Home

3Com 3500 Switch User Manual

1. Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default CoS setting Whether all bridge ports inthe m enabled enabled factory system implement Class of disabled default or Service current value 268 CHAPTER 9 BRIDGE WIDE PARAMETERS bridge cos summary 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 2 switching modules only Displays whether Class of Service CoS is enabled or disabled shows how the eight possible priority values are assigned or if CoS is disabled how they were last assigned to the two queues and shows the rate limit that exists on the high priority queue queue 1 Valid Minimum Abbreviation bes Important Considerations a By default CoS is enabled and the eight priority values traffic classes 0 7 are divided between the two queues in accordance with IEEE 802 1p recommendations that is queue 1 high priority has classes 4 5 6 and 7 and queue 2 low priority has classes 0 1 2 and 3 a If CoS is disabled indicated at the top of the display the display reflects the most recent configuration even though it is no longer active Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Queue Number of the queue for a 1 index which you want to see a 2 number information C all Fields in the Bridge CoS Summary Display Field Description Queue Number of the queue Queue 1 is always the high priority queue Queue 2 is always the low p
2. Warning nformation that alerts you to potential personal injury ABOUT THIS GUIDE Table 3 Text Conventions Convention Description Screen displays This typeface represents information as it appears on the screen Command gt The word command means that you enter the command exactly as shown in the text and then press Return or Enter Commands appear in bold Example To set flow control enter the following command ethernet flowControl This guide always gives the full form of a command However you can abbreviate commands by entering just enough characters to distinguish one command from another similar command as shown in Valid Minimum Abbreviations under each command description Commands are not case sensitive The words enter and type When you see the word enter in this guide you must type something and then press the Return or Enter key Do not press Return or Enter when an instruction simply says type Keyboard key names If you must press two or more keys simultaneously the key names are linked with a plus sign Example Press Ctrl C Words in italics Italics are used to a Emphasize a point a Denote a new term when it is defined in text Documentation Comments 25 Documentation Comments Your suggestions are very important to us They help us to make our documentation more useful to you Please send e mail comments ab
3. display enable disable rsvp menu summary detail bandwidth menu display modify excessTagging menu display enable disable statistics menu interval receive transmit v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 qos classifier summary For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays summary information about the QoS classifiers on your system Valid Minimum Abbreviation q cl s Fields in the QoS Classifier Summary Display Field Description 802 1p For nonflow classifiers IEEE 802 1p tag value Cast Cast type for the classifier a Flow classifiers unicast multicast ofall a Nonflow classifiers unicast multicast broadcast Orall Classifier Number of the flow or nonflow classifier a Flow classifiers in the range of 1 399 Note 20 and 23 are predefined a Nonflow classifiers in the range of 400 498 Note 401 407 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 and 490 are predefined but you can modify or remove them Control Control number that you assign to the classifier Name Name that you assign to the classifier Protocol Protocol type if applicable that is associated with the classifier control a Flow classifiers IP protocol type TCP UDP or all a Nonflow classifiers TCP IP IPX AppleTalk or any 692 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP qos classifier detail v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder
4. stp txFrames Configurable status of STP on a port If bridge wide STP is enabled the port STP configuration options are a enabled STP sets the operating state of the port blocking listening etc according to network topology characteristics This is the default configuration for all ports a disabled STP is disabled and the port is disabled The port does not participate in STP decisions frame reception or frame transmission a removed STP is disabled on the port but the port can still receive or transmit frames if its link state is up If bridge wide STP is disabled the port STP setting has no effect as long as its link state is up the port forwards all valid frames To see a matrix of port and bridge STP settings see bridge port stpState in this chapter Number of frames that this port has transmitted This object counts a frame transmitted on the interface that corresponds to this port only if the frame is for a protocol that the local bridging function is processing includes bridge management frames bridge port detail v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 Displays detailed information about bridge ports including the Spanning Tree Protocol STP configurations for the bridge port Valid Minimum Abbreviation b pod Important Considerations The port numbering that is displayed for your ports is always sequential although it depends on the placement of the modules that you hav
5. Default Burst size Bridge ports 802 1p tag TCP drop control enabled flow classifiers only Start and end times Input time type Classifiers controlled For receivePort or aggregate rate limit types maximum amount of data in Kbytes that you can transmit at the line rate before the transmission is policed For receivePort or aggregate rate limit types the receive ports for which you want to enable the rate limit IEEE 802 1p priority tag value that you want to apply to forwarded frames for flow or nonflow classifiers Whether one way filtering is used so that drop packets establish a TCP connection Whether you want to set starting and ending times for a control Type of time control that you want to establish See Table 7 for a complete listing of input time type options Classifiers that this control affects See gos control summary for a list of defined classifiers associated with controls 16 8192 KBytes a Oneor more selectable ports m all a fora list of selectable ports a 0 7 none a fora list of selectable values m y yes a no a specific a daily a dayoftheweek a everydayofthe week a weekdays a weekends m everyweekdays m everyweekends Selectable classifiers that is those not already associated with a control Determined by your specified rate limit Current bridge ports Curr
6. Weekdays Weekends Starting day mm dd Starting time hh mm Ending day mm dd Ending time hh mm Starting day mm dd Starting time hh mm Ending day mm dd Ending time hh mm The Ending day and time cannot exceed 24 hours from the Starting day and time Starting day Monday 1 Tuesday 2 Wednesday 3 Thursday 4 Friday 5 Saturday 6 Sunday 7 Starting time hh mm Ending day Monday 1 Tuesday 2 Wednesday 3 Thursday 4 Friday 5 Saturday 6 Sunday 7 Ending time hh mm The Ending day and time cannot exceed 24 hours from the Starting day and time Starting day Monday 1 Tuesday 2 Wednesday 3 Thursday 4 Friday 5 Saturday 6 Sunday 7 Starting time hh mm Ending day mm dd Ending time hh mm The Ending day and time cannot exceed 24 hours from the Starting day and time Starting time hh mm Ending time hh mm Starting time hh mm Ending time hh mm gos control define 715 Input Time Type Options Every weekday Starting time hh mm Ending time hh mm Every weekend Starting time hh mm Ending time hh mm Procedure Enter a control number The valid range is 5 through 50 with the next available number as the default 2 Enter a control name Enter the rate limit type none receivePort Of aggregate The default is none To drop all conforming packets for a set of ports use receivePort Or aggregate set the rate limit to 0 a
7. 622 CHAPTER 20 IPX ipx server display v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays the server table for the system to determine which servers are learned Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx ser d Important Considerations Your system maintains a table of servers that reside on other IPX networks You can a Use the Service Advertising Protocol SAP to exchange server information automatically a Make static entries in this server table The first line in the output the status line indicates whether a IPX forwarding is enabled a RIP is active a SAP is active a RIP Triggered updates are enabled SAP Triggered updates are enabled a Secondary route server option is enabled For a CoreBuilder 3500 system the route table display shows the range for the routing table primary entries in the format n m where nis the current number of entries and m is the maximum number of primary entries ipx server display 623 Options 3500 only Prompt Description Possible Values Default Service type Number for the type of service m that the server performs a 0x1 Oxfffff Enter up to 6 hex characters For example 0x4 file server For more details consult your Novell documentation Use quotation marks around any string with embedded spaces Use double quotes to enter an empty string Service name Pattern for the servi
8. Before you transfer files You must create the file to receive the snapshot images on an FIP or TFP server before you send the images to the file You supply the IP address of the host and specify the file according to the requirements of your TFTP or FTP implementation Some TFP implementations require that you store the file in the same directory in which the TFTP daemon server is running on the remote host Because TFTP provides no user authentication give the file Joose permissions to make it publicly readable and writable TFTP servers do not grant requests for file access On the CoreBuilder 3500 if you use FIP for system fileTransfer you must enter a login name and password if you are sending a file to an FTP server TFTP Procedure Create an empty file with open write permissions on the host to store the system display images From the top level of the Administration Console enter system snapshot save Enter the IP address of the host on which you want to save the display images If your TFTP implementation requires a full path name enter the full path of the file that is designated to contain the display images some implementations allow you to specify only the file name and the system uses the default TFTP directory CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT While the system sends the files to the host it displays the name of each display image that it transfers When the transmission is complete the syste
9. Depending on the system numbering may or may not skip an empty slot and continue with the ports that are associated with the next occupied slot See the mplementation Guide for your system for specific information about port numbering Numbering includes unused ports Only one port number is assigned to a Gigabit Ethernet module in switches that use Gigabit Ethernet modules The system no longer assigns port number 1 to the out of band management port which does not receive a port number The rxFrames value that the Ethernet summary command reports for a bridge port may differ from the value that the bridge port summary command reports The Ethernet summary command counts all frames that are delivered to the port while the bridge port summary command reports only valid frames that are passed to the port Therefore the Ethernet summary value should exceed the bridge port summary value by the number of receive errors rxErrs At some prompts you can specify the option to list Ethernet ports and port numbers The option displays Selection Port and Port Label columns The Selection column and Port column contain the same port numbers because they represent your physical ports Fields in the Ethernet Summary Display Field Description actualFlowControl actualPortMode autoNegMode autoNegState linkStatus macAddress noRxBuffers portLabel portState portType reqFlowControl reqPortMode rxBytes
10. Important Considerations 3900 a To remove a previously assigned password set the password to none 9300 a The password must be consistent throughout the autonomous system Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interface Index number of one or more One or more all factory interfaces for which you want valid IP interface default or to assign or remove a index numbers current value password m all a fora list of selectable indexes Password Password for the specified a Up to eight none factory interface ASCII characters default or current value The none option removes a previously assigned password ip ospf linkStateData databaseSummary v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip ospf linkStateData databaseSummary 557 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Summarizes link state advertisements LSAs in the link state database Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipold Important Consideration a To view link state database information OSPF must be active enabled Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Area ID Area ID in the form Valid area ID 0 0 0 0 factory n n n n where 0 lt n lt 255 default or that corresponds to the OSPF current value area for which you want to view LSA summary information Area mask Subnet mask of OSPF area for Valid area mask 0 0 0 0 factory which you want to view LSA default or summary information current v
11. Number of received frames that were discarded because there was no higher layer to receive them or because the port was disabled Sum of all receive errors that are associated with this port summary report only Average number of frames that were received per second by this port during the most recent sampling period Sampling periods are 1 second long and not configurable Number of frames that were copied into receive buffers by this port Field management detail 155 Description rxinternalErrs rxMulticasts rxPeakByteRate rxPeakFrameRate rxUnicasts txByteRate txBytes txDiscards txErrs txFrameRate txFrames txlnternalErrs txMulticasts txPeakByteRate txPeakFrameRate txQOverflows txUnicasts Number of frames that were discarded because of an internal error during reception Number of multicast frames that were delivered to a higher level protocol or application by this port Peak value of ethernetPortByteReceiveRate for this port since the station was last initialized Peak value of ethernetPortFrameReceiveRate for this port since the station was last initialized Number of unicast frames that were delivered by this port to a higher level protocol or application Average number of bytes transmitted per second by the port during the most recent sampling period Number of bytes that were transmitted by this port including framing characters Number of transmitted frames that were discarded because the
12. a AppleTalk a PX Valid Minimum Abbreviation log s Important Considerations a Fora specific service or all services you can configure up to four severity levels a Use a comma to separate multiple service names and severity levels for example system appletalk and error warning Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Services Levels Selected services levels Services to configure Severity levels to enable Whether the selected services and severity levels are enabled or disabled system ipx appletalk all for a list of valid services to configure error warning config info all for a list of valid severity levels to enable y yes y n no log services 753 Log Services Examples To enable all severity levels for the AppleTalk service Select menu option log services Select services system ipx appletalk all Selectable values system ipx appletalk Select services system ipx appletalk all appletalk Select levels error warning config info all all Enable the selected services levels n y yl y To show that all severity levels are enabled for the AppleTalk service enter log display To disable the warning and info severity levels for the AppleTalk service follow this example Select menu option log services Select services system ipx appletalk all appletalk Select levels error warnin
13. aes A m n 5 elect classifiers which are subject to this control nter classifiers 20 23 420 430 440 450 4 450 ti 718 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP qos control modify v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Modifies the characteristics of a previously defined control including controls 1 through 4 which the system provides by default Valid Minimum Abbreviation q com Important Considerations a The software prompts you according to the rate limit type that you select a f the existing control has a rate limit type of receivePort or aggregate with multiple rate limits you can now change one rate limit without affecting the other defined rate limits Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Control Number of the control 5 50 No default but the number that you want to modify next sequential Existing control numbers number is appear in braces automatically entered Control numbers 1 4 are predefined Control name Name of the control that you want to modify Unique name Current name for with up to 32 specified control characters Use around any string with embedded spaces Use to enter an empty string for a list of selection criteria Prompt Description Possible Values Default Rate limit type Service level Loss eligible Excess packets service
14. bridge port address list v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 Displays the MAC addresses canonical addresses that are currently associated with selected bridge ports as well as the address type static or dynamic Valid Minimum Abbreviation bpoal Important Consideration a f you have multiple ports that are associated with a trunk the display groups ports that are associated with a trunk on one line for example 3 4 6 and lists the addresses that are associated with the trunk Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN Index numbers of the VLANs to m One or more interface which the desired bridge ports valid VLAN indexes belong indexes only if in all allClosed A mode a fora list of selectable VLANs Bridge ports Bridge ports for which you a One or more want to display MAC addresses valid bridge port numbers m all a to display a port summary 294 CHAPTER 10 BRIDGE PORT PARAMETERS bridge port address add v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 Adds new MAC addresses to the selected bridge ports as statically configured addresses Valid Minimum Abbreviation bpoaa Important Considerations a If you have multiple ports that are associated with a trunk the display groups ports that are associated with a trunk on one line for example 3 4 6 and lists the addresses that are associated with the trunk a A statically configured address is never aged out of the
15. m Specify 2 to see the port summary for example to see whether ports are associated with a trunk and then enter the appropriate port numbers a The VID is used as the IEEE 802 1Q tag if tagging is enabled for a port Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VID Unique user defined integer w If the default Next available used by management VLAN exists VID operations 2 4094 a If the default VLAN does not exist 1 to redefine the default VLAN or 2 4094 for other VLANs 348 CHAPTER 14 VIRTUAL LANs VLANs Prompt Description Possible Values Default Bridge ports Protocol suite for VLANs other than the default Index numbers of the bridge ports that belong to the VLAN If you include trunked ports specify the anchor port of the trunk On the CoreBuilder 9000 the list of ports includes the front panel ports and the module s backplane port When you define a VLAN that includes the IP protocol type you cannot specify a port that is owned by a router port IP interface One or more protocol suites that you want to specify for the VLAN The default VLAN always uses the protocol type unspecified One or more of the ports that are available to be assigned to the VLAN all for a list of selectable ports IP unspecified IPX factory default Apple for AppleTalk XNS DECnet SNA Vines X 25 NETBEUI unspecified Default VLAN or a po
16. rxBcastBytes 3500 and 9000 Layer 3 rxBcastFrames 3500 and 9000 Layer 3 rxMcastBytes 3500 and 9000 Layer 3 rxMcastFrames 3500 and 9000 Layer 3 rxUcastBytes 3500 and 9000 Layer 3 rxUcastFrames 3500 and 9000 Layer 3 For all Layer 2 systems or switching modules the VLAN origin is always static which indicates that the VLAN was created by the user For the CoreBuilder 3500 or CoreBuilder 9000 the origin indicates one of the following a static The VLAN was created statically user configured by using the bridge vlan define command a router The VLAN was created automatically by the router port IP interface of router origin You create a router port IP interface using the ip interface define command with the interface type port You cannot modify or remove a router port VLAN GVRP The VLAN was created dynamically from a GVRP update GVRP You must enable the GVRP state for the entire system as a bridge wide parameter and for the participating bridge ports as a bridge port parameter Index numbers of the bridge ports that belong to each VLAN In the second part of the detail display the Port column lists the ports for the VLAN individually and indicates ports that are trunked or have tagging On the CoreBuilder 9000 the list of ports includes the front panel ports and the appropriate backplane ports Example On a 12 port Layer 3 module the list of ports includes ports 1 12 and por
17. Backup In this state the router monitors the availability of the Master router If the Master router fails the Backup router assumes forwarding responsibility for all IP addresses that are associated with the virtual router a Initialize Transitional state between Backup and Master States Typically indicates that the virtual router has been configured but not enabled or that the virtual router mode has been set to disabled In this state the router waits for a Startup event When the router receives the Startup event it broadcasts an ARP request that contains the virtual router MAC address for all IP addresses that are associated with the virtual router and transitions to the Master state If the Startup event is not received it transitions to the Backup state Type Type of virtual router primary Of backup VLAN Index Index number of the virtual LAN VLAN on which the virtual router is defined VRID Virtual Router ID 0 255 Must be unique on the LAN Sample IP VRRP Summary Display Select menu option ip vrrp summary Enter VLAN interface index 2 2 Enter virtual router ID 1 1 VLAN Index Ports 7 12 14 VRID Address Type State Interval Pri Preempt Auth Error 158 101 175 228 Primary Master l secas 255 Yes pass none 488 v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip vrrp detail CHAPTER 17 VIRTUAL ROUTER REDUNDANCY VRRP For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only
18. Each software command has its own description in this guide Each command description begins at the top of a page A command description begins with these items a The full command name a Platforms on which this command is valid Under the command name is a list of 3Com switch platforms The command is valid on every platform that has a check mark v next to it 3500 y 9000 y 9400 y 3900 y 9300 a A short description of the purpose of the command Some command descriptions begin with a sentence similar to this one For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer n switching modules only where n is either 2 or 3 Because the CoreBuilder 9000 system can house both Layer 2 modules and Layer 3 modules this sentence alerts you to the fact that this particular command is valid only on Layer 2 modules or Layer 3 modules The command description continues with one or more of the following sections a Valid Minimum Abbreviation This section lists the shortest number of characters that you can type to issue the command a Important Considerations These usage notes identify potential problems before you use the command a Options If the command begins a configuration process or other procedure this section presents each prompt that you see its description the possible values that you can enter and the default value a Fields If the command prompts the system to display information this section lists the display
19. a The new system name appears the next time that you display the system configuration Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default New string New or changed name forthe Astringofup system to 64 case sensitive characters a to get information about the naming guidelines 102 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT v 3500 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 system time Displays and changes the system s current date and time timezone and daylight saving time Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy t Important Considerations a The system s internal clock is set at the factory You may want to reset the system date and time to match the system s physical location m 00 specifies the year 2000 for all 3Com products See the 3Com Web site for more details Options Field Description DateTime Starting date and time in the following format yyyy mm ddThh mm ss Timezone User configured time zone for example GMT for Greenwich Mean Time dst a Ifyou enter y to the prompt a sub menu appears that lists the Daylight Savings Time around the world and a user specified option for start and end dates a If you enter n you are returned to the Time menu system time datetime v 3500 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 system time datetime 103 Sets the system s date and time Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy td Important Considerations a The system s internal clock is set at the factory You may want to res
20. a When you assign a packet filter to one or more ports you must assign a processing path The path transmit all transmit multicast receive all receive multicast or receive internal of a port can have only one packet filter assigned to it however you can assign a single packet filter to multiple paths and ports a f you try to assign a filter to a port that already has a filter assigned the system displays a warning message and the assignment fails a After you assign the filter ports and paths are removed from the list of possible values which are listed in the Options table a Possible values for filters n depend on the number of created or loaded filters on the system a Possible values for bridge ports n depend on the number of existing bridge ports on the system Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Select filter Identifier id a 1 n Current valid number of the 2 F ietotvaid selected filter filter thatyou want for a list of vali t filter identifiers o assign Select bridge ports Number of the a 1 n Current valid bridge port to all selected bridge which you want to port assign the selected m for a list of valid filter ports bridge packetFilter assign 383 Prompt Description Possible Values Default Select path s Identifier of the a txA Current valid path to which you selected path txM want to assign the selected filter a x a XM m rxl L all a for a li
21. bridge spanningTree stpState earlier in this chapter Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default STP group Single address to which a A valid STP 01 80 C2 00 00 00 address bridge listens for STP group address factory default or information current value 266 CHAPTER 9 BRIDGE WIDE PARAMETERS bridge gvrpState v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Enables or disables the GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP which can help simplify management of VLAN configurations in larger networks and determines whether the virtual LAN VLAN origin for a port based VLAN is dynamic with GVRP or static without GVRP Valid Minimum Abbreviation bg Important Considerations m To activate GVRP in your system you first enable it for the entire bridge this command and then enable it on appropriate individual bridge ports see Chapter 10 a To maximize the effectiveness of GVRP it should be enabled in as many end stations and network devices as possible a VLANs that are created dynamically with GVRP exist only as long as a GVRP enabled device is sending updates If the devices no longer send updates or if GVRP is disabled or if the system is rebooted all dynamic VLANs are removed a If you disable GVRP after it has been enabled for a period of time the system deletes all VLAN interfaces that were learned through GVRP and leaves unchanged all VLAN
22. management ip interface remove command 160 CHAPTER 5 OuT OF BAND MANAGEMENT management ip route v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 display Displays the system s routing table to determine which routes to other IP networks are configured and whether the routes are operational Valid Minimum Abbreviation m ip ro di Important Considerations The system prompts you for an IP address and subnet mask This information enables you to display only a subset of routes instead of all routes To see all entries in the table press Return at the prompts The first line in the output the status line indicates whether IP routing is enabled in band only a P interface options such as ICMP router discovery appear under ip interface detail and are set on a per interface basis The route table display includes a range for the routing table entries as follows There are n of m possible Routing Table entries Where n is the minimum and m is the maximum number of entries Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP address IP address that A valid IP address 0 0 0 0 directs the system to display only those routes that match the bits set in the specified IP address and its corresponding subnet mask Press Enter to take the default which displays all entries Subnet mask Subnet mask that A valid subnet mask Based on directs the system to specified IP display only those address routes that match
23. rxSameTrunkld Selected node trunk id list State TCMP identifier that the system assigned to the trunk Node trunk identifications that each port has detected on the trunk Ports in the trunk The second half of the display lists each individual port in each trunk Number of ports that participate in the trunk Number of TCMP messages received that contain a bad TCMP Type field Number of TCMP messages received that contain a bad TCMP version number Number of TCMP messages that were received on each port Number of TCMP helloMessages that were received on each port Number of times that TCMP has detected a TCMP trunk configuration that exceeds the eight node maximum Number of times that TCMP has received a helloMessage that contains the TCMP agent s own Node trunk id an illegal configuration Node trunk identifications that are selected for use on the trunk Whether the trunk is up or down 306 CHAPTER 11 TRUNKS Field Description TCMP Whether TCMP is enabled or disabled for the trunk Tcmpstate TCMP state for each port in the trunk Trunk state txFrames txHellos Type notInUse Not selected for use in the trunk a selected Selected for use in the trunk but not yet active in the trunk a inUse Active in the trunk State up or down of each port link in the trunk Number of TCMP messages that were transmitted on each port Number of TCMP helloMessages that
24. 10 Specify whether drop packets are used to establish a TCP connection yes no The default is no Set the start and end time for the control yes no The default is no a b c If you specified a start and end time enter the time type Time type selections are variations on days of the week and weekends or it can be specific day or range of days and time See Table 7 for a complete listing of input time type options Enter the starting day and or time Enter the ending day and or time Enter the classifiers that are subject to this control The system displays the associated classifiers in brackets If you select aggregate as the rate limit type or select the drop packets use to establish a TCP connection option the system displays only flow classifiers QoS Control Modify Example 3500 This example shows modifications to a predefined control 4 for a predefined classifier 405 Select menu option qos control modify nter control number 1 5 4 Controlled Load Interactive_Multimedia A m nter control name Select bridge ports Select IEEE Enter IEE LeDSsa ete EiL 802 1lp tag to apply to forwarded frames 802 1lp tag 0 7 none none Drop packets used to establish a TCP connection Do you want yY Do you want T to have any time control yes no no y ea ter input time type kends ev ter the ter the ter the ter the
25. Edit a packet filter load Load a packet filter assign Assign a packet filter unassign Unassign a packet filter portGroup Administer port groups Type q to return to the previous menu or for help CB9000 slot6 1 12 E FEN TX L3 bridge packetFilter load Packet filter 1 stored Lastly the user lists the loaded filters with bridge packetfilter list and confirms the contents of the filter with bridge packetfilter display CB9000 slot6 1 12 E FEN TX L3 bridge packetFilter list Packet Filter 1 rejMulticast No port assignments Menu options Corebuilder 9000 94DC8 list List all packet filters display Display a packet filter create Create a packet filter delete Delete a packet filter edit Edit a packet filter load Load a packet filter assign Assign a packet filter unassign Unassign a packet filter portGroup Administer port groups Type q to return to the previous menu or for help CB9000 slot6 1 12 E FEN TX L3 bridge packetFilter display 1 Packet Filter 1 rejMulticast name rejMulticast pushField b 0 pushLiteral b 0x01 and not 382 CHAPTER 15 PACKET FILTERS bridge packetFilter v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 assign For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Assigns a selected packet filter to a port or set of ports port group Valid Minimum Abbreviation b pa a Important Considerations
26. ID 3500 VLAN index 3900 9000 9300 9400 range of addresses that the central agency assigned to your organization This address is specific to your network and system 32 bit number that uses the same format and representation as an IP address The subnet mask determines which bits in the IP address are interpreted as the network number the subnetwork number and the host number Each IP address bit that corresponds to a 1 in the subnet mask is in the network subnetwork part of the address Each IP address bit that corresponds to a 0 is in the host part of the IP address State of the IP interface It indicates whether the interface is available for communications up or unavailable down a Type of interface VLAN based or router port based 3500 a Type of interface VLAN or system all other platforms a Logical port number of the router port based IP interface or the VLAN index that is associated with the IP interface a VLAN index number that is associated with the IP interface 400 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP ip interface detail v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 Displays detailed information about the specified interfaces or all interfaces Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip i det Important Consideration a When you enter the command you are prompted for an interface index number even if you have only one interface defined Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Interfa
27. Options 3900 9300 Prompt Description Possible Values Default Area Index number of the area that m Valid area index contains the range that you number want to delete a fora list of selectable indexes IP address IP address of the range that Up to you want to delete 255 255 255 255 538 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf defaultRouteMetric VY 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 display For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays the cost of a default route Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o d di Important Considerations a Ifa default metric is not defined the router does not advertise itself as the default router a By default the default route metric is not defined Field in the IP OSPF Default Route Metric Display Field Description Default route metric Cost metric that is associated with the default route A higher cost indicates a slower route for example because it entails more hops or less bandwidth ip ospf defaultRouteMetric v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 define ip ospf defaultRouteMetric define 539 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Defines the default route metric for the router Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o d de Important Considerations a If a default metric is not defined the router does not advertise itself as the default router a By default the default route metric is not
28. PACE Interactive Access 218 port duplex mode 212 213 port flow control 215 port labels 219 port monitoring 221 222 port numbering 204 207 port speed 212 213 port state 220 statistics 204 208 event log 747 752 examples defining QoS classifiers 699 defining QoS controls 717 defining VLANs Layer 2 devices 354 defining VLANs Layer 3 devices 350 351 358 359 modifying QoS classifiers 705 modifying QoS controls 722 modifying VLANs Layer 2 devices 362 modifying VLANs Layer 3 devices 359 362 of a script 125 removing VLANs 363 setting Ignore STP mode 365 trunk changes 316 trunk definitions 311 excess packet tagging QoS 735 737 excess packets treatment with RSVP 728 730 extended diagnostics version number 69 776 INDEX F fax service 3ComFacts 769 FDDI Fiber Distributed Data Interface fragmenting packets 255 port label 241 FDDI MAC condition report 237 LLC Service enabling 239 FDDI station and SRFs 224 228 FDDI_Snap packets 256 feedback on documentation 25 File Transfer Protocol FTP 87 89 107 filter id 371 filters for QoS flow classifiers defining 696 modifying 701 flow classifiers cast types 695 701 702 defining 694 predefined 691 protocol types 695 701 702 removing 706 using aggregate rate limit 715 flow control defining for Gigabit trunk 310 315 displaying for trunks 305 329 flow control Ethernet ports 215 flush for management ip routes 164 snmp trap 197 flushing learned IP r
29. RIP or static Specified Specified reject Do not advertise in external router or all route mask LSAs RIP static routes from routers specified routers RIP or static Specified all 0 0 0 0 reject Do not advertise in external router or all LSAs any RIP static route routers from specified routers Export Policy Conditions for Direct Routes Protocol Interface Action Description Direct Specified accept Advertise in external LSAs all direct non OSPF routes off of specified interfaces interface or All non OSPF interfaces Direct Specified reject Do not specify in external LSAs any direct non OSPF routes off of specified interfaces interface or All non OSPF interfaces ip ospf policy define 597 Example of Import Policy Select menu option ip ospf policy define Enter policy type import export import import Enter route address 0 0 0 0 204 201 89 9 Enter route subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Enter policy action accept reject accept accept Enter metric adjustment 0 65535 0 Enter administrative weight 1 16 1 2 Example of Export Policy Select menu option ip ospf policy define Enter policy type import export import export Enter origin protocols dir sta rip all dir sta rip sta Enter source address 0 0 0 0 204 243 30 4 Enter route address 0 0 0 0 22 32 4 2 Enter route subnet mask 255 0 0 0 Enter policy action accept reject accept accept Enter metric adjustme
30. Select bridge ports 1 13 all 1 3 13 Enter protocol suite IP IPX Apple XNS DECnet SNA Vines X25 NetBEUI unspecified IPX II IPX 802 2 IPX 802 3 IPX 802 3 Enter protocol suite q to quit IP Apple XNS DECnet SNA Vines X25 NetBEUI IPX II IPX 802 2 IPX 802 3 q Configure per port tagging n y yl Yy Enter port 1 tag type none 802 10 none Enter port 2 tag type none 802 10 none Enter port 3 tag type none 802 10 none Enter port 13 tag type none 802 10 802 10 Enter VLAN Name IPX1 Bridge VLAN Define Example 3500 This example shows the steps necessary to define an IP VLAN with IEEE 802 1Q tagging on some ports Instead of supplying Layer 3 address information when you define the VLAN you can define multiple IP interfaces for this VLAN This VLAN has trunk ports Select menu option bridge vlan define Enter VID 1 4094 2 2 Select bridge ports 1 4 6 9 13 all 3 6 Default selection 3 6 Selectable bridge ports selection ports label 1 2 2 3 39 CampusLk1 4 4 6 6 8 CampusLk2 9 9 10 10 Lal Tal 12 12 13 13 Select bridge ports 1 4 6 9 13 all 3 6 3 6 9 Enter protocol suite IP IPX Apple XNS DECnet SNA Vines X25 NetBEUI unspecified IPX II IPX 802 2 IPX 802 3 IPX 802 2 SNAP IP Enter protocol suite q to quit IPX Apple XNS DECnet SNA Vines X25 NetBEUI IPX II IPX 802 2 IPX 802 3 IPX 802 2 SNAP
31. fddi mac detail VY 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Displays detailed FDDI MAC information A detail report displays various FDDI MAC statistics including information about the MAC received and transmitted frames and received and transmitted bytes as well as additional FDDI MAC statistics Valid Minimum Abbreviation fdmd Important Consideration a The MAC summary display changes slightly when ports are configured as DAS ports Fields in the FDDI MAC Detail Display Field Description currentPath Path on which this MAC is currently located primary or secondary isolated concatenated Or thru downstream MAC address of this MAC s downstream neighbor downstreamType PC type of this MAC s downstream neighbor dupAddrTest Pass or fail test for a duplicate address duplicateAddr Whether this address is duplicated on the FDDI ring errorCount Number of SMT MAC errors frameCount Number of frames that this MAC received frameErrCond Active when the frameErrorRatio is greater than or equal frameErrorRatio frameErrThresh lateCount IcAvailable IIcService lostCount noRxBuffers notCopiedCond to frameErrorThresh Ratio of the number lostCount plus the frameErrorCount divided by the frameCount plus lostCount Threshold for determining when a MAC condition report is generated Number of token rotation timer expirations since this MAC last received a token Whether this MAC can send or receive LLC frames Setting o
32. inDiscards inForwards inHdrErrors inReceives inSameSegment Number of datagrams that the IP station discarded because of an error in the source or destination IP address Number of datagrams that were dropped because of a checksum error Number of datagrams that the IP station delivered to local IP client protocols Number of packet receive discards Total number of packets that were forwarded that is routed through hardware or software or both Number of datagrams that the IP station discarded because the IP header contained errors Total number of IP datagrams that were received including those with errors Number of packets that were received on an interface and that need to be forwarded out on the same interface Field Description inTtlExceeds outDiscards outForwards Number of packets that were received on an interface and that need to be forwarded but that have an IP header TTL value of less than 2 Number of packet transmit discards Total number of packets that a router has forwarded to an outbound interface that is routed through hardware or software or both 420 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP ip route display For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays the system s routing table to determine which routes to other IP y 3500 networks are configured and whether the routes are operational v 9000 y 9400 Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip route di V 390
33. number you want to remove selectable control numbers a fora list of the selectable controls QoS Control Remove Example 9000 Layer 3 CB9000 slot2 1 12 E FEN TX L3 qos control remove Enter control number 2 5 5 qos Idap display y 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 Displays Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP status information Valid Minimum Abbreviation q 1 disp Important Considerations a When LDAP is enabled displays server IP address and polling period a When LDAP is disabled displays QOS Resource Reservation Protocol RSVP and LDAP status Fields in the QoS LDAP Display Field Description LDAP server The IP address of the LDAP server address Poll period Selected poll period 726 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP qos Idap enable v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 Enables QoS parameter directory services which are located on the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP server Valid Minimum Abbreviation qle Important Considerations a An LDAP server must be configured a Before you enable LDAP the LDAP server must have a directory group configured with QoS parameters in an dif file a Parameter changes for a specific group may affect more than one system If you know that a change will affect more than one system disable LDAP to test the change After you are sure you want the change you can then enable LDAP Options Prompt Descript
34. operating as IP multicast routing interfaces using the Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DVMRP Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipmdis Fields in the IP Multicast DVMRP Interface Summary Display Field Description Index Number associated with the interface for identification purposes Address IP address of the interface Metric Numeric DVMRP metric or cost that you assign to the interface State Role that the interface plays in IP multicast delivery One or more of the following descriptors may appear querier The interface is functioning as the IGMP Querier for its subnetwork non querier The interface is not functioning as the IGMP Querier for its subnetwork leaf There are no routers downstream of this interface IP multicast group members may reside on this subnetwork non leaf The interface is a branch in the IP multicast delivery tree There are one or more IP multicast routing interfaces downstream of this interface one way Traffic is moving downstream only disabled DVMRP is disabled on the interface up The IP interface is available to support network communication down The IP interface is not available to support network communication 506 CHAPTER 18 IP MULTICAST ip multicast dvmrp For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only interface detail v 3500 Displays information about IP interfaces that run the Distance Vector Multicast
35. ryw Qos Qos kdays Control starting day veryweekends specific mm dd 06 02 hh mm 09 00 Qos mm dd 06 02 Qos hh mm 17 00 lect classifiers which are subject to this control ter classifiers 20 23 404 407 420 430 4 404 407 B B control starting time i Control ending day HAA we m control ending time Aw 5 0 yes no to modify add the start and end time for the control Enter rate limit typ none receivePort aggregate none receivePort Enter service for conforming packets high best low high Are conforming packets loss eligible yes no no Enter service for excess packets high best low drop low drop How should rate limit b xpressed percentage KBytes sec KBytes sec Enter rate limit in KBytes sec 0 65434 2048 Enter burst size in KBytes 16 8192 181 no yes no no specific daily dayoftheweek everydayoftheweek weekdays 405 724 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP qos control remove For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Removes a previously defined control v 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 is 3900 Important Consideration 9300 a When you remove a control the associated classifiers are no longer controlled and no longer have a set rate limit service level or 802 1p tag Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Control Number for the control that a Oneormore
36. snmp rmonConfiguration v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 snmp rmonConfiguration 199 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Configures the transmit and receive mode to monitor Ethernet and Fiber Distributed Data Interface FDDI statistics as follows a receive Monitors incoming port data a transmitAndReceive Monitors incoming and outgoing port data Valid Minimum Abbreviation sn r Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Transmit receive Whether RMON is m receive Current mode configured for only setting incoming port data or for transmitAndReceive both incoming and outgoing port data 200 CHAPTER 6 SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL SNMP snmp writeDisable v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 Allows or disallows SNMP write requests Valid Minimum Abbreviation sn w Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default SNMP write Whether SNMP write access is off off request enabled or disabled on mode 5 PHYSICAL PORT PARAMETERS Chapter 7 Ethernet Ports Chapter 8 Fiber Distributed Data Interface FDDI E E d gt ETHERNET PORTS Before you configure your system become familiar with the physical port numbering scheme on the system Understanding the port numbering scheme enables you to a Manage your bridge ports especially if you use trunking as described in the Implementation Guide for your system a Acc
37. static VLAN you cannot modify the VID selected automatically after you define a router port IP interface nor can you change the VID of the default VLAN The default VLAN requires a VID of 1 Whether the VLAN aware mode tagging mode is allPorts Of taggedVlanPorts The default for CoreBuilder 3500 Release 2 0 or later is allPorts allPorts is also the default as of CoreBuilder 9000 software Release 3 0 The value taggedVlanPorts is a compatibility mode for VLANs configured prior to CoreBuilder 3500 Release 2 0 and for VLANs configured on CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 modules prior to CoreBuilder 9000 Release 3 0 bridge vlan define 3500 9000 Layer 3 v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 i gt For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Creates a VLAN on the CoreBuilder 3500 system or a CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 module When you explicitly configure a VLAN on the system you assign information such as a VLAN ID VID a set of bridge ports and optionally a protocol type and IEEE 802 1Q tagging For details about this command on the SuperStack II Switch 3900 the Switch 9300 the CoreBuilder 9400 and CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 2 modules see bridge vlan define 3900 9300 9400 9000 Layer 2 next Valid Minimum Abbreviation b v def Important Considerations a If you have previously defined your IP VLANs with Layer 3 address information that is network based VLANs you can redefine your IP VLANs without L
38. system assigns a life of approximately 7 minutes to each entry When the age if the entry decreases to zero the entry either disappears or is refreshed PTmr Time remaining before the system sends a prune message to an upstream router Time is shown in minutes m and seconds s When traffic is actively flowing a dash indicates that no prune message has been sent upstream Field ip multicast dvmrp cacheDisplay 519 Description inVif outVif Ports Interface that receives incoming IP multicast traffic from the spanning tree for the source subnetwork and group listed on the left The interface is presented as an index number and either an I or a T precedes the index number An I precedes a routing interface index number A T precedes a tunnel index number A P after the index number indicates that a prune message has been sent to an upstream router The entry lt none gt may appear if the system is not able to build the cache entry correctly This temporary condition corrects itself quickly Interfaces to which traffic from the inVif is being forwarded Each interface is presented as an index number and either an I or a T precedes each index number An I precedes a routing interface index number A T precedes a tunnel index number A p after an index number indicates that the upstream router has pruned this branch of the delivery tree and no multicast packets are being forwarded through this local interf
39. when autonegotiation is disabled When autonegotiation is enabled flow control values are ignored Configurable parameter that sets the port mode on Ethernet ports that have port mode options when autonegotiation is disabled When autonegotiation is enabled port mode values are ignored Number of bytes received by this port including framing characters Total of all receive errors that are associated with this port CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET PORTS Field Description rxFrames Number of frames that were copied into receive buffers by this port slot channel Maps a CoreBuilder 9000 switch fabric module port to 9000 switch fabric module slot port 9000 txBytes txErrs txFrames txQOverflows vendorName 3500 an interface module backplane link The channel designation is just a backplane trace number For example to troubleshoot a problem with switch fabric module port 5 slot channel 3 1 look at the first backplane link for slot 3 Module slot and port number in the CoreBuilder 9000 system Number of bytes that were transmitted by this port including framing characters Sum of all transmit errors that are associated with this port summary report only Number of frames that were transmitted by this port Number of frames that were lost because transmit queue was full Vendor name for a GBIC module Other modules display n a To display Ethernet port statistics relative to a basel
40. your modem port Procedure From the top level of the Administration Console enter system serialPort configModem You can now enter commands that support the appropriate parameters for your network All characters that you enter are transmitted to the modem port until you type the escape sequence in step 2 2 When the modem is configured enter the escape sequence with no intervening characters or spaces Entering the escape sequence breaks the connection to the modem serial port and returns you to the previous Administration Console menu 100 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system serialPort Enables the external modem from the Administration Console enableModem Valid Minimum Abbreviation V 3500 sy see 9000 Y Y 9400 Important Consideration a You must configure the external modem before you can enable it See Y 3900 the configModem command description on the previous page v 9300 v 3500 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 system name system name 101 Assigns or changes the name of the system The system name identifies the system to users on other systems in the network Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy na Important Considerations a Assign an easily recognizable and unique name for each system For example name the system according to its physical location as in PARIS ENGLAB1 a Use quotation marks around any string that has embedded spaces a Use double quotation marks to enter an empty string
41. 1 800 NET 3Com 1 800 638 3266 Enterprise Customers 1 800 876 3266 1 408 326 7120 not toll free 772 APPENDIX A TECHNICAL SUPPORT INDEX Symbols character 473 478 Numbers 3C number 69 129 3Com bulletin board service 3Com BBS 768 3Com Knowledgebase Web Services 767 3Com URL 767 3ComFacts 769 802 3_RAW packets 256 A AARP AppleTalk Address Resolution Protocol 674 to 676 access levels 37 38 and passwords 75 addModify snmp trap 195 address group adding port addresses 391 address threshold 252 address port patterns for QoS classifiers 696 701 703 addresses adding static 294 for SNMP trap reporting 194 addressThresholdEvent 257 Administration Console 29 to 42 password access 75 administration console of an ATM switch 30 advancedPing 179 475 476 advancedTraceRoute 184 packet size 480 ttl option 480 wait option 480 advertise RIP mode 451 453 AEP AppleTalk Echo Protocol 682 aggregate rate limit 710 712 for flow classifiers 715 aggregated links 299 aging time 258 allClosed mode for VLANs and Ignore STP mode 365 displaying 338 selecting 364 allOpen mode for VLANs displaying 338 selecting 364 analyzer port MAC address 758 anchor ports rate limits affecting 716 trunking 313 AppleTalk AARP AppleTalk Address Resolution Protocol 674 to 676 AEP AppleTalk Echo Protocol 682 checksums 680 DDP statistics 683 forwarding 679 interfaces 663 to 670 NBP statistics 686
42. 101 117 151 from 158 101 112 56 icmp_seq 0 from 158 101 112 56 icmp_seq 1 from 158 101 112 56 icmp_seq 2 101 112 56 PING Statistics round trip ms min avg max 18 21 26 disabled enabled 3 packets received Enter host IP address 0 0 0 0 158 101 112 56 Enter number of ICMP request packets Enter packet size bytes 28 4096 64 Enter Burst Transmit Ping mode Enter Quiet mode disabled enabled disabled Enter time sec waits between sending each packet 17 9999 3 64 byte packets time 26 time 18 time 18 0 packet loss 1 20 ms ms ms disabled 1 2 478 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 ip traceRoute For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Traces a route to a destination using the default traceRoute options Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip t Important Considerations a TraceRoute information includes all of the nodes in the network through which a packet passes to get from its origin to its destination It uses the IP time to live TTL field in UDP probe packets to elicit an Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP Time Exceeded message from each gateway to a host a To change the default traceRoute options use ip advancedTraceRoute The command description for ip advancedTraceRoute lists the default traceRoute options a You can either supply the host name or IP address as pa
43. 112 99 IP address for the system 255 255 0 0 subnet mask VLAN interface index ip interface summary all Validate access to management workstation ip ping 158 101 112 26 management workstation address Enable the Spanning Tree Protocol bridge stpState enabled Configure my node as an SNMP trap destination snmp trap add 158 101 112 26 management workstation address all turn on all traps q no more trap destinations snmp trap display 126 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT logout Terminates a Telnet session or returns control to the password prompt in a serial port session J 3500 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation J 9400 logo 3900 Important Consideration 9300 m Press Escape to return to the top level before you log out oft ts MODULE ENVIRONMENT This chapter describes how to use module commands for modules that are installed in the CoreBuilder 9000 7 slot 8 slot and 16 slot chassis to Display the module configuration and status Administer a statistics baseline and module redundancy Set the module name and the console screen height View the date and time Manage nonvolatile data nvData Clear the module diagnostic block Reboot a module For more information about administering your module parameters see the CoreBuilder 9000 Implementation Guide 128 CHAPTER 4 MODULE ENVIRONMENT Menu Structure gt The commands that you can use dep
44. 260 CHAPTER 9 BRIDGE WIDE PARAMETERS Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default stpState 3500 3900 9300 9400 stpState 9000 L2 and L3 Whether the Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled or disabled for the system Whether the Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled or disabled for the module enabled disabled enabled disabled disabled factory default or current value enabled factory default or current value bridge spanningTree v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 stpPriority Modifies the bridge priority which influences the choice of the root and designated bridges Valid Minimum Abbreviation b sp stpp Important Considerations a The bridge priority is expressed as a hexidecimal value The characters Ox signify this a The lower the bridge s priority value the more likely it is that the bridge is chosen as the root bridge or a designated bridge a You can change the value while STP is disabled or enabled If you change the value while STP is disabled the value is retained when you enable STP Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default STP priority Bridge wide STP parameter 0x0 Oxffff 0x8000 factory default or current value 262 CHAPTER 9 BRIDGE WIDE PARAMETERS bridge spanningTree v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 stpMaxAge Determines when the stored CPDU configuration message is discarded from the bridge s memory if the bridg
45. 3 switching modules only Changes an existing port based protocol based or network based VLAN definition on the CoreBuilder 3500 system or CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 module To use this command on the SuperStack II Switch 3900 or Switch 9300 the CoreBuilder 9400 and CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 2 modules see bridge vlan modify 3900 9300 9400 9000 Layer 2 next Valid Minimum Abbreviation b v modi Important Considerations a Before you modify the port assignments for a VLAN always enter to review the system port summary If the VLAN includes trunk ports you must specify the anchor lowest numbered port in each trunk If there are no trunk ports enter one or more port numbers or enter a11 to assign all ports to the VLAN a For the CoreBuilder 3500 if you want to modify your VLAN to include FDDI DAS ports you must specify the lowest numbered port in the DAS pair a f you modify the default VLAN you can only change the member ports or the tag status You cannot change the name or the VID or the protocol type of unspecified a f you modify the tagging type of a backplane port on a switching module make sure that you modify the tagging type of the corresponding port on the switch fabric module a To modify a VLAN to support more than one protocol suite for the VLAN specify one protocol at each of the prompts a Select the bridge ports that you want to be part of the modified VLAN or specify 2 to display a port sum
46. 30 10 Enter Destination Port number 30000 65535 33434 Enter the number of probes to be sent at each ttl level 1 10 3 Enter time sec to wait for a response 1 10 3 Enter the packet size bytes 28 4096 28 Configure TRACEROUTE sourceAddress n y y Index Interface address 0 Best interface default oD 158 101 117 151 2 158 101 10 1 Select interface index 0 2 0 Enter Numeric mode disabled enabled disabled Press Enter key to interrupt Traceroute to 158 101 101 27 10 hops max 28 bytes packet 1 158 101 117 254 12 ms 7 ms 5 ms 2 158 101 112 254 51 ms 9 ms 7 ms 3 158 101 96 22 21 ms 15 ms 6 ms 4 158 101 101 27 18 ms 90 ms 80 ms 482 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP ip statistics For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only J Displays different types of IP statistics general statistics and those specific 3500 to the User Datagram Protocol UDP or the Internet Control Message v 9000 Protocol ICMP 9400 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 3900 ip sta 9300 l Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Statistics Type of IP statistics that you want ip ip to display a udp icmp a all Fields in the IP Statistics Display Field Description forwDatagrams Number of datagrams that the IP station tried to forward fragCreates Number of IP datagram fragments that were generated as a result of fragmentation on this system frag
47. 3900 9300 Specifies the maximum time value in microseconds of fddiMACT Req that is used by any MAC that is configured in this path T Req is the value that a MAC bids during the claim process to determine a ring s operational token rotation time T_Opr The lowest T Req bid on the ring becomes T_Opr Valid Minimum Abbreviation fd pam Important Considerations a When you set T_Opr low the token rotates more quickly so token latency is reduced However more of the ring s available bandwidth is used to circulate the token a Higher values of T_Opr use less bandwidth to circulate the token but they increase token latency when the ring is saturated a You can use this command to configure the same setting on multiple ports simultaneously When you specify multiple port numbers the system prompts you to choose the setting and then applies it to all of the ports Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Ports One or more FDDI station ports m Any of the z for which you want to set the available ports path maxTreq on the installed FDDI modules m all Path Path that you want to set a p primary a ADAS porthas primary and w s secondary secondary paths a all a A SAS port has only a primary path maxTreq Value that a MAC bids during 0 4294967295 16500 the claim process to determine microseconds a ring s operational token rotation time T_Opr fddi mac summary v 3500 v 9000 9400 3
48. A valid mask Based on mask with the route source network for example 255 255 0 0 470 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interfaces Index number of the interface for m One or more Previous which you want to define a selectable entry if routing policy interface applicable indexes m all a fora list of selectable interface indexes Policy action Whether the route is accepted or m accept accept rejected a reject Metric Used with accept increase or 0 16 0 which adjustment decrease in the converted route does not metric by the specified value change the Options include metne add subtract Administrative weight multiple metric by value use new metric as divisor modulus take remainder of division operation expressed as an integer Metric value for this policy 1 16 1 higher values have higher priority over lower numbered values associated with the route ip rip policy remove v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Deletes a previously defined route policy Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip rip polr Important Considerations a The system assigns an index number to each policy that you define This index takes into account all route policies that are set on the system RIP and OSPF so the assigned index can be higher than you may expect a When you remove a policy the a
49. ARP reply frames that were received on an IP interface inRequests ARP request frames that were received on an IP interface outlfdown Failure of the system to send one of the following three frames because the state of the IP interface was down m ARP request a ARP reply a P frame to be forwarded pending ARP resolution outMemErrors Failure of the system to allocate memory to transmit either an ARP request or an ARP reply outReplies ARP replies that were transmitted from an IP interface outRequests ARP requests that were transmitted from an IP interface 436 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 ip dns display For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays the current domain name and the name servers that are associated with it Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip d di Important Considerations The Domain Name System DNS client provides DNS lookup functionality to the CoreBuilder IP ping and traceRoute features You can specify a host name rather than an IP address when you perform various operations for example when you use ping Or traceRoute to contact an IP station With the DNS commands you specify one or more name servers that are associated with a domain name Each name server maintains a list of IP addresses and their associated host names When you use ping Or traceRoute With a host name the DNS client attempts to locate the name on the nam
50. Administer console level functions Set the file transfer protocol Display all configuration and status information Administer a statistics baseline Administer the terminal and modem serial ports Set the system nam Display Diagnose Error Log Administer the Simple Network Time Protocol Type q to return to the previous menu or for help Read Access Example When you enter the Administration Console with read access the system menu contains the fewest options as shown in this example on the CoreBuilder 3500 Select menu option system Menu options display snapshot baseline diagErrLog snte CoreBuilder 293 300 Display the system configuration Display all configuration and status information Administer a statistics baseline Display Diagnose Error Log Administer the Simple Network Time Protocol Type q to return to the previous menu or for help Access Examples 39 Using Menus to Perform Tasks When you access the Administration Console the top level menu appears You perform administrative tasks by selecting options from this menu and its submenus A brief description accompanies each option in the display The commands that you can use depend on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardware options that are configured for your system The Menu Structure diagrams at the beginning of most chapters show the complete list of comma
51. Considerations a Excess tagging is disabled by default a When you enter this command you are prompted to enter an IEEE 802 1p tag value for excess packets in the range of 0 through 7 with 0 as the default For example if you specify 1 excess packets become background traffic Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IEEE 802 1p Tag value to use to tag or retag 0 7 0 tag value excess packets gos excessTagging disable 737 qos excessTagging For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only disable Disables the tagging of excess packets with a special 802 1p tag value v 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation A 9000 q e disa 9400 Important Consideration 3900 a Excess tagging is disabled by default 9300 738 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP qos statistics interval For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Sets a sampling interval for gathering QoS statistics J 3500 Y 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 qsi 3900 Important Considerations 9300 a The default interval is 5 seconds a When you enter this command the system prompts you to enter the appropriate interval The existing value appears in brackets a A nonzero value shows the byte or packet count per interval period A zero value shows byte or packet counters Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Interval Interval in seconds during 0 60seconds 5 factory which you want to g
52. Default Virtual link Index number of the virtual link m Index number for which you want to display summary information of a currently defined virtual link m all a fora list of selectable indexes Fields in the IP OSPF Virtual Links Summary Display Field Description Dead Intvl Number of seconds before the area border router s neighbors declare it down when they stop hearing the router s Hellos Hello Intvl Length of time in seconds between Hello packets Indx Index number of the virtual link Password Password for the virtual link Rxmit Intvl Length of time in seconds between link state advertisement Target Router Transit Area Xmit Delay retransmissions End point area border router where the virtual link terminates Common area that the virtual link uses to reach the target router Estimated number of seconds that it takes to transmit a link state update packet over the virtual link ip ospf virtualLinks v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 detail ip ospf virtualLinks detail 575 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays detailed information about a virtual link Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o v det Important Consideration a This display also contains virtual link detail and neighbor information Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Virtual link Index number of the virtual link m Index number for which you want to display of a c
53. Displays summary information and detailed statistics for the specified virtual router Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip v det Important Consideration a Displays both summary information and the VRRP router statistics table for locally configured virtual routers whether they are in the Master Backup or Initialize state Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN Index number of the virtual a Oneor more interface LAN VLAN for which you valid IP VLAN index want to display virtual router index numbers information L all a fora list of selectable indexes Virtual ID of the virtual router for a Valid ID of virtual router ID which you want to display virtual router ID router that is summary information 0 255 defined on the a for list of VEAN selectable IDs Fields in the IP VRRP Detail Display Field Description Address IP address of the virtual router addrListErrors Total number of VRRP advertisements that were received that do not match the address list defined for the virtual router Total number of VRRP advertisements that this virtual router has received advertReceived advintErrors Total number of VRRP advertisement packets that were received for which the advertisement interval is different than the one that is configured for the virtual router Field Description Auth authFailures becomeMaster Error Interval InvalidAuthType invalidPktTypeRx ipTtlErr
54. Fields in the IP OSPF Link State Data Router Display Field Description Flags a v Router is the endpoint of an active virtual link that is using the area as a transmit area ASBR Router is an autonomous system boundary router ABR Router is an area border router Field ip ospf linkStateData router 559 Description Link Data Link ID Link Type LS Age LS Seq LSID Metric Router ID PTP MIB Il index value for an unnumbered point to point interface Transit Net IP address of the router s interface Stub Net Network IP address mask Virtual link IP interface address of neighboring router PTP Neighboring router s router ID Transit Net Address of designated router Stub Net IP network subnetwork number Virtual link Neighboring router s router ID PTP Connection is point to point to another router Transit Net Connection is to a transit network one that has more than one OSPF router on it Stub Net Connection is to a stub network Virtual link Connection is to a far end router that is the endpoint of a virtual link Time in seconds since LSA was originated Sequence number of the LSA used to detect older duplicate LSAs ID number of the router that originated the LSA Cost of the link Originating router ID 560 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf linkStateData v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 network Fo
55. For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Sets the virtual link transmit delay in seconds Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o v del Important Consideration a The virtual link transmit delay must be consistent throughout the autonomous system Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Virtual link Index number of the virtual link m Index number for which you want to specify of a currently the transmit delay defined virtual link a all a fora list of selectable indexes Transmit New virtual link transmit delay 1 65535 seconds 1 factory delay in seconds default or current value 586 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf virtualLinks v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 hello For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Sets the virtual link Hello interval in seconds Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o v he Important Considerations a Hello packets inform other routers that the sending router is still active on the network a f arouter does not send Hello packets for a period of time specified by the dead interval the router is considered inactive by its neighbors a The virtual link Hello interval must be consistent throughout the autonomous system Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Virtual link Index number of the virtual link m Index number for which you want to specify of a currently the Hello in
56. ID as the router receiving the packet When an OSPF database descriptor packet is received and the packet length is too short When an OSPF link state request LSR packet is received and the packet length is too short When processing an LSR packet if the area is not configured on the interface When an OSPF link state update LSU packet is received and the packet length is too short When processing an LSU packet if there are more than 500 advertisements the packet is not processed When an OSPF link state acknowledgement LSAck packet is received and the packet length is too short When processing an LSAck packet if the area described by the packet is not known by the router receiving the packet When processing any OSPF packet if the packet length is less than the OSPF header length then it must have been truncated and the packet is dropped When an OSPF packet is received on an interface that is not running OSPF When an OSPF packet is received over a virtual link but the virtual link is down or not configured When an OSPF packet is received over a non virtual link from a source whose IP network does not match the IP network of the interface on which it was received When an OSPF packet is received on a Non Broadcast Multiple Access network from an unknown neighbor When an OSPF packet is received whose version is not OSPF version 2 Number of Hello packets that have been received Number of LSA acknow
57. IP interfaces Index number of the interfaces m One or more Previous for which you want to set the RIP selectable entry if mode interface applicable indexes a all a fora list of selectable interface indexes 454 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP Prompt Description Possible Values Default RIP mode Selected RIP Version 1 mode that disabled learn Version 1 determines how the interface bale factory handles RIP 1 packets and z default or updates a advertise current 3500 9000 value a enabled 3500 9000 RIP mode Selected RIP mode that a disabled learn Version 2 determines how the interface aam factory not 9000 handles RIP 2 packets and default or updates a advertise current 3500 only value a enabled 3500 only IP RIP Mode Example Select IP interfaces 1 2 all Interface 1 Enter RIP Version 1 mode disabled learn advertise enabl learn disabled Interface 1 Enter RIP Version 2 mode disabled learn advertise enabl learn enabled ip rip compatibilityMode v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only On a per interface basis sets the RIP Version 1 compatibility mode Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip ri com Important Considerations a The RIP 1 compatibility mode determines how the software sends periodic RIP 2 updates For RIP 1 the software never uses the multicast address it uses the advertisement list
58. IPX address of the interface 0x1 Oxfffffffe Current network The address must be unique within address address the network Ticks Number that the system uses to 1 65534 where Current calculate route ticks A tick is an a 1 FDDI setting estimate of how long a packet takes to reach the network segment a 4 Ethernet There are 18 21 ticks in a second fae a 10 Serial Link Prompt Description Possible Values Default Frame Frame encapsulation format for the Ethernet_ll Current format interface IPX uses four Ethernet and 802 2 format two FDDI formats Ethernet Type I Novell 802 3 RAW 802 2 LLC and a 802 2 LLC 802 3 SNAP The FDDI formats are available with 802 2 SNAP and a RAW_802 3 802 3 SNAP a SNAP a 802 3 SNAP VLAN Index number of the VLAN that is a A selectable Current interface associated with the IPX interface VLAN interface VLAN index index to view a list of selectable indexes 612 CHAPTER 20 IPX ipx interface remove For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Removes an IPX interface if you no longer perform routing on the ports v 3500 that are associated with the interface Y 9000 9400 Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx i r 3900 9300 Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Index Index number for the interface a One or more 1 if only 1 that you want to remove selectable IPX interface interface indexes a to view a list of selectable inde
59. Layer 3 Bridge VLAN Remove Example 3500 Select menu option bridge vlan remove Select VLAN interface indexes 1 2 all Selectable vlans selection VID ports name 1 1 1 13 Default 2 2 Sro gpI IP1 Select VLAN interface indexes 1 2 all 2 364 CHAPTER 14 VIRTUAL LANs VLANs bridge vlan mode v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 Determines whether data with a unicast MAC address can be forwarded between VLANs Valid Minimum Abbreviation b v mode Important Considerations a Select a VLAN mode as follows a allOpen Use this less restrictive mode if you do not have security issues concerning the forwarding of data between VLANs It is the default VLAN mode for all VLANs that you create It permits data with a unicast MAC address to be forwarded between VLANs The allOpen mode implies that the system uses a single bridge address table for all of the VLANs on the system a allClosed Use this restrictive mode if you are concerned about security between VLANs Data cannot be forwarded between VLANs but can still be routed between VLANs This mode implies that each VLAN that you create has its own address table a For the CoreBuilder 3500 system and CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 modules if you are using allClosed mode and STP with multiple routes to a destination you can also use the command bridge vlan stoMode to disable STP blocking for a specified VLAN a For the CoreBuilder 9000 set a
60. Port number for UDP 1 65535 67 factory number default or current value IP forwarding Forwarding A valid IP address address addresses that are used for UDP packets 444 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP ip udpHelper remove v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Removes a port number or IP forwarding address that has been defined for UDP Helper Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipur Important Consideration a The system immediately removes the port numbers and IP forwarding addresses that you specified You are not prompted to confirm the deletion Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default UDP port UDP port number 1 65535 67 factory number that you want to default or remove current value IP forwarding Forwarding A valid IP address address addresses that you want to remove ip udpHelper hopCountLimit v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Sets the maximum hop count to specify how many steps the system uses to forward a packet through the router Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip uh Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default BOOTP hop Maximum number 0 16 4 factory count limit of hops to allow for default or UDP packet current forwarding value 446 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip udpHelper thres
61. Select bridge port 2 7 7 v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 analyzer start Starts port monitoring activity on the selected bridge port Valid Minimum Abbreviation an sta Important Considerations You must already have an analyzer port configured First designate a bridge port to serve as the analyzer port and connect the analyzer to that port See analyzer add earlier in this chapter for details On the CoreBuilder 9000 the analyzer port and the monitor port must be on the same module The MAC address of the analyzer port is displayed when you configure that port and when you display the roving analysis configurations on the system to which the analyzer is attached The media type of the analyzer port must match the media type of the port being monitored Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet are the same media type You can use a Fast Ethernet 10 Mbps port to monitor a Gigabit Ethernet 100 Mbps port but a warning message will be printed If the sustained traffic load is greater than 10 Mbps the analyzer on the slower port may not see all the frames on the faster port When you successfully configure a bridge port to be monitored all the data that the monitored port receives and transmits is copied to the selected analyzer port Once a port is selected to serve as a monitor port the RMON data that it can record is limited to the RMON groups statistics history alarm event protocolDir and probeCo
62. Spanning Tree Protocol STP parameter values Valid Minimum Abbreviation bd Fields in the Bridge Display Field Description addressCount addrTableSize addrThreshold agingTime bridgeFwdDelay Number of addresses in the bridge address table at the point in time in which you are viewing it This value fluctuates but the highest value reached is recorded in the PeakAddrCount field Maximum number of addresses that can be stored in the bridge address table For CoreBuilder switches the value is 32K For SuperStack II Switches the value is 16K Configurable reporting threshold for the total number of addresses known on this bridge When this threshold is reached the system generates the SNMP trap addressThresholdEvent The range of valid values for setting this object is between 1 and 1 plus the maximum table size To configure this value for the 3500 and 9000 L3 modules see bridge addressThreshold later in this chapter This option is not available for the 3900 9300 9400 and 9000 L2 modules at this release Configurable time period in seconds that the bridge uses to age out dynamic addresses except when a topology change has occurred After a topology change the bridge uses the value shown in the forwardDelay field instead until it receives configuration messages without the topology change flag set The default value for agingTime is 300 seconds The acceptable range is 10 1 000 000 You can
63. Values Default Terminal Signal speed for the terminal 19200 9600 speed connection a 9600 a 4800 a 2400 a 1200 Confirmation Confirmation of terminalspeed y yes change H OO Procedure Local Connection To set the terminal speed for the serial port from the top level of the Administration Console enter system serialPort terminalSpeed 94 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT 2 Enter the terminal speed setting for the serial port See the Options table gt for supported terminal speed rates The system response depends on the cable status The terminal speed is referred to as baud rate in the following messages If the cable is connected to the terminal port when you set the terminal speed for that port the system displays the following message Changing the baud rate may cause a loss of communication since you are currently connected via the serial port Are you sure you want to change the baud rate y n a f you respond y yes the serial port s baud rate is changed immediately and you lose the ability to communicate with any devices connected to the port until you adjust the device baud setting to match a f you respond n no the rate does not change and the display returns to the previous menu Procedure IP Interface From the top level of the Administration Console enter system serialPort terminalSpeed Enter the terminal speed setting for the terminal port The terminal speed is refe
64. When you enable autonegotiation the system ignores your requested portMode information for 10 100BASE TX ports and your requested flowControl information for 1OOOBASE SX ports When you disable autonegotiation the system recognizes the requested portMode values for ports that have portMode options and the requested flowControl values for 1000BASE SX ports 100BASE FX ports and backplane ports do not support autonegotiation Therefore it is extremely important that you understand how to implement flowcontrol and portMode in your network See the Implementation Guide for your system for more information Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Port Port numbers for which you m A single port want to enable or disable oe A range of autonegotiation ports m all a to display a port summary Autonegotiation Whether to enable or a enable enable setting disable autonegotiation on each of the ports that you disable selected ethernet portMode v 3500 v 9000 9400 v 3900 9300 Sets the port speed 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps and the duplex mode full duplex or half duplex on individual ports Valid Minimum Abbreviation e portm Important Considerations You can use this command to configure the same setting on multiple ports simultaneously When you specify multiple port numbers the system prompts you to choose the setting and then applies it to all of the ports The device that is connected to each port
65. When you specify a host name the host name and its associated IP address must be configured on a network name server Also you must add the IP address on the name server to the list of name server addresses that are associated with the network domain name See ip dns domainName earlier in this chapter for more information When the system sends an echo request packet to an IP station using ping the system waits for an ICMP echo reply packet Possible responses a f the host is reachable the system displays information about the ICMP reply packets and the response time to the ping a f the host does not respond the system displays the ICMP packet information and this message Host is Not Responding YOU may not have configured your gateway IP address a If the packets cannot reach the host the system displays the ICMP packet information and this message Host is Unreachable A host is unreachable when there is no route to that host To interrupt the command press Enter 474 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Host name or Host name or IP address of the a A valid host 0 0 0 0 or IP address destination that you want to name current png a P address value IP Ping Example Select menu option ip ping 64 bytes 64 bytes 64 bytes 158 PING 158 Enter host name IP address 0 0 0 0 158 101 111 50 Press Enter key to interrupt 101 111 50 64
66. a Avalid host 0 0 0 0 IP address destination that you want to ping name a P address Maximum ttl Maximum number of hops that the 1 255 hops 30 system can use in outgoing probe packets Destination Destination or base UDP port 30000 33434 port number that the system uses in probe 65535 packets Set the destination UDP port number to be very high to ensure that an application at the destination is not using that port Probe count Maximum number of probes that the 1 10 3 system sends at each TTL level Wait Maximum amount of time that the 1 10seconds 3 system waits for a response to a probe Packet size Number of bytes that the system 28 4096 28 sends in each UDP probe packet bytes Source address Source address other than the one a no y from which the probe packets a y yes originate This option is available if you have more than one IP interface defined on the system Possible Prompt Description Values Default Interface index Index number of the ICMP source IP A selectable O the address that you want to use interface index router picks the The system lists defined interfaces ae best and their indexes interface Numeric mode Whether the system shows hop a disabled disabled addresses numerically or symbolicall i say y y enabled IP Advanced Trace Route Example TTL value of 10 Select menu option ip advancedTraceRoute Enter host IP address 158 101 101 27 Enter maximum Time to Live ttl 1 255
67. a RIP is active a SAP is active a RIP Triggered updates are enabled a SAP Triggered updates are enabled a Secondary route server option is enabled a Fora CoreBuilder 3500 system the route table display shows the range for the routing table primary entries in the format n m where nis the current number of entries and m is the maximum number of primary entries ma The maximum number of hops or routers that a packet can cross is 16 except NetBIOS packets which can cross no more than 7 routers Options 3500 only Prompt Description Possible Values Default Start of First address in a range for which 0x0 Oxffffffff 0x0 address range you want to display routes End of address Last address in a range for which 0x0 Oxffffffff Oxffffffff range you want to display routes 616 CHAPTER 20 IPX Fields in the IPX Route Display Field Description Address Unique 4 byte network address of a segment in the system s routing table Age Number of seconds that have elapsed since the last time the router sent a packet Hops Number of hops or the number of routers that must be crossed to reach the network segment Interface System assigned number for the interface Node 6 byte MAC address of the router that can forward packets to the segment A node address of all zeroes 00 00 00 00 00 00 means that the route is connected directly to the router Ticks Number of ticks which is an estimate of time in seco
68. a When the system is configured to advertise RIP 2 packets and compatibility mode is disabled the software uses the multicast address of 224 0 0 9 when sending periodic updates This latest industry recommendation reduces the load on hosts that are not configured to listen to RIP 2 messages a When the system is configured to advertise RIP 2 packets and compatibility mode is enabled the software uses the advertisement list for RIP 2 updates Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interfaces Index number of the interfaces One or more Previous for which you want to set the RIP selectable entry if compatibility mode interface applicable indexes a all a fora list of selectable interface indexes RIP 1 Selected RIP Version 1 a disabled disabled compatibility compatibility mode that erabled mode determines how the system 7 handles RIP 2 updates 456 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip rip cost For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only On a per interface basis sets the RIP cost Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip ri cos Important Considerations a The default cost value is 1 which is appropriate for most networks a The system uses the cost number between 1 and 15 to calculate route metrics Unless your network has special requirements assign a cost of 1 to all interfaces Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP inte
69. a station generates Status Report Frames SRFs to report events and conditions to network management stations This value is user defined Timer used in the Neighbor Notification protocol to indicate the interval of time between generation of Neighbor Information Frames NIF This value is user defined Maximum propagation time for a trace on an FDDI topology Places a lower bound on the detection time for an unrecovering ring v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 fddi station connectPolicy Sets the connectPolicy attribute string that represents the connection policies in effect on a station A connection s type is defined by the types of the two ports involved in the connection Valid Minimum Abbreviation fd station c Important Considerations a Port types can be A B M or S m The system FDDI ports are type A or type B for Dual Attachment Station DAS ports and type M for Single Attachment Station SAS ports a By default all connections to the system ports are valid M M connections are accepted so that one CoreBuilder 3500 port can be connected to another system port Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Ports One or more FDDI station ports m Any of the for which you want to set the available ports connection policies on the installed FDDI modules m all connectPolicy Bit string that represents the See next table connection policies in effect on that station Bit to Set for Reje
70. address 158 99 112 219 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 allows access only by the single IP address 158 99 112 219 a The trusted IP client information is retained after a system reboot that is it is saved in nvData system console security define 79 Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP address IP address of the interface Any valid IP address chosen from the range of addresses that are assigned to your organization This address is specific to your network and system Subnet 32 bit number that uses the A valid subnet Depends on mask same format and mask in accordance specified IP representation as an IP address The subnet mask determines which bits in the IP address are interpreted as the network number the subnet number and the host number Each IP address bit that corresponds to a 1 in the subnet mask is in the network subnet part of the address Each IP address bit that corresponds to a 0 is in the host part of the IP address with the bits used address for network number subnet and host number 80 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system console Removes an IP address from the trusted IP client access list security remove Valid Minimum Abbreviation y 3500 sy co se r 9000 9400 Important Considerations a If you remove a trusted IP client definition through the Administration Y 3900 Console the definition is also removed in the Web Management 9300 Console and vice versa a
71. advancedTraceRoute 480 UDP port number for traceRoute 182 defining QoS controls 710 712 715 VLANs 310 331 deleting links 336 trunks 318 VLANs 363 designated root 253 destination address for SNMP trap reporting 194 destination IP address for QoS classifiers 702 destination IP address masks 702 detai trunks 329 detail information trunks 305 VLANs 341 details AppleTalk interface 664 Diagnostics status 69 disabled RIP mode 451 453 disabling excess packet tagging 737 RSVP 732 displaying QoS bandwidth 733 QoS classifier detail 692 QoS classifier summary 691 QoS control detail information 708 QoS excess packet tagging 735 QoS summary information 691 707 RSVP detail information 729 summary RSVP information 728 displaying TCMP state 301 304 328 DNS Domain Name System servers 436 to 440 documentation comments 25 drop service level 711 duplex mode Ethernet ports 212 213 DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol 507 dynamic versus static VLAN origin 345 352 E edge policing option 725 728 editor for scripts EMACS 124 vi 124 EME Enterprise Management Engine console 30 overview 33 enabled RIP mode 451 453 enabling excess packet tagging 736 RSVP 730 enabling and disabling Ethernet ports 220 errors routing interface 406 Ethernet address and restoring NV data 110 and roving analysis 757 autonegotiation 212 enabling and disabling ports 220 fragmenting packets 255 menu options 203 PACE Access 217
72. advertisement interval The minimum time interval between advertisements Advertisement holdtime The length of time that advertisements are held valid 416 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP gt The ranges for minimum advertisement interval depend on the set values for maximum advertisement interval and the holdtime range depends on the input values for both the maximum and minimum advertisement intervals Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interfaces Index number of the interfaces One or more Current for which you want to enable or selectable value disable ICMP router discovery interface indexes Not applicable if you have more mall than one interface a ones skort selectable interface indexes Router Whether you want to implement m enabled disabled discovery state ICMP router discovery on an or current a disabled interface The system prompts value you for a state for each interface Preference If you select enablea the host minimum value 0 interprets an unsigned integer as hex 80000000 a 32 bit signed 231 to 231 twos complement integer that represents the preference level to associate with the interface Higher values produce higher preference levels The minimum value is reserved so that the address is not used as a default router address only for specific IP destinations Maximum Maximum interval between 4 1800 seconds 600 advertisement advertisements interval Mini
73. all systems See the checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter for whether your system supports the command Top Level Menu system module management ethernet fddi bridge ip ipx appletalk qos snmp analyzer log script logout disconnect snmp menu trap menu display display community addModify b trap remove rmonConfiguration flush writeDisable smtProxyTraps v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 snmp display snmp display 191 Displays the current SNMP configurations for the community strings Valid Minimum Abbreviation snd Fields in the SNMP Display Field Description community string Community strings setting that controls access to the system a Read only community strings with the default public a Read write community strings with the default private 192 CHAPTER 6 SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL SNMP snmp community v 3500 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 gt Sets two SNMP community strings read only and read write To set the community strings for the CoreBuilder 9000 see the CoreBuilder 9000 Enterprise Management Engine User Guide Valid Minimum Abbreviation snc Important Considerations a When an SNMP agent receives an SNMP request the agent compares the community string in the request with the community strings that are configured for the agent SNMP get get next and set requests are valid if the community string in
74. and index number the ports defined in that trunk whether the Trunk Control Y 3500 Message Protocol TCMP is enabled or disabled and whether the port Y 9000 link is up or down vV 9400 Valid Minimum Abbreviation V 3900 Pere y 9300 Fields in the Bridge Trunk Summary Display Field Description Index Identifying number that the system assigned to the trunk You can select all or one trunk Name Trunk name that you defined Ports Port numbers in the trunk State Whether the trunk is up or down TCMP Whether the Trunk Control Message Protocol TCMP is enabledor disabled bridge trunk detail v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 Displays detailed trunk information in addition to the summary information Valid Minimum Abbreviation b t det Fields in the Bridge Trunk Detail Display Field Description FlowC For Gigabit Ethernet trunks the flow control setting on off rxOn txOn For other media types the field contains n a to indicate that flow control does not apply Index Identifying number for the system or module that the system assigned to the trunk Missing Number of ports that are configured for the trunk but are missing because an interface module is inaccessible Mode Operating mode 100half or 100fu1l1 for Fast Ethernet and 1000full for Gigabit Ethernet Name Trunk name that you defined Node trunk id Node trunk id list Ports Present rxBadType rxBadVersion rxFrames rxHellos rxOverflow
75. and you can try to reenter the changes Although the possible range for stpForwardDelay is 4 30 the available range is constrained by the following inequality 2 x stpForwardDelay 1 second gt stpMaxAge Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default STP forward delay Time in seconds that a 4 30 seconds 15 factory bridge spends in the listening default or state and the learning state current value bridge spanningTree stpGroupAddress v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 Sets the single address to which a bridge listens to receive Spanning Tree Protocol STP information Each STP bridge on the network sends STP packets to the group address Every STP bridge on the network receives STP packets that were sent to the group address regardless of which bridge sent the packets The current value is shown in the stpGroupAdaress field of the bridge display Valid Minimum Abbreviation b sp stpg Important Considerations a Because there is no industry standard for a group address products from different vendors may respond to different group addresses If STP does not seem to be working in a mixed vendor environment other vendors products may use different group addresses as their defaults If that is true set the STP group address to be the same across all bridges in the network a Before you can modify the STP group address you must disable STP if it is not already disabled on the bridge See
76. associated with it If you plan to use the trunking feature or the MPLA feature define the appropriate trunks before you define your VLANs See Chapter 11 for more information If you plan for your VLAN to include trunk ports specify the anchor port lowest numbered port that is associated with the trunk For example if ports 1 through 3 are associated with a trunk specify 1 to define the VLAN to include all of the physical ports in the trunk ports 1 through 3 If you have not defined trunks specify one or more port numbers or a1i to assign all ports to the VLAN interface If a port is shared by another VLAN verify that if tagging is the only distinguishing characteristic between the VLANs the specified tag type is not in conflict with the port s tag type in another VLAN that is there is only one port that is tagged none Do not use this command if you want GVRP to dynamically create IEEE 802 1Q port based VLANs Instead explicitly enable the GVRP state for the participating ports and enable the GVRP state for the entire system To set the per port GVRP state use the bridge port gvrpState See Chapter 10 To set the bridge wide GVRP state use the bridge gvrpState command See Chapter 9 Whether you are bridging or routing you can select more than one protocol suite per VLAN and specify one protocol at each of the prompts Use the protocol type of unspecified to create a port based VLAN The IPX protocol type 1px 802
77. byte packets from 158 101 1LI50 icmp_seq 0 time 16 ms from 158 101 111 50 icmp_seq 1l time 19 ms from 158 101 111 50 icmp_seq 2 time 24 ms 101 111 50 PING Statistics 3 packets transmitted 3 packets received 0 packet loss round trip ms min avg max 16 20 24 ip advancedPing v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Tries to contact a host with one or more of the advanced ping options Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip advancedP Important Considerations a When you specify a host name the host name and its associated IP address must be configured on a network name server Also you must add the IP address on the name server to the list of name server addresses that are associated with the network domain name See ip dns domainName earlier in this chapter for more information The burst option when enabled overrides the value set in the quiet Or wait option The burst option floods the network with Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP echo packets and can cause network congestion Do not use the burst option during periods of heavy network traffic Use this option only as a diagnostic tool in a network that has many routers to determine if one of the routers is not forwarding packets For example you can set a high count value 1000 packets and then observe the run lights on the units the run lights blink rapidly on routers that ar
78. define 608 ipx interface modify 610 ipx interface remove 612 ipx interface SAPadvertising 613 ipx interface RIPadvertising 614 ipx route display 615 ipx route secondary 617 ipx route static 618 ipx route remove 620 ipx route flush 621 ipx server display 622 ipx server static 624 ipx server remove 626 ipx server flush 627 ipx server secondary 628 ipx forwarding 629 ipx rip mode 630 ipx rip triggered 631 ipx rip policy summary 632 ipx rip policy define 633 ipx rip policy modify 635 ipx rip policy remove 637 ipx sap mode 638 ipx sap triggered 639 ipx sap policy summary 640 ipx sap policy detail 641 ipx sap policy define 642 ipx sap policy modify 645 ipx sap policy remove 648 ipx output delay 649 ipx statistics summary 650 ipx statistics rip 651 ipx statistics sap 652 ipx statistics forwarding 653 ipx statistics interface 655 ipx oddLengthPadding 657 ipx NetBIOS 658 ipx secondary 659 21 APPLETALK Menu Structure 662 appletalk interface summary 663 appletalk interface detail 664 appletalk interface define 665 appletalk interface modify 667 appletalk interface remove 669 appletalk interface statistics 670 appletalk route display 672 appletalk route flush 673 appletalk aarp display 674 appletalk aarp remove 675 appletalk aarp flush 676 appletalk zone display network 677 appletalk zone display zone 678 appletalk forwarding 679 appletalk checksum 680 appletalk sourceSocket 681 appletalk ping 682 ap
79. defined a Defining is default route metric is useful when the configuration supports multiple paths to the same destination It provides a way to signify which of the paths is to be preferred Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Default Cost metric that is associated 1 65535 route metric with the default route 540 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only defaultRouteMetric Removes the default route metric remove Valid Minimum Abbreviation J 3500 Pear 9000 9400 Important Considerations a fa default metric is not defined the router does not advertise itself as 3900 the default router 9300 a By default the default route metric is not defined a The default route metric is removed immediately after you enter the command You are not prompted to confirm the deletion ip ospf interface summary 541 ip ospf interface For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only summary Displays summary information for the system s OSPF interface 3500 configuration v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 ip oi su 3900 Fields in the IP OSPF Interface Summary Display 9300 Field Description ArealD OSPF area to which the interface belongs Dead Intvl Time interval in seconds before OSPF declares that a neighbor is dead Hello Intv OSPF Hello packet transmit interval in seconds for the interface Indx Interface e
80. defined resilient link Valid Minimum Abbreviation bim Important Considerations Connect the network cable to the resilient link port after you reboot the system In general create links before you define your Virtual LANs VLANs If you plan to create resilient links for part of a VLAN create the resilient links before you create the VLAN When you create a resilient link that includes ports that are part of a VLAN those ports are removed from the VLAN You must modify the VLAN and add the new bridge port to the appropriate VLAN This situation does not apply to the default VLAN all ports are part of the default VLAN If you have already defined other links or trunks on your system you cannot select ports that are part of an existing link or a trunk You must reboot the system at the end of the link definition process You can define multiple links in one define operation The resilient link port pair uses a single MAC address for frames sourced by this pair The resilient link name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Resilientlink New resilient link name Use Maximum 32 name quotation marks around any alphanumeric characters character string that has embedded spaces Main port New port to be the main port Any of the available of the defined resilient link ports on the system Standby New port to be the standby Any of the available port port of the
81. diagErrlog 115 system sntp display 116 system sntp define 117 system sntp modify 118 system sntp remove 119 system sntp state 120 system sntp polllnterval 121 system sntp tolerance 122 system reboot 123 script 124 logout 126 4 MODULE ENVIRONMENT Menu Structure 128 module display 129 module snapshot summary 130 module snapshot detail 131 module baseline display 132 module baseline set 133 module baseline requestedState 134 module redundancy 135 module name 136 module time 137 module screenHeight 138 module nvData reset 139 module nvData emergencyDownload 140 module nvData displayDownload 141 module nvData staging 142 module clearDiagBlock 143 module diagErrlog 144 module reboot 145 disconnect 146 PART Ill ESTABLISHING MANAGEMENT ACCESS 5 Out OFr BAND MANAGEMENT Menu Structure 150 management summary 151 management detail 153 management ip interface summary 156 management ip interface define 157 management ip interface modify 158 management ip interface remove 159 management ip route display 160 management ip route static 162 management ip route remove 163 management ip route flush 164 management ip route default 165 management ip route noDefault 166 management ip route findRoute 167 management ip arp display 168 management ip arp static 169 management ip arp remove 170 management ip arp flushAll 171 management ip arp flushDynamic 172 management ip rip display 173 management ip rip mode 174 management ip ri
82. diagram shows the complete list of commands for all systems See the checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter for whether your system supports the command Top Level Menu bridge menu port menu address menu system display summary list module ipFragmentation detail add management ipxSnapTranslation multicastLimit remove ethernet addressThreshold stpState find fddi agingTime stpCost flushAll bridge spanningTree stpPriority flushDynamic ip gvrpState gvrpState ipx cos address appletalk port qos multicast snmp packetFilter analyzer vlan log trunk script mpla logout link disconnect 280 CHAPTER 10 BRIDGE PORT PARAMETERS bridge port summary v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 Displays a summary of bridge port information including the Spanning Tree Protocol STP configurations for selected bridge ports Valid Minimum Abbreviation b po su Important Considerations The port numbering that is displayed is always sequential although it depends on the placement of the modules that you have configured into your system See the Implementation Guide for your system for more information about port numbering For resilient links the main and standby ports are shown in ascending order When you are prompted to select ports you can enter to see a matrix of information about the bridge ports This matrix is useful for example if you have trunks configured but forge
83. different system and subnetwork Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default tunnel Index number of the tunnel for m A valid DVMRP which you modify the remote tunnel index tunnel end point number in the system a fora list of selectable tunnel index numbers remote A valid IP address on a different A valid IP address current value address system and subnetwork Use the 0 0 0 0 format ip multicast dvmrp tunnels threshold v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip multicast dvmrp tunnels threshold 515 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Modifies the time to live TTL threshold on an existing DVMRP tunnel Valid Minimum Configuration ipmdtt Important Consideration a When you first define a tunnel the system automatically assigns the value 1 as the TTL threshold for the tunnel which is different from the interface TTL threshold Use this command to modify the TTL threshold value on any existing tunnel Options Prompt Definition Possible Values Default tunnel Index number of the existing AvalidDVMRP DVMRP tunnel on which you tunnel index want to modify the TTL number threshold a fora list of selectable tunnel index numbers threshold Value that determines whether 1 32 1 factory IP multicast packets are default or forwarded The interface current value compares the packet TTL to the TTL threshold 516 CHAPTER 18 IP MULTICAST ip multicast dvmrp tunnels
84. download display shows the following information 3900 a File Type 9300 a File Name a Server IP 142 CHAPTER 4 MODULE ENVIRONMENT module nvData 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 staging Enables either default module settings or retention of nonvolatile data settings when you hot swap a module Valid Minimum Abbreviation mo nv sta Important Considerations a f you hot swap a module and the staging flag is set to on the new module adopts the nonvolatile data settings from the old module a f you hot swap a module and the staging flag is set to off the new module uses the module default settings for the new module Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Staging Whether you want to enable or off off setting disable the NV staging flag on module clearDiagBlock 143 module Prevents diagnostic information about failed modules from accumulating clearDiagBlock in module display screens 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation J 9000 mo cle 9400 Important Considerations 3900 m The module immediately removes diagnostic information about failed 9300 modules from the SNMP MIB swSysDiagnosticsGroup a If you enter y yes the module immediately removes the diagnostic information about failed modules from the SNMP MIB swSysDiagnosticsGroup a If you enter n no the module displays the previous menu 144 CHAPTER 4 MODULE ENVIRONMENT module diagErrLog Displays hardware diagnostic errors that have b
85. e gt EVENT LOG This chapter provides guidelines and other key information about how to administer event logs in your system including the following tasks a Display the event log configuration a Configure the output devices a Configure the services Use event logging to capture different types of log messages from various services applications and send them to the Administration Console The log messages display real time information about the state of the system or a specific service and can help you diagnose site specific problems On CoreBuilder 9000 systems event logging is controlled entirely through the Enterprise Management Engine EME not through the Administration Consoles of individual modules as described here See the CoreBuilder 9000 Enterprise Management Engine User Guide for information on how to keep logs of switch events For more information about implementing event logging on your network see the CoreBuilder 3500 Implementation Guide 748 CHAPTER 23 EVENT LOG Menu Structure The commands that you can use depend on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardware options that are configured for your system The following diagram shows the complete list of commands for all systems See the checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter for whether your system supports the command Top Level Menu log menu system display m
86. each configured Valid IP address address server 120 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system sntp state v 3500 9000 vV 9400 3900 v 9300 Enables or disable the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP state for the system Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy snt s Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default SNTP state Whether you want to a disabled disabled implement SNTP on the system enabled v 3500 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 system sntp pollinterval Sets a poll interval value This value determines how often the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP client sends a request to the SNTP server Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy snt p Important Consideration a The default polllnterval value is once an hour 3600 seconds The value 86400 the polllnterval limit is the number of seconds in a day Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Request poll In seconds the poll interval 64 86400 seconds 3600 interval 122 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system sntp tolerance Sets a tolerance threshold that is used to update the local system time Y Y 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9000 sy snt to vV 9400 i Important Consideration Y 3900 m f the difference between the server time and the local time exceeds 9300 the specified tolerance threshold the client drops the server time and maintains the current local system time unchanged Options Prompt Description Possible Values D
87. for which you want available to set the mac ports on the notCopiedThreshold installed FDDI modules m all notCopiedThreshold Time value set to determines when the system generates a MAC condition report because too many frames could not be copied 0 4294967295 6550 microseconds fddi mac IlcService v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Sets the Logical Link Control LLC service so that LLC frames are sent and received on the MAC LLC frames are all data frames that are transmitted on the network Valid Minimum Abbreviation fdm 1 Important Considerations m f there is something wrong on your network you may want to turn off data user traffic for a MAC by disabling LLC service Although you have disabled data traffic from the MAC the MAC still participates in neighbor notification and is visible to network management a You can use this command to configure the same setting on multiple ports simultaneously When you specify multiple port numbers the system prompts you to choose the setting and then applies it to all of the ports Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Ports One or more FDDI station ports m Any of the for which you want to set the available ports mac IlcService on the installed FDDI modules C all IIcService Whether LLC frames are sent m enabled enabled and received on the MAC disabled 240 fddi mac path v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 CHAPTER 8 FIBER DISTR
88. fora list of selectable interface indexes ARP proxy Whether you want to implement m enabled Current state ARP proxy on an interface The a dieabled value system prompts you for a state for each interface 410 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP IP Interface ARP Proxy Example 3500 Select menu option ip interface arpproxy Select IP interfaces 1 2 all 2 Interface 2 Enter proxy state disabled enabled enabled enabled ip interface broadcastAddress v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only On a per interface basis assigns the broadcast address that the system uses to forward the received directed broadcasts and advertise Routing Information Protocol RIP packets Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip ib Important Considerations You assign the broadcast address on a per interface basis When an IP interface is configured its default broadcast address is 255 255 255 255 The broadcast address that you specify affects the RIP advertisement address that is used for the RIP interface You see the specified broadcast address as the advertisement address under the RIP menus See ip rip display later in this chapter for information about the RIP interface display You cannot change the broadcast address for an interface if you have added any RIP advertisement addresses to that interface See ip rip addAdvertisement later in this chapter for
89. forward group traffic on those 9400 interfaces 3900 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9300 ipmis Important Considerations a Your selection applies to all interfaces in the system a 3Com recommends that you keep IGMP snooping enabled at all times It adds little processing overhead to the system and enhances the efficiency of your network if IP multicast traffic is present Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default snooping Whether the system m enabled enabled factory default mode can observe record ee disabled or current value packets and set filters on appropriate ports in an interface ip multicast igmp v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 querying ip multicast igmp querying 525 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Enables or disables the system s ability to operate as the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP querier if so elected by other IGMP capable devices in the subnetwork The IGMP querier is always the device with the lowest IP address Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipmig Important Considerations a Your selection applies to all interfaces in the system a The most efficient bandwidth usage is achieved by having the device that is closest to the source of IP multicast traffic operate as the querier for a given subnetwork Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default query mode Whether the system enabled enabled factory default can offer itsel
90. host To change the default traceRoute options use the management ip advancedTraceRoute command You can either supply the host name or IP address as part of the command string or you can supply the information at the prompt When you specify a host name the host name and its associated IP address must be configured on a network name server Also you must add the IP address on the name server to the list of name server addresses that are associated with the network domain name See Chapter 16 for more information about ip dns commands To track the route of an IP packet traceRoute launches UDP probe packets with a small TTL value and then listens for an ICMP Time Exceeded reply from a gateway Probes start with a small TTL of 1 and increase the value by 1 until one of the following events occurs a The system receives a Port Unreachable message indicating that the packet reached the host a The probe exceeds the maximum number of hops default 30 At each TTL setting the system launches three UDP probe packets and the traceRoute display shows a line with the TTL value the address of the gateway and the round trip time of each probe If a probe answers from different gateways the traceRoute feature prints the address of each responding system If no response occurs in the 3 second timeout interval traceRoute displays an asterisk for that probe management ip traceRoute 183 Other characters that can be displayed inclu
91. in the local retransmit queue to the neighbor Neighbor s adjacency Down No recent data received from neighbor connection is down a Attempt Only used on nonbroadcast networks No recent data received from neighbor will attempt to contact a Init Have recently seen Hello packet from neighbor however two way communication has not been established a Two way Bidirectional communication has been established a ExStart Taking initial step to create adjacency between neighboring routers a Exchange Database descriptions are being exchanged a Loading LSA databases are being exchanged a Full Neighboring routers are fully adjacent Number of LSAs in LSA summary queue for the neighbor ip ospf virtualLinks v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Statistics ip ospf virtualLinks statistics 577 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays statistics that are associated with virtual links Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip ov st Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Virtual link Index number of the virtual link m Valid interface for which you want to display index number statistics 7 all a fora list of selectable indexes Fields in the IP OSPF Virtual Links Statistics Display Field Description adjacencyDown adjacencyUp authError computeDR IsaXsumError mismatchArealD mismatchAreaType Number of times that O
92. indexes ip interface arpProxy v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only On a per interface basis enables or disables ARP proxy which helps end stations on a subnetwork reach remote subnetworks that do not have routing capabilities or a default gateway configured Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip i a Important Considerations a When ARP proxy is enabled and an end station sends an Address Resolution Protocol ARP request for a remote network the system determines if it has the best route and then answers the ARP request by sending its own MAC address to the end station The end station then sends the frames for the remote destination to the system which uses its own routing table to reach the destination on the other network a When an interface is defined the default ARP proxy state is enabled a The end stations must view the entire network configuration as one network that is by using a smaller subnet mask a Evaluate prolonged use of ARP proxy because it has some drawbacks including increased ARP traffic and a need for larger ARP tables to handle the mapping of IP addresses to MAC addresses Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Interface Index number for the interface One or more Current for which you want to enable or selectable value disable ARP proxy interface Not applicable if you have more indexes than one interface m all a
93. interface a The system allows you to configure an interface as a DVMRP default route even when DVMRP is disabled on the interface If DVMRP is disabled the interface does not advertise itself as a default route Options Prompt Definition Possible Values Default interface Index number of the routing a Avalidinterface 1 factory interface on which you want to index number default or configure a default route current value a fora list of selectable indexes default Value that you assign to the 0 32 O factory route metric default route as the cost of default or that route current value default Routes that the interface m all all factory route advertises to neighboring only default or a advertise DVMRP routers mode current value ip multicast igmp interface summary 521 ip multicast igmp For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only interface summary Summarizes key information about IGMP interfaces v 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation A 9000 ipmi is 9400 Fields in the IP Multicast IGMP Interface Summary Display 3900 9300 Field Description Index Number assigned to the routing interface to its right Address IP address of a routing interface in the system TtlThreshold Time to live TTL threshold that is assigned to the interface This threshold affects IP multicast packets only Protocol Multicast routing protocol that registers with IGMP In release 3 0 software there is one support
94. interface indexes a fora list of selectable interface indexes An address from the advertisement list Previous entry if applicable ip rip policy summary v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays summary information about RIP routing policies Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip ri pol s Important Considerations a Your system has one unified IP routing table Route policies enable you to control the flow of routing information between the network the protocols and the unified routing table on your system a Route policies are classified as follows mport policies import routing information from what RIP learns from a router neighbor to the unified routing table You can also import routing information from Open Shortest Path First OSPF E amp xport policies send information from the routing table to RIP and RIP routers which controls what is going out on the wire to the RIP domain You can also export from the routing table to OSPF m The system tracks policies that you define in both RIP and OSPF so the indexes that are assigned to your policies may have gaps for example if you have RIP policies 1 and 2 and OSPF policies 3 6 the next policy that is available for RIP or OSPF is 7 Fields in the IP RIP Policy Summary Display Field Description Action Action for the route accept or reject Index Index number of the poli
95. interface is available for communications up or unavailable down 32 bit number that uses the same format and representation as an IP address The subnet mask determines which bits in the IP address are interpreted as the network number the subnetwork number and the host number Each IP address bit that corresponds to a 1 in the subnet mask is in the network subnetwork part of the address Each IP address bit that corresponds to a 0 is in the host part of the IP address Type of interface VLAN based VLAN or router port based port Index number of the IP VLAN that is associated with the IP interface Maximum advertisement interval between ICMP router discovery advertisements in seconds Minimum advertisement interval between ICMP router discovery advertisements in seconds Length of time that ICMP router discovery advertisements are held valid State of the IP interface It indicates whether the interface is available for communications up or unavailable down a Logical port number of the IP interface if the Type field displays port a VLAN index number that is associated with the IP interface if the Type field displays VLAN 402 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP IP Interface Detail Example 3500 Select menu option ip interface detail Select IP interfaces ll all 1 1 IP routing is disabled Index 1 Index 1 Index 1 IP address Subnet mask State Type ID 158 101 3121 259 220 9002
96. is needed a lt n gt Unknown packet type a To interrupt the command press Enter Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Host name or Host name or IP address of the m A valid host 0 0 0 0 IP address destination to which you want to name trace a route a IP address IP Trace Route Example Select menu option ip traceRoute Enter host name IP address 0 0 0 0 158 101 101 40 Press Enter key to interrupt Traceroute to 158 101 101 40 30 hops max 28 bytes packet 1 158 101 117 254 9ms 22 ms 5 ms 2 158 101 112 254 8 ms 22 ms 8 ms 3 1586 701 9 22 7 ms 22 ms 7 ms 4 158 101 101 40 7 ms 23 ms 6 ms 480 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP ip advancedTraceRoute J 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Traces a route to a host with one or more of the advanced traceRoute options Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip advancedT Important Considerations a When you specify a host name the host name and its associated IP address must be configured on a network name server Also you must add the IP address on the name server to the list of name server addresses that are associated with the network domain name See ip dns domainName earlier in this chapter for more information a To interrupt the command press Enter Options Possible Prompt Description Values Default Host name or Host name or IP address of the
97. is set 9300 m The module maintains the accumulated totals since power on a After you disconnect from a module on which you set a baseline the baseline is disabled You must reconnect to that module and use the module baseline requestedstate option to reenable the baseline 134 CHAPTER 4 MODULE ENVIRONMENT module baseline Enables or disables a baseline requestedState Valid Minimum Abbreviation 3500 mo ba req v 9000 9400 Important Considerations a When you reenable a baseline the counters return to the values that 3900 have accumulated since the most recent baseline that you set 9300 a Disabling a baseline returns the counters to the total accumulated values since the last power on a After you disconnect from a module on which you set a baseline the baseline is disabled You must reconnect to that module and use the module baseline requestedstate option to reenable the baseline Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Baseline Whether you want to enable or m enabled disabled disable the baseline disabled module redundancy 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 module redundancy 135 Establishes a fault tolerant environment for your CoreBuilder 9000 system Valid Minimum Abbreviation mo red Important Considerations a You must be using a CoreBuilder 9000 8 slot or 16 slot chassis ma The Redundancy option appears on the module menu if you have one or two switch fabric modules installed If
98. it in a one step process mw On the CoreBuilder 9000 loading a filter from another host is a two step process You must first download the packet filter source file to the Enterprise Management Engine EME using TFTP then connect to the Layer 3 module then enter this bridge packetFilter load command The syntax of the EME download command is download module lt slot subslot gt filter lt IP address gt lt filename gt You must use TFTP to download on the CoreBuilder 9000 FIP does not work When you enter bridge packetFilter load the CoreBuilder 9000 does not prompt you for any options Instead the module simply looks for the downloaded filter on the EME If it finds it it loads it If it does not find it it prints the message Filter not found a TFP or FIP hosts may place restrictions on which files and pathnames are valid See your host administrator or host documentation for TFTP and FTP information m bridge packetFilter load verifies the syntax of the filter If the syntax is correct it stores the filter into non volatile memory If the syntax is incorrect you are prompted to enter the built in editor so that you can fix the filter 380 CHAPTER 15 PACKET FILTERS Options 3500 Prompt Description Possible Values Default Host IP IP address of the machine from Any valid IP address current IP address which you want to transfer the address filter File Path and file name of the filter m fora list of path
99. limits and priorities to the packets that are associated with one or more of your classifiers A classifier has no effect until you associate it with a control The system provides predefined classifiers and controls that are suitable for many configurations or you can define your own classifiers apply controls to the classifiers and then decide whether to use RSVP For more information about QoS and RSVP see the Implementation Guide for your system For the CoreBuilder 9000 the commands in this chapter apply only to Layer 3 switching modules 690 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP Menu Structure The commands that you can use depend on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardware options that are configured for your system The following diagram shows the complete list of commands for all systems See the checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter for whether your system supports the command Top Level Menu system module management ethernet fddi bridge ip ipx appletalk gos snmp analyzer log script logout disconnect classifier gt control _ qos menu classifier menu ldap gt rsvp bandwidth excessTagging statistics _ summary detail define modify remove control menu summary detail define modify remove Idap menu
100. linkStatus Boolean value indicating the current state of the physical ink status for this port either enabled or disabled macAddress MAC address of this port multiCollisions noRxBuffers portLabel portState portType reqFlowControl reqPortMode requestedState rxByteRate rxBytes rxDiscards rxErrs rxFrameRate rxFrames Number of times that multiple collisions were detected on this port Number of frames that were discarded because no buffer space was available User defined label name The maximum length of the string is 32 characters including the null terminator Current software operational state of this port Possible values are on line and off line Specific description of this port s type Values for each port type 10 100BASE TX RJ 45 100BASE FX SC LOOOBASE SX SC LOOOBASE LX SC If autonegotiation is disabled a configurable parameter that sets the flow control option on the port If autonegotiation is enabled flow control values are ignored If autonegotiation is disabled a configurable parameter that sets the port mode on Ethernet ports that have port mode options If autonegotiation is enabled port mode values are ignored Configurable parameter that enables or disables this port The default is enabled Average number of bytes received per second by this port during the most recent sampling period Number of bytes received by this port including framing characters
101. mask you want to add to the area address range class on address range class Advertise Whether to advertise area ay yes y range range 536 v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip ospf areas modifyRange CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH FIRST OSPF For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Modifies an OSPF area range Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o a modifyr Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Area Index number of the area that m Valid area index contains the range that you number want to modify a fora list of selectable indexes IPaddress of Existing range that you want to Up to range modify in the form of an IP 255 255 255 255 address IP address Range in the form of an IP Up to Current value address 255 255 255 255 Subnet Subnet mask of the range that Variable based on Current value mask you want to modify address range class Advertise Whether to advertise the area w y yes Current value range range a no IP OSPF Areas Modify Range Example Select area 1 2 1 Enter IP address of range to modify 3 3 3 1 Enter IP address Enter subnet mask Advertise this area range 343 3 L 4 2 2 272 255 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 yes no yes y ip ospf areas removeRange 537 ip ospf areas For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only removeRange Removes an OSPF area range vV 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation A 9000 ip o a remover 9400
102. maximum routing table size On extended memory systems this is 4 200 000 ip ospf stubDefaultMetric v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 display ip ospf stubDefaultMetric display 571 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays the stub default metric value for an area border router Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o stu di Important Considerations a The stub default metric value determines if the router generates the default route into the stub areas of the network This value applies to area border routers ABRs that have attached stub areas If a stub default metric is not defined the router does not advertise a default route into the attached stub area a By default the stub default metric is not defined Field in the IP OSPF Stub Default Metric Display Field Description Stub default Currently defined OSPF stub default metric metric 572 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf stubDefaultMetric define J 3500 y 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Defines the stub default metric value for an OSPF area border router Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o stu de Important Considerations a The stub default metric value determines if the router generates the default route into the stub areas of the network This value applies to area border routers ABRs that have attached stub areas If a stub default met
103. message notifies you of the success or failure of your save as in the following examples System NV data successfully stored on host 158 101 112 34 Saving system transfer timed out Error I O error while writing nonvolatile data Do you wish to retry the save using the same parameters n y yl To save the data as proposed enter y If you enter n the NV data is not saved and the previous menu appears The text of the failure message depends on the problem that the system encountered while it saved the NV data At the end of a successful save the system display returns to the previous menu 110 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system nvData v 3500 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 restore Restores the NV data that was previously saved to a file Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy nv r Important Considerations a Before you attempt to restore the data to a system that has a different system ID be aware that the following types of NV data may cause problems when they are restored a Management IP addresses defined in IP interface configurations are saved as NV data and restored To avoid duplicate IP address problems you may need to change the IP address of defined interfaces before you connect the restored system to the network a Statically configured Ethernet addresses are saved as NV data Verify that you have no duplicate addresses when you restore the NV data Options Prompt Description Pos
104. metric v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Modifies the metric or cost of an existing DVMRP tunnel Valid Minimum Configuration ipmdtm Important Consideration a When you first define a tunnel the system automatically assigns the value 1 as the metric or cost of the tunnel which is different from the interface metric Use this command to modify the metric value on any existing tunnel Options Prompt Definition Possible Values Default tunnel Index number of the existing AvalidDVMRP DVMRP tunnel on which you tunnel index want to modify the metric number a fora list of selectable tunnel index numbers metric DVMRP cost for the tunnel 1 32 1 factory This value affects the shape of default or the IP multicast spanning tree when there are multiple paths to the same downstream destination The lower cost path is chosen first current value ip multicast dvmrp routeDisplay v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip multicast dvmrp routeDisplay 517 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays IP multicast route information that your system has learned from using the Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DVMRP The system uses this information to forward IP multicast traffic that it receives Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipmdr Fields in the IP Multicast DVMRP Route Display Field Descripti
105. more information Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interfaces Index number of the a Oneormore Current value interfaces to which you interface want to assign a broadcast indexes address L all Not applicable if you have for a list of more than one interface selectable interface indexes Broadcast Broadcast address that A valid address Current address address per you want to assign to an interface interface 412 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP ip interface directedBroadcast v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Specifies whether the forwarding of a directed broadcast all 1s in the host portion of the address is enabled or disabled for a specified interface A directed broadcast is a packet that is sent to a specific network or series of networks Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip i di Important Considerations a You define the directed broadcast state on a per interface basis a When the state is enabled and the system determines that the destination is different from the interface that is receiving the directed broadcast the system uses the broadcast address that is defined for this interface to forward the directed broadcast a You can disable the forwarding of a directed broadcast if security is an issue a By default the directed broadcast state is enabled Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default
106. must be configured for the same port mode If the port speeds differ the link does not come up If the duplex modes differ link errors occur Gigabit Ethernet ports do not support mode options The value all refers only to ports that support port mode options If you change to full duplex mode on the port a message indicates that collision detection will be disabled unless you configure the connected device to the same duplex mode Disable autonegotiation on any port on which you are setting a specific port mode 10 100BASE TX supports the following modes and speeds a 10 Mbps full duplex mode a 10 Mbps half duplex mode a 100 Mbps full duplex mode a 100 Mbps half duplex mode 100BASE FX supports the following modes and speeds a 100 Mbps full duplex mode a 100 Mbps half duplex mode 214 CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET PORTS Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Port Ports for which you want to a Asingle port change the portMode values A range of ports a all a to display a port summary Port mode Speed and duplex mode for See Important 10half setting each of the ports that you Considerations 10 100BASE TX selected earlier in this section 100half 100BASE FX Procedure 1 To change the port speed or duplex mode for 10 100BASE TX ports or the duplex mode for 100BASE FX ports enter ethernet portMode 2 At the prompt for example 1 241a111 enter the ports whose portMode values you wa
107. n y n Enter y yes or n no at the prompt If you respond n the Time menu appears If you respond y the system displays the following 1 First Sunday in April to last Sunday in October North America 2 Last Sunday in March to last Sunday in October Europe parts of Asia 3 Last Sunday in October to last Sunday in March Parts of Australia 4 Last Sunday in October to the Sunday on after March 15th New Zealand parts of Australia 5 Enter a start and an end dates for the current year Select daylight saving time option 1 5 1 The format for option 5 is ccyy mm ssThh mm ss Example 1999 05 20T12 30 34 3 Enter a daylight saving time option system nvData save v 3500 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 system nvData save 107 Stores nonvolatile NV data on a server The CoreBuilder 3500 uses the Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP or File Transfer protocol FTP to transfer the files to the host depending on the setting for the system fileTransfer option The SuperStack II Switch 3900 Switch 9300 and the CoreBuilder 9400 use TFTP to transfer files Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy nv s Important Considerations TFTP To store NV data you must first create two files on the TFTP server before you send the data a Control file Use any filename that is meaningful to you Example ctrlfile a NV data file Use the control filename plus the nvd extension Example ctrifile nvd When t
108. network a Service policies control the services in the service table and those that the router advertises a Novell defines several different service types using specific numbers for the server advertising the service You can change the Novell service type when you modify a SAP policy Some of the most common service types are 0x0004 File Server 0x0005 Job Server 0x0007 Print Server 0x0009 Archive Server Ox000A Job Queue 0x0047 Advertising Print Server 0x0098 NetWare Access Server For a complete list of Novell service types consult your Novell documentation Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Policy Index number of the policy you m 1 1 if only one want to modify a FRG View alist policy of selectable policies Service Origin of the service to which w Static All Origin this policy applies This a SAP parameter is valid only if the policy Type is set to Export a All 646 CHAPTER 20 IPX Prompt Description Possible Values Default Service Type Number for the type of service m 0x1 Oxfffff All that the server performs a All Enter up to 6 hex characters For example 0x4 file server For more details consult your Novell documentation Server Name of the server providing Server name All Name the services a All IPX Address IPX network address of the a 0x0 Oxfffffffe All network where the server a All resides Node 6 byte MAC address of the Anode address All Address rout
109. number E all a fora list of selectable indexes DVMRP Whether DVMRP mode is a enabled disabled factory mode enabled or disabled disabled default or current value 508 CHAPTER 18 IP MULTICAST ip multicast dvmrp interface metric v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Modifies the DVMRP metric on an interface for which DVMRP is enabled Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipmd im Important Considerations a Use this command if you want to modify the metric value of 1 that the system assigns to an interface when you define it even if DVMRP is not yet enabled a The metric affects the shape of the IP multicast spanning tree when there are multiple paths to the same downstream destination The lower cost path is the preferred path Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interface Index number of the a Avalid IP interface index routing interface for number which you want to gt modify the default a for a list of selectable index numbers metric metric DVMRP cost for the a 1 32 1 factory interface default or current value ip multicast dvmrp tunnels summary v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip multicast dvmrp tunnels summary 509 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Summaries key information about DVMRP tunnels that you have configured in your system Tunnels enable IP multicast spannin
110. number that m Any interface is associated with the VLAN selectable index VLAN index number E all a fora list of selectable indexes STP state Whether you want to ignore the STP w disabled disabled state for the VLAN index a enabled Bridge VLAN STP Mode Example 3500 selection VID ports name al 1 13 Default 2 2 e e N IP1 Select VLAN interface index es 1 2 all 2 Ignore STP state for VLAN index 2 disabled enabled disabled enabled 366 CHAPTER 14 VIRTUAL LANs VLANs bridge vlan vlanAwareMode v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only For compatibility purposes allows the system to observe previous VLAN resource usage and tagged frame ingress rules for CoreBuilder 3500 serial port upgrades from Release 1 2 0 to 2 1 0 or 3 0 0 or CoreBuilder 9000 upgrades from Release 2 0 0 to 3 0 0 Valid Minimum Abbreviation bvv Important Considerations a Use this command only if you upgrade your system and the system reports an error after reaching the VLAN resource limit during a power up with a serial port console connection During the upgrade the difference in resource usage and modes of tagging could cause the later release to use more VLAN resources than did the earlier release thereby causing a decrease in the total number of allowable VLANs m If the system reaches the VLAN resource limit during the upgrade it displays an error message to i
111. of MIB information differ depending on the SNMP management method that you choose In addition you can configure an SNMP agent to send traps to an SNMP manager to report significant events Access to system information through SNMP is controlled by community strings You can use either an in band or an out of band IP interface to manage the system with SNMP This chapter provides guidelines and other key information about how to set up SNMP in your system To configure SNMP for system management with SNMP Assign an IP address to either the system processor out of band Ethernet port or an in band Ethernet port Set the destination IP address to which the traps are forwarded by the system agent For more information about setting up SNMP see the Implementation Guide for your system To set community strings snmp authentication_trap and snmp extensions on a CoreBuilder 9000 Enterprise Switch see the CoreBuilder 9000 Enterprise Management Engine User Guide You can access the Remote Monitoring RMON capabilities of the CoreBuilder 3500 through SNMP applications such as Transcend Network Control Services software 190 CHAPTER 6 SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL SNMP Menu Structure The commands that you can use depend on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardware options that are configured for your system The following diagram shows the complete list of commands for
112. of default predefined controls selectable values gos control define 711 Prompt Description Possible Values Default Control name Name that you assign to the a Unique name Default Best Rate limit type Service level Loss eligible Excess packet service Excess loss eligible control Predefined names are as follows a Default Best Effort for control 1 a Background for control 2 a Business Critical for control 3 a Controlled Load for control 4 Type of rate limit none no rate limit a receivePort a rate limit on the specified ports aggregate the bandwidth for all ports chosen for the associated classifier For flow classifiers only Service level for the conforming packets a transmit priority that corresponds to a transmit queue Drop causes the system to drop all traffic on all ports that are associated with the classifier and control Whether conforming packets are loss eligible A loss eligible packet can be dropped if the transmit queue for which it is destined exceeds its threshold For receivePort or aggregate rate limit types the service level for excess packets packets that exceed the rate limit For receivePort or aggregate rate limit types whether excess packets are loss eligible with up to 32 characters Use around any string with embedded spaces Use to enter an empty string for a list of selection criteria none recei
113. often indicates a faulty station on the FDDI ring or a dirty FDDI connector a You can use this command to configure the same setting on multiple ports simultaneously When you specify multiple port numbers the system prompts you to choose the setting and then applies it to all of the ports Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Ports One or more FDDI station w Any of the ports for which you want available to set the mac ports on the frameErrorThreshold installed FDDI modules a all frameErrorThreshold Time value set to 0 4294967295 655 value determine when the microseconds system generates a MAC condition report because too many frame errors have occurred 238 CHAPTER 8 FIBER DISTRIBUTED DATA INTERFACE FDDI fddi mac notCopiedThreshold VY 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Sets the timing when the system generates a MAC condition report because too many frames could not be copied Valid Minimum Abbreviation fdmn Important Considerations a Not copied frames occur when there is no buffer space available in the station which in turn indicates congestion in the station a You can use this command to configure the same setting on multiple ports simultaneously When you specify multiple port numbers the system prompts you to choose the setting and then applies it to all of the ports Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Ports One or more FDDI station m Any of the A ports
114. one of the password levels for the Administration Console There are three levels of password for the Administration Console Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy co p Important Considerations a The Administration Console supports three levels of access a One for only browsing or viewing reaa a One for configuring network parameters write a One for full system administration administer a When you log on for the first time press Return or Enter at the password prompt because the initial passwords that are stored in the nonvolatile memory of the system are null for all access levels a To change passwords you must enter the Console at the administer access level m The system does not display the password in the field as you type a Set a password for each access level that you want to configure Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Access level Level of access for the person m read read logging on to the system at Aig a administer Password Text string typed by the person m Astringofup logging on to 32 case sensitive characters a Enter for a null password 76 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system console v 3500 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 screenHeight Changes the Administration Console s screen height to increase or decrease the space available for displaying information Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy co sc Important Considerations a The setting controls the way that the
115. only Defines m direct sta rip protocols from which protocol the route en a Sta static originated rip Source address Source router from which the Any valid IP 0 0 0 0 all route was learned Not address applicable to the following a Import policies a Export polices that define direct as the Origin Protocol Route address Route IP address Not applicable Any valid IP 0 0 0 0 all to export policies that define address direct as the Origin Protocol Route subnet Subnet mask for the route for Any valid subnet 0 0 0 0 all mask example 255 255 0 0 Not mask applicable to export policies that define direct as the Origin Protocol IP interfaces Index number of the interface for w Valid interface all factory which you want to define a index default or routing policy Only applicable all current when specifying direct asthe value origin protocol when defining an fora list of export policy selectable indexes Policy action Accept or reject the route accept accept a reject Metric For accept conditions only 0 65535 with or 0 which adjustment increases or decreases the without options does not converted route metric by the change the specified value Options metric add subtract multiply metric by value divide metric by value modulo remainder of division operation as integer ip ospf policy define 595 Prompt Description Possible Values Default ASE type Type of external
116. or range of days and time See Table 7 for a complete listing of input time type options Enter the starting day and or time Enter the ending day and or time 10 gos control define 717 Enter the classifiers that are subject to this control The system displays the available classifiers in parentheses If you select aggregate as the rate limit type or if you said yes to the drop TCP connection packets option only flow classifiers appear in parentheses QoS Control Define Example 3500 This example shows a control for a nonflow classifier Because the control has a rate limit of none the system does not prompt you for information that applies to the other rate limit types Select menu option qos control define Enter control number 5 50 5 Enter control name definetest Enter rate limit typ none receivePort aggregate none Enter service for conforming packets high best low drop best Are conforming packets loss eligible yes no no Select IEEE 802 1p tag to apply to forwarded frames Tag 0 7 none none Drop packets used to establish a TCP connection yes no no Set start and end time for the control yes no no yes ter input time type specific daily dayoftheweek everydayoftheweek weekdays kends everyweekdays everyweekends specific weekdays ter the Qos control starting time hh mm 09 00 ter the Qos control ending time hh mm 17 00 5
117. parameters and their definitions Recommendations for Entering Commands gt Conventions 23 a Procedure Numbered steps walk you through complex commands a Example Examples show the interactive display when the system provides additional useful information Before you enter any command 3Com recommends that you Examine the system menu carefully for the full command string Consult the documentation for the valid minimum abbreviation for the command string If you are unfamiliar with a particular system always enter the entire command even though the system accepts abbreviated commands If you abbreviate commands you may make errors or omissions that have undesirable consequences For example on the CoreBuilder 9000 to list all addresses for a port you use the bridge port address list all command If you mistakenly enter bridge port address all the system interprets it as an abbreviated version of the bridge port address flushAll command which flushes the entire address table for the port and does not request that you confirm the command Conventions Table 2 and Table 3 list icon and text conventions that are used throughout this guide Table 2 Notice Icons Icon Notice Type Description D gt Information note nformation that describes important features or instructions or potential damage to an application system or f Caution nformation that alerts you to potential loss of data device
118. per trunk The 6 port SAS 3 port DAS FDDI Layer 3 supports 3 trunk groups In SAS mode the trunks can contain up to 6 ports In DAS mode the trunks can contain up to 3 ports a The FGA24 switch fabric module supports up to 4 trunk groups with up to 6 ports per trunk and the FGA24T switch fabric module supports up to 12 trunk groups with up to 6 ports per trunk The GAY cannot support 12 trunk groups because there are not enough ports on this module 3500 Supports up to 4 trunk groups with up to 8 ports per trunk 3900 Supports up to 4 trunk groups with up to 6 ports per trunk 9300 and 9400 a Supports up to 12 trunk groups with up to 6 ports per trunk a all Prompt Description Possible Values Default Mode Operating mode for a a 100half 100full for Fast Current 10 100 Ethernet trunk Ethernet mode a 10half 10full 100half 100full for platforms that support 10 Mbps Ethernet Flow control Flow control setting fora on Current Gigabit Gigabit Ethernet trunk off value Ethernet only m rxOn a txOn Trunk name Name of the trunk a Maximum 32 Current x alphanumeric characters trunk name Use quotation marks around any string with a for a list of selectable embedded spaces trunk names TCMP Trunk Control Message a enabled enabled Protocol TCMP Performs disabled factory the following functions A default or current a Detects and corrects TCMP state trunks that
119. ping 682 removing interfaces 669 routes 672 673 RTMP statistics 684 source socket verification 681 ZIP statistics 685 zones 677 678 applying controls to classifiers 713 areas 531 to 537 ARP Address Resolution Protocol cache 171 deleting cache entries 170 deleting dynamic cache entries 172 displaying cache 168 flushing all entries 171 flushing dynamic entries 172 remove 170 static cache entry 169 ARP cache 428 to 433 ASCll based editor and scripts 124 ATM switch 30 autonegotiation Ethernet ports 212 774 INDEX backplane ports interface module 31 backup saving NV data 107 bandwidth QoS displaying 733 modifying 734 bandwidth RSVP 725 728 baseline setting current 133 baud rate serial port 94 97 baud setting 95 best service level 711 blocking ignoring STP 365 BOOTP Boot Protocol as UDP service 442 hop count 442 relay threshold 446 bridge ports adding MAC addresses 294 defining VLANs 345 352 deleting VLANs 363 listing MAC addresses 293 modifying VLANs 355 360 VLAN summary 339 342 bridge wide parameters allOpen or allClosed VLAN mode 364 bulletin board service 768 burst size QoS control 712 burst advancedPing option 476 C cast types for QoS classifiers 695 718 changing VLANs 355 360 channels management and data 31 chassis management architecture 33 power management 33 checksums AppleTalk 680 Class of Service 267 Class of Service CoS 267 classifiers QoS applying controls to 713 def
120. prompted for the route subnet mask after the route address regardless of whether you specify the wildcard route address of 0 0 0 0 For more information about the default route and routing policies see the CoreBuilder 3500 Implementation Guide or the CoreBuilder 9000 Implementation Guide 466 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Policy type Type of policy import import m export Origin Which protocol advertises the w directory static protocols route for export policies only atic rip a ospf m all Source address Router s IP address a A valid IP address 0 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 0 m all Route address Associated route IP address A valid IP address 0 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 0 m all Route subnet Subnet mask for the route for A valid mask Based on mask example 255 255 0 0 route IP interfaces Index number of the interface One or more all or indexes for which you want to selectable previous define a routing policy interface indexes entry if applicable m all a fora list of selectable interface indexes Policy action Whether to accept or reject the m accept accept route m reject Metric For accept conditions only 0 16 with or 0 which adjustment increase or decrease in the without options does not converted route metric by the change specified value Options the metric add subtract multiple metric by value use new metric as divisor modulus remain
121. q Configure layer 3 address n y y n Configure per port tagging n y yl y Enter port 3 5 tag type none 802 10 none none Enter port 6 8 tag type none 802 10 none 802 190 Enter port 9 tag type none 802 10 none Enter VLAN Name IP1 352 CHAPTER 14 VIRTUAL LANs VLANs bridge vlan define 3900 9300 9400 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 9000 Layer 2 i gt Creates a port based VLAN on standalone systems or the CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 2 modules When you configure a port based VLAN you assign a VLAN ID VID a set of bridge ports and optionally IEEE 802 1Q tagging For details about this command on the CoreBuilder 3500 and CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 modules see bridge vlan define 3500 9000 Layer 3 earlier in this chapter Valid Minimum Abbreviation b v def Important Considerations On the SuperStack II Switch 3900 or 9300 you can define a maximum of 127 port based VLANs on a single system By default all ports are defined to be part of the default VLAN which always uses a VID of 1 and the name Default as of Release 3 0 0 If you delete the default VLAN you can redefine it with VID 1 only You cannot delete a VLAN that has an IP interface associated with it The VID is used as the IEEE 802 1Q tag for a port if tagging is enabled On the CoreBuilder 9000 the list of ports includes the front panel ports and both backplane ports even though onl
122. range 0 65535 65535 65535 Enter another filter yes no no n 700 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP Nonflow Classifier Procedure To accept the default or existing values that appear in brackets press Return 1 Enter a classifier number in the range of from 400 through 498 Numbers 401 through 407 are predefined nonflow classifiers with applied controls numbers 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 and 490 are predefined nonflow classifiers without controls If you have not removed any of the predefined nonflow classifiers you need to remove them before you can define another nonflow classifier With the default classifier there is a limit of 16 predefined nonflow classifiers Enter the classifier name a unique name of up to 32 characters long Enter a cast type For a nonflow classifier the options are unicast multicast broadcast and all 4 Enter one or any protocols The options are TCP IP IP IPX Appletalk any Or custom 5 If you choose custom enter the protocol type ethernet or DSAP SSAP a For ethernet type enter the hexidecimal value a ForDSAP SSAP type enter the DSAP and SSAP hexidecimal values 6 Enter one or all IEEE 802 1p tags Specify any combination of values in the range of from 0 through 7 or all QoS Classifier Define Example Nonflow Classifier Select menu option qos classifier define Enter classifier number 1 498 481 Enter classifier na
123. range that is associated with the seed interface Seed interfaces only User defined default AppleTalk zone name Clients that have not been configured to use a particular zone use the default zone name Seed interfaces only First AppleTalk zone that is associated with the interface You are then prompted to enter up to 15 additional zone names Seed interfaces only Index number of the VLAN that you want to associate with the AppleTalk interface When the system prompts you for a VLAN interface index it indicates the available VLANs that you can associate with a new AppleTalk interface Number of minutes that you want to bring down the AppleTalk interface after you change zone information This prompt appears only when you modify the zone information that is associated with the interface 1 65279 1 65279 Up to 32 ASCII characters a Up to 32 ASCII characters a q to quit specifying zone names and move on to the VLAN interface index prompt a Available valid VLAN index number a fora list of selectable indexes 1 120 minutes Current value Current value Current value Current value Current value appletalk interface remove 669 appletalk interface For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only remove Removes an existing AppleTalk interface V 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation v 9000 spe 9400 Important Considerations 3900 a You can specify a single inte
124. reboot the system enter y yes and implement the new trunk information or to return to the previous menu enter n no Entering n no cancels the trunk changes The system reports that it is unable to continue with the trunk configuration Bridge Trunk Modify Example 9000 Select menu option bridge trunk modify Select trunk index 1 3 Selectable trunks selection ports name 1 7 8 12 trunkl 2 1 2 4 19 trunk2 3 3 14 17 18 trunk3 Select trunk index 1 3 2 Fast Ethernet Select ports 1 2 5 6 15 16 19 all 1 2 19 1 2 Enter trunk name trunk2 Enter TCMP state disabled enabled enabled The configuration of the ports will be modified Are you sure you want to reboot the system n y y 318 CHAPTER 11 TRUNKS bridge trunk remove v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 Removes a previously defined trunk You can remove one or more trunks with this command Valid Minimum Abbreviation btr Important Considerations a The number of trunk groups and the number of ports within a trunk group depend on your system See the Options table However because each Gigabit Ethernet module uses an internal trunk resource towards the limit of four Gigabit Ethernet only keep in mind how many trunk resources you have when you remove trunks For example if you have a trunk with two Gigabit Ethernet ports which consolidates two Gigabit trunk resources into one as well as three other trun
125. redirect message back to the originator of the frame indicating the better gateway to use in the future a It routes the frame to the gateway a ICMP redirect can be set on a per interface basis a For better performance or if you have applications that ignore ICMP redirects disable the ability of the interface to send ICMP redirects a If you have two interfaces that belong to virtual LANs VLANs that share a given port and you want to completely disable ICMP redirects for that port disable the redirects for each interface that shares that port If you disable it for only one interface and enable it for the other you may not get the performance improvement that you want 414 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interfaces Index number of the interfaces m One or more Current to which you want to enable or selectable value disable the transmission of an interface indexes ICMP redirect to the sender of all a frame i Not applicable if you have for a list of selectable more than one interface f interface indexes ICMP redirect Whether you want to a enabled disabled or state implement ICMP redirect state current i a disabled on an interface The system value prompts you for a state for each interface ip interface icmpRouterDiscovery v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Enables or disab
126. reject Do not advertise in external router or all LSAs any RIP static route from routers specified router s Export Policy Conditions for Direct Routes Protocol Interface Action Description Direct Specified accept Advertise in external LSAs all direct non OSPF routes off of specified interfaces interface or All non OSPF interfaces Direct Specified reject Do not specify in external LSAs any direct non OSPF routes off of specified interfaces interface or All non OSPF interfaces IP OSPF Policy Modify Example Select menu option Select policy 1 Enter origin protocols Enter source address Enter rout Enter ASE type address Enter policy action Enter administrative weight typel type2 ip ospf policy modify LILTS 0 0 0 0 accept reject Enter metric adjustment 1 dir sta rip all rip 0 0 0 30543 accept 0 65535 0 1 16 typel 602 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH FIRST OSPF ip ospf policy remove v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Deletes OSPF routing policies Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o por Important Considerations m The system assigns an index number to each policy that you define This index number takes into account all route policies that are set on the system Routing Information Protocol RIP and OSPF so the assigned index may be higher than you expect a When you remove a policy the associated
127. resort The SMT Standard recommended value is 7 a The lerCutoff value is expressed as an exponent such as 1 x 10 10 A healthy network has an LER exponent between 1 x 10 19 and 1 x 10 19 a You can use this command to configure the same setting on multiple ports simultaneously When you specify multiple port numbers the system prompts you to choose the setting and then applies it to all of the ports Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Ports One or more FDDI station ports m Any of the for which you want to set the available ports port lerCutoff on the installed FDDI modules m all lerCutoff Link error rate estimate at 4 15 4 which a link connection is disabled 244 CHAPTER 8 FIBER DISTRIBUTED DATA INTERFACE FDDI fddi port label Assigns a unique name to your FDDI ports for easy identification of the devices that are attached to them for example workstation server FDDI Y 3500 backbone Port labels serve as useful reference points and as an accurate Y Y 9000 means of identifying your ports for management 2300 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 3900 fd po label 9300 Important Consideration a You can use this command to configure the same setting on multiple ports simultaneously When you specify multiple port numbers the system prompts you to choose the setting and then applies it to all of the ports Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Ports One or more FDDI station ports
128. rxMcastLimitType 3900 9300 9400 and 9000 L2 rxNoDestDiscs 3900 9300 9400 and 9000 L2 rxNoRescrDiscs 3500 and 9000 L3 rxOtherDiscs 3900 9300 9400 9000 L2 9000 L3 rxOtherDiscards 3500 rxSameSegDiscs rxSecurityDiscs SRRingNumber 3500 and 9000 L3 Total number of frames that this bridge port received from its segment However unlike the rxFrames field in the Ethernet display which counts all frames this field does not count frames in error Thus this value may be lower than the value shown in the rxFrames field in the Ethernet display Number of frames discarded due to customer filters on the rxinternal path Number of multicast frames that were discarded when rxMcastLimit was exceeded Amount of time that rxMcastLimit has been exceeded Number of frames that were discarded due to a user defined packet filter on the receive multicast path of this port Configurable parameter that limits the rate of multicast frames that are forwarded from a bridge port The default value is 0 which means there is no limit To configure this option see bridge port multicastLimit in this chapter Configurable parameter that selects the type of frames on which the multicast limit operates both multicast and broadcast frames or broadcast frames only The default value is McastBcast To configure this option see bridge port multicastLimit in this chapter Number of frames that this po
129. source node address of all zeroes 00 00 00 00 00 00 means that the route is connected directly to the router Action Whether this router accepts or rejects a route that matches the policy Metric Value the system uses to increase or decrease a route metric This parameter is valid only if the Policy Action is set to Accept Weight Metric value of this policy ipx rip policy define v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ipx rip policy define 633 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Define a RIP Routing Information Protocol policy Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx ripd Important Considerations a Every router maintains a table of current routing information in a routing table a Routing protocols receive or advertise routes from the network a Routing Policies control the flow of routing information between the network the protocols and the routing table manager Prompt Description Possible Values Default Type Type of the policy Import a Import Import apply the policy to received routes or Export apply the a AEXPON policy to advertised routes Route Origin of the route to which a Dir All Origin this policy applies This a Static parameter is valid only if the policy Type is set to Export m RIP a All Route Route to which this policy a Ox1 Offfffffe All address applies a All IP interfaces One or more IP interfaces on One or more IP All this router associated with the inte
130. state The current value is shown in the priority field of the bridge port detail display Valid Minimum Abbreviation b po stpp Important Considerations m You can use this command to configure the same setting on multiple ports simultaneously When you specify multiple port numbers the system prompts you to choose the setting and then applies it to all of the ports a Port priority is a 1 octet value written in hexidecimal format a fall ports in a bridge have the same priority value then the port number is used as the determining factor a f your configuration is successful the previous menu appears If the configuration is not successful the system notifies you that your changes failed and you can try to reenter your changes Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Bridge ports Bridge ports for which you A valid bridge port want to set the STP port number priority STP priority One octet value that 0x0 Oxff where 0x80 determines which port is the Ox precedes a designated port when there is hexidecimal value more than one port attached to the same LAN 292 CHAPTER 10 BRIDGE PORT PARAMETERS bridge port gvrpState v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Allows the port to participate in sending and receiving GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP updates which can help you simplify the management of IEEE 802 1Q VLAN configura
131. that was received from the specific server system sntp define 117 system sntp define Specifies up to three Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP server IP addresses VZ 3500 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation s 9400 sy snt de 3900 Important Considerations 9300 a You can define up to three SNTP servers for backup purposes a Your system provides the SNTP client a The system indicates that it is adding the IP address to the SNTP database The server is assigned an index number Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Server s IP IP address of a server to add to Valid IP address address the SNTP database except 0 0 0 0 118 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system sntp modify Replaces an existing Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP server IP address y 3500 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 sy snt m 3900 Options J 9300 Prompt Description Possible Values Default Index Index number of the server that Available Server you want to modify index number Server IP address of each configured Valid IP address address server system sntp remove 119 system sntp remove Removes a Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP server IP address from the SNTP server list Y 3500 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 sy snt r 3900 Options y 9300 Prompt Description Possible Values Default Index Index number of the server Available Server that you want to remove index number Server IP address of
132. the checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter for whether your system supports the command Top Level Menu ip menu ospf menu system interface areas module route defaultRouteMetric management arp interface ethernet multicast linkStateData fddi dns neighbors bridge vrrp routerID ip udpHelper partition WH _ ipx routing stubDefaultMetric _ appletalk ospf virtualLinks qos rip policy snmp ping statistics analyzer advancedPing log traceRoute script advancedTraceRoute logout statistics disconnect areas menu display defineArea modifyArea removeArea addRange modifyRange removeRange defaultRouteMetric menu display define remove interface menu summary detail statistics mode priority arealD cost delay hello retransmit dead password linkStateData menu databaseSummary router network summary external neighbors menu display add remove partition menu display modify stubDefaultMetric menu display define remove virtualLinks menu summary detail statistics define remove arealD router delay hello retransmit dead password policy menu summary detail define modify remove ip ospf areas display 531 ip ospf areas display For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays a list of existing OSPF areas v 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviati
133. the classifier m all a fora list of selectable values The name that is associated with the classifier number that you specified is shown in brackets 704 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP To modify the cast type enter a new cast type For a flow classifier the options are unicast multicast and all To accept the default or current value that appears in brackets press Enter To modify the IP protocol type enter another IP protocol type TCP UDP or all 5 To modify the current source IP address enter a new source IP address 6 To modify the current source IP address mask enter a new source IP 10 11 12 13 address mask To modify the current destination IP address enter a new destination IP address To modify the current destination IP address mask enter a new destination IP address mask To modify the TCP or UDP source port range enter the new start of the TCP or UDP port range in the range of from 0 through 65535 Limit the source port range as much as possible Enter the new end of the TCP or UDP source port range in the range of from o through 65535 To modify the TCP or UDP destination port range enter the new start of the TCP or UDP port range in the range of from 0 through 65535 Enter the new end of the TCP or UDP destination port range in the range of from 0 through 65535 Limit the destination port range as much as possible At the prompt specify w
134. the interface are configured with a different dead interval than this router This prevents the router from becoming a neighbor with these other routers This statistic is incremented under the following circumstances a When an OSPF Hello packet is received and the dead interval it defines is different from the dead interval configured on the OSPF interface Number of Hello packet interval mismatches that were detected Number of subnet mask mismatches that were detected Number of packet checksum errors since interface has come up Number of database description packets that were received from valid OSPF neighbors nterpretation a A non zero value is OK Database description packets are sent when forming adjacencies with valid neighbors A large number of receiveDD packets in a network whose configuration has not changed could indicate that adjacencies are being torn down and re established This statistic is incremented under the following circumstances a When an OSPF database descriptor packet from a valid OSPF neighbor is received Number of unknown LSAs that were received 546 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH FIRST OSPF Field Description receiveError receiveHello receiveLsAck receiveLSR Number of general receive errors Interpretation A non zero value indicates that OSPF packets are being dropped and that this could be causing routing problems This statistic is incremented under the follow
135. the system is in allClosed mode that is associated with a specified MAC address Valid Minimum Abbreviation b po a fi Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default MAC MAC address canonical A valid MAC address address that you want to find address on the system bridge port address flushAll v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 Removes all static and dynamic MAC addresses from the bridge ports that you select Static MAC addresses are those that you specified using the bridge port address add option Dynamic MAC addresses are those that the bridge learned automatically Valid Minimum Abbreviation b po a flusha Important Consideration a f the bridge is power cycled reset or rebooted the address table is automatically flushed Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN Index numbers of the VLANs to m One or more interface which the desired bridge ports valid VLAN indexes belong indexes only if in all allClosed z mode a fora list of selectable VLANs Bridge ports Bridge ports for which you a One or more want to remove all addresses valid bridge port numbers a to display a port summary 298 CHAPTER 10 BRIDGE PORT PARAMETERS bridge port address flushDynamic v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 Removes all dynamic MAC addresses from the bridge ports that you select Dynamic MAC addresses are those that the bridge learned by receiving and processing pa
136. to follow is a hexadecimal number The acceptable range is 0x0 Oxff To configure port priority values see bridge port stpPriority in this chapter The port priority is included in the port ID and is considered the most significant portion because it is the first factor that determines if a port is to be the designated port when more than one bridge port is attached to the same LAN The lowest priority is chosen If all ports in a bridge have the same priority then the port number is used as the determining factor Number of frames that the bridge port discarded due to a user defined packet filter on its receive all path Number of frames that the bridge port discarded because the receiving bridge port was not in the forwarding state Number of frames that the bridge port discarded because of internal bridge system errors such as hardware and software address table discrepancies Total number of frames all types that the bridge port received and forwarded to another bridge port Number of multicast frames that the bridge port received and forwarded to another bridge port Number of unicast frames the bridge port received and forwarded to another bridge port Number of unicast frames that the port received and flooded to one or more ports Field Description rxFrames rxinternalFilters 3500 and 9000 L3 rxMcastExcDiscs rxMcastExceeds rxMcastFilters 3500 and 9000 L3 rxMcastLimit
137. to make the protocol more robust m f the probability of losing configuration messages is low lengthen the time to lower the overhead of the algorithm a The recommended Hello time is 2 seconds a Although the possible range for stpHelloTime is 1 10 the available range is constrained by the following inequality stpMaxAge gt 2 x stpHelloTime 1 second Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default STP hello time Time in seconds between 1 10seconds 2 factory configuration messages from default or the root bridge current value 264 CHAPTER 9 BRIDGE WIDE PARAMETERS bridge spanningTree stpForwardDelay v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 Sets the amount of time that the bridge spends in each of the listening and learning states if it is the root bridge The current value is shown in the bridgeFwdDelay field of the bridge display Valid Minimum Abbreviation b sp stpf Important Considerations This value temporarily prevents a bridge from starting to forward data packets to and from a link until news of a topology change has spread to all parts of a bridged network The recommended and default value is 15 seconds Setting the value too low can result in temporary loops while STP reconfigures the topology Setting the value too high can lead to a longer wait while STP reconfigures the topology If the configuration was not successful the system notifies you that your changes failed
138. trusted IP client Mask Subnet mask that is associated with the trusted IP address 78 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system console security define v 3500 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 AN Gives a client trusted access to your system by adding the client IP address and subnet mask to an access list Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy co se de Important Considerations CAUTION Be careful when you define trusted IP clients If you specify an incorrect IP address or subnetwork address when you define a trusted IP client you can affect your own ability to access the system See the Implementation Guide for your system a Configure trusted IP clients in this order a Define the trusted IP clients using system console security define a Display the list of configured trusted IP clients using system console security display to verify that you have configured the trusted IP clients correctly a Enable the system to verify trusted IP clients using system console security access a You can configure up to five IP addresses or five subnetwork addresses as trusted IP clients a An IP address or subnetwork address can be used to access the system only if it is on the trusted IP client list a Use the subnet mask to allow trusted access to all addresses on a particular subnetwork Examples The IP address 158 99 112 219 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 allows trusted access to all addresses on the 158 99 112 subnetwork The IP
139. using the default ping options Valid Minimum Abbreviation m ip p Important Considerations a This tool is useful for network testing performance measurement and management It uses the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP echo facility to send ICMP echo request packets to the IP destination that you specify a f you need to change the default ping options use management ip advancedPing a You can either supply the host name or IP address as part of the command string or you can supply the information at the prompt a When you specify a host name the host name and its associated IP address must be configured on a network name server Also you must add the IP address on the name server to the list of name server addresses that are associated with the network domain name See ip dns define in Chapter 16 for more information a When the system sends an echo request packet to an IP station using ping the system waits for an ICMP echo reply packet Possible responses a f the host is reachable the system displays information about the ICMP reply packets and the response time to the ping a f the host does not respond the system displays the ICMP packet information and this message Host is Not Responding YOU may not have configured your gateway IP address a If the packets cannot reach the host the system displays the ICMP packet information and this message Host is Unreachable A host is unreachable when the
140. v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Defines a control for one or more existing classifiers Valid Minimum Abbreviation q co def Important Considerations a A control can assign multiple rate limit values and an IEEE 802 1p priority tag value to the packets that are associated with one or more classifiers ma The system prompts you according to the rate limit type that you select You can only use one rate limit type none receivePort or aggregate per control For a type of receivePort or aggregate you can specify multiple rate limit values for groups of ports or individual ports The aggregate rate limit type can only be applied to flow classifiers a Loss eligible packets are conforming packets that are discarded instead of queued when transmit queues back up beyond a threshold You can specify whether conforming packets as well as nonconforming excess packets are loss eligible when you define the control Marking packets loss eligible is useful for an intelligent discard of traffic in a congestion situation Nonconforming excess packets are packets that exceed the specified rate limit a With the QoS timer control you can configure QoS control sessions with starting and ending times similar to using a VCR Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Control Number of the control a 5 50 1 factory number Control numbers 1 4 are a fora list
141. v 9000 9400 3900 9300 summary ip ospf linkStateData summary 561 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays summary link state advertisements LSAs in the link state database Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipols Important Consideration a To view link state database information OSPF must be active enabled Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Area ID Area ID in the form Valid area ID 0 0 0 0 factory n n n n where 0 lt n lt 255 default or that corresponds to the OSPF current value area for which you want to view summary LSA information Area mask Subnet mask of the OSPF area Valid area mask 0 0 0 0 factory for which you want to view default or summary LSA information current value LSID Link State ID For type 3 0 0 0 0 factory a For type 3 summary LSAs summary LSAs default or this is the IP address of the ae current value destination network a For type 4 summary LSAs e Tek this is the autonomous yahd aiat ID system boundary router s Router ID in the form of an IP address LSID mask Link State ID bit mask Link State ID bit 0 0 0 0 factory Example 255 0 0 0 mask default or current value 562 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF Fields in the IP OSPF Link State Data Summary Display Field Description LS Age LS Seq LSID Metric Network mask Router ID Time in seconds since LSA was originate
142. violate trunk configuration rules a Ensures orderly activation and deactivation of trunk ports 316 CHAPTER 11 TRUNKS Procedure To modify trunk information for a bridge follow these steps Enter the trunk index number or to display the selectable trunks enter The system shows the media type for the trunk for example Fast Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet Or FDDI At the prompt enter the ports that you want to be part of the trunk or to display a port summary enter The maximum number of ports per trunk is 8 for the CoreBuilder 3500 and the CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 modules To change the 10 100 operating mode enter the new operating mode or to display information about the selectable values enter For Fast Ethernet you can select 100 Mbps running in half duplex or full duplex mode All ports in the trunk are set to the specified operating mode To change the flow control setting for a Gigabit Ethernet trunk only enter a new flow control setting To change the name of the trunk enter the new name or to view information on how to specify a trunk name enter The name can have up to 32 characters Use quotation marks around any character string that has embedded spaces Enter the TCMP state The system default is enabled If you modified the port information the system displays a message to inform you that the port configuration will change and then displays a reboot prompt At the system prompt to
143. you only have one switch fabric module installed in the chassis the status of the second switch fabric slot is Not Responding Options Possible Prompt Description Values Default Display Module redundancy configuration and status reset Whether the module s nonRedundant non redundant indicator resets 136 CHAPTER 4 MODULE ENVIRONMENT module name Assigns or changes an easily recognizable and unique module name to help you manage it 3500 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 mo nam 3900 Important Considerations 9300 a Assign an easily recognizable and unique name for each module For example name the module according to its physical location such as CB9000 ENGLAB1 a Use quotation marks around any string with embedded spaces a The new module name appears the next time that you display the configuration Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default New name New or changed name forthe w Astringofup Current system module to 32 and module case sensitive name characters a for information about the naming guidelines module time 137 module time Displays the module s current date and time 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation J 9000 mo ti 9400 Important Considerations 3900 m You cannot change the system time from the module You can only 9300 change the date and time from the Enterprise Management Engine EME a The CoreBuilder 9000 module s internal clock is initialized wh
144. 0 9400 3900 9300 bridge packetFilter portGroup display 387 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays a port group Valid Minimum Abbreviation b pa p di Important Consideration a Possible values for port groups n depend on the number of user defined port groups on the system Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Select port Number ofthe port group to 1 n Current port ae display a fora list of group valid port groups Sample Bridge Packet Filter Port Group Display 3500 Select menu option bridge packetFilter portGroup display Select port group 1 2 2 2 Port Group 2 Sales Port 5 Port 6 388 CHAPTER 15 PACKET FILTERS bridge packetFilter portGroup create v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Creates a port group Valid Minimum Abbreviation bpape Important Considerations m You can create up to 32 port groups one for each bit in the 32 bit port group mask a The portGroup create command only creates port group associations You must create and assign a filter to a port group to affect filtering See bridge packetFilter create portGroup and bridge packetFilter assign earlier in this chapter a Possible values for bridge ports n depend on the number of bridge ports on the system Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Select port Mask
145. 0 Y 9300 Important Considerations a For the CoreBuilder 3500 only the system prompts you for an IP address and subnet mask As a result you can display only a subset of routes instead of all routes To see all entries in the table simply press Enter at these prompts a The first line in the output the status line indicates whether IP routing is enabled a For the CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 module it also indicates whether Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP router discovery is enabled on the system a For the CoreBuilder 3500 IP interface options such as ICMP router discovery appear under ip interface detail earlier in this chapter and are set on a per interface basis Options 3500 only Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP address IP address and its a A valid IP address 0 0 0 0 corresponding subnet mask for 0 0 0 0 displays all entries which to display only those routes that match the bits set in it Subnet mask Subnet mask for the A valid subnet mask ofa Current specified IP address specified IP address value for which to display only those routes that match the bits setin it Fields in the IP Route Display Field Description Destination Subnet mask Metric Gateway Status TTL IP address of the destination network subnetwork or host This field can also identify a default route which the system uses to forward packets that do not match any other routing table
146. 00 3900 9300 ip multicast dvmrp tunnels define 511 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Defines one end point of a DVMRP tunnel The other tunnel end point lies on an IP multicast routing interface on a different system and subnetwork One or more unicast routers lie between these tunnel end points Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipmdtd Important Considerations IP multicast tunnels are not required in all networks Configure a tunnel only if you need to have IP multicast traffic forwarded through one or more routers that do not understand IP multicast protocols and would therefore filter IP multicast packets Because IP multicast packets are encapsulated in unicast format at the tunnel entrance point the interim routers in the tunnel forward the packets onward toward the other tunnel exit point Think of an IP multicast tunnel end point as being layered on top of a regular DVMRP routing interface Therefore before you can define a multicast tunnel end point in your system you must first define at least one IP virtual LAN VLAN define at least one IP interface and enable DVMRP on the interface The remote tunnel end point must lie on a different system and subnetwork You must define the tunnel on both end points that is on both the local system and the remote system even though you specify the address of the remote interface in the local system When you define a tunnel with local and re
147. 00 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 interface TTL ip multicast igmp interface TTL 523 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Modifies the time to live TTL threshold of a given routing interface The interface compares the TTL value in each IP multicast packet against its TTL threshold If the packet TTL is greater than the threshold TTL the interface decrements the packet TTL by 1 and forwards the packet provided that no other restrictions exist Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipmiit Important Considerations a Because IGMP is enabled by factory default the system assigns a TTL threshold value of 1 as soon as you create an IP interface a This TTL threshold affects IP multicast packets only Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interfaces Index numbers of the a Oneor more interfaces for which you want valid interface to modify the TTL threshold index numbers a fora list of selectable indexes TTL Value you want to assign to 0 255 1 factory threshold the specified interfaces default or current value 524 CHAPTER 18 IP MULTICAST ip multicast igmp For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only snooping Enables or disables the system s ability to understand the Internet Group J Management Protocol IGMP and snoop on IGMP packets to determine 3500 if IP multicast group members exist downstream from routing interfaces v 9000 and therefore if the system should
148. 00 4 0 Down Port 1 ARP proxy Broadcast address Directed broadcast ICMP redirect enabled 259 299 2 597299 enabled enabled ICMP router discovery Preference MaxAdviInterval MinAdvInterval Holdtime disabled n a n a n a n a ip interface define 3500 9000 Layer 3 v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Defines an IP interface Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip i def Important Considerations a When you define an IP interface you must decide whether you want the interface to use router port based routing or VLAN based routing a Router port based routing directs the system to attempt to route the frame before it attempts to bridge the frame When you set up a router port based IP interface the system automatically creates a virtual LAN VLAN for the interface The system assigns the next available VLAN index number to this VLAN a VLAN based routing directs the system to attempt to bridge the frame before it attempts to route the frame When you set up a VLAN based IP interface you must first define a VLAN and select IP as a protocol supported by the VLAN as described in Chapter 14 If you define a router port you do not have to define the VLAN first the corresponding single port VLAN is automatically defined a Port based routing uses allClosed mode VLAN based routing uses either allClosed or allOpen mode If you attempt to set up a router port based IP inter
149. 00 protocols and the routing tables on your system a There are two classes of routing policies a Import policies Control which OSPF non self originated external routes are stored in the routing table OSPF import policies control only what the local router uses They do not affect the propagation of non self originated external routes to other routers a Export policies Used on OSPF boundary routers to control which self originated external routing updates are placed in the link state database for propagation over the network In this way export policies govern what other routers learn with regard to the local boundary router s self originated information ma The system tracks policies that you define in both OSPF and Routing Information Protocol RIP so the indexes that are assigned to your policies may have gaps For example if you have OSPF policies 1 and 2 and RIP policies 3 through 6 the next policy is 7 Fields in the IP OSPF Policy Summary Display Field Description Action Action for the route accept or reject Idx Index number of the interface Protocol Protocol for example OSPF Route Source network Source Source router Type Whether the policy is an import or export policy Wt Administrative weight range of values 1 through 16 ip ospf policy detail v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip ospf policy detail 591 Displays summary and detailed information about OSPF routing policies Valid Min
150. 1 847 262 6000 3Com Facts Automated Fax Service Access by Digital Modem ISDN users can dial in to the 3Com BBS using a digital modem for fast access up to 64 Kbps To access the 3Com BBS using ISDN call the following number 1 847 262 6000 The 3Com Facts automated fax service provides technical articles diagrams and troubleshooting instructions on 3Com products 24 hours a day 7 days a week Call 3Com Facts using your Touch Tone telephone 1 408 727 7021 Support from Your Network Supplier If you require additional assistance contact your network supplier Many suppliers are authorized 3Com service partners who are qualified to provide a variety of services including network planning installation hardware maintenance application training and support services When you contact your network supplier for assistance have the following information ready a Product model name part number and serial number a A list of system hardware and software including revision levels a Diagnostic error messages a Details about recent configuration changes if applicable If you are unable to contact your network supplier see the following section on how to contact 3Com Support from 3Com If you are unable to obtain assistance from the 3Com online technical resources or from your network supplier 3Com offers technical telephone support services To find out more about your support options call the 3Com technical telep
151. 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP ip arp flushDynamic For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Deletes all dynamic learned entries from the Address Resolution Protocol y 3500 ARP cache y 9000 9400 Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip ar flushD 3900 Y 9300 Important Considerations a To flush all entries static and dynamic see the previous ip arp flushAll option a When you enter the command the system deletes all dynamic entries from the cache immediately You are not prompted to confirm the deletion v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 ip arp age For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Sets the age time for dynamic Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache entries Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip ara Important Considerations a The age time determines how long in minutes that the dynamic entries remain in the ARP cache before they are removed a By default the system flushes the entry from the cache when it reaches the age time a A value of o indicates no age time and the entry remains in the table until you remove it with the ip arp remove option or flush the ARP cache with the appropriate flush option Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Age time Time that dynamic 1 1440 minutes 15 factory entries remain in the 0 to disable aging default or ARP cache g ging current value 434 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP ip a
152. 2 ttl time to live advancedTraceRoute 480 example 185 type of module 69 U UDP User Datagram Protocol Helper overlapped IP interfaces 447 to 449 port and IP forwarding addresses 444 UDP Helper BOOTP 442 UDP port number advancedTraceRoute 480 traceRoute 182 UDP statistics 187 483 unspecified protocol type 348 updates RIP triggered 631 SAP triggered 639 URL 767 user configuration information 116 V values 252 default 41 entering in command strings 41 vi editor 124 VID VLAN ID 341 range 347 352 virtual links OSPF 574 to 589 VLAN interface 356 VLAN interface index 356 360 specifying for Ignore STP mode 365 used to delete VLANs 363 VLANs bridge VLAN commands modify 316 VLANs virtual LANs 337 defining for Layer 2 devices 352 defining for Layer 3 devices 345 detail information and statistics 341 displaying summary information 338 errors 406 interface index 401 607 modifying Layer 2 devices 360 modifying Layer 3 devices 355 358 removing 363 setting allOpen or allClosed mode 364 setting Ignore STP mode 365 trunking 346 VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol defining 492 enabling or disabling 499 introduction 485 modifying 495 removing 495 498 Ww wait advancedPing option 475 advancedTraceRoute option 480 Web Management access 71 72 applications 30 World Wide Web WWW 767 Z ZIP Zone Information Protocol 685 zones 677 678
153. 2 1 0 0 0 0 VIDX VRID priorityZeroTx invalidPktTypeRx addrListErrors unknownAuthType 2 1 0 0 0 VIDX VRID authTypeErrors 2 1 0 492 CHAPTER 17 VIRTUAL ROUTER REDUNDANCY VRRP v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip vrrp define Primary Routers Backup Routers Address Mode For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Defines a virtual router on the system Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip v def Important Considerations a Authentication passwords can be up to eight alphanumeric characters a You can define one Primary router per VLAN a Primary routers own the IP addresses that you associate with a virtual router a When you define a Primary virtual router the possible VLANs that you can select are the IP VLANs on the router that have no virtual routers configured a The virtual router ID VRID must be unique across all locally attached LAN segments and unique for the local router a When you define a Primary virtual router you cannot use the VRID of a virtual router that is already defined on the system or the VRID of a neighboring VRRP router a Backup routers back up the primary router of a specified virtual router and assume Master state responsibilities for the virtual router should the primary router fail a When you define a Backup virtual router you cannot use the VRID of a primary router that is defined on the system You cannot define a Primary and Backup VRRP router for the same vi
154. 2 snap is available for both the CoreBuilder 3500 system and the CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 switching modules For the CoreBuilder 9000 keep the following considerations in mind a When you define a VLAN on a switching module and other switching modules in the system also define this VLAN you must define the VLAN on both the switching module and on the switch fabric module When you define the VLAN on the Layer 3 switching module you must specify any front panel ports in the VLAN as well as the module s backplane port The specified backplane port must also be tagged if you have more than one VLAN and plan to communicate with VLANs on other modules on the CoreBuilder 9000 through the switch fabric module When you define the VLAN on the switch fabric module you must specify which switch fabric module backplane port is connected to the module backplane port The switch fabric module backplane port must also be tagged if you have more than one VLAN When you use a Layer 3 switching module to establish routing between VLANs on other switching modules you can configure the backplane port of the Layer 3 switching module as part of the VLANs and then define a routing interface for each VLAN One VLAN equals one network or subnetwork a For configurations that include FDDI ports if you plan for your VLAN to include FDDI DAS ports you must specify the lowest numbered port in the DAS pair when defining the ports in the VLAN See Chapter 8
155. 3500 9000 9000 9400 3900 9300 Layer Layer Commands 2 3 Part VI Routing Protocols Ch 16 IP p interface summary JY y S S S ip interface detail S YA ip interface define S T A L KL ip interface modify S SJ SL E A ip interface remove S S S S S ip interface arpProxy S S ip interface broadcastAddress S vA ip interface directedBroadcast S S ip interface icmpRedirect S S ip interface icmpRouterDiscovery S S ip interface statistics S Z ip route display S Sf S Zo A ip route static S S S S S ip route remove JY JY JY S S ip route flush S S A L xL ip route default S SJ LS SJ LS ip route noDefault S Ss SL J S ip route findRoute S Ss SL Ss SL ip arp display TA So if Mv ip arp static JY JY Sf JY JY ip arp remove JY JY LL vv ip arp flushAll S SJ SL 7 E G 54 CHAPTER 2 COMMAND SUMMARY Table 6 Command Summary continued 3500 9000 9000 9400 3900 9300 Layer Layer Commands 2 3 ip arp flushDynamic Vv Vv Vv ip arp age S ip arp statistics ip dns display ip dns domainName ip dns define ip dns modify ip dns remove VNNNNN AN SOW NN NN SN SS SONOS SON SS ip dns nslookup ip udpHelper display ip udpHelper define ip udpHelper remove ip udpHelper hopCountLimit ip udpHelper threshold ip udpHelper interface first ip udpHelper interface even ip udpHelper interface sequential ip routing A A ip rip display S S ip rip mode S N ip rip compatibilityMode ip rip cost ip rip pois
156. 400 Valid Minimum Abbreviation b ad 3900 9300 Important Considerations a The bridge address table size on CoreBuilder switches is 32K that is the bridge can store a maximum of 32768 addresses m The range of valid values for this parameter is between 7 and 7 plus the address table size Setting the address threshold to the highest possible value prevents the system from generating the trap because the value can never be reached Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default address Threshold for the total number 1 32769 29491 factory threshold of addresses that are known default or on this bridge current value 258 CHAPTER 9 BRIDGE WIDE PARAMETERS bridge agingTime v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 Sets the maximum period in seconds for aging out deleting dynamic addresses from the address table Valid Minimum Abbreviation b ag Important Considerations a Use this parameter to configure the system to age addresses in a timely manner without increasing packet flooding a To disable the bridge aging function set the value to 0 a This parameter does not affect statically configured addresses Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default aging time Maximum period in a 0 to disable 300 seconds for aging out dynamically learned forwarding information 10 1 000 000 seconds bridge spanningTree v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 stpState Enables or disable
157. 5 defined on the VLAN a for list of Fields in the IP VRRP Summary Display selectable IDs Field Description Address IP address of the virtual router Auth Whether the VRRP router uses simple password authentication If password authentication is configured the VRRP router discards any VRRP packet that does not have a matching authentication string Error Last type of invalid advertisement received or none Interval Time in seconds between virtual router advertisements The Master router advertises all IP addresses that are associated with the virtual router Backup routers on the VRID consider the Master down if two advertisement intervals pass with no advertisement from the Master Ports Ports that are defined on the virtual LAN VLAN and that are associated with the virtual router Preempt Whether a backup virtual router preempts a Master with a lower priority Yes allows preemption no prohibits it Field Description Pri Priority of the the virtual router Represented by a value from 0 through 255 Used in Master router election Value of 255 indicates that the router owns the IP addresses that are associated with the virtual router 0 indicates that the current Master has stopped participating in VRRP State Current state of the VRRP router One of the following a Master In this state the router is the active forwarding router for all IP addresses that are associated with the virtual router
158. 5279 network is associated with the seed range interface Seed interfaces only End of End of the network range that 1 65279 Value specified network is associated with the seed for start of range interface Seed interfaces only network range or current value 666 CHAPTER 21 APPLETALK Prompt Description Possible Values Default Default User defined default AppleTalk Up to 32 ASCII zone name zone name Clients that have characters not been configured to use a particular zone use the default zone name Seed interfaces only Zone name AppleTalk zone that is a Upto 32 ASCII associated with the interface characters You are prompted to enter up f to 15 additional zone names q a Seed interfaces only Sree oe names VLAN Index number of the VLAN that w Available valid interface you want to associate with the VLAN index index AppleTalk interface number a fora list of available VLAN indexes appletalk interface v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 modify For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Modifies an existing AppleTalk interface Valid Minimum Abbreviation ap im Important Considerations ma An AppleTalk interface defines the relationship between a virtual LAN VLAN and an AppleTalk network a Every AppleTalk interface has one VLAN associated with it a For routing purposes you define a range of network numbers that are assigned to the AppleTalk interface Exam
159. 538 to 540 interfaces 541 to 556 link state database 557 to 563 memory partition 569 570 neighbors 564 to 566 router ID 567 routing policies 590 to 602 soft restarts 570 statistics 603 stub default metrics 571 to 573 virtual links 574 to 589 out of band management 149 overlapped IP interfaces 447 to 449 P PACE Access Ethernet 217 PACE Interactive Access Ethernet 218 packet filter displaying contents 372 373 374 376 377 379 382 384 filter id 371 processing paths 382 packet size advancedPing 475 advancedTraceRoute 480 packets tagging of excess 736 737 password access levels 35 configuring 75 IP RIP 2 interface 459 percentage rate limit 712 per reservation bandwidth 725 728 ping 177 advanced ping example 181 example 178 ping command possible responses 473 pings AppleTalk 682 policing options RSVP 725 728 policy IPX RIP define 633 modify 635 summary 632 637 IPX SAP define 642 detail 641 modify 645 remove 648 summary 640 policy based services 689 port label 241 port group adding ports 391 port number setting the traceRoute 182 480 port ranges for QoS flow classifiers 696 701 703 port speed 95 terminal port setting the 93 96 port state Ethernet 220 ports autonegotiation Ethernet 212 defining for VLANs 346 defining in trunks 310 315 duplex mode Ethernet 212 213 enabling and disabling Ethernet 220 flow control Ethernet 215 labels Ethernet 219 maximum number in group 391 monitori
160. 6 ip interface summary 398 ip interface detail 400 ip interface define 3500 9000 Layer 3 403 ip interface define 3900 9300 9400 9000 Layer 2 406 ip interface modify 407 ip interface remove 408 ip interface arpProxy 409 ip interface broadcastAddress 411 ip interface directedBroadcast 412 ip interface icmpRedirect 413 ip interface icmpRouterDiscovery 415 f f ip interface statistics 418 ip route display 420 ip route static 422 ip route remove 423 ip route flush 424 ip route default 425 ip route noDefault 426 ip route findRoute 427 ip arp display 428 ip arp static 429 ip arp remove 430 ip arp flushAll 431 ip arp flushDynamic 432 iparpage 433 ip arp statistics 434 ip dns display 436 ip dns domainName 437 ip dns define 438 ip dns modify 439 ip dns remove 440 ip dns nslookup 441 ip udpHelper display 442 ip udpHelper define 443 ip udpHelper remove 444 ip udpHelper hopCountLimit 445 ip udpHelper threshold 446 ip udpHelper interface first 447 ip udpHelper interface even 448 ip udpHelper interface sequential 449 ip routing 450 ip rip display 451 ip rip mode 453 ip rip compatibilityMode 455 ip rip cost 456 ip rip poisonReverse 457 ip rip routeAggregation Mode 458 ip rip password 459 ip rip addAdvertisement 460 ip rip remove Advertisement 462 ip rip policy summary 463 ip rip policy detail 464 ip rip policy define 465 ip rip policy modify 469 ip rip policy remove 471 ip rip statist
161. 900 9300 Displays a summary of FDDI MAC information A summary report displays various FDDI MAC statistics including information about the MAC received and transmitted frames and received and transmitted bytes Valid Minimum Abbreviation fdms Important Consideration a The MAC summary display changes slightly when ports are configured as DAS ports Fields in the FDDI MAC Summary Display Field Description currentPath Path on which this MAC is currently located primary secondary Or isolated downstream MAC address of this MAC s downstream neighbor Errors Sum of errorCount lateCount lostCount and tvxExpiredCount noRxBuffers Number of frames discarded because no buffer space was available port Port numbers assigned to the FDDI module The FDDI port numbers change depending on the configuration of your system rxBytes Number of bytes that this MAC received rxErrors Number of errors that this MAC received rxFrames Number of frames that this MAC received station Unique identifier for the FDDI station smtAddress Address of the MAC that was used for SMT frames txBytes Number of bytes that this MAC transmitted txFrames Number of frames that this MAC transmitted This txQOverflows upstream number does not include MAC frames Number of frames that were discarded because the transmit queue was full MAC address of this MAC s upstream neighbor 234 CHAPTER 8 FIBER DISTRIBUTED DATA INTERFACE FDDI
162. 9000 9000 9400 3900 9300 Layer Layer Commands 2 3 Part VII Traffic Policy Ch 22 Quality of Service and RSVP qos classifier summary qos classifier detail qos classifier define qos classifier modify qos classifier remove qos control summary qos control detail qos control define qos control modify Se i es ORG Se Tk SS qos control remove qos ldap display qos ldap enable qos ldap disable qos rsvp summary qos rsvp detail qos rsvp enable qos rsvp disable qos bandwidth display qos bandwidth modify qos excessTagging display qos excessTagging enable Se SS SN IN Se NS N SSS Sa RN SKN By SSN I ESS qos excessTagging disable Table 6 Command Summary continued 3500 9000 9000 9400 3900 9300 Layer Layer 2 3 Commands qos statistics interval JY WA qos Statistics receive y PA qos statistics transmit S S Part VIII Monitoring Ch 23 Event Log log display S log devices S log services S Ch 24 Roving Analysis analyzer display analyzer add analyzer remove analyzer start VNNNNN Be WN NN SS SSN NN VNQNNNN se OE SS Ae AS Sa oN eS analyzer stop 64 CHAPTER 2 COMMAND SUMMARY SYSTEM LEVEL FUNCTIONS Chapter 3 System Environment Chapter 4 Module Environment oft ts gt SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT This chapter provides guidelines and other key information about how to use system Commands to a Set and modify gen
163. 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays detailed information about one or more QoS classifiers Valid Minimum Abbreviation q cl det Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Classifier Number of the classifier for a Oneormore number which you want detail numbers of information configured classifiers a a a fora list of selectable classifiers Fields in the QoS Classifier Detail Display Field Description 802 1p For nonflow classifiers IEEE 802 1p tag value any combination of priority tag values in the range 0 7 Cast The Cast type for the classifier a Flow classifiers unicast multicast Of all a Nonflow classifiers unicast multicast broadcast Or all Classifier Number of the flow or nonflow classifier a Flow classifiers in the range of 1 399 Note 20 and 23 are predefined a Nonflow classifiers in the range of 400 498 Note 401 407 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 and 490 are predefined but you can modify or remove them Field Description Classifier Filters flow classifiers only Destination Port range flow classifiers only Source Port range flow classifiers only Classifier Installed Flows if flows exist Control Name Protocol Filters address and port patterns Source IP address Source IP address mask a Destination IP address a Destination IP address mask a Transmission Control Protocol TCP o
164. 92 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system baseline Enables or disables a baseline requestedState Valid Minimum Abbreviation Y 3500 sy br 9000 9400 Important Considerations a When you reenable a baseline the counters return to the values that Y 3900 have accumulated since the most recent baseline that you set V 9300 a Disabling a baseline returns the counters to the total accumulated values since the last power up Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default New value Whether youwanttoenableor m enabled enabled disable the baseline a disabled system serialPort terminalSpeed v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 Sets the terminal speed of your system serial port The terminal speed is set by changing the terminal connection port baud rates Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy se t Important Considerations a When you change the terminal port baud rate to something other than 9600 the new setting becomes the new default even after you use the system nvData reset option a You must adjust the baud setting of your terminal or terminal emulator to match your system serial port s baud rate before you can reestablish communication using the terminal port m You can use this command through the terminal serial port or through a Telnet session However if you change the terminal speed while you are in a Telnet session you must reboot the system for the change to take effect Options Prompt Description Possible
165. 9300 Prompt Description Possible Values Default Policy Index number of the policy you m 1 1 if only one want to remove p toviewalit policy of selectable policies 638 CHAPTER 20 IPX v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ipx sap mode For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Selects a Service Advertising Protocol SAP mode that is appropriate for your network Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx sam Important Considerations a SAP provides routers and servers that contain SAP agents with a means of exchanging network service information m The system has three SAP modes a Off The system does not process any incoming SAP packets and does not generate any SAP packets of its own a Passive The system processes all incoming SAP packets and responds to SAP requests but it does not broadcast periodic or triggered SAP updates a Active The system processes all incoming SAP packets responds to explicit requests for routing information and broadcasts periodic and triggered SAP updates Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default SAP mode Whether the system processes a off disabled SAP packets ean factory aup default or active current value ipx sap triggered VY 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Sets the SAP Triggered Update mode which dictates when the IPX protocol broadcasts newly learned SAP serv
166. Command Reference Guide CoreBuilder 3500 CoreBuilder 9000 CoreBuilder 9400 SuperStack Il Switch 3900 SuperStack II Switch 9300 http www 3com com Part No 10013505 Published November 1999 3Com Corporation 5400 Bayfront Plaza Santa Clara California 95052 8145 Copyright 1999 3Com Corporation All rights reserved No part of this documentation may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative work such as translation transformation or adaptation without written permission from 3Com Corporation 3Com Corporation reserves the right to revise this documentation and to make changes in content from time to time without obligation on the part of 3Com Corporation to provide notification of such revision or change 3Com Corporation provides this documentation without warranty term or condition of any kind either implied or expressed including but not limited to the implied warranties terms or conditions of merchantability satisfactory quality and fitness for a particular purpose 3Com may make improvements or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this documentation at any time If there is any software on removable media described in this documentation it is furnished under a license agreement included with the product as a separate document in the hard copy documentation or on the removable media in a directory file named LICENSE TXT or LICENSE TXT If you are un
167. Considerations a For the CoreBuilder 3500 system and CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 modules IGMP commands exist under the ip multicast igmp menu a If no IP multicast group traffic is present on the selected VLAN you see this message No groups exist for this VLAN Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN ID ID number of the VLAN a Avalid VLAN ID 1 Default VLAN for which you want to VID number display group and port for a list of information i selectable VIDs Fields in the Bridge Multicast IGMP Groups Display Field Description VLAN ID ID number of the selected VLAN Group Hexidecimal equivalent of the IP multicast group address shown in the IpAddress column IpAddress IP multicast group address of the traffic that the system or module has observed on the selected VLAN Ports Ports that lead to group members 276 CHAPTER 9 BRIDGE WIDE PARAMETERS bridge multicast igmp For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 2 switching modules only desQuerier Determines whether the system or module is the designated querier for the selected VLAN 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation vV 9400 eer er ae Y 3900 Important Considerations V 9300 m For the CoreBuilder 3500 system and CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 modules IGMP commands exist under the ip multicast igmp menu a f the system or module is not functioning as the querier you see this message Device IS NOT designated querier on VLAN m If t
168. Displays AppleTalk routes that are listed in the system s routing table V 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation v 9000 ates 9400 Important Consideration 3900 a Your system maintains a table of local and remote routes to all 9300 reachable AppleTalk networks The Routing Table Maintenance Protocol RTMP automatically generates the routing table RTMP defines rules for a Information that is contained within each routing table a Exchanging information between routers so that the routers can maintain their routing tables Fields in the AppleTalk Route Display Field Description Distance Distance in hops to the destination network Interface Interface that is used to reach the destination network Network Range Range of numbers that identify a network Next Hop Next hop Internet router to which the packet must be sent State Status of each route One of the following good m suspect a bad a really bad appletalk route flush 673 appletalk route flush For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Deletes all dynamically learned AppleTalk routes from the routing table v 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 ap ee 3900 Important Consideration 9300 a The system deletes all dynamically learned AppleTalk routes immediately after you enter the command You are not prompted to confirm the deletion 674 CHAPTER 21 APPLETALK appletalk aarp For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only
169. Excess loss eligible How rate limit is expressed Rate limit value Type of rate limit none no rate limit a receivePort a rate limit on the specified ports a aggregate the bandwidth for all ports specified for the associated classifier Service level for the conforming packets Drop causes the system to drop all traffic on all ports that are associated with the classifier control Whether conforming packets are loss eligible A loss eligible packet can be dropped if the transmit queue for which it is destined exceeds its threshold For receivePort or aggregate rate limit types service level for excess packet For receivePort or aggregate rate limit types whether excess packets are loss eligible For receivePort or aggregate rate limit types format of the rate limit For receivePort or aggregate rate limit types number of Kbytes sec or a percentage O makes all packets excess packets none receivePort aggregate For a rate limit of receivePort or aggregate high best best effort or low For a rate limit of none high best low or drop y yes n no high best low drop y yes n no KBytes sec percentage 0 65434 KBytes sec 0 100 percent Current rate limit type Current service level Current value Current value Current value KBytes sec 720 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP Prompt Description Possible Values
170. Fails Number of ip datagrams that were discarded because they needed to be fragmented but could not be for example because their Don t Fragment bit was set fragOks Number of IP datagrams that were successfully fragmented inAddrErrors Number of datagrams that the IP station discarded because of an error in the source or destination IP address inDelivers Number of datagrams that the IP station delivered to local IP client protocols inDiscards Number of packet receive discards inHdrErrors Number of datagrams that the IP station discarded because the IP header contained errors inReceived Total number of IP datagrams that were received including those with errors osReceives Number of packets that were received that are destined to higher level protocols such as Telnet DNS TFTP and FTP osTransmits Number of packets that were sent through the router by higher level protocols such as Telnet DNS TFTP and FTP outDiscards Number of packet transmit discards Field Description outNoRoutes Number of datagrams that the IP station discarded because there was no route to the destination outRequests Number of datagrams that local IP client protocols passed to IP for transmission reasmFails Number of packet reassembly failures reasmReqs Number of packet reassembly requests reasmOks Number of successful packet reassemblies rtDiscards Number of packets that were discarded due to system resource errors unkProtos Number of packet
171. For GVRP to function on the port you must enable it on the port as well as the entire bridge To configure GVRP on a port see bridge port gvrpState in this chapter To configure GVRP on the bridge see bridge gvrpState in Chapter 9 284 CHAPTER 10 BRIDGE PORT PARAMETERS Field Description linkState pathCost portNumber portld priority rxAllFilters 3500 and 9000 L3 rxBlockedDiscs 3500 and 9000 L3 rxErrorDiscs rxForwards 3500 and 9000 L3 rxForwardMcasts 3900 9300 9400 and 9000 L2 rxForwardUcasts 3900 9300 9400 and 9000 L2 rxFloodUcasts State of the link up or down that is whether it is available for communication Cost to add to the total path cost when this port is the root port To configure a port s STP cost see bridge port stpCost in this chapter Logical index number that the system assigns to the bridge port which may not correspond with the physical port number depending on your system configuration For example when you define a trunk only the anchor port receives a portNumber As you add and remove logical ports portNumbers are reassigned so that they remain consecutive Port identification which includes the port priority value first 2 digits after Ox and the logical port number last 2 digits Both are shown as hexidecimal values Configurable STP port priority value The default value is 0x80 Ox signifies that the value
172. HAPTER 21 APPLETALK appletalk ping For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Pings an AppleTalk node using the AppleTalk Echo Protocol AEP 3500 g pp g pp v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 a 3900 Options 9300 Prompt Description Possible Values Default Destination AppleTalk node that you want Valid AARP address AARP to test for network connectivity address appletalk statistics ddp v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 appletalk statistics ddp 683 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays AppleTalk Datagram Delivery Protocol DDP statistics Valid Minimum Abbreviation apsd Fields in the AppleTalk DDP Statistics Display Field Description inBcastErrors Number of dropped DDP datagrams for which the system was not their final destination and that were sent to the broadcast MAC address inCsumErrors Number of DDP datagrams that were dropped because of a checksum error inDiscards Number of DDP Datagrams that were discarded during routing inForwards Total number of packets that were forwarded including those with errors inLocals Number of DDP datagrams for which an attempt was made to forward them to their final destination inNoClients Number of DDP datagrams that were dropped for unknown DDP types inNoRoutes Number of DDP datagrams that were dropped for unknown routes inReceives Total number of packets that were received includin
173. IBUTED DATA INTERFACE FDDI Sets the path assignment for MACs Valid Minimum Abbreviation fdmp Important Considerations a The fddiMAC path selections depend on the stationMode configuration DAS or SAS a You can use this command to configure the same setting on multiple ports simultaneously When you specify multiple port numbers the system prompts you to choose the setting and then applies it to all of the ports Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Ports One or more FDDI station ports m Any of the for which you want to set the available ports MAC path on the installed FDDI modules m all MAC path Path assignments for MACs For DAS ports primary primary a secondary a isolated For SAS ports primary isolated fddi port display v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Displays information about FDDI ports including the type path and port label as well as other FDDI port statistics such as error counters Valid Minimum Abbreviation fd pod Fields in the FDDI Port Display Field Description connectState Connect state of this port disabled connecting standby Or active currentPath Path on which this port is currently located ebErrorCond Whether an elasticity buffer error has been detected during the past 2 seconds ebErrorCount Number of elasticity buffer errors that have been detected ctFailCount Number of consecutive times that the link confidence test LCT has failed du
174. IP interface options such as ICMP router discovery appear under ip interface detail and are set ona per interface basis The Type field differs according to platform In the CoreBuilder 3500 which provides port based routing and VLAN based routing the Type field displays whether the IP interface is VLAN based or router port based In all other platforms which provide VLAN based routing the Type field displays whether the IP interface is used for VLAN traffic or for system management The last rightmost field in the display differs according to platform In the CoreBuilder 3500 the ID field displays either the logical port number that is associated with a router port based IP interface or the VLAN interface index number that is associated with the IP interface In all other platforms the VLAN index field displays the VLAN interface index number that is associated with the IP interface Options Prompt Description ip interface summary 399 Possible Values Default Interface index Index number of the IP interface whose summary information you want to display a Oneor more selectable interface indexes m all a fora list of selectable interface indexes Fields in the IP Interface Summary Display Field Description Index Index number of the IP interface whose summary information you want to display IP address IP address of the interface chosen from the Subnet mask State Type
175. IP interfaces Index numbers of the interfaces m One or more Current to which you want to enable or selectable value disable the forwarding of a interface directed broadcast indexes Not applicable if you have more w all than one interface a for a list of selectable interface indexes Directed Whether you want to implement m enabled Current broadcaststate direct broadcast on an interface disabled value The system prompts you for a state for each interface IP Interface Directed Broadcast Example 3500 Select menu option ip interface directedBroadcast Select IP interfaces 1 2 all 2 Interface 2 Enter directed broadcast state disabled nabled enabled v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip interface icmpRedirect For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Enables or disables the transmission of an Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP redirect to the sender of a frame to indicate that there is a better gateway available to handle the frame than this routing interface Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip i icmpre Important Considerations a The software determines whether there is a better path for the frame by determining whether the source interface is the same as the destination interface and whether the frame s sender is on a directly connected network If the software determines that a received frame has a better path available through another gateway a It sends an ICMP
176. IP multicast traffic from occupying unnecessary bandwidth the best device to operate as the querier is the one closest to the source of IP multicast traffic You can disable querying on select devices or manipulate IP addresses with the bridge multicast igmp queryIpAddress command to force this configuration IGMP querying must be disabled on a CoreBuilder 9400 switch if you configure it as a MultiPoint Link Aggregation MPLA core switch For more information about MPLA see the CoreBuilder 9400 Implementation Guide For the CoreBuilder 3500 system and CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 modules IGMP commands exist under the ip multicast igmp menu Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IGMP Whether the system can a enabled enabled factory querying operate as the IGMP querier if a dieabied default or so elected current value bridge multicast igmp querylpAddress 3500 vy 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 2 switching modules only Configures the source address that is inserted in IGMP query packets Valid Minimum Abbreviation b mu i queryi Important Considerations a For the CoreBuilder 9400 and SuperStack II Switch 9300 and 3900 systems you do not need to used this command as long as you have one in band IP interface configured the system uses its IP address as the source IP address of query packets Use this command only if you want the system to use a different source I
177. IP packets and does not generate any RIP packets of its own a Learn The system processes all incoming RIP packets but it does not transmit RIP updates Advertise 3500 and 9000 only The system broadcasts RIP updates but it does not process incoming RIP packets a Enabled 3500 and 9000 only The systems broadcasts RIP updates and processes incoming RIP packets a An advertising router sends a RIP message every 30 seconds with both the IP address and a metric the distance to the destination from that router for each destination Each router through which a RIP packet must travel to reach a destination equals one hop 452 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP Fields in the IP RIP Display Field Description Advertisement Addresses 3500 and 9000 only Compatibility Mode 3500 only Cost 3500 and 9000 only ndex Poison Reverse 3500 and 9000 only RIP 1 Mode RIP 2 Mode Route Aggregate 3500 only List of available advertisement addresses The list is used for RIP 2 updates only if the RIP 1 compatibility mode is enabled RIP 1 always uses advertisement addresses Whether RIP 1 compatibility mode is enabled or disabled by default disabled RIP cost for the interface by default 1 Index number of the interface Whether poison reverse mode is enabled or disabled by default enabled Mode for RIP 1 If you disable RIP 1 the output lists the state as of f Other modes are
178. Interface Define Example Select menu option IPX Address Enter Enter Ticks Enter Enter Frame Format VLAN interface index 4 Oxl Oxfffffffe 1 65534 1 1 Ox Ethernet_II 802 2 Raw_802 3 SNAP 4 Ethernet_ll 802 2 802 2 LLC RAW_802 3 SNAP 802 3_SNAP A selectable VLAN interface to view a list of selectable indexes ipx interface define 45468f30 802 2 4 610 CHAPTER 20 IPX ipx interface modify v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Changes the characteristics of an existing IPX interface Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx im Important Considerations a An IPX interface defines the relationships among an IPX virtual LAN VLAN the IPX router and the IPX network The IPX router has one IPX interface defined for each network that is directly connected to it a When you modify an interface you can change the interface s IPX address ticks format and the associated IPX VLAN index a Unless your network has special requirements for example a need for redundant paths do not change the cost value of 1 that is assigned by default to each interface Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Index Number associated with the interface One or more 1 if only 1 that you want to modify selectable IPX interface interfaces a to view a list of selectable interfaces IPX 4 byte
179. Layer 2 switching modules only qPort Displays the number of the port that receives incoming IGMP queries for the selected VLAN 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation vV 9400 b mu i gp Y 3900 Important Considerations V 9300 m f no query packets have been received within the last five minutes approximately when you enter this command the system responds No queries are heard by the switch a For the CoreBuilder 3500 system and CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 modules IGMP commands exist under the ip multicast igmp menu Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN ID ID number of the VLAN a Avalid VLAN ID 1 Default VLAN for which you want to VID display the port that last received query packets a fora list of selectable VIDs oe tte E E d i gt i gt BRIDGE PORT PARAMETERS This chapter provides guidelines and other key information about how to manage bridge ports in your system This chapter covers bridge port options only For information about other bridge menu options use the Table of Contents to find the appropriate chapter in this Command Reference Guide For more information about configuring bridge ports in your network see the Implementation Guide for your system Menu Structure The commands that you can use depend on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardware options that are configured for your system The following
180. Logical Link Control service description 239 LMA Local Management Application ATM Switch 31 log event 747 logout 126 low service level 711 778 INDEX M MAC Media Access Control addresses adding 294 displaying 293 MAC type for trunk 310 315 management and naming the system 101 136 configuring system access 190 displaying detailed information 153 displaying summary information 151 SNMP community strings 192 Transcend Network Control Services 30 Web Management applications 30 management data channels 31 management ip advancedPing 179 advancedTraceRoute 184 displaying statistics 186 ping 177 statistics 176 tracing a route destination 182 management ip arp defining a static cache entry 169 displaying cache 168 flushing all entries from cache 171 flushing dynamic entries 172 removing cache entries 170 management ip interface defining the IP address 157 displaying summary information 156 modifying 158 removing 159 management ip rip displaying RIP information 173 management ip route default 165 defining a static route 162 deleting default 166 displaying the routing table 160 finding in table 167 flushing learned routes 164 noDefault 166 removing an existing route 163 searching the routing table 167 masks source and destination IP address 695 702 subnet 395 maximum per reservation bandwidth 730 maximum total reservable bandwidth 730 memory partition OSPF 569 570 memory size 69 menu structure 150 menu
181. OSPF boundary routers use Type 1 as default Only applicable to export policies Index Index number of the policy Interface Origin interface only applicable when specifying direct as Origin Protocol Metric Adjustment to the cost metric of routes that match the policy Protocol Origin protocol for export policies only Can also specify a direct Of static route 592 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH FIRST OSPF Field Description Route Source Type Weight Route against which the policy is applied Source router only applicable to export policies that do not specify direct as Origin Protocol Whether the policy is an import or export policy Administrative weight range of values 1 through 16 ip ospf policy define v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip ospf policy define 593 Defines import and export OSPF routing policies Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o po def Important Considerations The system assigns an index number to each policy and takes into account all route policies Routing Information Protocol RIP and OSPF that are set on the system There are certain conditions associated with import and export policies See the OSPF Routing Policies section in the OSPF chapter of your product s Implementation Guide for more information Your system has one unified IP routing table Routing policies allow you to control the flow of information among the network the protocols and the routi
182. Options f pie Prompt Description Possible Values Default Enter Web URL where the Web help Management Help system files installation are located URL 72 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system console Enables or disables access to the Web Management software webAccess Valid Minimum Abbreviation y 3500 sy co w 9000 9400 Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default V 3900 i z 9300 Web Whether remote access to the w enabled enabled management Web Management system is i disabled allowed system console consoleAccess 73 system console Controls remote access via Telnet or modem to the system console consoleAccess Valid Minimum Abbreviation 3500 sy co co 9000 Y 9400 Options J 3900 Prompt Description Possible Values Default V 9300 Console Whether remote access tothe m enabled enabled access system console is allowed y a disabled 74 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system console v 3500 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 ctlKeys Enables or disables the control key combination default Ctrl X that allows you to reboot the system from the Administration Console Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy co ct Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Control keys Whether you want to enable or m enabled enabled disable the reboot control key disabled combination j system console password v 3500 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 system console password 75 Sets
183. P OSPF Specified Specified accept Advertise RIP OSPF static static routeror route mask specified route from all routers specified source router on specified interfaces with or without metric adjustments RIP OSPF Specified all 0 0 0 0 accept Advertise all static router or RIP OSPF static routes from all routers specified router on specified interfaces with or without metric adjustments RIP OSPF Specified Specified reject Do not advertise the static routeror route mask RIP OSPF static specified all routers route on specified interfaces RIP OSPF Specified all reject Do not advertise all static routers or RIP OSPF static routes on all routers specified interfaces Example of Import Policy Select menu option ip rip policy define Enter policy type import export import import Enter source address 0 0 0 0 Enter route address 0 0 0 0 158 101 135 40 Enter route subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Select IP interfaces 1 2 all 1 1 Enter policy action accept reject accept Enter metric adjustment 0 16 0 Enter administrative weight 1 16 1 Example of Export Policy Select menu option ip rip policy define Enter policy type import export import export Enter origin protocols dir sta rip ospf all rip Enter source address 0 0 0 0 Enter route address 0 0 0 0 Select IP interfaces 1 2 all 1 all Enter policy action accept reject accept Enter met
184. P 65535 source port or UDP source port factory range range defaults Specify as small a range OF CUNEN values as possible The start value determines the end value Prompt Description Possible Values Default Start andend For flow classifiers only 0 65535 0 and of TCP or UDP start and end of the TCP 65535 destination or UDP destination port factory port range range defaults or current Specify as small a range as possible The start vaus value determines the end value Additional For flow classifiers only y yes no factory filters additional source default address port destination and port n no patterns information for this classifier Each set of information counts toward the classifier limit Custom For nonflow classifiers m Ethertype protocol type with the custom a DSAP SSAP custom protocol type nonflow classifiers only Custom Hex values for nonflow m Ethertype hex value 0x0 protocol classifiers with the of 0x0 Oxffff hexidecimal custom protocol type a DSAP hex value of value custom 0 x0 Oxff nonflow classifiers only a SSAP hex value of 0x0 Oxff 0x0 802 1p tag For nonflow classifiers Any combination of Current only the IEEE 802 1p priority tag values in value if tag value the range of 0 7 any Procedure Flow Classifier Enter the number of the classifier that you want to modify The current numbers are shown in braces To modify the name enter the new name for
185. P address for query packets If there are no in band IP interfaces configured and you want to enable querying you must enter an IP address with this command a Fora CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 2 switching module to offer itself as a querier you must enter an IP address with this command a For the CoreBuilder 3500 system and CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 modules IGMP commands exist under the ip multicast igmp menu Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IGMP Query Source address that the Any unique IP 0 0 0 0 first in band Source IP system uses in its IGMP address in dotted IP interface index or Address queries decimal format current value 3900 9300 9400 0 0 0 0 or current value 9000 L2 274 CHAPTER 9 BRIDGE WIDE PARAMETERS bridge multicast igmp For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 2 switching modules only vians y IGMP snooping is enabled lists the VLAN IDs of VLANs that are carrying IP multicast traffic 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation vV 9400 ine doe Y 3900 Important Consideration V 9300 m For the CoreBuilder 3500 system and CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 modules IGMP commands exist under the ip multicast igmp menu bridge multicast igmp groups 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 2 switching modules only Displays IP multicast group and associated port information for a selected VLAN Valid Minimum Abbreviation b mu i g Important
186. POA bridge gvrpState WA WA bridge cos enable S V L L bridge cos summary A 4 J J bridge cos modify S A 4 bridge multicast igmp summary y S L A 50 CHAPTER 2 COMMAND SUMMARY Table 6 Command Summary continued 3500 9000 9000 9400 3900 9300 Layer Layer 2 3 Commands bridge multicast igmp snoopMode S v4 J LS bridge multicast igmp queryMode S S J g bridge multicast igmp querylpAddress S S 4 af bridge multicast igmp vlans S S L X bridge multicast igmp groups S WA Sif bridge multicast igmp desQuerier if S TE bridge multicast igmp rPorts S S JS oe bridge multicast igmp qPort S S Ss v Ch 10 Bridge Ports bridge port summary SJ LL SL LLL bridge port detail V 4 L4 LLL bridge port multicastLimit V L4 L4 LLL bridge port stpState V Ls L4 LLL bridge port stpCost V 4 4 4 HV bridge port stpPriority V 4 4 4 4 JG bridge port gvrpState JY JY bridge port address list S S MA MA K bridge port address add V 4 4 LLL bridge port address remove S S WA JY JY J bridge port address find S Sf Soot SF SF bridge port address flushAll V 4 4 4 AV bridge port address flushDynamic J JY S A J 4 Table 6 Command Summary continued 3500 9000 9000 9400 3900 9300 Layer Layer Commands 2 3 Ch 11 Trunks bridge trunk autoMap summary bridge trunk autoMap enable bridge trunk autoMap disable bridge trunk autoMap test AN ON ON NON NN OE NS bridge trunk summary JY vv V L bridge trunk detail Jf L
187. PX 802 3 IPX 802 2 SNAP q odify layer 3 address n y y n odify per port tagging n y yl y Enter port 9 tag type none 802 10 none 802 10 Enter port 11 tag type none 802 10 none 802 19 Enter VLAN Name IP1 IP1 360 CHAPTER 14 VIRTUAL LANs VLANs bridge vlan modify 3900 9300 9400 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 9000 Layer 2 i gt Changes a port based VLAN definition on the indicated system Layer 2 module See Important Considerations for information on when changes take effect To use this command on the CoreBuilder 3500 or CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 modules see the bridge vlan modify 3500 9000 Layer 3 earlier in this chapter Valid Minimum Abbreviation b v modi Important Considerations a You need not reboot the system for the changes to take effect However depending on the number of VLANs that are affected the system may take several minutes to return control to you a f you modify the tagging type of a backplane port on a switching module make sure that you modify the tagging type of the corresponding port on the switch fabric module a f tagging is enabled for a port the software uses the VID as the 802 1Q tag a If you modify the default VLAN you can only change the member ports or the tag status You cannot change the name or the VID a If you modify the tagging for a port shared by another VLAN verify that the new tag type does not co
188. Perform system or module Perform system level or setup and management tasks module level administration such usually a single network as resetting the module or changing administrator passwords Write Perform active network Configure network parameters management such as setting the aging time for a bridge Read Only view system or module Access only display menu items parameters like display summary and detail 36 CHAPTER 1 ADMINISTRATION OVERVIEW Accessing Your You access the Administration Console for your system in one of two System ways a For all systems except the CoreBuilder 9000 Access the Administration Console for the first time at the Administer level and press Return at the password prompt the initial password is null Subsequently every time that you access the Administration Console it prompts you for an access level and password as shown here Select access level read write administer Password The passwords are stored in nonvolatile NV memory You must enter the password correctly before you can continue a For the CoreBuilder 9000 On this system the Enterprise Management Engine EME controls passwords and access levels to manage the chassis and its installed modules To access a module in a CoreBuilder 9000 system follow these steps 1 Log into the EME 2 Access the module that you want to manage using the EME connect command Example To connect to a module in sl
189. Protocol STP and Class of Service CoS Manage trunking of bridge ports Set and display MultiPoint Link Aggregation MPLA parameters Manage resilient links Set bridge parameters for specific bridge ports Manage virtual LANs VLANs Manage packet filtering for port groups Routing ip Set up IP IP multicast and IP Open Shortest Path First OSPF routing ipx Set up IPX routing appletalk Set up AppleTalk routing Password Access Levels 35 Table 4 Types of Commands Associated with Configuration Tasks continued Type of Command Top Level Menus Tasks Quality of Service gos Set up classifiers and controls for management traffic policy based services Monitoring log Set severity levels and services for event logging analyzer Monitor the network using a network analyzer Accessing the Administration Console Password Access Levels Depending on which system you are managing you access the Administration Console in either two steps for the CoreBuilder 9000 or one step for all other systems See Accessing Your System later in this section for details For all systems the Administration Console supports three password levels allowing you to provide different levels of access for a range of users Your access level determines which types of menu commands you can use as described in Table 5 Table 5 Password Access Levels Access Level For users who need to Allows users to Administer
190. RAMETERS Menu Structure 251 bridge display 252 bridge ipFragmentation 255 bridge ipxSnapTranslation 256 bridge addressThreshold 257 bridge agingTime 258 bridge spanningTree stpState 259 bridge spanningTree stpPriority 261 bridge spanningTree stpMaxAge 262 bridge spanningTree stpHelloTime 263 bridge spanningTree stpForwardDelay 264 bridge spanningTree stpGroupAddress 265 bridge gvrpState 266 bridge cos enable 267 bridge cos summary 268 bridge cos modify 269 bridge multicast igmp summary 270 bridge multicast igmp snoopMode 271 bridge multicast igmp queryMode 272 bridge multicast igmp querylpAddress 273 bridge multicast igmp vians 274 bridge multicast igmp groups 275 bridge multicast igmp desQuerier 276 bridge multicast igmp rPorts 277 bridge multicast igmp qPort 278 10 BRIDGE PORT PARAMETERS Menu Structure 279 bridge port summary 280 bridge port detail 283 bridge port multicastLimit 288 bridge port stpState 289 bridge port stpCost 290 bridge port stpPriority 291 bridge port gvrpState 292 bridge port address list 293 bridge port address add 294 bridge port address remove 295 bridge port address find 296 bridge port address flushAll 297 bridge port address flushDynamic 298 11 TRUNKS Menu Structure 300 bridge trunk autoMap summary 301 bridge trunk autoMap enable disable 302 bridge trunk autoMap test 303 bridge trunk summary 304 bridge trunk detail 305 bridge trunk define 307 bridge trunk modify 312 bridge t
191. Routing Protocol v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 ipmdis 3900 Fields in the IP Multicast DVMRP Interface Detail Display 9300 Field Description Index Address Metric State Group Peer Port Number associated with the interface for identification purposes IP address of the interface Numeric DVMRP metric or cost that you assign to the interface Role that the interface plays in IP multicast delivery One or more of the following descriptors may appear a querier The interface is functioning as the IGMP Querier for its subnetwork a non querier The interface is not functioning as the IGMP Querier for its subnetwork leaf There are no routers downstream of this interface IP multicast group members may reside on this subnetwork a non leaf The interface is a branch in the IP multicast delivery tree There are one or more IP multicast routing interfaces downstream of this interface a one way Traffic is moving downstream only a disabled DVMRP is disabled on the interface a up The IP interface is available to support network communication a down The IP interface is not available to support network communication IP multicast group addresses of the traffic that is being received and forwarded on that interface IP address of the upstream router The additional information to the right relates to the version of DVMRP that is running and the port i
192. SPF adjacencies have gone down Number of times that OSPF adjacencies have been formed Number of packets discarded due to OSPF authentication errors Interpretation a A non zero value is bad and means that packets from some OSPF routers are being discarded due to authentication errors This statistic is incremented under the following circumstances a f the OSPF packet authentication type is something other than simple password that is cryptographic authentication is not supported in the current implementation a f the OSPF packet contains a password but the interface does not have a password configured a f the OSPF packet has a simple password that does not match the password defined for the OSPF interface Number of times that the designated router was computed Number of LSA checksum errors that have been detected Number of interface area ID mismatches that have been detected Number of interface area type mismatches that have been detected 578 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH FIRST OSPF Field Description mismatchDead mismatchHello mismatchMask packetXsumError receiveDD receivedUnknown Number of router dead interval mismatches that were detected Interpretation a A non zero value is bad and means that some OSPF routers on the interface are configured with a different dead interval than this router This prevents the router from becoming a neighbor with these other routers This statist
193. SPF router priority for the interface Rxmit Intvl LSA retransmit interval in seconds Field ip ospf interface detail 543 Description State Xmit Cost Xmit Delay Interface state Disabled OSPF is not enabled on the interface Down Interface is down but OSPF is enabled on it Loopback Interface is a loopback interface Waiting Router is trying to determine the identity of the DR and BDR on the network PTP Interface is operational and connects to either a point to point network or a virtual link The router attempts to form adjacency with the neighboring router DRot her Interface is on a multiaccess network where this router is not the designated router or backup designated router BDR Router is the backup designated router on the attached network DR Router is the designated router on the attached network Interface transmit cost Interface transmit delay in seconds 544 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf interface VY 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Statistics For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays statistics that are associated with specified OSPF interfaces Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o i st Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interface Index number of the interface m Valid interface for which you want to display index number statistics m all a fora list of selectab
194. STEM ENVIRONMENT system console Defines the text that is displayed to a prospective user when access to security message your system is denied Y Y 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9000 sy co sem 9400 or Important Consideration Y 3900 m Use system console security display to view the text of the 9300 current deny message Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Deny Text that is displayed to a Alphanumeric text You are not message prospective user whose IP of up to 85 considered a address does not appear on characters and trusted user the list of trusted users spaces Please see your network administrator system console timeout timeOut 83 system console Configures the system to disconnect remote sessions after a specified timeout timeOut interval of no activity Y 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9000 sy cott 9400 a Important Considerations Y 3900 m The default inactive time interval is 30 minutes V 9300 a To change the timeout interval value before the system disconnects remote sessions see system console timeout interval next for details Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Timeout Whether you want to enable or m enabled disabled state disable the timeout state a disabled 84 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system console timeout interval v 3500 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 Sets the remote timeout interval to a value from 1 minute through 60 minutes Val
195. Select menu option Select VLAN inter Select bridge por Enter port 2 tag Enter port 3 tag 4 tag Enter port 5 tag Enter port 6 tag Enter port odify per port tagging n y y face index 1 2 ts 1 27 all type none 802 10 type none 802 10 type none 802 10 type none 802 10 type none 802 10 bridge vlan modify T 1 27 2 6 none 802 19 none 802 190 none 802 19 none 802 19 none 802 19 bridge vlan remove v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 bridge vlan remove 363 Deletes a VLAN definition Valid Minimum Abbreviation bvr Important Considerations a When you remove a VLAN on a CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 2 or Layer 3 module the system prompts you to verify that you want to wait the several minutes that it may take for the removal to be complete a You cannot remove a VLAN that is associated with any type of routing interface for example a router port VLAN created by a router port IP interface or a protocol based VLAN associated with a particular router interface Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN System assigned index number that w A selectable interface is associated with the VLAN VLAN index index i all a fora list of selectable indexes Continue Whether you want to continue with n no y verification the VLAN removal even though the yes 9000 removal may take a few minutes to E yay Layer 2 and complete
196. Session Session numbers destination IP addresses and ports protocols number of senders receivers and RSVP reservations Session receiver Port numbers an RSVP style ST of fixed filter FF shared and session explicit SE or wildcard filter wF next hop addresses LIH reservation values TTD values bandwidth values burst values and filters Session sender Port numbers source IP addresses previous hop addresses Logical Interface Handle LIH values Time To Die TTD values bandwidth values burst size values and output ports Session Actual flow that was installed on the system shown in the last installed flows portion of the output Total resv Admission control policy RSVP begins to refuse reservations bandwidth when the requested bandwidth on an output link exceeds the total reservable bandwidth 730 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP qos rsvp enable For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Enables RSVP on the system RSVP settings that you specify v 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 qre 3900 Important Considerations 9300 a By default RSVP is disabled a In general when you enable RSVP use the default settings a You are allowing RSVP to reserve this amount of bandwidth in the system You can oversubscribe over 100 and specify a value of up to 200 Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Maximum total Admission control polic
197. Talk the default PP a XNS a DECnet a SNA a Vines a X 25 a NETBEUI Modify Layer 3 address IP VLAN Layer 3 address and mask IP VLAN Per port tagging Tag type VLAN name for VLANs other than the default Whether you want to modify the Layer 3 information for the VLAN Avoid this mechanism and instead define multiple IP interfaces per VLAN with ip interface define commands Optional fields IP network and mask used to set up flood domains for overlapping IP VLAN subnetworks Whether you want to modify the per port 802 1Q VLAN tagging You are prompted to answer for each port that you specified Either no tagging or IEEE 802 1Q tagging the VID Unique user defined name that identifies members of the VLAN If you use spaces put quotation marks around the VLAN name unspecified a IPX II a IPX 802 2 a PX 802 3 a IPX 802 2 SNAP 3500 only m y yes a Nn no Any valid IP network address and mask none m 802 1Q Up to 32 ASCII characters or spaces Current address and mask Current tag type for each port Current name 358 CHAPTER 14 VIRTUAL LANs VLANs Procedure To modify information for a VLAN follow these steps 1 Select the VLAN interface index 2 Fora VLAN other than the default VLAN enter the VLAN identification VID number 3 Specify the index numbers of the bridge ports 4 Fora VLAN other than the default VLAN specify one or more pro
198. This command takes effect immediately You are not prompted to confirm the deletion Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Trusted IP One or more index numbers of m 1 5 1 if only one client index the IP addresses that you want iil client to remove a fora list of selectable indexes system console security access v 3500 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 AN system console security access 81 Enables or disables whether the system verifies trusted IP clients on your system Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy co sea Important Considerations CAUTION Be careful when you define trusted IP clients If you specify an incorrect IP address or subnetwork address when you define a trusted IP client you can affect your own ability to access the system See the Implementation Guide for your system a Configure trusted IP clients in this order a Define the trusted IP clients using system console security define a Display the list of configured trusted IP clients using system console security display to verify that you have configured the trusted IP clients correctly a Enable the system to verify trusted IP clients using system console security access Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Trusted Whether you want to allow or m enabled disabled client access disallow your system to restrict a disabled only access according to your list of trusted IP clients 82 CHAPTER 3 SY
199. Tx Host Tx Discards ndex NetBIOS Max Hops NetBIOS Rx NetBIOS Tx No Routes Total Received Tx Discards Tx MTU Exceeded Number o Number o Number o ayer head Number o maximum Number o Number o ndex num Number o Number o Number o Number o Number o Number o successfull Number o transmitted Number of IPX packets tha RIP and SAP applications that were dropped Number of IPX packets tha RIP and SAP applications Number of IPX packets that were dropped due to IPX address errors in the network layer header Number of IPX packets that were forwarded IPX packets to be forwarded that were not Number of IPX packets that were received to be forwarded IPX forwarded packets that were successfully IPX packets that were dropped due to IPX Network er errors IPX packets tha transport contro were dropped due to exceeded were received for the IPX host s were received for the IPX host s IPX packets that were transmitted from the IPX host s RIP and SAP applications IPX packets from the IPX host s RIP and SAP applications that were dropped on transmission ber that is assigned to the IPX interface IPX NetBIOS packets that exceeded the transport control maximum IPX NetBIOS packets that were received IPX NetBIOS packets that were transmitted IPX packets that were dropped because the IPX route is unknown IPX packets that were received IPX packets that were
200. V 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation v 9000 sone eee 9400 Options 3900 9300 Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interface Index number of the interface m Valid interface First available from which you want to index number factory remove a neighbor default or a fora list of current value selectable indexes Neighbor Address of neighbor that you Valid IP addresson address want to remove interface subnetwork ip ospf routerID 567 ip ospf routerID For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Sets the OSPF router ID Z 3500 Y 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 ipoe 3900 Important Considerations 9300 a The OSPF router ID identifies the router to other routers within an autonomous system Three types of router identifiers are available all three take the form of an IP address a Default A unique ID that the system generates and uses as the default router ID a Interface The index of an IP interface on the router Address An ID that you define in the form of an IP address a OSPF routing must be inactive disabled before you can add or modify an OSPF router ID To set the OSPF mode to disabled see ip ospf interface mode earlier in this chapter After you modify the router ID you can set the OSPF mode to enabled on the interface a The router ID must be unique from all other router IDs and ip interfaces in the autonomous system for OSPF to operate correctly Cho
201. VLAN mode for each switching module and the switch fabric module a Changing this mode removes all VLANs and redefines the default VLAN a Before you issue this command to change the mode you must remove all routing interfaces including router port IP interfaces If routing interfaces are defined the system displays this message could not change configured VLAN mode interface in use by client Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN mode Selected VLAN mode for the entire m allOpen allOpen system factory a allClosed default or current value bridge vlan stpMode 365 bridge vlan stpMode For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only If allClosed mode is enabled allows the system to ignore the Spanning y 3500 Tree Protocol STP state for a specified VLAN interface or all interfaces v 9000 for either routing or bridging 9400 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 3900 b v st 9300 Important Considerations m This mode is valid only if the VLAN mode is set to a11Closed ma To disable the STP state on a per port basis with either allOpen or allClosed mode use the bridge port stpState command See Chapter 10 a f you have configured router port IP interface and therefore have a router port VLAN the ignore STP mode is enabled and cannot be changed You cannot select a router port VLAN with this command Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN System assigned index
202. Vv AAY bridge trunk define S L MA K bridge trunk modify WA Ss Vv Ls L bridge trunk remove S L AAM Ch 12 MultiPoint Link Aggregation bridge mpla summary S bridge mpla detail A bridge mpla mode A bridge mpla peerMacAddress S Ch 13 Resilient Links bridge link summary bridge link detail bridge link define bridge link linkState bridge link activePort bridge link modify bridge link remove Se SN TONE S a a S a RN Aw SS SO ASS Ay SSS ASS 52 CHAPTER 2 COMMAND SUMMARY Table 6 Command Summary continued 3500 9000 9000 9400 3900 9300 Layer Layer Commands 2 3 Ch 14 Virtual LANs VLANs bridge vlan summary bridge vlan detail bridge vlan define bridge vlan modify bridge vlan remove QVNNNNN AN SNES NNN SOS NON SON SS NON SOON bridge vlan mode bridge vlan stpMode VNNNNNN SN Se Sa Ne NI NSS bridge vlan vianAwareMode Ch 15 Packet Filters bridge packetFilter list bridge packetFilter display bridge packetFilter create bridge packetFilter delete bridge packetFilter edit bridge packetFilter load bridge packetFilter assign bridge packetFilter unassign bridge packetFilter portGroup list bridge packetFilter portGroup display bridge packetFilter portGroup create bridge packetFilter portGroup delete bridge packetFilter portGroup addPort Sew SS SN NS NS SS A SNS VNNNNNNNNNNN NNN bridge packetFilter portGroup removePort Table 6 Command Summary continued
203. a packet as loss eligible it falls into one of the three lowLoss Statistics a If the queue is not over the threshold it is counted as a lowLossSent a If the queue is over its threshold it is counted as lowLossDelayed a f the queue is full it is counted as lowLossDropped a Loss eligible packets are conforming packets that are discarded instead of queued when transmit queues back up beyond a threshold You can specify whether conforming packets as well as nonconforming excess packets are loss eligible when you define a control Marking packets loss eligible is useful to enable intelligent discard of traffic in a congestion situation When the system is congested you can decide which traffic can be discarded and mark that traffic as loss eligible 742 Options Prompt CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP Description Possible Values Default Bridge ports Queues Port numbers of ports for which you want to display transmit Statistics On the CoreBuilder 9000 the list of ports includes the front panel ports and any enabled backplane ports One or more port numbers all for a list of selectable ports Transmit queues types of a reserved service whose statistics you hi igh want to display a best a low m all a fora list of selectable values Fields in the QoS Transmit Statistics Display Field Description highLossDropped a gt i
204. able to locate a copy please contact 3Com and a copy will be provided to you UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT LEGEND If you are a United States government agency then this documentation and the software described herein are provided to you subject to the following All technical data and computer software are commercial in nature and developed solely at private expense Software is delivered as Commercial Computer Software as defined in DFARS 252 227 7014 June 1995 or as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a and as such is provided with only such rights as are provided in 3Com s standard commercial license for the Software Technical data is provided with limited rights only as provided in DFAR 252 227 7015 Nov 1995 or FAR 52 227 14 June 1987 whichever is applicable You agree not to remove or deface any portion of any legend provided on any licensed program or documentation contained in or delivered to you in conjunction with this User Guide Unless otherwise indicated 3Com registered trademarks are registered in the United States and may or may not be registered in other countries 3Com the 3Com logo CoreBuilder DynamicAccess NETBuilder Il PACE SmartAgent SuperStack and Transcend are registered trademarks of 3Com Corporation 3Com Facts is a service mark of 3Com Corporation PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Inc AppleTalk is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Incorporated Banyan an
205. ace Eventually this entry disappears from the cache display Either no entry or lt none gt appears in this column if the system is not able to build the cache entry correctly This temporary condition corrects itself quickly Physical ports that correspond to the interfaces that are listed in the outVifs field The Ports field shows a dash when there are no outgoing interfaces and when the outgoing interfaces are tunnels 520 CHAPTER 18 IP MULTICAST ip multicast dvmrp v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 default For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Configures a default route for IP multicast traffic on a DVMRP interface This interface advertises itself as a default route to neighboring DVMRP routers Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipmdd Important Considerations a A default route metric of O means that the default route function is not activated on the interface interface does not advertise 0 0 0 0 to DVMRP routers Values other than O means that the default route function is activated and these values represent the cost of the default route a Definitions of default route modes a all The interface advertises the default route plus all other known routes to neighboring DVMRP routers a only The interface advertises only the default route to neighboring DVMRP routers If the system learns a default route it propagates it no matter which mode is set on a given
206. acket filter you can assign the filter to the transmit or the receive paths of any bridge port or group of bridge ports The filter executes a series of test operations on the packet s contents and if the result is zero it stops filters the packet If the end result is non zero the filter lets the packet pass For more information about implementing packet filters on your network see the Implementation Guide for your system For the CoreBuilder 9000 platform the commands in this chapter apply to Layer 3 switching modules only 370 CHAPTER 15 PACKET FILTERS Menu Structure The commands that you can use depend on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardware options that are configured for your system The following diagram shows the complete list of commands for all systems See the checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter for whether your system supports the command Top Level Menu bridge menu packetFilter menu create menu system display list portGroup module ipFragmentation R display custom management ipxSnapTranslation create Sihernel addressThreshold delete _PortGroup menu fddi agingTime edit list bridge spanningTree load display ip gvrpState assign create ipx cos unassign delete appletalk port portGroup addPort qos multicast removePort snmp lb packetFilter analyzer vian log trunk script mp
207. ackets from one subnetwork to another when required a When you disable IP routing the system discards any IP packets that are not addressed directly to one of its defined IP interfaces a By default IP routing is disabled on the system Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP routing state Whether IP routingis enabled disabled implemented on the system a disabled v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 ip rip display For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays information about the Routing Information Protocol RIP interfaces on the system RIP is one of the IP Interior Gateway Protocols IGPs When RIP is enabled the system dynamically configures its routing tables Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip rid Important Considerations a The output for this display differs according to platform a The first line in the output the status line indicates whether IP routing is enabled a For the CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 module it also indicates whether Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP router discovery is enabled on the system a For the CoreBuilder 3500 IP interface options such as ICMP router discovery appear under ip interface detail earlier in this chapter and are set on a per interface basis The rest of the output contains more RIP interface information a The four available RIP modes are as follows a Disabled The system ignores all incoming R
208. address table and cannot be learned on a different port You must first remove it from its former port Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN Index numbers of the VLANs to One or more interface which the desired bridge ports valid VLAN indexes belong indexes only if in ll allClosed a8 mode a fora list of selectable VLANs Bridge ports Bridge ports to which you want m One or more to add certain MAC addresses valid bridge port numbers a to display a port summary MAC MAC address that you want to A valid MAC address add to the selected port address bridge port address v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 remove Removes individual MAC addresses from the address table Valid Minimum Abbreviation bpoar Important Consideration a This command is typically used to remove only static MAC addresses because the bridge could relearn a dynamic MAC address shortly after you remove it Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN Index numbers of the VLANs to m One or more interface which the desired bridge ports valid VLAN indexes belong indexes only if in all allClosed mode a fora list of selectable VLANs MAC MAC address that you want to A valid MAC address remove address 296 CHAPTER 10 BRIDGE PORT PARAMETERS bridge port address v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 find Displays the bridge port as well as the vlan index number if
209. age number of frames per second that this MAC received during the most recent sampling period Number of frames that this MAC received Number of frames discarded because of an internal hardware error during reception Number of multicast frames that this MAC delivered to a higher level protocol or application Peak value of fddiMACByteReceiveRate for this MAC since the station was last initialized Peak value of fddiMACFrameReceiveRate for this MAC since the station was last initialized Number of unicast nonmulticast frames that this MAC delivered to a higher level protocol or application Address of the MAC used for SMT frames Maximum value of the target token rotation time Maximum supported target token rotation time that this MAC can support Target token rotation time negotiated during the claim process Number of tokens that this MAC received 236 CHAPTER 8 FIBER DISTRIBUTED DATA INTERFACE FDDI Field Description tReq Target token rotation time that this MAC requested tvxCapab Maximum time value of the valid transmission timer that tvxExpiredCount tvxValue txByteRate txBytes txDiscards txFrameRate txFrames txlnternalErrs txMulticasts txPeakByteRate txPeakFrameRate txQOverflows txUnicasts upstream upstreamDupAddr this MAC can support Number of times that this MAC s valid transmission timer has expired Value of the valid transmission timer that this MAC uses Average number
210. also enter O to disable aging To configure this value see bridge agingTime later in this chapter Configurable time period in seconds that the bridge spends in each of two states listening and learning before it transitions to the forwarding state provided that the bridge is the root bridge If the bridge is not the root bridge the bridge uses the value shown in the fwdDelay field that is assigned to it by the root bridge The default value is 15 seconds The acceptable range is 4 30 seconds To configure the bridge forward delay see bridge spanningTree stpForwardDelay later in this chapter Field Description bridgeHelloTime bridgeldentifier bridgeMaxAge designatedRoot forwardDelay gvrpState 3500 and 9000 L3 helloTime holdTime ipFragmentation 3500 and 9000 L3 ipxTranslation 3500 and 9000 L3 owLatency Configurable time period in seconds that elapses between configuration messages when the bridge is the root bridge If the bridge is not the root bridge the bridge uses the value shown in the hel 1loTime field which is assigned to it by the root bridge The default value is 2 seconds The acceptable range is 1 10 seconds To configure the bridge hello time see bridge spanningTree stpHelloTime later in this chapter Unique bridge identification that includes the bridge priority value and the MAC address of port 1 Configurable time period in seconds that
211. alue Fields in the IP OSPF Link State Data Database Summary Display Field Description Checksum summation Total of all LSA checksums External LSAs Number of external link LSAs LSA count Number of LSAs Network LSAs Number of network link LSAs Router LSAs Number of router link LSAs Summary LSAs Number of summary link LSAs 558 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf linkStateData v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 router For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays router link state advertisements LSAs in the link state database Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipolr Important Consideration a To view link state database information OSPF must be active enabled Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Area ID Area ID in the form Valid area ID 0 0 0 0 factory n n n n where 0 lt n lt 255 default or that corresponds to the OSPF current value area for which you want to view router link state advertisement information Area mask Subnet mask of OSPF area for Valid area mask 0 0 0 0 factory which you want to view router default or link state advertisement current value information LSID Link State ID router ID of the Router ID 0 0 0 0 factory originating router in the form default or of an IP address current value LSID mask Link State ID bit mask Link State ID bit 0 0 0 0 factory Example 255 0 0 0 mask default or current value
212. alues Default Policy Index number of the policy you m 1 1 if only one want to remove ss SVR NIGHTS policy of selectable policies ipx output delay For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only J Sets the IPX output delay option for RIP Routing Information Protocol 3500 and SAP Service Advertising Protocol packets This option delays the v 9000 updating of the RIP and SAP server information table 9400 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 3900 ipx io 9300 Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Output delay Whether you want to enable or enable disable mode disable the output delay option a disable 650 CHAPTER 20 IPX ipx statistics For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only summary Displays IPX summary statistics vV 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation v 9000 ipx st su 9400 Important Considerations pia a The first line in the output the status line indicates whether a IPX forwarding is enabled a RIP is active a SAP is active a RIP Triggered updates are enabled a SAP Triggered updates are enabled a Secondary route server option is enabled Fields in the IPX Statistics Summary Display Field Description Forwarded Number of IPX packets that were forwarded Fwd Received Number of IPX packets that were received to be forwarded Fwd Transmitted Number of IPX forwarded packets that were successfully transmitted Host Delivers Number of IPX packets that we
213. ame of the link Use Maximum 32 name quotation marks around any alphanumeric characters character string that contains spaces Main Port Main port that you want tobe Any of the available part of the link ports on the system Standby Standby port that you want to Any of the available Port be part of the link ports on the system Define Whether you want to define y yes n another another link link Se Reboot the Resilient links that you define my yes y system do not take effect until you reboot the system Procedure You can define all links in one bridge link define operation and then reboot At the end of each link definition the system prompts you to define another link Enter the link name or to get information about specifying the link name enter Select the port that you want to be the main port To get information about the selectable ports enter Select the port that you want to be the standby port To get information about the selectable ports enter At the system prompt to define another link enter y yes or to end the link define sequence enter n no You must reboot for the links to take effect 332 CHAPTER 13 RESILIENT LINKS bridge link linkState 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 2 switching modules only Sets the linkState value enabled or disabled for a specific resilient link Valid Minimum Abbreviation bli Important Consideratio
214. and file pathname to transfer criteria for name last entering the loaded pathname m Upto 128 characters Bridge Packet Filter Load Example 3500 The system transfers the specified filter and displays a confirmation message Select menu option bridge packetFilter load Host IP address 158 101 112 191 File pathname tftpboot srackley joe fil Packet filter 2 stored Bridge Packet Filter Load Example 9000 The user has copied the source text for the reject multicast traffic filter rejmulticast fil from the Filter Builder application to the TFTP application s root directory on host 159 101 8 112 You must use TFTP FTP does not work The user then logs on to the CoreBuilder 9000 EME and issues the download command to transfer the filter file to the EME Note that the user specifies the type of download filter and for which module 6 01 the filter is destined CB9000 gt download module 6 01 filter 159 101 8 112 rejmulticast fil File transfer request pending Downloading file from external file server to em 000000289 Downloading file from eme to module 6 1 000000289 File transfer completed successfully The user next connects to the module and loads the filter CB9000 gt connect 6 01 Menu options Corebuilder 9000 94DC8 list List all packet filters display Display a packet filter create Create a packet filter delete Delete a packet filter edit
215. and interface IP address of the out of band interface chosen from the range of addresses that the central agency assigned to your organization This address is specific to your network and system Whether the interface is available to route IP traffic enabled or not disabled Whether RIP is dynamically configuring its routing tables act ive or on request passive State of the IP interface indicating whether the interface is available for communications up or unavailable down 32 bit number that uses the same format and representation as an IP address The subnet mask determines which bits in the IP address are interpreted as the network number the subnet number and the host number Each IP address bit that corresponds to a 1 in the subnet mask is in the network subnet part of the address Each IP address bit that corresponds to a 0 is in the host part of the IP address Type of device that is connected to the interface management ip interface define v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 management ip interface define 157 Defines the IP address of the IP management out of band port Valid Minimum Abbreviation mipid Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP address IP address of the out of band interface chosen from the range of addresses that the central agency assigned to your organization This address is specific to your network and system Subnet 32 bit number that uses t
216. ands that you use to edit the packet filters You can edit packet filter language statements that define the packet filter algorithm See the Implementation Guide for your system for information about developing the packet filters Save your work periodically with Ctrl w To complete the editing process press Esc The system replaces the filter or creates a new filter depending on your response to the prompts When you exit the system examines the filter s syntax If the syntax is correct the filter is loaded into the switch s non volatile memory Possible values for filters n depend on the number of created or loaded filters on the system Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Select filter Identifier id number of the a 1 n Most recent filter that you want to edit filter edited a fora list of all identifiers Replace Whether to replace the a n no y existing selected filter filter ay yes Store as Whether to create a new filter m n no y new filter 378 CHAPTER 15 PACKET FILTERS Replace Existing Filter Example 3500 Select menu option bridge packetFilter edit Select filter 1 1 Editing packet filter 1 Editor Commands Buffer list Ctrl l Ctrl d DI Line next Ctrl n previous Ctrl p Cursor start Ctrl a end Ctrl e left Ctrl b Insert line Enter Delete previous Ctrl h BSP current Mode insert overstrike toggle Ctrl o Sa
217. are options that are configured for your system The following diagram shows the complete list of commands for all systems See the checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter for whether your system supports the command Top Level Menu management menu ip menu interface menu system summary b interface summary module detail route define gt management ip barp modify ethernet rip remove fddi ping bridge advancedPing route menu ip traceRoute display ipx advancedTraceRoute static appletalk statistics remove qos flush snmp default analyzer noDefault log findRoute script logout arp menu disconnect display static remove flushAll flushDynamic rip menu display mode statistics v 3500 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 management summary management summary 151 Displays Ethernet summary information about the out of band system management port Valid Minimum Abbreviation m sum Important Considerations a The management summary and management detail displays contain the same fields as the Ethernet summary and Ethernet detail displays a Fields that do not apply to the management port contain n a in the management summary and management detail displays Fields in the Management Summary Display Field Description actualFlowControl Actual flow control setting for Gigabit Ethernet ports When autonegotiation is completed the value is the
218. arp v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 display Display the contents of the Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache for each interface on the system Valid Minimum Abbreviation mip ard Important Considerations a The system uses the ARP cache to find the MAC addresses that correspond to the IP addresses of hosts and other routers on the same subnets Each device that participates in routing maintains an ARP cache which is a table of known IP addresses and their corresponding MAC addresses a The first line in the output the status line indicates whether IP routing is enabled in band only a P interface options such as ICMP router discovery appear under ip interface detail and are set on a per interface basis The second status line indicates the number of entries in the ARP cache Fields in the Management IP ARP Display Field Description Hardware address MAC address that is mapped to the IP address IP address IP address of the interface Type Type of entry static or dynamic management ip arp static 169 management ip arp Defines a static ARP cache entry on the system static Valid Minimum Abbreviation Y 3500 mip ars 9000 9400 Important Consideration a You can define up to 128 static ARP entries 3900 One 9300 ptions Prompt Description Possible Values Default Interface index Index number of the m A valid index number interface for which you want to define a static ARP entry IP address P a
219. assigned to your organization Subnet mask Subnet mask for the interface A valid subnet Current that you want to modify mask in subnet accordance with mask the bits that are used for network number subnetwork and host number VLAN interface Index number of the IP VLAN a A selectable Current index for that is associated with the IP VLAN index value VLAN based interface for a VLAN based IP routing interface you must assign this number a fora list of selectable VLAN indexes Not applicable if you have more than one VLAN 408 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP ip interface remove v 3500 vy 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Removes an IP interface from the system s routing table Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip ire Important Considerations a Before you remove the interface remove any static entries in the routing table or the Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache a On the CoreBuilder 3500 if you remove a router port based IP interface the system removes the virtual LAN VLAN that is associated with it as well Options Prompt Description IP interfaces Index number that is associated with the interfaces that you want to remove Not applicable if you have more than one interface Possible Values Default a Oneor more Current selectable value interface indexes all for a list of selectable interface
220. associated with a system event Trap numbers enabled Traps that are active 194 CHAPTER 6 SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL SNMP snmp trap addModify v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 Adds or modifies trap reporting destination configurations When an event occurs the system sends the trap that you specify here to the destination address Valid Minimum Abbreviation snta Important Considerations You can define up to 10 destination addresses and the set of traps that are sent to each destination address No unlisted traps are transmitted Specify a range of more than two trap numbers with a hyphen and nonsequential trap numbers with commas If the destination address that you entered is not a valid end station if a valid IP interface is not defined on the system or if the agent does not have a route to the destination the agent displays this message Trap address invalid or unreachable If you see this message verify the IP address of the end station that it is online and that a route exists to the intended management station See the Device Monitoring chapter in the Implementation Guide for your system for an explanation of what the individual traps mean Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Trap Destination IP address of the A valid destination destination SNMP manager IP address address Trap Traps that you want to direct m A valid trap numbers to to th
221. at can be bridged to Ethernet LANs Valid Minimum Abbreviation b ipf Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default ipFragmentation Whether large FDDI packets m enabled enabled value can be divided into smaller packets so that they canbe disabled bridged to Ethernet 256 bridge ipxSnapTranslation v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 CHAPTER 9 BRIDGE WIDE PARAMETERS For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Translates 802 3_RAW IPX packets to FDDI_SNAP packets when they are forwarded from Ethernet to FDDI links and vice versa when packets are forwarded from FDDI to Ethernet Valid Minimum Abbreviation b ipx Important Consideration a When IPX SNAP Translation is disabled the system uses standard IEEE 802 1H bridging to translate 802 3_RAW packets to FDDI_LRAW packets when they are forwarded from Ethernet to FDDI and vice versa from FDDI to Ethernet Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default ipx Whether the system uses IPX enabled disabled SnapTranslation SNAP Translation when a disabled forwarding packets between Ethernet and FDDI links bridge addressThreshold 257 bridge For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only addressThreshold Sets the reporting threshold for the number of Ethernet addresses that are known When this threshold is reached the system generates the 3500 SNMP trap called addressThresholdEvent v 9000 9
222. at corresponds to a 1 in the subnet mask is in the network subnetwork part of the address Each IP address bit that corresponds to a 0 is in the host part of the IP address VLAN interface Index number of the IP VLAN a Aselectable Current index that is associated with the IP VLAN index value interface a fora list of Not applicable if you have more selectable than one VLAN VLAN indexes IP Interface Define Example Enter IP address Enter subnet mask Enter VLAN interface index 2 2 2 158 101 1 1 255 255 0 0 255 255 255 0 ip interface modify v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Changes the configuration of an interface that you have already defined Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip im Important Consideration mw On the CoreBuilder 3500 you cannot modify the port number router port based routing after it has been defined because of the associated virtual LAN VLAN you must remove the interface and then redefine it Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interface Index number that is associated A selectable IP Current with the interface that you want interface index value to modify a fora list of Not applicable if you have more selectable than one interface indexes IP address IP address of the interface that A valid IP address Current IP you want to modify in the range of address addresses that are
223. ather QoS default or statistics current value qos statistics receive v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 gos statistics receive 739 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays QoS receive statistics Valid Minimum Abbreviation qasr Important Considerations a The system displays the statistics at the interval that you specified The default interval is 5 seconds a The receive statistics shows the effect of the traffic control services that you configured Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Bridge ports Port numbers whose receive a One or more statistics you want to display port numbers On the CoreBuilder 9000 the mall list of ports includes the for a list of front panel ports and any enabled backplane ports selectable ports Fields in the QoS Receive Statistics Display Field Description droppedPackets Number of packets that were dropped when they were received droppedPacketsPeak Highest number of packets that were dropped on receipt up to this point flowExcess Number of flow classifier bytes that are excess flowExcessPeak Highest number of flow excess bytes that have been received up to this point flowReserved Number of conforming flow classifier bytes that have been received flowReservedPeak Highest number of flow classifier bytes that have been received up to this point nonFlowExcess Number of nonflow classifier bytes that have been
224. atic route If an interface goes down any static servers on that interface are permanently removed from the server table until the interface comes back up a Static servers take precedence over dynamically learned servers to the same destination You can have a maximum of 32 static servers a Before you define static servers on the system first define at least one IPX interface See ipx interface define earlier in this chapter for more details Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Interface index Interface index number for the a Aselectable IPX server interface index a fora list of selectable IPX interfaces Service type Number for the type of service m that the server performs a 0x1 Oxffff Service name Service name of the server up to m Any selectable 79 characters service name a fora list of selectable names IPX network IPX network address of the server 0x0 Oxfffffffe address Socket value Socket value of the server 0x0 Oxffff Node address Node address of the server Hops Number of hops to the server 0 15 IPX Static Server Example Interface index 1 1 1 service type 0xl OxFFFF 0x4 service name gb201 IPX address 0x0 Oxfffffffe 0x8c14a228 socket 0x0 Oxffff 0x8059 node address 00 00 2e 3 56 02 hops 0 15 2 626 CHAPTER 20 IPX ipx server remove v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreB
225. ault 694 defining 694 displaying detail information 692 displaying summary information 691 guidelines for using 689 modifying 701 parameters for defining 695 718 predefined flow and nonflow 691 removing 706 specifying address port patterns 696 701 703 specifying IP addresses 695 702 command strings entering abbreviated 41 entering values 41 quick 34 commands 150 system menu for baselining statistics 90 for managing NV data 108 community strings 192 configuration tasks 34 conforming packets service levels 711 console access 73 control packets 733 734 controls QoS associating with classifiers 713 burst size 712 defining 710 displaying detail information 708 displaying summary information 707 modifying 718 721 names 711 parameters for defining 710 removing 724 service levels 711 specifying IEEE 802 1p tags 712 conventions notice icons 23 text 24 CoreBuilder 3500 system and network monitoring 755 CoreBuilder 9000 management features 33 system management overview 30 cost IP RIP mode 456 Spanning Tree settings 254 D DAS dual attach station pairs trunks and 307 data channels management 31 date displaying 137 DDP Datagram Delivery Protocol 683 defaults control service level best 715 IP RIP mode learn 453 OSPF route metric 538 to 540 QoS classifier 694 route for IP 421 screen height 76 Spanning Tree Protocol 261 ttl value for advancedTraceRoute 480 ttl value for traceRoute 182 UDP port number for
226. autonegotiated setting When autonegotiation is disabled the value is the user selected flow control value actualPortMode Actual operating port mode When autonegotiation is completed the value shown is the autonegotiated setting When autonegotiation is disabled the value is the user selected port mode autoNegMode Autonegotiation mode configured for port Possible values are enabled or disabled autoNegState Current negotiation state Possible values are disabled configuring completed and failed linkStatus Boolean value indicating the current state of the physical link status for this port either enabled or disabled macAddress MAC address of this port noRxBuffers Number of frames that were discarded because no buffer space was available portLabel User defined label name The maximum length of the string is 32 characters including the null terminator portState Current software operational state of this port Possible values are on line and off line portType Specific description of this port s type Value for port type 10 100BASE TX RJ 45 reqFlowControl If autonegotiation is disabled a configurable parameter that sets the flow control option on the ports If autonegotiation is enabled flow control values are ignored 152 CHAPTER 5 OuT OF BAND MANAGEMENT Field Description reqPortMode rxBytes rxErrs rxFrames txBytes txErrs txFrames txQOverflows If autonegotiation is disabled a conf
227. ave recently seen Hello packet from neighbor however two way communication has not been established Two way Bidirectional communication has been established a ExStart Taking initial step to create adjacency between neighboring routers a Exchange Database descriptions are being exchanged a Loading LSA databases are being exchanged a Full Neighboring routers are fully adjacent SumQ Number of LSAs in LSA summary queue for the neighbor ip ospf neighbors add 565 ip ospf neighbors add For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Adds a neighbor static IP address to an existing interface v 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 ipona 3900 Important Consideration 9300 m The system learns neighbor addresses dynamically on interfaces that support multicast routing Define static neighbors only on nonmulticast interfaces Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interface Index number of the interface m Valid interface First available to which you want to add a index number factory neighbor default or a fora list of current value selectable indexes Static Address of neighbor that you Valid IP addresson neighbor want to define interface address subnetwork 566 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf neighbors For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only remove Removes a static neighbor from an existing interface
228. ayer 3 address information To define multiple IP interfaces per IP VLAN use the ip interface define command See Chapter 16 a The VLAN that you create with this command is a static VLAN To establish routing between static IP VLANs define your IP VLANs and then use the ip interface define command to define an IP routing interface As of Release 3 0 you can also specify the interface type vian to create one or more IP routing interfaces for a static IP VLAN a f you have a router port IP interface on the system you cannot specify the port that belongs to the router port IP interface when you explicitly define an IP VLAN or a VLAN that includes the IP protocol A router port IP interface is an alternative to static VLANs and allows routing versus bridging You create a router port IP interface by entering the ip interface define command with the interface type port and a single bridge port A router port IP interface requires allClosed mode See Chapter 16 for more information 346 CHAPTER 14 VIRTUAL LANs VLANs You must specify a VID in the range from 2 through 4094 You can no longer define a VLAN other than the default VLAN with a VID of 1 VID 1 is reserved for the default VLAN only as of Release 3 0 0 As of Release 3 0 0 the default VLAN always uses the name Default and the protocol type unspecified If you delete the default VLAN you can redefine it with VID 1 only You cannot delete a VLAN that has a routing interface
229. ber An I precedes an interface index number A T precedes a tunnel index number 518 CHAPTER 18 IP MULTICAST ip multicast dvmrp v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 cacheDisplay For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays the DVMRP cache which is a collection of information about the IP multicast packets that have traveled through the system Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipmd c Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Multicast Source for which you m Depends on your 255 255 255 255 source address want to view cache network factory default information a 255 255 255 255 current value for all sources Multicast Multicast group for Depends on your 255 255 255 255 group address which you want to network factory default e a 255 255 255 255 current value for all groups Fields in the IP Multicast DVMRP Cache Display Field Description Source Information about IP multicast sources a Entries preceded by angle brackets gt are subnetworks that contain sources a Entries without angle brackets are the IP addresses of source devices Group IP multicast group address of packets coming from the source and subnetwork to the left CTmr Time since the cache entry was originally recorded Time is noted in hours h minutes m and seconds s Age Value that indicates the remaining life for the cache entry Time is recorded in minutes m and seconds s The
230. ber of ICMP time stamp reply packets that were received messages Number of ICMP packets that were received outAddrMaskReps Number of ICMP address mask reply packets that were sent outAddrMasks Number of ICMP address mask request packets that were sent outDatagrams Number of UDP packets that the router sent outDestUnreach Number of ICMP destination unreachable packets that were sent outEchoReps Number of ICMP echo reply packets that were sent outEchos Number of ICMP echo request packets that were sent outErrors Number of ICMP packets sent that were dropped due to system resource errors outMsgs Number of ICMP packets that were sent outParmProbs Number of ICMP parameter problem packets that were sent outRedirects Number of ICMP redirect packets that were sent outSrcQuenchs outTimeExcds outTimeStampReps outTimeStamps Number o Number o Number o Number of ICMP source quench packets that were sent ICMP time exceeded packets that were sent ICMP time stamp reply packets that were sent ICMP time stamp request packets that were sent oot fe ts SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL SNMP You can manage the system using a Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP based external management application called the SNMP manager that sends requests to the system The SNMP agent provides access to the collection of information about the system called Management Information Bases MIBs Your views
231. bsequently change the broadcast address a f you are using RIP 2 for the interface you must enable RIP compatibility mode if you want the system to use the advertisement list instead of the multicast address for RIP updates See ip rip compatibilityMode earlier in this chapter for more information a Toadd an advertisement address on other platforms you must remove the directed broadcast address if you only want the address that you added to be used for RIP advertisements Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interfaces Index number of the interfaces One or more Previous for which you want to add the selectable entry if advertisement address interface applicable indexes a fora list of selectable interface indexes Advertisement Selected IP address to add tothe A valid IP address address list of advertisement addresses 462 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP ip rip remove Advertisement v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Removes an advertisement address from the list of RIP advertisement addresses for an interface Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip ri re Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interfaces Index number of the interfaces for which you want to remove the advertisement address Advertisement Advertisement address that you address want to remove a Oneor more selectable
232. but it does not process incoming RIP packets a Enabled The interface broadcasts RIP updates and processes incoming RIP packets Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interfaces Index number of the interface for m Selected Previous which you want to set the RIP interfaces entry if mode applicable L all a fora list of selectable indexes RIP mode Selected RIP Version 1 mode that m disabled learn or Version 1 determines how the interface earn current handles RIP 1 packets and a value updates a advertise a enabled RIP mode How the interface handles RIP2 m disabled disabled or Version 2 packets and updates current a learn value a advertise a enabled management ip rip mode 175 Management IP RIP Mode Example Select menu option management ip rip mode Select IP interfaces l all 1 1 Interface 1 Enter RIP Version 1 mode disabled learn learn disabled Interface 1 Enter RIP Version 2 mode disabled learn learn disabled 176 CHAPTER 5 OuT OF BAND MANAGEMENT management ip rip v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 Statistics Displays general RIP statistics Valid Minimum Abbreviation mip rip s Fields in the Management IP RIP Statistics Display Field Description queries Number of queries routeChanges Number of route changes management ip ping v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 management ip ping 177 Tries to reach or ping a specified destination
233. by evenly distributing interfaces v 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 puwis 3900 Important Considerations 9300 ma The value even directs the system to hash the client s MAC address to determine the source network for forwarded packets This arrangement evenly distributes the interface among those on the network a The system implements your selection immediately You can view the UDP Helper configuration when you configure the forwarding address ip udpHelper interface sequential v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Configures UDP Helper to support overlapped IP interfaces by distributing the interfaces sequentially Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipuis Important Considerations a The value sequential directs the system to assign each overlapped IP interface in turn as the source network for forwarded packets a The system implements your selection immediately You can view the UDP Helper configuration when you configure the forwarding address 450 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip routing For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Controls whether the system forwards or discards IP packets that are addressed to other hosts Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip routi Important Considerations a When you enable IP routing the system acts as a standard IP router it forwards IP p
234. c For more information about implementing roving analysis on your network see the Implementation Guide for your system 756 CHAPTER 24 ROVING ANALYSIS Menu Structure The commands that you can use depend on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardware options that are configured for your system The following diagram shows the complete list of commands for all systems See the checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter for whether your system supports the command Top Level Menu system module management ethernet fddi bridge ip ipx appletalk qos snmp analyzer log script logout disconnect analyzer menu display add remove start stop analyzer display 757 analyzer display Displays the roving analysis configuration showing which ports are designated as analyzer ports and which bridge ports are currently being v 3500 monitored v 9000 ace tose Y 9400 Valid Minimum Abbreviation and V 3900 f i Fields in the Analyzer Displa 9300 Field Description Ports configured as List of analyzer ports on the system including the port analyzer ports number and MAC address These are the ports that can accept traffic that is mirrored from a monitored port Analyzer ports are typically connected to a network analyzer or probe There may be multiple analyzer ports defined on the switch Port Analyzer port number Type M
235. ce IP address mask 695 702 source socket verification AppleTalk 681 speed Ethernet ports 212 213 split horizon 457 SRF Status Report Frames and FDDI stations 224 228 and lerAlarm 242 state STP mode VLANs 365 state of IP interface 395 static routes defining for IP 422 defining for IPX 618 static servers defining IPX 624 statistics DDP Datagram Delivery Protocol 683 displaying IP UDP and ICMP 186 Ethernet 204 208 general IP 482 782 INDEX CMP Internet Control Message Protocol 187 483 P interface 418 PX forwarding 653 PX interface 655 PX RIP 651 PX SAP 652 NBP Name Binding Protocol 686 OSPF Open Shortest Path First 603 OSPF soft restart 570 QoS Quality of Service interval for 738 QoS receive 739 QoS transmit 741 RTMP Routing Table Maintenance Protocol 684 trunk 305 329 UDP User Datagram Protocol 187 483 VLAN virtual LAN 341 ZIP Zone Information Protocol 685 Statistics AppleTalk protocol 683 to 686 STP Spanning Tree Protocol stpMode 365 stub default metrics OSPF 571 to 573 subnet masks defining 404 406 displaying 399 for VLANs 349 summary information trunk 301 304 328 VLAN 338 system baseline display 90 system baseline set 91 system console access 73 system console webAccess 71 system diagErrlog 115 system ID 69 system information displaying 69 129 system name displaying 69 setting 101 135 136 system reboot 123 system serial port 93 96 system sntp define 117 system sntp d
236. ce index Index number of the m One or more IP interface whose configured indexes summary l all information you want to display a fora list of selectable indexes Fields in the IP Interface Detail Display Field Description ARP proxy Broadcast address Directed broadcast ICMP redirect ICMP router discovery Index IP address Whether ARP proxy is enabled or disabled for the specified interface Broadcast address for the specified interface Whether the forwarding of a directed broadcast all 1s in the host portion of the address is enabled or disabled for the specified interface A directed broadcast is a packet that is sent to a specific network or series of networks Whether ICMP redirect is enabled or disabled for the specified interface Whether the ICMP Router Discovery is enabled or disabled for the specified interface Index number that is associated with the interface IP address of the interface chosen from the range of addresses that the central agency assigned to your organization This address is specific to your network and system Field Description Preference Whether there is a preference being used for the specified interface If ICMP router discovery is enabled the system uses the routing interface with the highest preference level State State of the IP interface It indicates whether the Subnet mask Type Index MaxAdvinterval MinAdvinterval Holdtime State
237. ce name n pattern U se quotation marks around m Upto 79 any string with embedded alphanumeric spaces characters Use double quotes to enter an empty string Fields in the IPX Server Display Field Description Age Number of seconds that have elapsed since the last time a server in the table sent a packet Hops Number of networks that must be crossed to reach the server The maximum number is 15 Interface Index number of the interface Name Name for the server that you define Network 4 byte IPX network address of the server Node 6 byte MAC address of the server that forwards packets to the segment Socket 2 byte socket address of the server that receives service requests Type Type of service that the server provides The IPX protocol defines various types of services One common type is 0x4 which is for a file server For more information on IPX type values consult your Novell documentation 624 CHAPTER 20 IPX ipx server static For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Defines a static IPX server Y 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 ipx ser st 3900 Important Considerations 9300 a Static servers remain in the table until you remove them until you remove the corresponding interface or until you remove the route to the corresponding network address a A static server must have an IPX network address that corresponds to a configured interface or to a st
238. ch sends an advertisement to the other virtual routers that one of them must assume Master responsibilities immediately Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN Index number of the virtual a Index number of alP Index interface LAN VLAN on which you virtual LAN VLAN number index want to define the virtual defined on the of first router system available VLAN a fora list of selectable indexes VRID Virtual router identifier 1 255 1 Identifies the virtual router that you want to define on the LAN IP VRRP Remove Example Select menu option ip vrrp remove Enter VLAN interface index 2 3 all 2 Enter virtual router ID 1 1 v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip vrrp mode For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Enables or disables a configured virtual router Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip v mode Important Considerations a You must configure the virtual router before you can enable it a You cannot modify or remove a virtual router that is enabled you must disable the virtual router before you can change or delete the virtual router Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN Index number of the virtual a Index number of alP Index interface LAN VLAN on which you virtual LAN VLAN number index want to define the virtual defined on the of first router system available VLAN L all a fora list of selectable indexes VRID Virtua
239. cified default or interface current value ip ospf interface hello v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip ospf interface hello 553 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Sets the interface Hello interval Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o i he Important Considerations a Hello packets inform other routers that the sending router is still active on the network a If a router does not send Hello packets for a period of time specified by the dead interval the router is considered inactive by its neighbors a The Hello packet interval must be consistent throughout the autonomous system Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interface Index number of one or more w One or more all factory interfaces for which you want valid IP interface default or to set the Hello interval Hello packet Interval in seconds at which interval the interface transmits Hello packets index numbers C all a fora list of selectable indexes 1 65535 seconds current value 10 factory default or current value 554 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf interface v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 retransmit For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Specifies the OSPF link state advertisement LSA retransmit interval for an interface Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipoir Options Prompt Description Possible Val
240. ckets Valid Minimum Abbreviation b po a flushd Important Consideration a f the bridge is power cycled reset or rebooted the address table is automatically flushed Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN Index numbers of the VLANs to m One or more interface which the desired bridge ports valid VLAN indexes belong indexes only if in all allClosed s mode a fora list of selectable VLANs Bridge ports Bridge ports for which you a One or more want to remove all addresses valid bridge port numbers a to display a port summary oe tte e toee VW TRUNKS You can configure a system to aggregate multiple network links into a single trunk With trunking you can create high speed point to point or multipoint connections without changing or replacing existing cabling In addition trunking provides automatic point to point redundancy between two devices Redundant links normally have one link disabled by Spanning Tree to prevent looping trunking utilizes both links This chapter provides guidelines and other key information about how to configure trunking in your system The system treats trunked bridge ports in the same way that it treats normal individual bridge ports Also all higher level network functions including Spanning Tree algorithms virtual LANs VLANs and Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP management do not distinguish a trunk from any other netw
241. col NBP statistics v 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9000 ota 9400 Fields in the AppleTalk NBP Statistics Display 3900 eee 9300 Field Description inBcastReqs Number of NBP Broadcast Requests that have been received inErrors Number of NBP packets that have been received and rejected for any error inFwdReqs Number of NBP Forward Requests that have been received inLkupReplies Number of NBP Lookup Replies that have been received inLkupReqs Number of NBP Lookup Requests that have been received TRAFFIC POLICY Chapter 22 Quality of Service QoS and RSVP 2 oo fey e 2 PT E d gt QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP Quality of Service QoS and the Resource Reservation Protocol RSVP are advanced features that provide policy based services Policy based services establish various grades of network services to accommodate the needs of different types of traffic for example multimedia video and file backups QoS software relies on RSVP to provide admission control This chapter provides guidelines and other key information about how to configure QoS and RSVP in your system QoS and RSVP features include classifiers controls and RSVP parameters Configure these features in the following order You first enter the command qos to define how the system groups packets so that it can schedule them with the appropriate service level You then enter the command gos control define to assign rate
242. ct path s number of the filter that you want to unassign Numbers of one or more bridge ports from which you want to unassign the selected filter Identifiers of one or more paths from which you want to unassign the selected filter for a list of valid filter identifiers 1 n all for a list of valid ports txA txM rxA rxM rxl all for a list of valid paths selected filter Current valid selected bridge port Current valid selected path bridge packetFilter unassign 385 Bridge Packet Filter Unassign Examples 3500 The unassignment is from the transmit all txa paths on port 1 Select menu option bridge packetFilter unassign Select filter 1 1 1 Select bridge port 1 1 Select path s txA rxA all txA rxA txA 386 CHAPTER 15 PACKET FILTERS bridge packetFilter portGroup list v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays a list of currently defined port groups Valid Minimum Abbreviation b pa p 1 Bridge Packet Filter Port Group List Example Select menu option bridge packetFilter portGroup list Port Group 1 Marketing Port group mask bit 15 Port Group 2 Sales Port group mask bit 32 In the example the system has two port groups defined Marketing and Sales The display shows the group id group name if any and group mask bridge packetFilter portGroup display v 3500 v 900
243. cting a Station Connection This Connection Is Rejected If This Bit Is Set Connection Rules A A 0 Undesirable peer connection that creates twisted primary and secondary rings notify station management SMT A B 1 Normal trunk ring peer connection A S 2 Undesirable peer connection that creates a wrapped ring notify SMT 226 CHAPTER 8 FIBER DISTRIBUTED DATA INTERFACE FDDI This Connection Is Rejected If This Bit Is Set Connection Rules A M 3 Tree connection with possible redundancy The node may not go to Thru state in Configuration Management CFM In a single MAC node Port B has precedence with defaults for connecting to a Port M B A 4 Normal trunk ring peer connection B B Undesirable peer connection that creates twisted primary and secondary rings notify SMT B S 6 Undesirable peer connection that creates a wrapped ring notify SMT B M 7 Tree connection with possible redundancy The node may not go to Thru state in CFM In a single MAC node Port B has precedence with defaults for connecting to a Port M M A 12 Tree connection with possible redundancy M B 13 Tree connection with possible redundancy M S 14 Normal tree connection M M 15 Connection that allows one system port to be connected to another system port fddi station tNotify v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Sets the timer used in the Neighbor Notification protocol to indicate the interval of time between generation of Neighb
244. cy Protocol Protocol for example RIP Route Route affects the policy Source Source router a11 is from all routers Type Whether the policy is an import or export policy Weight Administrative weight 1 through 16 464 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP ip rip policy detail v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays detailed information about RIP routing policies Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip ri pol det Important Considerations a This display contains the summary information and two additional fields Interface and Metric a Route policies are classified as follows mport policies import routing information from what RIP learns from a router neighbor to the unified routing table You can also import routing information from Open Shortest Path First OSPF E amp xport policies send information from the routing table to RIP and RIP routers which controls what is going out on the wire to the RIP domain You can also export from the routing table to OSPF Fields in the IP RIP Policy Detail Display Field Description Action Action for the route accept or reject Index Index number of the policy Interface Interface that is associated with the policy a11 applies to all interfaces Metric Assigned metric a value 0 through 16 for RIP 1 or RIP 2 metrics can use options and Protocol Protocol for example RIP Rout
245. d Sequence number of the LSA used to detect older duplicate LSAs Type 3 Destination network s IP address m Type 4 ASBR s OSPF router ID Cost to reach the network a For a For Type 3 destination network s IP address mask Type 4 Notused must be 0 Originati ng router ID ip ospf linkStateData external v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip ospf linkStateData external 563 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays external network link state advertisements LSAs in the link state database Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipole Important Consideration a To view link state database information OSPF must be active enabled Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default LSID Link State ID in the form of the Valid IP address 0 0 0 0 factory destination network s IP default or address current value LSID mask Link State ID bit mask Link State ID bit 0 0 0 0 factory Example 255 0 0 0 mask default or current value Fields in the IP OSPF Link State Data External Display Field Description Fwd Address Forwarding address for data traffic to the advertised destination LS Age Time in seconds since LSA was originated LS Seq Sequence number of the LSA used to detect older duplicate LSAs LSID IP network number Metric Cost to reach advertised destination Network Mask IP address mask for the advertised destination Rou
246. d 32 VRRP MIB New Master 33 VRRP MIB Authentication Failure 35 QOS MIB QOS INTRUDER Trap Enter the trap destination address 158 102 31 22 Enter the trap numbers to enabl 1 8 13 29 32 33 35 all 7 1 8 13 29 32 33 35 35 196 CHAPTER 6 SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL SNMP snmp trap remove Removes a destination so that no SNMP traps are reported to that destination Y 3500 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation y 9400 snt r 3900 Important Consideration 9300 a When the system removes the destination address it displays the previous menu snmp trap flush 197 snmp trap flush Removes all SNMP trap reporting destinations 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation Y 9000 snt f 9400 Important Consideration Y 3900 a When you flush the SNMP trap reporting destinations you remove all 9300 trap destination address information for the SNMP agent 198 CHAPTER 6 SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL SNMP snmp trap smtProxyTraps v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Controls SNMP s ability to alert you by means of an SNMP to SMT proxy that a significant event is occurring in the Fiber Distributed Data Interface FDDI station statistics Valid Minimum Abbreviation snt s Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default SNMP to SMT Whether the SMT proxy a enabled disabled proxy mode agent is enabled or disabled disabled
247. d Minimum Abbreviation ip route s Important Considerations Before you can define static routes you must define at least one IP interface See ip interface define 3500 9000 Layer 3 earlier in this chapter for more information For the CoreBuilder 3500 you can define up to 256 static routes For the other platforms you can define up to 64 static routes Static routes remain in the table you must remove them before you can remove the corresponding interface Static routes take precedence over dynamically learned routes to the same destination Static routes are included in periodic Routing Information Protocol RIP updates that the system sends Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Destination IP IP address of the A valid IP address address destination network subnetwork or host for this route Subnet mask Subnet mask for the A valid subnet mask Based on specified IP address specified IP address Gateway IP IP address of the A valid router address address gateway that this route uses ip route remove v 3500 vy 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Deletes an existing route Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip route r Important Consideration a When you enter the command the system deletes the route immediately from the routing table You are not prompted to confirm the deletion Options Prompt Description Possible Va
248. d VINES are registered trademarks of Banyan Worldwide DEC DECnet and PATHWORKS are registered trademarks of Compaq Computer Corporation OpenView is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Company AIX IBM and NetView are registered trademarks and NetBIOS is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Internet Explorer Microsoft MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Netscape Netscape Navigator and the Netscape N and Ship s Wheel logos are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation in the United States and other countries IPX Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell Inc Sun and SunNet Manager are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc Xerox and XNS are trademarks of Xerox Corporation UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Ltd All other company and product names may be trademarks of the respective companies with which they are associated PART CONTENTS ABOUT THIS GUIDE Using This Book 20 Finding Specific Information in This Guide 20 Command Information 22 Recommendations for Entering Commands 23 Conventions 23 Documentation Comments 25 Year 2000 Compliance 25 GETTING STARTED ADMINISTRATION OVERVIEW Administration Console Overview 29 CoreBuilder 9000 System Management Overview 30 Management and Data Channels 31 CoreBuilder 9000 Management Featur
249. d because of a user defined packet filter on its transmit all path Number of frames that this bridge port discarded because the transmitting bridge port was not in the forwarding state Field Description txFrames txMcastFilters 3500 and 9000 L3 txMtuExcDiscs 3500 and 9000 L3 Number of frames that this port transmitted to its segment This object counts a frame transmitted on the interface that corresponds to this port only if the frame is for a protocol that the local bridging function is processing includes bridge management frames Number of frames that this port discarded because of a user defined packet filter on its transmit multicast path Number of frames that this port discarded because of excessive size 288 bridge port multicastLimit v 3500 v 9000 vV 9400 V 3900 v 9300 CHAPTER 10 BRIDGE PORT PARAMETERS Sets a threshold value on a bridge port that affects the per second forwarding rate of multicast or broadcast traffic that originates on the segment connected to that port Valid Minimum Abbreviation b pom Important Considerations You can use this command to configure the same setting on multiple ports simultaneously When you specify multiple port numbers the system prompts you to choose the setting and then applies it to all of the ports A value of zero indicates that no limit is configured If you want to configure a limit for a trunk be sure to apply it to t
250. dThreshold IcService path port menu display erAlarm erCutoff abel path stationMode menu display modify 224 CHAPTER 8 FIBER DISTRIBUTED DATA INTERFACE FDDI fddi station display v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Displays FDDI station information The system display shows the station configuration status reporting and the most pertinent statistics about general station activity and errors Valid Minimum Abbreviation fd station d Fields in the FDDI Station Display Field Description configuration connectPolicy ecmState ports remoteDisconnect station ID statusReporting tnotify traceMaxExp Attachment configuration for the station or concentrator Values can be Thru Isolated Wrap_A and Wrap_B Bit string that represents the connection policies in effect ona station How connection policies translate into bits is described in fddi station connectPolicy in this chapter This value is user defined Current state of the ECM state machine Ports numbers assigned to the FDDI module The FDDI port numbers change depending on the configuration of your system Flag indicating that the station was remotely disconnected from the network as a result of receiving an fddiSMTAction with the value of disconnect ina Parameter Management Frame PMF A station requires a Connect Action to rejoin the network and clear the flag Unique identifier for the FDDI station Whether
251. dance with specified IP determines which bits in the IP the bits that are address address are interpreted as the used for network network number the subnetwork number number and the host number subnetwork and Each IP address bit that corresponds host number to a 1 in the subnet mask is in the network subnetwork part of the address Each IP address bit that corresponds to a 0 is in the host part of the IP address Interface type Whether to use router port based port vlan routing or VLAN based routing vlan VLAN mode Whether the system removes all a n no y for router VLANs and recreates the default port based VLAN to enable port based routing y yes routing Bridge port for Port to use for port based routing 1 n router may designate only one port for a list of port based routing selectable ports VLAN interface Index number of the IP VLAN thatis m A selectable Next index for associated with the IP interface for VLAN index available VLAN based a VLAN based IP interface you 2 f list of index routing must assign this number Not a fora listo number selectable applicable if you have more than VLAN one VLAN indexes ip interface define 3500 9000 Layer 3 405 IP Interface Define Example Port based Routing Enter IP address 158 101 1 1 Enter subnet mask 255 255 0 0 255 255 255 0 Enter interface type vlan port vlan port VLAN mode must be changed to allClosed to support this interface T
252. data Instead it receives only the data from the ports to be monitored If you have enabled the Spanning Tree Protocol STP on the port STP is automatically disabled If the physical port configuration changes in the system that is if you remove or rearrange modules the MAC address of the analyzer port remains fixed If you replace the module with the analyzer port with a module of a different media type the roving analysis port RAP configuration for that port is cleared When you configure a port that is part of a virtual LAN VLAN as an analyzer port a warning is displayed because adding the port removes the port from all VLANs When the port is restored when you remove the analyzer port it becomes a member of the default VLAN If the probe is attached to a 10 Mbps Ethernet analyzer port and the roving analysis port RAP is monitoring a 100 Mbps Ethernet port with a sustained traffic rate greater than 10 Mbps the analyzer may not see all of the frames After you enter a bridge port number the system displays the MAC address of the analyzer port Record this information for setting up the port that you want to monitor On the CoreBuilder 9000 the port to which the analyzer is attached and the port you wish to monitor must be on the same blade Trunked ports and resilient link ports can not be configured as analyzer ports Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Bridge port Number of the bridge port
253. ddress to use in A valid IP address the entry MAC address Hardware address to A valid MAC address use in the entry in the format XX XX XX XX XX XX a fora list of selectable indexes Management IP ARP Static Example Select interface index 1 2 2 Enter IP address 158 101 12 12 Enter MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 01 170 CHAPTER 5 OuT OF BAND MANAGEMENT management ip arp v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 remove Deletes an entry from the ARP cache for example if the MAC address has changed Valid Minimum Abbreviation m ip ar rem Important Considerations a When you enter the command the system deletes the entry immediately from the cache You are not prompted to confirm the deletion a f necessary the system subsequently uses ARP to find the new MAC address that corresponds to that IP address Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP address IP address that is A valid IP address associated with the entry that you want to delete management ip arp flushAl 171 management ip arp Deletes all entries from the ARP cache flushAll Valid Minimum Abbreviation J 3500 m ip ar flushA 9000 9400 Important Considerations a This command applies to the CoreBuilder 3500 only other platforms 3900 US ip arp flush To flush dynamic entries only see the 9300 management ip arp flushDynamic command next a When you enter the command the system deletes all en
254. de the following a n Network is unreachable a H Host is unreachable a P Protocol is unreachable a F Fragmentation is needed a lt n gt Unknown packet type a To interrupt the command press Enter Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Host name or Host name or IP address of the A valid hostname 0 0 0 0 IP address destination to which you want to or IP address trace a route Management IP Trace Route Example Select menu option ip traceRoute Enter host name IP address 0 0 0 0 158 101 101 40 Press Enter key to interrupt Traceroute to 158 101 101 40 30 hops max 28 bytes packet 1 158 101 117 254 9 ms 22 ms 5 ms 2 158 101 112 254 8 ms 22 ms 8 ms 3 158 107 96 22 7 ms 22 ms 7 ms 4 158 101 101 40 7 ms 23 ms 6 ms 184 CHAPTER 5 OuT OF BAND MANAGEMENT management ip advancedTraceRoute v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 Traces a route to a host with one or more of the advanced traceRoute options Valid Minimum Abbreviation m ip advancedT Important Considerations a When you specify a host name the host name and its associated IP address must be configured on a network name server Also you must add the IP address on the name server to the list of name server addresses that are associated with the network domain name See ip dns define in Chapter 16 for more information a To interrupt the command press Enter Options Possible Prompt Descriptio
255. defined resilient ports on the system link Define Whether you want to define y yes n another another link link mn Reboot the Resilient links that you define my yes y system do not take effect until you nio reboot the system 336 CHAPTER 13 RESILIENT LINKS bridge link remove 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 2 switching modules only Removes a previously defined resilient link pair You can remove one or more resilient link pairs with this command Valid Minimum Abbreviation blir Important Consideration a Removing a link requires that you reboot the system Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Resilient link Index number of the resilient Depends on index link pair that you want to configured links remove a fora list of selectable link indexes Bridge Link Remove Example Select menu option bridge link remove Select link index s 1 2 all 2 The configuration of the ports will be modified The system must be rebooted to complete resilient link configuration This may take a few minutes Are you sure you want to reboot the system n y yl y ette E E d gt VIRTUAL LANs VLANs A virtual LAN VLAN is a logical definition of a network work group It is roughly equivalent to a broadcast domain A VLAN interface is your system s point of attachment to a given VLAN A VLAN and a VLAN interface ar
256. dentify the index of the VLAN that it was unable to create The system removes all bridge ports from the VLAN that it could not restore from NV data but does maintain the previously stored NV data a The difference in VLAN resource usage is based on the following In CoreBuilder 3500 Release 1 2 0 and CoreBuilder 9000 Release 2 0 0 all bridge ports were not VLAN aware tagging aware unless they were assigned to a VLAN that has one or more tagged ports This behavior is associated with the VLAN aware mode of taggedVlanPorts If you see the VLAN resource error message you can restore your VLANs by issuing this command and setting the VLAN aware mode to taggedVLANPorts If VLANs are already defined the system prompts you to reboot the system to put the new mode into effect As of CoreBuilder 3500 Release 2 0 0 and CoreBuilder 9000 Release 3 0 0 all bridge ports become VLAN aware after a software update or after an NV data reset and do not have to be explicitly tagged in order to forward tagged frames This behavior is associated with the default VLAN aware mode of aliPorts If you do not see the VLAN internal resource error message maintain the VLAN aware mode of aliPorts bridge vlan vianAwareMode 367 a The VLAN aware mode reflects the difference in tagged frame ingress rules between releases Therefore even if the system can accommodate the number of VLANs from the earlier release be aware that it begins using different ingress
257. der 3500 and CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 switching modules are valid only under one of the following conditions If the VLANs are defined for the same protocol type or for the type called unspecified and do not share any ports Example IP VLAN1 has ports 1 through 6 and IP VLAN2 has ports 7 through 12 If the VLANs are explicitly defined for different protocol types In this case the VLANs may share ports Example An IP VLAN and an IPX VLAN both use ports 2 through 4 As of Release 3 0 0 the CoreBuilder 3500 system and CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 modules support one of three origins for a VLAN If you explicitly create the VLAN with a bridge vlan define operation the origin of the VLAN is static If you create a router port IP interface for which the system automatically creates a router port VLAN the origin of the router port VLAN is router If you enable dynamic port based VLAN configuration via the GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP the origin is GVRP 342 CHAPTER 14 VIRTUAL LANs VLANs GVRP is based on IEEE 802 1Q and allows for dynamic configuration of port based VLANs GVRP can help you simplify the management of VLAN configurations in larger networks Use the command bridge port gvrpState to explicitly enable GVRP on the participating bridge ports and use the command bridge gvrpState to enable the bridge GVRP state for the entire system The bridge GVRP state enables you to control GVRP on the system without lo
258. der of division operation as integer Prompt Description Possible Values Default Administrative Metric value for this policy 1 16 1 weight higher values have higher priority RIP Import Policy Conditions for Specified Interfaces Source Route Router address mask Action Description Specified Specified accept Accept specified route from specified router route mask source router on specified interfaces with or without metric adjustments ete Specified all 0 0 0 0 accept Accept all routes from specified router router on specified interfaces with or without metric adjustments all all Specified accept Accept specified route on specified routers route mask interfaces with or without metric adjustments all all accept Accept all routes on specified interfaces with or without metric adjustments Specified Specified reject Reject specified route from specified router route mask router on specified interfaces Metrics are not applicable Specified all reject Reject all routes from specified router router on specified interfaces all Specified reject Reject specified route from all routers route mask on specified interfaces all all reject Reject all routes on specified interfaces CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP RIP Export Policy Conditions for Specified Interfaces Source Protocol Router Route Action Description RI
259. dex number of the interfaces m One or more Previous for which you want to set the selectable entry if poison reverse mode interface indexes applicable a all a fora list of selectable interface indexes Poison Reverse Whether you want to a disabled Current mode implement poison reverse for nabled value the selected interface 458 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP ip rip routeAggregation VY 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Mode For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Sets the route aggregation mode Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip ri ro Important Considerations a Route aggregation mode determines which route table entries are sent during a RIP Version 2 update a f route aggregation mode is enabled RIP 2 can function like RIP 1 and collapse route table entries for all subnets of a directly connected network For example if route aggregation is enabled and the system is advertising subnets 150 100 31 0 and 150 100 32 0 only the entry for network 150 100 0 0 is sent in the update With RIP Version 2 you must enable route aggregation mode if you want the interface to collapse the route table entries and function like RIP 1 a f route aggregation mode is disabled the default a RIP 2 update sends all routing table entries Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interfaces Index number of the interfaces m One or more Previous for which you want to set
260. dge packetFilter v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 create custom For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Creates a custom packet filter using the built in editor Valid Minimum Abbreviation b pa c c Important Considerations m You can create custom filters to add filtering logic based on the content of the packet a The built in editor is a simple one line at a time editor that supports a short list of EMACS style editing commands a Save your work periodically with Ctrl w When you press Esc to exit the built in editor the system examines the filter s syntax If the syntax is correct the filter is loaded into the switch s non volatile memory Incorrect syntax filters are not loaded into non volatile memory and are not saved across editor sessions a After you create the filter edit it using bridge packetFilter edit as described later in this chapter a The alternative to creating a custom packet filter using the built in editor is to create the packet filter on an external system and transfer it across the network into the switch See bridge packetFilter load later in this chapter a You can also use the Filter Builder component of the Web Management application to create custom filters a On CoreBuilder 3500 systems you can load the filter on to the switch directly from Filter Builder a On CoreBuilder 9000 system you must save the filter to an ASCII file and then download th
261. display Displays the AppleTalk Address Resolution Protocol AARP cache v 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9000 ae 9400 Fields in the AppleTalk AARP Display 3900 9300 Field Description AARP address AppleTalk protocol address Age secs Age of the ARP entry in seconds Interface Index number of the interface on which the address was learned MAC address Hardware address that corresponds to the AppleTalk address appletalk aarp remove 675 appletalk aarp For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only remove Removes an AppleTalk Address Resolution Protocol AARP cache entry 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9000 ee 9400 Options 3900 i ES _Htf__ses ss 9300 Prompt Description Possible Values Default AARP AARP address that you want to Any valid AARP address remove from the system s address AARP cache 676 CHAPTER 21 APPLETALK appletalk aarp flush For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Deletes all AppleTalk Address Resolution Protocol AARP entries from the y 3500 system s AARP cache v 9000 9400 Valid Minimum Abbreviation apaf 3900 9300 Important Consideration a The system deletes all AARP entries immediately after you enter the command You are not prompted to confirm the deletion appletalk zone display network 677 appletalk zone For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only display network Displays the AppleTalk Zone table indexed by netwo
262. e TTL value of 10 Select menu option ip advancedTraceRoute Enter host IP address 158 101 101 27 Enter maximum Time to Live ttl 1 255 30 10 Enter Destination Port number 30000 65535 33434 Enter the number of probes to be sent at each ttl level 1 10 3 Enter time sec to wait for a response 1 10 3 Enter the packet size bytes 28 4096 28 Configure TRACEROUTE sourceAddress n y y Index Interface address 0 Best interface default al 158 101 727 151 2 158 101 10 1 Select interface index 0 2 0 Enter Numeric mode disabled enabled disabled Press Enter key to interrupt Traceroute to 158 101 101 27 10 hops max 28 bytes packet 1 158 101 117 254 12 ms 7 ms 5 ms 2 158 101 112 254 51 ms 9 ms 7 ms 3 158 101 96 22 21 ms 15 ms 6 ms 4 158 101 101 27 18 ms 90 ms 80 ms 186 CHAPTER 5 OuT OF BAND MANAGEMENT management ip v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 Statistics Displays different types of IP statistics general statistics and those specific to the User Datagram Protocol UDP or the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP Valid Minimum Abbreviation m ip sta Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Statistics Type of IP statistics that you want ip ip to display a udp icmp m all Fields in the Management IP Statistics Display Field Description forwDatagrams Number of datagrams that the IP station tried to forward fra
263. e disabled enabled enabled Trunk definition complete Define another trunk y n n y Select mac type Fast_Ethernet Gigabit_Ethernet Select up to 8 ports 1 12 1 6 Enter trunk name Trunk2 Enter TCMP state disabled enabled Fast_Ethernet enabled Fast_Ethernet nabled enabled The configuration of the ports will be modified The system must be rebooted to complete trunk configuration n y yl y 312 CHAPTER 11 TRUNKS bridge trunk modify v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 Changes a trunk in either of two ways Modifies a trunk s characteristics for example a Fast Ethernet operating mode or the Trunk Control Message Protocol TCMP state Adds or removes a port from the trunk as long as you maintain at least one of the original ports in the trunk Valid Minimum Abbreviation btm Important Considerations Keep at least one port that you defined in the original trunk To completely redefine a trunk configuration remove the trunk and define a new one You cannot modify add or remove ports that are part of different trunks from the trunk that you are modifying To avoid configuration errors do not modify Fiber Distributed Data Interface FDDI station mode port pairs when any of the ports in the pair are members of a trunk If you have more than one media type on your system for example Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet you are prompted for a media type b
264. e Route that the policy affects Source Source router a11 is from all routers Type Whether the policy is an import or export policy Weight Administrative weight 1 through 16 ip rip policy define v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Defines an import or export route policy for RIP Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip ri pol def Important Considerations a Route policies are classified as follows mport policies import routing information from what RIP learns from a router neighbor to the unified routing table You can also import routing information from Open Shortest Path First OSPF E amp xport policies send information from the routing table to RIP and RIP routers which controls what is going out on the wire to the RIP domain You can also export from the routing table to OSPF a The system assigns an index number to each policy and takes into account all route policies set on the system RIP and OSPF You can define up to 128 routing policies total shared between OSPF and RIP policies a Certain conditions are associated with import and export policies See the import and export policy tables that follow the Options table for lists of the conditions a You can set up an IP RIP or OSPF import or export policy to accept or advertise the default route as long as the default route exists in the routing table When you define a policy you are always
265. e SNMP Manager range or enable sequence of valid trap s a all a fora list of available trap numbers snmp trap addModify 195 Procedure From the top level of the Administration Console enter snmp trap addModify The system displays the list of traps Enter the IP address of the SNMP manager destination address Enter one or more trap numbers for that destination a11 or to get a list of selectable values SNMP Trap addModify Example 3500 Select menu option snmp trap addModify Trap Descriptions Trap Description 1 MIB II Coldstart 2 MIB II Link Down 3 MIB II Link Up 4 MIB II Authentication Failure 5 Bridge MIB New Root 6 7 8 Bridge MIB Topology Change 3C System MIB System Overtemperature 3C System MIB Power Supply Failure 13 3C System MIB Address Threshold 14 3C System MIB System Fan Failure 15 3C FDDI MIB SMT Hold Condition 16 3C FDDI MIB SMT Peer Wrap Condition 17 3C FDDI MIB MAC Duplicate Address Condition 18 3C FDDI MIB MAC Frame Error Condition 19 3C FDDI MIB MAC Not Copied Condition 20 3C FDDI MIB MAC Neighbor Change 21 3C FDDI MIB MAC Path Change 22 3C FDDI MIB Port LER Condition 23 3C FDDI MIB Port Undesired Connection 24 3C FDDI MIB Port EB Error Condition 25 3C FDDI MIB Port Path Change 26 RMON MIB Rising Alarm 27 RMON MIB Falling Alarm 28 POLL MIB Response Received 29 POLL MIB Respons ot Receive
266. e analogous to an IP subnetwork and an IP interface For more information about VLANs see the Implementation Guide for your system Menu Structure The commands that you can use depend on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardware options that are configured for your system The following diagram shows the complete list of commands for all systems See the checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter for whether your system supports the command Top Level Menu bridge menu vlan menu system display summary module ipFragmentation detail management ipxSnapTranslation define ethernet addressThreshold modify fddi agingTime remove gt bridge spanningTree mode ip gvrpState stpMode ipx cos vlanAwareMode appletalk port qos multicast snmp packetFilter analyzer vlan log trunk script mpla logout link disconnect The bridge vlan stpMode command is available only when you enable allClosed mode on the CoreBuilder 3500 system or the CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 switching modules The command does not appear when you are using the default VLAN mode allOpen or when you use allClosed mode on a Layer 2 system or module 338 CHAPTER 14 VIRTUAL LANs VLANs bridge vlan summary v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 Displays a summary of VLAN information In a summary report the system displays the ports and protocols that are assigned to
267. e auto learn address mode option enables auto address learning for the specified VRID If a new interface is added to the VLAN on a primary virtual router the new IP address is sent out in VRRP advertisements so that the Backup routers in auto learn mode can learn the new address without having to manually add the new address to each backup router The smaller the advertisement interval the smaller the failover time if the master fails The advertisement interval must be the same across the set of VRRP routers that are associated with a single VRID Backup routers must have the same advertisement interval as the Master router Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN Index number of the Index number of an IP Index interface virtual LAN VLAN on virtual LAN VLAN that is number of index which you want to defined on the system first available define the virtual a fora list of selectable VEAN router indexes VRID Virtual router 1 255 1 identifier Identifies the virtual router that you want to define on the LAN Virtual Type of virtual router w Primary Primary router type that you want to Backup define Address Method by which the m auto learn auto learn mode virtual router you a P address want to define learns its IP addresses ip vrro modify 497 Prompt Description Possible Values Default Advertise Time between virtual 1 255 seconds 1 interval router advertisements Preempt Whet
268. e configured into your system See the mplementation Guide for your system for more information about port numbering For resilient links the main and standby ports are shown in ascending order When you are prompted to select ports specify the 2 option to see a list of information about your bridge ports This matrix is useful for example if you have trunks configured but forget which port is the anchor port You must use the anchor port number to display a port summary for a trunk Fields in the Bridge Port Detail Display Field Description designatedBridge Identity of the designated bridge of the LAN to which the port is attached It is an STP port parameter designatedC ost Cost through this port to get to the root bridge The designated cost of the root port is the same as the cost that is received in incoming BPDUs from the designated bridge for that LAN It is an STP port parameter designatedPort Identity of the designated port on the designated bridge designatedRoot Identity of the root bridge in the LAN which includes the root bridge s priority value and the MAC address of port 1 on that bridge fwdTransitions Number of times that the port has entered the forwarding state since you enabled STP or rebooted the system This value is useful for determining the relative stability of the topology gvrpState Whether the GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP is 3500 9000 L3 enabled or disabled on the port
269. e control queue Low priority packets do not have bandwidth explicitly allocated Valid Minimum Abbreviation qbm Important Considerations a When you enter the command the system prompts you to enter the percentage of bandwidth to use for high priority traffic on the output link a The value 75 specifies that three high priority packets are transmitted for each best effort packet a The value 50 sets equal priority for high priority and best effort packets a The value 100 is strict prioritization it allows best effort packets to be sent only when no high priority packets need to be sent Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Percentage of Percentage of bandwidth that O 100 percent 75 bandwidth you want to be used for high priority traffic on the output link qos excessTagging For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only display Displays status information about whether excess packets are tagged with a special IEEE 802 1p tag value 3500 poe v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 q e disp 3900 9300 736 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP qos excessTagging v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 enable For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Tags or retags excess packets with a special 802 1p tag value This special value refers to any packets that are marked as excess that you want to tag Valid Minimum Abbreviation qee Important
270. e file to the switch manually using TFTP and the bridge packetFilter load command described later in this chapter a The system only creates the packet filter definitions You must still assign the standard filter to ports and filtering paths as described for bridge packetFilter assign later in this chapter bridge packetFilter create custom 375 Create Custom Bridge Packet Filter Example 3500 After you enter the custom filter editor the system displays the editor commands as shown here Select menu option bridge packetFilter create custom Buffer Line Cursor Insert Delet Editor Commands list Ctrl l next Ctrl n previous Ctrl p start Ctrl a nd Ctrl e left Ctrl b right Ctrl f line Enter ode Save Exit previous Ctrl h BSP current Ctrl d DEL line Ctrl k insert overstrike toggle Ctrl o Ctrl w Esc You now enter packet filter language statements that define the packet filter algorithm See the Implementation Guide for your system for information about developing the packet filters 376 CHAPTER 15 PACKET FILTERS bridge packetFilter v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 delete For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Deletes the selected packet filter Valid Minimum Abbreviation b pa de Important Considerations a You cannot delete a filter if it is assigned Before you can delete the filter you
271. e forwarding packets successfully but remain unlighted or blink slowly on routers that are not forwarding packets successfully a To interrupt the command press Enter Options Possible Prompt Description Values Default Host name or Host name or IP address of the a Avalidhost 0 0 0 0 IP address destination that you want to ping name a P address Number of Number of ICMP echo request 1 9999 3 ICMP Request packets that are sent to ping a host packets packets If the destination host does not respond after it is pinged by the number of packets that you specify the system displays a Host is Unreachable or Host is not Responding message 476 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP Prompt Description Possible Values Default Packet size Burst Transmit Ping mode Quiet mode Time between sending each packet wait ICMP sourceAddress Interface index Number of bytes in each ICMP echo request packet The packet size includes both the IP and the ICMP headers How rapidly to send out ICMP echo request packets When enabled sends out the ICMP echo request packets as rapidly as possible The system displays a period upon receiving an ICMP echo replay packet Use this display to determine how many packets are being dropped during the burst This is unique to the burst option How much packet information to display after a ping When enabled the system displays information about the number
272. e is the root bridge The current value is shown in the bridgeMaxAge field of the bridge display Valid Minimum Abbreviation b sp stpm Important Considerations a If the value is too small the STP may reconfigure the topology too often causing temporary loss of connectivity in the network a f the value is too large the network may take longer than necessary to adjust to a new STP configuration after a topology change such as the restarting of a bridge a A conservative value assumes a delay variance of 2 seconds per hop The recommended and default value is 20 seconds a Although the possible range for stpMaxAge is 6 40 the available range is constrained by the following inequalities a 2 x stpForwardDelay 1 second gt stpMaxAge a stopMaxAge gt 2 x stopHelloTime 1 second Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default STPmaxage Value in seconds when the 6 40 seconds 20 factory stored configuration message default or information is deemed too old current value and is discarded bridge spanningTree v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 stpHelloTime Sets the time between configuration messages that the bridge generates if it is operating as the root bridge The current value is shown in the bridgeHelloTime field of the bridge display Valid Minimum Abbreviation b sp stph Important Considerations a f the probability of losing configuration messages is high shorten the time
273. e modules Valid Minimum Abbreviation btae Important Considerations You can enable or disable the autoMap function on slots All trunking is performed through the switch fabric module Do not perform backplane trunking through the interface modules When you enable autoMap on a module in a specific slot the switch fabric module verifies that the switch fabric module and the interface module s backplane configuration support dynamic backplane mapping When you disable autoMap on a module in a specific slot the switch fabric module verifies that the interface module s backplane configuration is compatible with that of the switch fabric module s backplane Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Slot number Slot number to choose to One slot number enable or disable autoMap function 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 bridge trunk autoMap test bridge trunk autoMap test 303 Indicates what happens when you do a reset on the switch fabric module when autoMap is enabled Valid Minimum Abbreviation btat Important Consideration After you enable or disable a module for automatic backplane trunking the switch fabric module verifies that the interface module s backplane configuration is compatible or not compatible to the switch fabric s configuration If autoMap is enabled on the desired interface module then the switch fabric module verifies that the switch fabric and interface module s backplane co
274. e number that is assigned to the system by 3Com System name 64 character maximum user defined alphanumeric name that uniquely identifies the system on your network System up time Time since the last system reboot Time in service Total operational time since the system was manufactured Type of module Type of physical ports Version build date and System software version number and date and time time when the software was built You configure the system parameters for the CoreBuilder 9000 system through the Enterprise Management Engine EME See the CoreBuilder 9000 Enterprise Management Engine User Guide for a complete list and detailed explanation of the CoreBuilder 9000 system commands 70 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system fileTransfer v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 Sets the file transfer protocol to either Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP or File Transfer Protocol FTP Use this protocol to retrieve or store files across the network for system functions such as scripts snapshots software updates and nvData save and restore Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy f Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default File transfer File transfer protocol for the a FIP TFTP protocol system m FIP system console webHelpConfig 71 system console Sets the Uniform Resource Locator URL for access to the Web webHelpConfig Management Help system Y 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9000 sy co wh 9400
275. e of values Some command descriptions include a section called Important Considerations that contains additional information to be aware of when using the command Where appropriate examples help you to understand the commands This guide does not contain troubleshooting information or instructional material about why or when to use a particular command For information about troubleshooting and networking tasks see the Implementation Guide that is shipped with your system on a CD ROM Finding Specific Information in This Guide Use this chart to help you find information about specific tasks If you are looking for information about Turn to System administration and configuration tasks Part Getting Started Using command abbreviations Summary of commands for all platforms Displaying the system or module configuration Part Il System Level Using the snapshot feature PaNeHOns Baselining statistics Configuring system parameters such as name date time and passwords Configuring system security Establishing system access through a Web browser Saving restoring and resetting nonvolatile data Running scripts of Console tasks Setting up the system for out of band management access Part Ill Establishing through serial ports or using IP and setting up SNMP Management Access Administering the IP management interface Configuring SNMP community strings Administering trap reporting Administering Etherne
276. e range of are predefined flow 1 498 classifiers a Nonflow classifiers 400 498 except 401 407 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 and 490 401 407 are predefined nonflow classifiers with applied controls and IEEE 802 1p tag values of 1 7 Classifier name Name that you a Unique name with up to assign to the 32 characters Use classifier around any string with embedded spaces Use to enter an empty string a fora list of selection criteria Cast type Cast type for the a Flow classifiers unicast flow or nonflow multicast or all classifier a Nonflow classifiers unicast multicast broadcast or all a fora list of selectable cast types Protocol type IP or other protocol m Flow classifiers IP type if applicable protocol type with TCP that you want to UDP or all e a Nonflow classifiers TCP es IP IPX AppleTalk classifier custom or any a fora list of selectable protocol types Source IP For flow classifiers Up to 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 address only IP address of factory the source default wildcard match 696 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP Prompt Description Possible Values Default Source IP For flow classifiers Up to four portions 0 0 0 0 address mask only source IP 255 255 255 255 factory address mask or default how many portions of the IP address you want to match Example 255 255 255 0 matches the first three portions of the spec
277. e requires that you put the system in allClosed mode Unique user defined integer VLAN ID that identifies this VLAN It is used by management operations You can assign or modify a VID that is associated with a static VLAN you cannot modify the VID selected automatically after you define a router port IP interface nor can you change the VID of the default VLAN The default VLAN requires a VID of 1 Whether the VLAN aware mode tagging mode is allPorts or taggedVlanPorts The default for CoreBuilder 3500 Release 2 0 or later is allPorts allPorts is also the default as of CoreBuilder 9000 software Release 3 0 The value taggedVlanPorts is a compatibility mode for VLANs configured prior to CoreBuilder 3500 Release 2 0 and for VLANs configured on CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 modules prior to CoreBuilder 9000 Release 3 0 bridge vlan detail v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 bridge vlan detail 341 Displays per port information such as tagging in addition to the VLAN summary information For the CoreBuilder 3500 and the CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 switching modules this command also displays VLAN statistics Valid Minimum Abbreviation b v det Important Considerations a The default VLAN always uses VLAN ID VID 1 and the name Default For Layer 3 systems and modules it also uses the protocol type unspecified a The VLAN ID VID is used as the 802 1Q tag if tagging is enabled for a port The VLAN statistics for the CoreBuil
278. e servers that you specify When the DNS client locates the name it resolves it to the associated IP address See UNIX Network File System NFS documentation for information about how to create and maintain lists of domain names and IP addresses on the name servers Fields in the IP DNS Display Field Description Domain name Name of the domain name up to 79 alphanumeric characters Name server Name server that is associated with the domain ip dns domainName v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Changes the name of a currently defined domain Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip d do Important Considerations a You can specify a domain name with up to 79 alphanumeric characters a Use single quotation marks around any string that has embedded spaces Use double quotation marks to enter an empty string Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Domain name Name of the a A valid domain name or current domain The name f name a to get information can be up to about specifying a 79 characters long domaine 438 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 ip dns define For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Defines a new name server IP address to associate with the current domain name Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip d de Important Conside
279. e system is operating The system does not have to be powered down a Make sure that the FTP server or TFTP server software is running on the device from which you are installing the software a Make sure that you have defined an IP address on your system a Some FIP servers or TFP servers do not accept the full pathname If this is true on your server enter the image filename only a On the CoreBuilder 3500 if you are using the FTP file transfer protocol you must enter a login name and password Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Host IP IP address of the machine from Any valid IP address address which to load the software update Install file Name of the image to be name loaded 90 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system baseline v 3500 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 display Displays when the current baseline was last set Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy bd Important Considerations a Use this command to determine if you need a newer baseline for viewing statistics a The system also indicates if you have not yet set a baseline on the system system baseline set 91 system baseline set Resets the baseline counters to zero Y 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9000 sy b s vV 9400 z Important Considerations Y 3900 a Baselining is automatically enabled when you set a baseline y 9300 a The system maintains the accumulated totals since power up a The baseline is time stamped
280. e to configure bridge wide parameters This chapter addresses the commands in the bridge menu except port packetFilter vlan trunk mpla and link which other chapters in this Command Reference Guide address For more information about configuring bridging and related features see the Implementation Guide for your system Menu Structure The commands that you can use depend on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardware options that are configured for your system The following diagram shows the complete list of commands for all systems See the checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter for whether your system supports the command Top Level Menu bridge menu spanningTree menu igmp menu system display stpState summary module ipFragmentation stpPriority snoopMode management ipxSnapTranslation stpMaxAge queryMode ethernet addressThreshold stpHelloTime querylpAddress fddi agingTime stpForwardDelay vians bridge spanningTree stpGroupAddress groups ip gvrpState desQuerier ipx cos pee rPorts appletalk port enable gPort qos multicast summary snmp packetFilter modify analyzer ak multicast menu og run F script mpla P iomp logout link disconnect 252 CHAPTER 9 BRIDGE WIDE PARAMETERS bridge display v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 Displays bridge statistics and configuration information including
281. each summary screen reflect the current values of all fields and counters at the time that you use the snapshot feature 3500 Y 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 mo sn su 3900 Important Consideration 9300 a f a feature or protocol has only one display option display the module includes the same image in the snapshot of both the summary and the detail display images module snapshot detail 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Captures an image of all module detail display screens The display screens contain the current values of all fields and counters at the time that you use the snapshot feature Valid Minimum Abbreviation mo sn de Important Consideration a fa feature or protocol has only one display option display the module includes that image with both the summary and detail display images 132 CHAPTER 4 MODULE ENVIRONMENT module baseline display 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Displays when the current baseline was last set Valid Minimum Abbreviation mo ba dis Important Considerations a Use this command to determine if you need a newer baseline for viewing statistics a The display indicates if you have not set the baseline on a module module baseline set 133 module baseline set Resets the baseline counters to zero and time stamps the baseline 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation J 9000 mo ba set 9400 Important Considerations 3900 a Baselining is automatically enabled when a baseline
282. each VLAN Valid Minimum Abbreviations b v s in allOpen mode on Layer 2 or Layer 3 switches and modules b v su in allClosed mode on Layer 3 switches and modules Important Considerations a The summary display lists the physical ports that are associated with each VLAN interface It does not indicate bridge port characteristics for example trunked ports See bridge vlan detail next for this information a The VLAN mode shown in the Type field affects VLANs as follows For the CoreBuilder 3500 CoreBuilder 9400 SuperStack II Switch 3900 and SuperStack II Switch 9300 the VLAN mode affects all configured VLANs on the system For the entire system the default VLAN mode is al lopen For the CoreBuilder 9000 the VLAN mode affects all VLANs that are associated with a particular module the switch fabric module or all VLANs on a switching module For each module the default VLAN mode is allopen a As of Release 3 0 0 the CoreBuilder 3500 system and CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 modules support one of three origins for a VLAN If you explicitly create the VLAN with a bridge vlan define operation the origin of the VLAN is static If you create a router port IP interface for which the system automatically creates a router port VLAN the origin of the router port VLAN Is router If you enable dynamic port based VLAN configuration via the GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP the origin is GVR bridge vlan summa
283. ed routing protocol DVMRP Querier IP address of the IGMP querier in the subnetwork to which the interface belongs If the interface is functioning as the IGMP querier this field shows Self 522 CHAPTER 18 IP MULTICAST ip multicast igmp interface detail v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Supplements the IP multicast IGMP interface summary display with group and port information Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipmi id Fields in the IP Multicast IGMP Interface Detail Display Field Description Index Number assigned to the routing interface to its right for identification purposes Address IP address of a routing interface in the system that is identified by the index number to its left TtIThreshold Time to live TTL threshold that is assigned to the interface This threshold affects IP multicast packets only Protocol Multicast routing protocol that registers with IGMP In release 3 0 software there is one supported routing protocol DVMRP Querier P address of the IGMP querier in the subnetwork to which the interface belongs If the interface is functioning as the IGMP querier this field shows Self group P multicast group address for which packets have been received or forwarded port s Physical port numbers that are associated with the interface listed in the Address field that see incoming or outgoing traffic ip multicast igmp v 35
284. ed updates are enabled a Secondary route server option is enabled Fields in the IPX Interface Display Field Description Format Frame encapsulation format Index System assigned index number for the interface IPX address Unique 4 byte network address State Status of the IPX interface It indicates whether the interface is available for communications up or unavailable down Ticks Number that the system uses to calculate route time A tick is an estimate of how long a packet takes to reach the network segment There are 18 21 ticks in a second The possible values are 1 65534 and are defined as a 1 FDDI a 4 Ethernet a 10 Serial Links VLAN index Index number of the VLAN that is associated with the IPX interface When the system prompts you for this option the menu identifies the available VLAN indexes 608 CHAPTER 20 IPX ipx interface define v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Defines an IPX interface Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx i de Important Considerations a An IPX interface defines the relationships among an IPX virtual LAN VLAN the IPX router and the IPX network The IPX router has one IPX interface defined for each network than is directly connected to it a When you define an interface you define the interface s IPX address cost format and any associated IPX VLAN index a Before you define the IPX routin
285. edia type and Port Speed FDDI Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet Address MAC address of the analyzer port Ports being monitored List of ports that the system is monitoring Includes the MAC address of the analyzer port to which the monitored port traffic will be forwarded Port Monitored port number Type Media type and Port Speed FDDI Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet Analyzer Address MAC address of the analyzer port to which the monitored port traffic will be forwarded and to which your network analyzer or probe is attached There may be multiple analyzer ports defined on the switch Analyzer Display Example 3500 Select menu option analyzer display Ports configured as analyzer ports Port Type Address 8 Fast Ethernet 00 80 3e 2b 42 08 Ports being monitored Port Type Analyzer Address 12 Fast Ethernet 00 80 3e 2b 42 08 758 CHAPTER 24 ROVING ANALYSIS v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 analyzer add Defines a bridge port to serve as a dedicated analyzer port Valid Minimum Abbreviation an a Important Considerations On CoreBuilder 3500 and CoreBuilder 9000 systems you can connect as many as 16 network analyzers to a system On other platforms you can connect one network analyzer For more accurate analysis attach the analyzer to a dedicated port instead of through a repeater After a port is selected to serve as an analyzer port it cannot receive or transmit any other
286. een saved in the flash memory When the system is initializing if the diagnostic software detects 3500 errors and if the system completes initializing the detected errors are Y 9000 written to flash memory and stored in a dynamic error log 2400 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 3900 mo dia 9300 Important Consideration a The error messages are saved to flash memory until you power down the system or clear the error log with the system clearDiagBlock command module reboot 145 module reboot Reboots the specified module 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation J 9000 mo reboot 9400 Important Considerations 3900 m Rebooting a module returns you to the Enterprise Management 9300 Engine EME prompt so that you must reconnect to the module a f you enter y the module reboots a f you enter n the previous menu appears on the screen 146 CHAPTER 4 MODULE ENVIRONMENT 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 disconnect Disconnects you from the Administration Console and returns you to the Enterprise Management Engine EME module Valid Minimum Abbreviation disc Important Consideration a Disconnecting from the Administration Console does not disconnect you from a Telnet session ESTABLISHING MANAGEMENT II ACCESS Pa E Peoee Chapter5 Out of Band Management Chapter6 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP often ts OuT OF BAND MANAGEMENT The Internet Protocol IP is a standard network
287. eer switch in the MPLA core bridge mpla detail 323 bridge mpla detail Displays the trunk state and node trunk IDs for the switch ports 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9000 b mp d 9400 tars Fields in the Bridge MPLA Detail Display 3900 Field Description 9300 Mode Whether MPLA is enabled on the switch Possible values are enabled and disabled The default is disabled 324 CHAPTER 12 MULTIPOINT LINK AGGREGATION MPLA bridge mpla mode 3500 9000 v 9400 3900 9300 Enables or disables the MultiPoint Link Aggregation feature on the switch Valid Minimum Abbreviation b mp m Important Considerations Use only CoreBuilder 9400 systems as MPLA core switches The core of a multipoint aggregated link must contain two 9400 switches whose out of band management ports also must be directly connected Use only Switch 3900 devices as edge switches Each MPLA edge switch must have at least one physical link to each core switch Multiple trunked links may connect an edge and core switch for added bandwidth Use only Gigabit Ethernet links between MPLA core switches and edge switches All links from an edge switch to the MPLA core switches must be aggregated trunked at the edge switch While the Trunk Control Message Protocol TCMP is optional in point to point trunks you must configure it to run on all of the point to multipoint links between MPLA edge switches and core switches You can enable these feat
288. efault Time Time threshold value in 0 3600 seconds 900 tolerance seconds that is used to update the local system time system reboot v 3500 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 system reboot 123 Reboots the system Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy r Important Considerations a This command disconnects the present Administration Console session and starts another session whether your system is connected to the Administration Console by an external modem or through an rlogin or Telnet session a To view diagnostic information during reboots connect your system through the Console serial port Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Reboot the Confirmation that you want to n no system reboot a y yes 124 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT v 3500 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 script Executes a command file that you have written to expedite and automate Administration Console tasks Valid Minimum Abbreviation sc Important Considerations a Any command that you can enter in the Administration Console can be part of a script You can even script your entire system setup so that you can repeat the exact setup on other systems a You create scripts in an ASCll based line editor such as EMACS or vi Scripts must be stored on the TFP server For the CoreBuilder 3500 you can select TFTP or FTP as the file transfer method See system fileTransfer earlier in this chapter for more d
289. efault VLAN When you define a VLAN to include trunk ports specify the anchor port lowest numbered port that is associated with the trunk Do not use Gigabit Ethernet GEN Interface modules such as the 2 port 1000BASE SX Gigabit Ethernet GEN Interface Module when defining trunks Enter to see the port summary for example to indicate whether there are ports associated with FDDI Dual Attach Station DAS pairs and then enter the appropriate port numbers To specify an FDDI DAS pair specify the lowest numbered port in the DAS pair The number of trunk groups and the number of ports within a trunk group depend on your system See the Options table The 3CB9FG24T switch fabric module supports up to 12 trunk groups on the CoreBuilder 9000 308 CHAPTER 11 TRUNKS If you are working with Gigabit Ethernet modules in a SuperStack II Switch keep in mind that each Gigabit Ethernet module uses an internal trunk resource towards the limit of four You can trunk Gigabit Ethernet modules together each with one port to consolidate the Gigabit trunk resources If you have four trunks defined and you add a Gigabit Ethernet module to the system after a boot the system reports that the configuration is incompatible You must delete one of the existing trunks You must reboot the module at the end of the trunk definition process You can define multiple trunks in one bridge trunk define operation On the CoreBuilder 9000 rebooti
290. efore you are prompted for the trunk information Any changes that you make to the trunk s characteristics take effect immediately and do not interrupt trunk operations If you add or remove a port however you must reboot the system to implement the change a In an FDDI trunk a You cannot modify FDDI station mode port pairs when any of the ports in the pair are in a trunk a When you modify the station mode any FDDI ports that are associated with virtual LANs VLANs or a trunk are removed from the VLAN or trunk a Within a trunk you cannot change certain port characteristics such as FDDI station mode For example in an FDDI trunk you cannot change a trunked DAS dual attach station port to an SAS single attach station port or an SAS port to a DAS port a f you change an FDDI port pair from SAS to DAS you select the pair using just the lower of the two port numbers just as with a trunk anchor port Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Trunk index Index number of the trunk One or more trunks that you want to modify for a list of selectable trunk indexes 314 CHAPTER 11 TRUNKS Prompt Description Possible Values Default Ports Total number of the bridge 9000 Currently ports that you want to be ara inodiles aa Ge configured part of the trunk Rae pp ports up to 4 trunk groups with up to 6 ports per trunk a Layer 3 modules support up to 3 trunk groups with up to 6 ports
291. elect IP interfaces 1 2 all 1 Interface 1 Enter password none wings 460 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP ip rip addAdvertisement J 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Adds an advertisement address to an IP RIP interface Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip ria Important Considerations m The system uses the specified advertisement address to advertise routes to other stations on the same network It uses this address for sending updates RIP 2 updates depend on the setting of RIP compatibility mode a Advertisement addresses are handled differently based on RIP 1 and RIP 2 a For the CoreBuilder 3500 each interface that you define initially uses the default broadcast address 255 255 255 255 as the advertisement address With RIP 1 updates the address that you specify becomes the new RIP 1 advertisement address if you change the broadcast address If you subsequently use RIP 2 configure the interface to send RIP 2 advertisements and have the RIP 1 compatibility mode disabled the multicast address is used for updates a For the CoreBuilder 9000 each interface that you define initially uses the directed broadcast address as the RIP advertisement address all 1s in the host field a You can specify up to 64 advertisement addresses in separate iterations a On the CoreBuilder 3500 a After you add an advertisement address you cannot su
292. electable interface index for a list of selectable interface indexes A valid IP address A valid MAC addressin the format XX XX XX XX XX XX index 1 2 2 158 101 12 12 00 00 00 00 00 01 430 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 ip arp remove For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Deletes an entry from the Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache for example if the MAC address has changed Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip ar rem Important Considerations a When you enter the command the system deletes the entry from the cache immediately You are not prompted to confirm the deletion a f necessary the system subsequently uses ARP to find the new MAC address that corresponds to that IP address Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP address IP address for the A valid IP address entry that you want to delete ip arp flushAll v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Deletes all entries from the Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip ar flushA Important Considerations a To flush dynamic entries only see ip arp flushDynamic next in this chapter a When you enter the command the system deletes all entries from the cache immediately You are not prompted to confirm the deletion 432 CHAPTER
293. em Port recognizes flow control packets and responds by halting transmission The port does not generate flow control packets Port ignores flow control packets but it can generate them if necessary Gigabit Ethernet Fast Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet Fast Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet ethernet paceAccess 3500 v 9000 9400 v 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 2 switching modules only Configures the Ethernet ports on your system to support the PACE Interactive Access feature which ensures reliable timing by preventing excessive Ethernet network jitter the variation in the timing of packet delivery that can cause garbled sound jerky images and delays Valid Minimum Abbreviation e pa Important Considerations a PACE technology is 3Com s method to provide reliable timing optimal LAN bandwidth utilization and data prioritization for time sensitive multimedia and real time applications and data only applications a PACE Interactive Access employs a back off algorithm that enables your system to control traffic flow on a point to point link with an end station When the network experiences congestion the switch holds packets PACE Interactive Access prevents an end station from monopolizing the link Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Port Ports for which you want toset m A range of port the PACE feature numbers m all a to display a
294. en the module is shipped from the factory You may want to reset the EME date and time to match the system s physical location Module Time Example CB9000 slot10 1 12 E FEN TX L3 module time The current module time is 05 20 98 04 37 57 PM 138 CHAPTER 4 MODULE ENVIRONMENT module screenHeight 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Changes the Administration Console s screen height to increase or decrease the space available for displaying information Valid Minimum Abbreviation mo scr Important Considerations a The setting controls the way that the module displays statistical summaries and other information that results from your use of the menus not the way that the module displays the menus themselves a Each time that the screen output reaches the designated screen height the module prompts you to press a key to display more information Set the screen height to infinite 0 if you do not want the modules to display this prompt At o however the screen output can scroll beyond the screen depending on your screen size Most terminal screens are 24 lines Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default New screen New screen height in lines height Set this Default screen height for value as the future Administration Console default sessions a 1 200 24 a 0 for infinite height m y yes y a Nn no module nvData reset 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 module nvData reset 139 R
295. end on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardware options that are configured for your system The following diagram shows the complete list of commands for all systems See the checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter for whether your system supports the command Top Level Menu module menu snapshot menu system display summary module snapshot detail management baseline f ethernet redundancy baseline menu fddi name display bridge time set ip screenHeight requestedState 1px nvData i redundancy menu appletalk clearDiagBlock aa menu gos diagErrLog snmp reboot reset NonRedundant analyzer nvData menu serpi reset logout emergencyDownload disconnect as aaa The redundancy option appears if you have a CoreBuilder 9000 8 slot and 16 slot chassis and if you have one or two GEN Switch Fabric Modules installed In addition to the module options you must also use the disconnect option from the top level menu to return to the Enterprise Management Engine EME module display 129 Generates software and hardware revision numbers module status information and warning messages for certain module conditions module display 3500 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 mo d 3900 Important Considerations 9300 a The module display provides the configuration information for the module to
296. ent nbpInBroadcastRegs Number of NBP broadcast requests that have been received nbplnErrors Number of NBP packets that have been received and rejected for any error nbplnForwardReqs Number of NBP forward requests that have been received nbplnLookupReqs Number of NBP lookup requests that have been received rtmplnDataPkts Number of RTMP data packets that have been received rtmplnRequestPkts Number of RTMP request packets that have been received rtmpOutDataPkts Number of good RTMP data packets that have been sent rtmpRouteDeletes Number of times that RTMP has deleted a route that was aged out of the table zipAddressInvalids Number of times that this entity had to broadcast a ZIP GetNetInfo reply because the GetNetInfo request had an invalid address zipInErrors Number of ZIP packets that have been received and rejected for any error zipInExReplies Number of ZIP extended replies that have been received zipInGniRequests Number of ZIP GetNetInfo request packets that have been received zipInZip Queries Number of ZIP queries that have been received zipInZipReplies Number of ZIP replies that have been received zipOutGniReplies Number of ZIP GetNetInfo reply packets that have been sent zipOutlnvalids Number of ZIP GetNetInfo replies that have been sent with the indication that the previous client zone name was invalid 672 CHAPTER 21 APPLETALK appletalk route For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only display
297. ent value specific Current classifier or classifiers for the control Procedure Enter the control number that you want to modify The existing controls are displayed in braces To modify the name enter the new name for the classifier The name that is associated with the specified control number appears in brackets Enter the rate limit type for example none receivePort or aggregate The available values depend on how the control was defined the current limit appears in brackets For the receivePort or aggregate rate limits enter the service level for conforming packets as high best Or low For the none rate limit enter the service level for conforming packets as high best low or drop If you use drop the system drops all traffic on all ports for the classifier that is associated with the control The current value appears in brackets 5 Specify whether the conforming packets are loss eligible yes or no If you have selected receivePort or aggregate for the rate limit type you are prompted for the following information a Enter the service level for excess packets high best low orf drop b Specify whether excess packets are loss eligible yes or no Your current value is the default c Specify whether you want to modify the existing rate limits yes or no If you enter no the system maintains the existing values for all associated rate limits If you enter yes specify how the f
298. entry You may want to use the default route in place of routes to numerous destinations that all have the same gateway IP address Subnet mask that is associated with the IP address of the destination network subnetwork or host Associated cost of sending a packet to the destination The system includes the metric in its RIP and OSPF updates to allow other routers to compare routing information received from different sources Address that directs the router how to forward packets whose destination addresses match the route s IP address and subnet mask The system forwards such packets to the indicated gateway Status of the route See the following status table Time To Live Time remaining before the route expires or is reset Status for Routes Field Description Direct Route is for a directly connected network Learned Route was learned using indicated protocol Learned Route was learned but is partially timed out This condition is RIP Zombie applied to all learned routes reached by an interface gateway Learned RIP2 Local Static Timed out which is in the down state Route was learned using RIP 2 protocol Actual interface address Route was statically configured Route has timed out and is no longer valid 422 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 ip route static For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Defines a static route Vali
299. entry When the system drops the packet it sends an ICMP destination unreachable message to the host that sent the packet Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Gateway IP IP address that is A valid IP address address associated with the default route that you want to add for example 158 101 112 253 166 CHAPTER 5 OuT OF BAND MANAGEMENT management ip route v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 noDefault Deletes the default route Valid Minimum Abbreviation m ip ron Important Consideration a The system deletes the default route from the routing table immediately after you enter the command You are not prompted to confirm this deletion management ip route v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 findRoute management ip route findRoute 167 Searches for a route in the routing table Valid Minimum Abbreviation m ip route fi Important Considerations a This command enables you to find a route using an IP address or a host name as long as Domain Name System DNS is configured a When you enter this command with a valid IP address or host name the system displays the routing table entry Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP address or host name IP address that is A valid IP address or host 0 0 0 0 associated with the name route you that want to find or a host name if DNS is configured 168 CHAPTER 5 OuT OF BAND MANAGEMENT management ip
300. er Commands 2 3 ethernet portMode So Lf gL J ethernet flowControl S S S S S ethernet pacelnteractiveAccess S S ethernet paceAccess ethernet label S NN NN ethernet portState ethernet monitoring summary ethernet monitoring mode S QNNNN AN SSN ONS NN S Ch 8 FDDI fddi station display fddi station connectPolicy fddi station tNotify fddi station statusReporting fddi path display fddi path tvxLowerBound fddi path tmaxLowerBound fddi path maxTreq fddi mac summary fddi mac detail fddi mac frameErrorThreshold fddi mac notCopiedThreshold fddi mac IlcService fddi mac path Ses NN NON ON AS NO Ne Se SNS SS By SS NR SN Rs NS SN fddi port display Table 6 Command Summary continued 3500 9000 9000 9400 3900 9300 Layer Layer 2 3 Commands fddi port lerAlarm S WA fddi port lerCutoff JY JY fddi port label JY JY fddi port path JY Jf fddi stationMode display WA J fddi stationMode modify S S Part V Bridging Parameters Ch 9 Bridge wide Parameters bridge display V 4 4 Vv bridge ipFragmentation WA WA bridge ipxSnapTranslation WA S bridge addressThreshold S S bridge agingTime J KL L K K K bridge spanningTree stpState S Y A A M bridge spanningTree stpPriority S L L L C7 bridge spanningTree stpMaxAge JY YV LSA An fae bridge spanningTree stpHelloTime J L MA Yds iv bridge spanningTree stpForwardDelay S V Vv E E A bridge spanningTree stpGroupAddress JY Sl of
301. er addresses Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx sa t Important Considerations a The system has two SAP triggered modes a Disabled Broadcasts IPX SAP server addresses 3 seconds after learning them a Enabled Broadcasts IPX SAP server addresses immediately after learning them Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Triggered Setting for IPX SAP broadcast a disabled enabled update mode timing enabled 640 CHAPTER 20 IPX v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ipx sap policy summary For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Display a list of IPX SAP Service Advertising Protocol policies Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx saps Fields in an IPX SAP Policy Summary Display Field Description Idx Index number of the IPX SAP policy Origin Source of the service to which this policy applies If the policy type is set to Export the possible values of this parameter are SAP Static or All This parameter is not applicable if the policy type is set to Import Type Policy type Import apply the policy to received services or Export apply the policy to advertised services Name Object name that assigned to the server Type Service type represented by a one digit number Refer to Novel documentation for a complete list of service types Network IPX network address for the server or All which implies all routes Node 6 byte MAC address of the router that can forward
302. er key information about how to use the Internet Packet eXchange IPX protocol routing commands to route packets from your system to an external destination The IPX protocol is a NetWare LAN communications protocol that moves data between servers and workstation programs running on various network nodes IPX is a User Datagram Protocol UDP that is used for connectionless communications IPX packets are encapsulated and carried by Ethernet packet and Token Ring frames To route packets using the IPX protocol you Define an IPX routing interface 2 Decide which IPX routing and server options you want to use 3 Enable IPX forwarding gt gt An IPX routing interface defines the relationship between an IPX virtual LAN VLAN and the subnetworks in the IPX network Each routing IPX VLAN interface is associated with a VLAN that supports IPX The system has one interface defined for each subnetwork that is directly connected to it You must first define a VLAN as described in Chapter 14 before you define an associated IPX VLAN interface For more information about IPX see the Implementation Guide for your system For the CoreBuilder 9000 the commands in this chapter apply to Layer 3 switching modules only 606 CHAPTER 20 IPX Menu Structure The commands that you can use depend on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardware that are configured for your system The followi
303. er that can forward in the format packets to the network A XX XX XX XX XX X node address of all zeroes Xx 00 00 00 00 00 00 All means that the route is connected directly to the router Interface Index number of the IP a Oneor more All Index interface associated with this interface policy numbers a All a to view a list of selectable interfaces Policy action Whether this router accepts or m Accept Accept rejects a service that matches Rei a Reject the policy Weight Metric value of this policy This 1 16 1 parameter specifies the order of precedence for policies that match the same service A higher value takes precedence over a lower value IPX SAP Policy Modify Example Select menu option ipx rip policy modify Select policy 1 1 Enter service origin static sap all all sap Enter the service type 0x1 0Ox1lffff all allj all Enter the server nam all Enter the IPX address 0x0 Oxfffffffel all fall Enter the node address all Select interface index 2 all fall Enter the policy action accept reject accept accept Enter the administrative weight 1 16 1 2 648 CHAPTER 20 IPX ipx sap policy remove v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Remove an existing SAP Service Advertising Protocol policy Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx sapr Options Prompt Description Possible V
304. eral system parameters Important considerations and options are also provided where applicable a Configure management access to the system through one of two serial connection types a Configure management access through the serial port For information about commands for configuring an out of band management interface see Chapter 5 For more information about administering your system environment see the Implementation Guide for your system 68 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT Menu Structure The commands that you can use depend on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardware that are configured for your system The following diagram shows the complete list of commands for all systems See the checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter for whether your system supports the command Top Level Menu system menu system module management ethernet fddi bridge ip ipx appletalk qos snmp analyzer log script logout disconnect display console fileTransfer snapshot softwareUpdate gt baseline gt serialPort name time nvData clearDiagBlock diagErrLog sntp reboot console menu webHelpConfig webAccess consoleAccess ctlKeys password screenHeight security security menu display define remove access message timeout menu timeout snapshot menu summary de
305. erfaces the multicast routing protocols used and the amount of time it takes to reach each hop from the receiver a All interim devices must support IP multicast traceroute for you to see a complete path on the display Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default source IP IP address of the source device Any valid IP address address that sends traffic to a specific IP for IP multicast multicast group address source devices in your network multicast The IP multicast group address Any valid IP group that the source is using for a multicast group address particular application This is address used by useful when all applications come from the same source source devices in your network 19 oe ete ts vy OPEN SHORTEST PATH FIRST OSPF This chapter describes commands that you can use to configure Open Shortest Path First OSPF routing on your system For more information about administering OSPF routing on your network see the Implementation Guide for your system For the CoreBuilder 9000 the commands in this chapter apply to Layer 3 switching modules only 530 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH FIRST OSPF Menu Structure The commands that you can use depend on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardware options that are configured for your system The following diagram shows the complete list of commands for all systems See
306. eroes 00 00 00 00 00 00 means that the route is connected directly to the router number a fora list of selectable IPX interfaces A node address in the format XX XX XX XX XX XX ipx route static 619 IPX Static Route Example Select menu option ip route static Enter IPX address 0x1 Oxfffffffe 0x44648 30 Enter Hops 1 15 1 Enter interface number 1 32 1 1 Enter node address 08 00 3e 21 14 78 620 CHAPTER 20 IPX ipx route remove v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Deletes a route from the IPX routing table Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx ro r Important Considerations a The route is immediately deleted You are not prompted to confirm the deletion a All servers that depend upon this route are removed from the server table including static servers Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IPX network 4 byte IPX network address 0x1 Oxfffffffe address ipx route flush 621 ipx route flush For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Deletes all dynamically learned routes from the IPX routing table Y 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 ipx ro f 3900 Important Considerations 9300 a All learned routes are immediately deleted You are not prompted to confirm the deletion a All dynamic servers that depend on these routes are removed from the server table
307. es unambiguous When you reach the level at which you perform a task the Administration Console prompts you for a value The prompt usually shows all valid values if applicable and typically suggests a default value The default may be the factory default value or the current value that you have defined for that parameter The Administration Console displays the valid values in parentheses and the default or current value in brackets For example Enter a new valu disabled enabled enabled To accept the default or current value press Enter Entering Values in Command Strings A command string can also contain the value of a command parameter If you enter a value at the end of a command string the Administration Console executes the task and the previous menu appears on the screen For example to set the path cost to the root through a port from the top level of the Administration Console enter bridge port stpcost 20 or b po stpc 20 42 CHAPTER 1 ADMINISTRATION OVERVIEW Navigating The Administration Console provides several shortcuts Through the Menus press Esc the Escape key To move quickly to the top level menu without backtracking through each intermediate menu The top level menu immediately appears a Enter gq a To move up through the hierarchy that is to move to the menu that is one level higher in the hierarchy a To cancel an operation that is currently in progress The previous
308. es 33 EME Overview 33 Configuration Tasks 34 Accessing the Administration Console 35 Password Access Levels 35 Accessing Your System 36 Access Examples 37 Using Menus to Perform Tasks 39 Selecting Menu Options 40 Entering Values 41 Navigating Through the Menus 42 PART Il COMMAND SUMMARY SYSTEM LEVEL FUNCTIONS SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT Menu Structure 68 system display 69 system fileTransfer 70 system console webHelpConfig 71 system console webAccess 72 system console consoleAccess 73 system console ctlkeys 74 system console password 75 system console screenHeight 76 system console security display 77 system console security define 78 system console security remove 80 system console security access 81 system console security message 82 system console timeout timeOut 83 system console timeout interval 84 system snapshot summary 85 system snapshot detail 86 system snapshot save 87 system softwareUpdate 89 system baseline display 90 system baseline set 91 system baseline requestedState 92 system serialPort terminalSpeed 93 system serialPort modemSpeed 95 system serialPort baudRate 96 system serialPort serialPortMode 98 system serialPort configModem 99 system serialPort enableModem 100 system name 101 system time 102 system time datetime 103 system time timezone 104 system time dst 106 system nvData save 107 system nvData restore 110 system nvData examine 112 system nvData reset 113 system clearDiagBlock 114 system
309. esets the module s nonvolatile data NV values to the factory defaults Valid Minimum Abbreviation mo nv res Important Considerations a At times you may want to reset the values to the factory defaults so that you can reconfigure the module from its original settings a Resetting the NV data means that all NV memory is set back to the factory defaults Before you proceed be sure that you want to reset your NV data Rebooting a module returns you to the Enterprise Management Engine EME prompt so that you must reconnect to the module Prompts Prompt Description Possible Values Default Do you wish Confirmation prompt a n no y to Resetting nonvolatile data may yes continue leave the module in an yy inconsistent state a reboot is necessary after each reset 140 CHAPTER 4 MODULE ENVIRONMENT module nvData emergencyDownload 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Performs an emergency download Valid Minimum Abbreviation mo nv sta Important Consideration a f you hot swap a module and the staging flag is set to off the new module uses the module default settings for the new module Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Staging Whether you want to enable or off off setting disable the NV staging flag on module nvData Displays emergency download information for your module displayDownload Valid Minimum Abbreviation 3500 mo nv dis v 9000 9400 Important Consideration a The
310. et the system date and time to match the system s physical location m 00 specifies the year 2000 for all 3Com products See the 3Com Web site for more details Procedure To change the system date or time enter da The system displays the current date and time and then prompts you to change the time Enter y yes or n no at the prompt If you respond n the top level menu appears If you respond y the system prompts you for the correct date and time Enter the correct date and time in this format ecyy mm ddThh mm ss Format Description yyyy century and last two digits of the year 00 99 first mm date 1 31 dd month 1 12 T Time designator hh hour 1 12 second mm minute 00 59 SS second 00 59 104 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system time timezone v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 Configures the local time zone and daylight savings time values Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy t timez Important Considerations a Displays the current time zone table with time zone indexes and the time zone identifiers before it prompts you to select a time zone index a The local time zone value adjusts the server reply universal time to local time properly a The default time zone is Greenwich Mean Time GMT Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Time zone Index number of the time zone m 1 28 1 GMT index that you want to configure a lists the default selec
311. etails a Some TFP implementations require that you store the script file in the same directory in which the TFTP daemon server is running on the remote host Because TFTP provides no user authentication make the file permissions oose so that the public can read and write to the file TFTP servers do not grant requests for file access Procedure From the top level of the Administration Console enter script The system prompts you for information about where you have stored the script that you want to run host IP address and file path Press Return at any prompt to accept the current or default value in brackets Enter the path name to the script file If you are using TFTP see system snapshot save earlier in this chapter for more details about pathname requirements The task that you scripted runs in the Administration Console script 125 Example Script 3500 This example scripts these tasks to initially configure your system a Changes the modem port baud m Sets the system name a Assigns an IP address for management a Verifies the IP connection by pinging the system a Enables Spanning Tree a Sets up SNMP trap reporting This script performs some start up configurations Set the modem serial port baud system serialPort modemSpeed 4800 modem serial port baud Set the system nam system name a Eng_CoreBuilder_4 Assign an IP address to the system ip interface defin 158 101
312. ets and does not generate any RIP packets of its own a Learn The system processes all incoming RIP packets but it does not transmit RIP updates Fields in the Management IP RIP Display Field Description Index ndex number of the interface RIP 1 mode Mode for RIP 1 If you disable RIP 1 the output lists the state as of f Other modes are learn default advertise and enabled RIP 2 mode Mode for RIP 2 If you disable RIP 2 the output lists the state as of f Other modes are learn default advertise and enabled 174 CHAPTER 5 OuT OF BAND MANAGEMENT management ip rip On a per interface basis sets one of four RIP Version 1 RIP 1 modes and mode one of four RIP Version 2 RIP 2 modes on the system Y Y 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9000 mip rim 9400 f Important Considerations 3900 m The CoreBuilder 3500 supports RIP Version 1 as well as RIP Version 2 9300 For each interface you select a RIP Version 1 mode and a RIP Version 2 mode The default RIP Version 1 mode for all platforms is learn The default RIP Version 2 mode for the CoreBuilder 3500 is disabled a The four available RIP modes are as follows a Disabled The interface ignores all incoming RIP packets and does not generate any RIP packets of its own a Learn The interface processes all incoming RIP packets but it does not transmit RIP updates This is the default RIP mode a Advertise The interface broadcasts RIP updates
313. f as a or current value candidate for election as the IGMP querier a disabled 526 CHAPTER 18 IP MULTICAST ip multicast cache v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays information about IP multicast traffic that has been observed on the system For more detailed information review the DVMRP cache See ip multicast dvmrp cacheDisplay earlier in this chapter Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipm c Important Consideration a Although the Administration Console menu description is protocol independent multicast cache this cache is not related to the multicast routing protocol called Protocol Independent Multicast PIM Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Multicast Source for which you a Depends on your 255 255 255 255 source want to view cache network factory default address information or current value a 255 255 255 255 for all sources Multicast Multicast group for which Depends on your 255 255 255 255 group you want to view cache network factory default address information a 255 255 255 255 or current value for all groups ip multicast cache 527 Fields in the IP Multicast Cache Display Field Description source group inVif outVif inPorts outPorts Subnetwork that contains a source device that is sending traffic addressed to the IP multicast group listed in the group field IP multica
314. f the Logical Link Control service Number of frames and tokens that this MAC lost during reception Number of frames discarded because no buffer space was available Active when the notCopiedRatio is greater than or equal to notCopiedThresh Field Description notCopiedCount notCopiedRatio notCopiedThresh oldDownstream oldUpstream ringOpCount rmtState rxByteRate rxBytes rxDiscards rxFrameRate rxFrames rxInternalErrs rxMulticasts rxPeakByteRate rxPeakFrameRate rxUnicasts smtAddress tMax tMaxCapab tNeg tokenCount Number of frames that were addressed to this MAC but were not copied into its receive buffers Ratio of notCopiedCount divided by the quantity copiedCount plus notCopiedCount Threshold for determining when a MAC condition report is generated Previous value of the MAC address of this MAC s downstream neighbor Previous value of the MAC address of this MAC s upstream neighbor Number of times that this MAC has entered the operational state from the nonoperational state State of the ring management as defined in SMT Average number of bytes per second that this MAC received during the most recent sampling period Number of bytes that this MAC received Number of good frames that this MAC received and discarded before being delivered to a higher level protocol or application Does not include frames that were not received into receive buffers such as missed frames Aver
315. f the reset a no y to operation You may not want continue to reboot because resetting ay yes nonvolatile data may leave the system in an inconsistent state so the system reboots after each reset 114 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system Prevents diagnostic information about failed modules from appearing in clearDiagBlock system display screens Y Y 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9000 sy cl vy 9400 i Important Consideration Y 3900 m After you enter this command the system immediately removes 9300 diagnostic information about failed modules from the SNMP MIB swSysDiagnosticsGroup Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Clear the Confirmation of your decision n no y diagnostic to clear the diagnostic block information y yes system diagErrLog 115 system diagErrLog Displays hardware diagnostic errors that have been saved in the flash memory When the system is initializing if the diagnostic software detects Y 3500 errors and if the system completes initializing the detected errors are 9000 written to flash memory and stored in a dynamic error log 4 v 9400 Valid Minimum Abbreviation JY 3900 mo dia v 9300 Important Consideration a The error messages are saved to flash memory until you power down the system or clear the error log with the system clearDiagBlock command 116 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system sntp display v 3500 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 Displays Sim
316. face in allOpen mode the system notifies you with a message that it will change the VLAN mode to allClosed and recreate the default VLAN clearing your existing VLANs in the process Then the system prompts you to continue See the port based router example at the end of this command description a You cannot define a port based IP interface on a port that is already a member of a VLAN based IP interface To change from one type of interface to another you must redefine all IP interfaces and VLANs that are associated with that port CAUTION Using different routing models port based or VLAN based in the same network without careful planning can adversely affect your network operations Be sure that you understand the potential effects of router port based and VLAN based routing on your network See the Implementation Guide for the CoreBuilder 3500 and for the CoreBuilder 9000 for detailed information about IP interfaces and VLANs 404 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP address IP address of the interface chosen A valid IP address from the range of addresses that in the range of the central agency assigned to your addresses that organization This address is specific are assigned to to your network and system your organization Subnet mask 32 bit number that uses the same A valid subnet Depends format and representation as an IP mask in on address The subnet mask accor
317. fails the Backup router assumes forwarding responsibility for all IP addresses that are associated with the virtual router a Initialize Transitional state between Backup and Master States Typically indicates that the virtual router has been configured but not enabled or that the virtual router mode has been set to disabled In this state the router waits for a Startup event When the router receives the Startup event it broadcasts an ARP request that contains the virtual router MAC address for all IP addresses that are associated with the virtual router and transitions to the Master state If the Startup event is not received it transitions to the Backup state Type of virtual router primary or backup Total number of VRRP advertisements with an unknown or unsupported version number that this virtual router has received Index number of the virtual LAN VLAN on which the virtual router is defined Virtual Router ID Number that identifies the virtual router on the LAN Sample IP VRRP Detail Display Select menu option ip vrrp detail ip vrrp detail 491 Enter VLAN interface index 2 2 Enter virtual router ID 1 1 VLAN Index 2 Ports 7 12 14 VRID Address Type State Interval Pri Preempt Auth Error 1 158 101 175 228 Primary Master 1 sec 255 Yes pass none VIDX VRID becomeMaster advertReceived ckSumErrors versionErrors 2 T 1 0 0 0 VIDX VRID adviIntErrors securViolations ipTtlErrors priorityZeroRx
318. fault VLAN enter a VLAN identification VID number or keep the default in brackets 3 Specify the index numbers of the bridge ports Specify whether you want to modify per port tagging 5 If you modify per port tagging enter the new tag type for the port none or 802 10 6 If you have defined more than one port enter a tag type for each port 7 Fora VLAN other than the default VLAN enter a new VLAN name or keep the current name The VLAN name can include up to 32 ASCII characters including spaces If you include spaces put quotation marks around the VLAN name 362 CHAPTER 14 VIRTUAL LANs VLANs Bridge VLAN Modify Example 9000 Layer 2 This example shows the removal of two ports from a port based VLAN that includes tagged front panel ports and a tagged backplane port port 21 CB9000 slot 10 1 Select VLAN inter Enter VID 2 4094 Select bridge por Configure per por Enter port 1 tag Enter port 2 tag Enter port 3 tag Enter port 21 tag Enter VLAN Name 20 E FEN TX L2 face index 1 3 Ja ESTA t tagging n y type none 802 1Q type none 802 10 type none 802 10 ts 1 22 al1 1 bridge vlan modify 3 5 21 1 3 21 yl Yy 802 1Q 802 1Q 802 10 802 1Q 802 10 802 1Q type none 802 10 802 10 802 1Q vlan3 vlantag3 Bridge VLAN Modify Example 3900 This example shows default VLAN changes in the ports and per port tagging type
319. ference Guide provides information about the commands that you use to configure and manage your system or module after you install it Before you use this guide you should have already consulted documents such as your system Getting Started Guide or module Quick Start Guide and physically installed your system or module Several CoreBuilder and SuperStack II platforms are documented in this book Table 1 lists the specific platforms and the current software release level of that platform as it relates to the information contained in this book Table 1 Platforms Covered in This Document Platform Release CoreBuilder 3500 3 0 SuperStack II Switch 3900 3 0 CoreBuilder 9000 3 0 SuperStack II Switch 9300 3 0 CoreBuilder 9400 3 0 This guide is intended for the system or network administrator who is responsible for configuring using and managing the system It assumes a working knowledge of local area network LAN operations and familiarity with communications protocols that are used on interconnected LANs If the information in the release notes that are shipped with your product differs from the information in this guide follow the instructions in the release notes 20 ABOUT THIS GUIDE Using This Book This guide contains information for every command for the platforms listed at the beginning of this chapter It includes specific information about command syntax field descriptions default values and the possible rang
320. figure path costs for ports on the bridge see bridge port stpCost in Chapter 10 Logical port with the best path from the bridge to the root bridge Address to which the bridge listens to receive configuration messages and other STP information To modify the STP group address see bridge spanningTree stpGroupAddress later in this chapter Whether the Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled or disabled for the bridge The default value is disabled for all switches except CoreBuilder 9000 modules To configure the bridge STP state see bridge spanningTree stpState later in this chapter STP is also configured on a port by port basis See bridge port stpState in Chapter 10 Time elapsed in hours minutes and seconds since STP last reconfigured the network topology Number of times that STP has reconfigured the network topology since you enabled STP or rebooted the system whichever is less Whether the bridge topology is currently changing true or not changing false bridge ipFragmentation v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 bridge ipFragmentation 255 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Determines whether the Fiber Distributed Data Interface FDDI and Ethernet stations that are connected to your system can communicate using IP when FDDI stations transmit packets that are too large for Ethernet IP fragmentation divides such large FDDI packets into smaller packets th
321. forwarded but not y transmitted IPX packets that were forwarded but dropped because the MTU was exceeded 656 CHAPTER 20 IPX Field Description Routes Aged Servers Aged Rip Metric Changed Sap Metric Changed Number o Number o Number o Number o imes the system marked a route entry unreachable because it did not receive an update for that entry during the timeout period imes the system marked a server entry unreachable because it did not receive an update for that entry during the timeout period imes the metric changed on a route entry imes the metric changed on a server entry ipx oddLengthPadding V 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ipx oddLengthPadding 657 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Sets the compatibility mode for older network interface cards NICs This mode enables an interface to pad IPX packets that have an odd number of bytes Older NICs discard IPX packets that have an odd number of bytes Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx od Important Considerations a This feature supports 10 MB switching modules only a If you use this feature be careful to select only those interfaces that require odd length padding Enabling this feature for every interface slows network performance Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Interface index Index number of the interface for m AselectableIPX 1 if only 1 which you wa
322. g interface you must specify a VLAN and select IPX IPX II IPX 802 2 IPX 802 2 LLC IPX 802 3 or IPX 802 2 SNAP as a protocol that the VLAN supports as described in Chapter 14 For routing a VLAN can now support multiple protocols a Unless your network has special requirements such as the need for redundant paths assign a cost of 1 to each interface a The two Fiber Distributed Data Interface FDDI encapsulation formats correspond to the Ethernet 802 2 LLC and 802 3 SNAP encapsulation formats If you select either of these Ethernet encapsulation formats the corresponding FDDI encapsulation format is automatically selected for shared Ethernet and FDDI ports Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IPX network 4 byte IPX address of the 0x1 Oxfffffffe address interface The address must be unique within the network Ticks Number that the system uses to 1 65534 1 calculate route time A tick is an estimate of how long a packet takes to reach the network segment There are 18 21 ticks in a second Prompt Description 609 ipx interface define Possible Values Default Frame format VLAN Interface Index Frame encapsulation format for the interface IPX uses four Ethernet and two FDDI formats Ethernet Type Il Novell 802 3 RAW 802 2 LLC and 802 3 SNAP The FDDI formats are available with 802 2 and SNAP Index number of the VLAN to associate with the IPX interface IPX
323. g config info all warning info Enable the selected services levels n y y n To show that the AppleTalk service is associated with only the error and config severity levels enter Log display 754 CHAPTER 23 EVENT LOG oft ts gt ROVING ANALYSIS This chapter provides guidelines and other key information about how to set up roving analysis in your system including the following tasks a Display roving analysis configuration a Add and remove analyzer a Start and stop monitoring Roving analysis is the mirroring of traffic on one port to another port of the same media type a The port being monitored is called the monitor port a The port that receives the mirrored traffic is called the analyzer port The analyzer port typically has a network analyzer or RMON probe attached through which you can watch the network traffic Use roving analysis to monitor Fast Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet or Fiber Distributed Data Interface FDDI port traffic for network management and troubleshooting purposes You use the Administration Console to choose any network segment that is attached to a system and monitor its activity You can monitor a designated roving analysis port to a Analyze traffic loads on each segment so that you can continually optimize your network loads by moving network segments a Troubleshoot network problems for example to find out why a particular segment has so much traffi
324. g on the installed FDDI modules m all statusReporting Parameter that controls a enabled enabled whether a station generates l a disabled Status Report Frames SRFs to report events and conditions to network management stations fddi path display 229 fddi path display Displays FDDI path information Y 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation Y 9000 fd pad 9400 Important Consideration 3900 a The path display changes slightly when ports are configured as DAS 9300 ports Fields in the FDDI Path Display Field Description maxTReq Maximum time value of fddiMACT Reg that any MAC that is configured in this path uses This value can be user defined path Current selected path ports Ports numbers that are assigned to the FDDI module The FDDI port numbers change depending on the configuration of your system ringLatency Total accumulated latency of the ring that is associated with this path tmaxLowBound Minimum time value of fddiMACT Max that any MAC that is configured in this path uses This value can be user defined traceStatus Current trace status of the path tvxLowBound Minimum time value of fddiMACTvxValue that any MAC that is configured in this path uses This value can be user defined Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Ports One or more FDDI station ports m Any of the for which you want to set the available ports path display on the installed FDDI modules m all Path Path that you
325. g those with errors inShortDdps Number of input DDP datagrams that were dropped because the system was not their final destination and their type was short DDP inTooFars Number of input datagrams that were dropped because the system was not their final destination and their hop count would exceed 15 inTooLongs Number of input DDP datagrams that were dropped because they exceeded the maximum DDP datagram size inTooShorts Number of input DDP datagrams that were dropped because the received data length was less than the data length that was specified in the DDP header or the received data length was less than the length of the expected DDP header outLocals Number of host generated DDP datagrams 684 CHAPTER 21 APPLETALK appletalk statistics For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only rtmp Displays AppleTalk Routing Table Maintenance Protocol RTMP statistics y 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9000 eta 9400 Fields in the AppleTalk RTMP Statistics Display 3900 9300 Field Description inDatas Number of good RTMP data packets that were received inOtherErrs Number of RTMP packets that have been received and rejected for an error other than a version mismatch inRequests Number of good RTMP request packets that were received inVersionErrs Number of RTMP packets that have been received and rejected due to a version mismatch outDatas Number of RTMP data packets that were sent outRequests Number of RTMP request packets t
326. g trees to be constructed through and beyond areas of the network routers that do not support IP multicast routing The two tunnel end points must lie in different systems and subnetworks Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipmdts Important Considerations a The index number shown in the DVMRP tunnel summary display is the tunnel index number When you define a DVMRP tunnel the system assigns a tunnel index number to it which is different from the routing interface index number Tunnel index numbers provide a way to identify individual tunnels which is necessary because multiple tunnel end points can be configured on the same routing interface Tunnel index numbers are also needed so that you can remove tunnels without removing the interface with which it is associated a When you remove a tunnel the system does not dynamically re order remaining tunnels in the DVMRP tunnel summary display For example if you had three tunnels with tunnel index numbers 1 2 and 3 and you then removed tunnel 2 the display lists the remaining tunnels with their original tunnel index numbers 1 and 3 in this example The system assigns tunnel index 2 to the next new tunnel that you define After 2 is used the system can assign tunnel index 4 for the next new tunnel and so on a You can define multiple IP multicast tunnel end points on the same local routing interface but each must lead to a different remote interface You cannot define multiple IP multicas
327. gCreates Number of IP datagram fragments that were generated as a result of fragmentation on this system fragFails Number of IP datagrams that were discarded because they needed to be fragmented but could not be for example because their Don t Fragment bit was set fragOks Number of IP datagrams that were successfully fragmented inAddrErrors Number of datagrams that the IP station discarded because of an error in the source or destination IP address inDelivers Number of datagrams that the IP station delivered to local IP client protocols inDiscards Number of packet receive discards inHdrErrors Number of datagrams that the IP station discarded because the IP header contained errors inReceived Total number of IP datagrams that were received including those with errors osReceives Number of packets received that are destined to higher level protocols such as Telnet DNS TFTP and FTP osTransmits Number of packets that were sent through the router by higher level protocols such as Telnet DNS TFTP and FTP outDiscards Number of packet transmit discards management ip Statistics 187 Field Description outNoRoutes Number of datagrams that the IP station discarded because there was no route to the destination outRequests Number of datagrams that local IP client protocols passed to IP for transmission reasmFails Number of packet reassembly failures reasmReqs Number of packet reassembly requests reasmOks Number of
328. ghLossDroppedPeak a gt ighLossSent a gt ighlossSentPeak owLossDelayed owLossDelayedPeak owLossDropped owLossDroppedPeak owLossSent Number of loss eligible packets that were discarded and were over the threshold Current highest count of loss eligible packets that were discarded and were over the threshold Number of loss eligible packets that were sent and were under the threshold at low latency Current highest count of loss eligible packets that were sent and were under the threshold Number of non loss eligible packets that were sent and over the threshold that is the transmit queues were backing up but not overflowing Current highest count of non loss eligible packets that were sent and were over the threshold Number of packets that were discarded because they exceeded the length of the transmit queue Current highest count of packets that were discarded because they exceeded the length of the transmit queue Number of non loss eligible packets that were sent and were under the threshold at low latency Field Description lowLossSentPeak Current highest count of non loss eligible packets that were sent and were under the threshold port Port number that is associated with the statistics queue Queue that is associated with the statistics 744 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP MONITORING Chapter 23 Event Log Chapter 24 Roving Analysis oot t
329. hat have been discarded This value reflects a summary of all statistics that end with Discs Discards Of Filters rxFrames Total number of frames that this bridge port received from its segment However unlike the rxFrames field in the Ethernet display which counts all frames this field does not count frames in error Thus this value may be lower than the value shown in the rxFrames field in the Ethernet display state Current operating state of the port Blocking The bridge continues to run STP on the port but the bridge does not receive packets from the port learn locations of station addresses from it or forward packets onto it a Listening The bridge continues to run STP and to transmit configuration messages on the port but it discards packets that are received on the port and does not transmit packets that are forwarded to the port a Learning STP operating state in which the bridge receives packets on the port to learn the location of some of the stations that are located on the port a Forwarding The bridge receives packets on the port and forwards or does not forward them depending on address comparisons with the bridge s source address list Provided that the link state is up this state field indicates forwarding even if STP is disabled for the bridge a Disabled Management has disabled the port or the link state is down 282 CHAPTER 10 BRIDGE PORT PARAMETERS Field Description
330. hat were sent routeDeletes Number of times that RTMP deleted a route that was aged out of the table routeEqChgs Number of times that RTMP changed the Next Internet Router in a routing entry because the hop count that was advertised in a routing table was equal to the current hop count for a particular network routeLessChgs Number of times that RTMP changed the Next Internet Router in a routing entry because the hop count that was advertised in a routing table was less than the current hop count for a particular network routeOverflows Number of times that RTMP attempted to add a route to the RTMP table but failed because of lack of space appletalk statistics v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 zip appletalk statistics zip 685 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays AppleTalk Zone Information Protocol ZIP statistics Valid Minimum Abbreviation ap s z Fields in the AppleTalk ZIP Statistics Display Field Description inErrors Number of ZIP packets that have been received and rejected for any error inExReplies Number of ZIP extended replies that have been received inGniReplies Number of ZIP GetNetInfo reply packets that have been received inGniRequests Number of ZIP GetNetInfo request packets that have been received inLocalZones Number of ZIP GetLocalZones requests packets that have been received inObsoletes Number of ZIP Takedown or ZIP Bringup packets that have been recei
331. have been transmitted ip ospf virtualLinks define 581 ip ospf virtualLinks For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only define Creates a new virtual link to a destination router V 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation A 9000 ip o v def 9400 Important Considerations 3900 a All areas of an OSPF routing domain must connect to the backbone 9300 area In cases where an area border router does not have direct physical access to the backbone you must configure a virtual link to act as a logical link to the backbone area a You can define up to 32 virtual links per router Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Transit area Area ID in the form Currently defined n n n n where 0 lt n lt 255 area ID through which the link is going Target ID of the target router whichis Valid IP address of router the router where the virtual OSPF area border link terminates router 582 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf virtualLinks remove v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Removes a virtual link Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o v rem Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Virtual link Index number of the virtual link m Index number that you want to remove of a currently defined virtual link 7 all a fora list of selectable indexes ip ospf virtualLinks arealD 583 ip ospf vir
332. he mask same format and representation as an IP address The subnet mask determines which bits in the IP address are interpreted as the network number the subnet number and the host number Each IP address bit that corresponds to a 1 in the subnet mask is in the network subnet part of the address Each IP address bit that corresponds to a 0 is in the host part of the IP address Any valid IP address Any subnet mask 255 255 0 0 or valid for use with the subnet the current IP mask value address currently stored in the system 158 CHAPTER 5 OuT OF BAND MANAGEMENT management ip interface modify v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 Changes the configuration of an IP management interface that you have already defined Valid Minimum Abbreviation m ip im Important Consideration m Use the management ip statistics command to periodically monitor IP activity for your system The statistics can help determine whether you need to change the IP management interface using the management ip interface modify command management ip interface remove 159 management ip Removes an IP management interface if you no longer need it interface remove Valid Minimum Abbreviation J 3500 mipir 9000 9400 Important Consideration m Use the management ip statistics command to periodically 3900 monitor IP activity for your system The statistics can help determine 9300 whether you need to remove the IP management interface using the
333. he trunk s anchor port lowest numbered port only However be aware that the limit that you specify applies separately to each link in the trunk even though you only enter it once that is it is not an aggregate For a larger array of similar options in the CoreBuilder 3500 and 9000 Layer 3 modules see the Quality of Service QoS chapter in this guide Chapter 22 and in the appropriate mplementation Guide Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Bridge ports Bridge ports for which One or more valid bridge you want to set the port numbers multicastLimit Frame type Frame type to which a BcastOnly McastBcast 3900 9300 the limit shall apply broadcasts only 9400 9000 L2 Multicast a McastBcast multicasts and broadcasts Configurable a 0 200 K frames sec 0 parameter that limits the per second receive threshold value rate of specified traffic 3500 and 9000 L3 a 0 200000 frames sec 3900 9300 9400 and 9000 L2 bridge port stpState v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 Sets the Spanning Tree Protocol STP state for one or more bridge ports The selection is effective only if STP is enabled for the system or module Valid Minimum Abbreviation b po stps Important Considerations a You can use this command to configure the same setting on multiple ports simultaneously When you specify multiple port numbers the system prompts you to choose the setting and then ap
334. he administrative weight 1 16 1 2 ipx rip policy modify v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Modify an existing RIP Routing Information Protocol policy Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx ri pm Important Considerations a Every router maintains a table of current routing information in a routing table a Routing protocols receive or advertise routes from the network a Routing Policies control the flow of routing information between the network the protocols and the routing table manager Prompt Description Possible Values Default Policy Index number of the policy you m 1 1 if only one want to modify a Aieviewa list policy of selectable policies Route Origin of the route to which a Static All Origin this policy applies This a RIP parameter is valid only if the policy Type is set to Export a All Route IPX route to which this policy Ox1 Oxfffffffe All address applies a All IP interfaces One or more IP interfaces on One or more IP All this router associated with the interface numbers RIP policy Sourcenode 6 byte MAC address of the Anode address All address router that can forward in the format packets to the segment A XX XX XX XX XX XX node address of all zeroes All 00 00 00 00 00 00 i means that the route is connected directly to the router Policy action Whether this router accepts or m Accept Accept rejects a ro
335. he new address to each backup router The smaller the advertisement interval the smaller the failover time if the master fails The advertisement interval must be the same across the set of VRRP routers that are associated with a single VRID Backup routers must have the same advertisement interval as the Master router Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Virtual router type Type of virtual router m Primary Primary that you want to Backu define p p VLAN interface Index number of the Index number ofanIP Index index virtual LAN VLAN on virtual LAN VLAN that number of which you want to is defined on the first define the virtual system available TOUET a fora list of selectable VEAN indexes VRID Virtual router 1 255 1 identifier Identifies the virtual router that you want to define on the LAN Address mode Method by which the m auto learn auto learn virtual router you want to define learns its IP addresses a P address 494 CHAPTER 17 VIRTUAL ROUTER REDUNDANCY VRRP Prompt Description Possible Values Default Advertise interval Time between virtual 1 255 seconds 1 router advertisements Preempt mode Whether a higher a n no y priority backup router ma y yes y preempt a lower priority master Authentication Whether a password m none none type is needed to access a the virtual router CIE Password Character string to up to eight alphanumeric authenticate access to characters virt
336. he order in which modules power off if there is insufficient power available a Allowing you to implement fault tolerant power which allows the chassis to reserve some of its power capacity to protect against a power supply failure In the chassis a The EME exchanges information with all modules through the MLAN a Interface modules pass data through the switch fabric module a On modules that include their own agent the EME connects to that module and then you can use the Administration Console management interface to manage that module 34 CHAPTER 1 ADMINISTRATION OVERVIEW Configuration Tasks i gt To help you configure your system the top level menu of the Administration Console groups the commands into types for certain tasks as listed in Table 4 Not all menus and tasks are available on all systems Table 4 Types of Commands Associated with Configuration Tasks Type of Command Top Level Menus Tasks General system Set system or module parameters handle module nonvolatile NV data set security reboot script Run scripts logout disconnect Leave the Administration Console Management management Set up the out of band management setup interface snmp Set up the system for SNMP and trap reporting Port based ethernet Manage Ethernet ports management fddi Manage Fiber Distributed Data Interface FDDI ports Bridging bridge Set bridge parameters for the entire system including for Spanning Tree
337. he system or module is functioning as the querier you see this message Device IS designated querier on VLAN Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN ID ID number of the VLAN a Avalid VLAN ID 1 Default VLAN for which you are VID requesting information for a list of selectable VIDs bridge multicast igmp rPorts 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 2 switching modules only Lists the ports in the selected VLAN that lead to IP multicast routers Valid Minimum Abbreviation b mu i r Important Considerations a The system determines which ports in a VLAN lead to multicast routers by snooping on advertisements from the following routing protocols Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DVMRP Multicast Open Shortest Path First MOSPF and Protocol Independent Multicast PIM a Router port entries age out after 100 seconds Routing protocol advertisements are usually sent every few seconds a For the CoreBuilder 3500 system and CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 modules IGMP commands exist under the ip multicast igmp menu Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN ID ID number of the VLAN a Avalid VLAN ID 1 Default VLAN for which you want to list VID ports that lead to IP i multicast routers for a list of selectable VIDs 278 CHAPTER 9 BRIDGE WIDE PARAMETERS bridge multicast igmp For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to
338. he system response depends on the cable status If the cable is connected to the terminal port when you set the baud rate for that port the system displays the following message Changing the baud rate may cause a loss of communication since you are currently connected via the serial port Are you sure you want to change the baud rate y n a f you respond y yes the serial port s baud rate is changed immediately and you lose the ability to communicate to any devices connected to it until you adjust the device baud setting to match a f you respond n no the rate does not change and the display returns to the previous menu Procedure IP Interface 1 From the top level of the Administration Console enter system serialPort baudRate 2 Enter the baud setting for the terminal port After you select the new baud the system displays the following message The baud rate will not change until the system is rebooted To have your change take effect without rebooting perform this command via the serial port Are you sure you want to change the baud rate y n a f you respond y yes the rate is not changed until you reboot the system a f you respond n no the rate does not change and the display returns to the previous menu 98 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system serialPort serialPortMode 3500 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 Configures the system serial port to establish either a terminal connection
339. he system saves NV data it writes it to a disk file on a host computer that is a server using TFTP or FTP You can then retrieve the data from the disk file with the restore option Some TFIP implementations require that you store the files in the same directory in which the TFTP daemon server is running on the remote host Some TFP implementations require a full path while other implementations allow you to specify only the file name and the system saves the file to the default TFTP directory Consult your network administrator or TFTP documentation for details about your host system s TFTP implementation Because TFP provides no user authentication give loose permissions to the control file and the NV data file on the remote host that is make the files publicly readable and writable TFTP servers do not grant requests for file access 108 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT Important Consideration FTP and TFTP a During the save procedure the current configuration can be altered To detect this event the software runs checksum on the NVRAM before and after the save If the checksum is different you are notified and prompted to save the configuration again In abnormal situations this reiteration can continue indefinitely so you are given the option to terminate the save You are also prompted for a retry request after a network TFTP O failure Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Host IP IP address
340. her a higher a n no y mode priority backup router my yes may preempt a lower priority master Authenticati Whether a password none none on type is needed to access the virtual router m pass Password Character string to up to eight alphanumeric authenticate access to characters virtual router IP VRRP Modify Example Select menu option ip vrrp modify Enter VLAN interface index 2 3 2 Enter virtual router ID 1 1 Enter virtual router s type Primary Backup Primary Enter address mode auto learn IP address auto learn IP address Old Ip Association address list VRID VIDX Address 1 2 158 101 175 228 Interface 158 101 175 228 will be selected as your primary address Enter the advertise interval in sec 1 255 1 Enter virtual router preempt mode no yes yes no Enter Authentication Type none pass none Enter virtual router state enabled disabled enabled 498 CHAPTER 17 VIRTUAL ROUTER REDUNDANCY VRRP ip vrrp remove 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Removes one or more existing virtual routers from the system Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipve Important Consideration a f you attempt to remove a virtual router that is in the Master state you are prompted to confirm the operation a f you enter no the system does not remove the virtual router a f you enter yes the system removes the virtual router whi
341. hether you want any other address and port patterns filters with this classifier yes or no the default is no If you specify yes the system prompts you for additional filtering information beginning with the source IP address If you have several existing address and port patterns you must specify all of them again during the modification process Any address and port patterns that you do not reenter are deleted Nonflow Classifier Procedure To modify the cast type enter a new cast type For a nonflow classifier the options are unicast multicast broadcast and all To modify the associated protocols enter another protocol The options are TCP IP IP IPX Appletalk any Or custom If you choose custom select the protocol type ethernet or DSAP SSAP a For the ethernet type enter the hexidecimal value a For the DSAP SSAP type enter the DSAP and SSAP hexidecimal values To modify the handling of IEEE 802 1p tags enter the appropriate tags using a value in the range of 0 through 7 or enter all QoS Classifier Modify Example Flow Classifier Select menu option qos classifier modify Enter classifier number 20 23 26 401 407 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 26 Enter classifier name IPFilterl Select cast type unicast multicast all unicast multicast Select IP protocol type TCP UDP all TCP UDP Enter source IP address 168 20 30 0 Enter source IP address mask 255 255 0 0 Enter destina
342. his removes all VLANs then re creates the Default VLAN continue n y yl y Select bridge port 1 6 1 IP Interface Define Example VLAN based Routing Enter IP address 158 101 1 1 Enter subnet mask 255 255 0 0 255 255 255 0 Enter interface typ vlan port vlan vlan Enter VLAN interface index 3 3 3 406 ip interface define 3900 9300 9400 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 9000 Layer 2 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP Defines an IP interface Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip i def Important Consideration a Before you define the IP routing interface first define a virtual LAN VLAN and select IP as a protocol that the VLAN supports as described in Chapter 16 Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP address IP address of the interface A valid IP address chosen from the range of in the range of addresses that the central agency addresses that assigned to your organization are assigned to This address is specific to your your network and system organization Subnet mask 32 bit number that uses the A valid subnet Depends on same format and representation mask in specified IP as an IP address The subnet accordance with address mask determines which bits in the bits that are the IP address are interpreted as used for network the network number the number subnetwork number and the subnetwork and host number Each IP address bit host number th
343. hold For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Sets the maximum number of times that the system forwards a packet to the network Valid Minimum Abbreviation iput Important Consideration a By default there is no threshold 0 Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default BOOTP relay Maximum number 0 65535 O factory threshold of times that the default or system forwards a current packet to the value network v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip udpHelper interface first For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Configures UDP Helper to support overlapped IP interfaces by using the first interface Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipuif Important Considerations Overlapped IP interfaces are multiple logical interfaces that are defined for a single physical port You can specify how UDP Helper forwards packets from overlapped IP interfaces with one of three interface options first even Of sequential a The value first directs the system to use the first overlapped IP interface as the source network for forwarded packets a The system implements your selection immediately You can view the UDP Helper configuration when you configure the forwarding address 448 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP ip udpHelper For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only interface even Configures UDP Helper to support overlapped IP interfaces
344. hone support phone number at the location nearest you 770 APPENDIX A TECHNICAL SUPPORT When you contact 3Com for assistance have the following information ready a Product model name part number and serial number a A list of system hardware and software including revision levels a Diagnostic error messages a Details about recent configuration changes if applicable Here is a list of worldwide technical telephone support numbers Country Telephone Number Country Telephone Number Asia Pacific Rim Australia 1 800 678 515 P R of China 10800 61 00137 or Hong Kong 800 933 486 021 6350 1590 India 61 2 9937 5085 Singapore 800 6161 463 Indonesia 001 800 61 009 S Korea Japan 0031 61 6439 From anywhere in S Korea 00798 611 2230 Malaysia 1800 801 777 From Seoul 0 2 3455 6455 New Zealand 0800 446 398 Taiwan R O C 0080 611 261 Pakistan 61 2 9937 5085 Thailand 001 800 611 2000 Philippines 1235 61 266 2602 Europe From anywhere in Europe call 31 0 30 6029900 phone 31 0 30 6029999 fax Europe South Africa and Middle East From the following countries you may use the toll free numbers Austria 0800 297468 Netherlands 0800 0227788 Belgium 0800 71429 Norway 800 11376 Denmark 800 17309 Poland 00800 3111206 Finland 0800 113153 Portugal 0800 831416 France 0800 917959 South Africa 0800 995014 Germany 0800 1821502 Spain 900 983125 Hungary 00800 12813 Sweden 020 795482 Ireland 1800 553117 Switzerla
345. ic is incremented under the following circumstances a When an OSPF Hello packet is received and the dead interval it defines is different from the dead interval configured on the OSPF interface Number of Hello packet interval mismatches that have been detected Number of subnet mask mismatches that have been detected Number of packet checksum errors since the interface has come up Number of database description packets that were received from valid OSPF neighbors nterpretation a A non zero value is OK Database description packets are sent when forming adjacencies with valid neighbors A large number of receiveDD packets in a network whose configuration has not changed could indicate that adjacencies are being torn down and reestablished This statistic is incremented under the following circumstances a When an OSPF database descriptor packet from a valid OSPF neighbor is received Number of unknown LSAs that have been received Field ip ospf virtualLinks statistics 579 Description receiveError receiveHello receiveLsAck receiveLSR Number of general receive errors Interpretation A non zero value indicates that OSPF packets are being dropped and that this could be causing routing problems This statistic is incremented under the following circumstances When an OSPF Hello packet is received and the packet length is too short When an OSPF Hello packet is received that has the same router
346. ics 472 ip ping 473 ip advancedPing 475 ip traceRoute 478 ip advancedTraceRoute 480 ip statistics 482 17 VIRTUAL ROUTER REDUNDANCY VRRP Menu Structure 485 ip vrrp summary 486 ip vrrp detail 488 ip vrrp define 492 ip vrrp modify 495 ip vrrp remove 498 ip vrrp mode 499 ip vrrp neighbor 500 ip vrrp statistics 501 18 IP MULTICAST Menu Structure 504 ip multicast dvmrp interface summary 505 ip multicast dvmrp interface detail 506 ip multicast dvmrp interface mode 507 ip multicast dvmrp interface metric 508 ip multicast dvmrp tunnels summary 509 ip multicast dvmrp tunnels define 511 ip multicast dvmrp tunnels remove 513 ip multicast dvmrp tunnels address 514 ip multicast dvmrp tunnels threshold 515 ip multicast dvmrp tunnels metric 516 ip multicast dvmrp routeDisplay 517 ip multicast dvmrp cacheDisplay 518 ip multicast dvmrp default 520 ip multicast igmp interface summary 521 ip multicast igmp interface detail 522 ip multicast igmp interface TTL 523 ip multicast igmp snooping 524 ip multicast igmp querying 525 ip multicast cache 526 ip multicast traceRoute 528 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH FiRST OSPF Menu Structure 530 ip ospf areas display 531 ip ospf areas defineArea 532 ip ospf areas modifyArea 533 ip ospf areas removeArea 534 ip ospf areas addRange 535 ip ospf areas modifyRange 536 ip ospf areas removeRange 537 ip ospf defaultRouteMetric display 538 ip ospf defaultRouteMetric define 539 ip ospf defaultRouteMet
347. id Minimum Abbreviation sy cot i Important Consideration a To enable or disable the inactive timeout interval for remote sessions see the preceding command system console timeout timeOut for details Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Telnet Timeout interval 1 60 minutes 30 timeout interval system snapshot v 3500 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 summary system snapshot summary 85 Captures an image of all system summary display screens This display reflects each application s status at the time that you use the snapshot feature Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy sn su 86 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system snapshot v 3500 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 detail Captures an image of all system detail screens The display reflects the current values of all fields and counters at the time that you use the snapshot feature Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy snd system snapshot save v 3500 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 system snapshot save 87 Sends detail screens to a file on the host machine that you specify Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy sn sa Important Considerations The CoreBuilder 3500 uses the Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP or File Transfer Protocol FTP to transfer the files to the host depending on the setting for the system fileTransfer option The SuperStack II Switch 3900 Switch 9300 and the CoreBuilder 9400 use TFTP to transfer files
348. ield Description 802 1p tag IEEE 802 1p priority tag value 0 7 that is applied to forwarded frames Can be defined for both flow and nonflow classifiers Burst Burst size in KBytes Classifiers controlled Control number Control name End time Excess loss eligible Excess service Limit Loss eligible Ports Rate limits control Service Classifiers that this control affects Number of the control Name that you assign to the control Control end time For receivePort or aggregate rate limit types whether excess packets are loss eligible For receivePort or aggregate rate limit type service level for excess packets Rate limit in KBytes sec or percentage Whether conforming packets are loss eligible A loss eligible packet can be dropped if the transmit queue for which it is destined is over its threshold Receive ports for which you want to enable the rate limit Number of the control that the rate limit affects Service level for the conforming packets high best low or drop Field Description Source Port range Start time TCP drop control Time control type Type Beginning and end of the source port range Control start time Whether TCP drop control filtering is enabled Time control type specific daily weekdays and so forth Rate limit type none no rate limit receivePort or aggregate 710 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP qos control define v 3500
349. ies to Layer 2 switching modules only Enables or disables the snooping listening function of the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Valid Minimum Abbreviation b mu i sn Important Considerations a The value that you select applies to the entire system or module a IGMP snooping must be disabled on a CoreBuilder 9400 switch if you configure it as a MultiPoint Link Aggregation MPLA core switch For more information about MPLA see the CoreBuilder 9400 Implementation Guide a For the CoreBuilder 3500 system and CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 modules IGMP commands exist under the ip multicast igmp menu Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IGMP Whether your system a enabled enabled factory snooping implements IGMP snooping a dis bl d default or current value 272 CHAPTER 9 BRIDGE WIDE PARAMETERS bridge multicast igmp 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 queryMode For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 2 switching modules only Enables or disables the querying function of the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP From all IGMP capable devices on a given subnetwork the one with the lowest IP address is elected as the querier Valid Minimum Abbreviation b mu i querym Important Considerations The value that you select applies to the entire system If you enable igmp querymode but disable igmp snoopmode the system or module cannot operate as an IGMP querier To prevent
350. ific port fddi stationMode modify v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Modifies the stationMode DAS or SAS that is assigned to a specific port number Valid Minimum Abbreviation fd stationM m Important Considerations a You cannot modify the stationMode when any of the ports in the pair are part of a trunk a Before the new stationMode takes effect you must reboot your system a You can use this command to configure the same setting on multiple ports simultaneously When you specify multiple port numbers the system prompts you to choose the setting and then applies it to all of the ports Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Ports FDDI station port for which you m Any of the want to set the stationMode available ports on the installed FDDI modules m all stationMode Mode of the FDDI port pair a DAS SAS selected to change a SAS reboot Prompt to reboot the system if w y yes you want the stationMode aA AO changes to take effect 248 CHAPTER 8 FIBER DISTRIBUTED DATA INTERFACE FDDI Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Chapter 15 BRIDGING PARAMETERS Bridge Wide Parameters Bridge Port Parameters Trunks MultiPort Link Aggregation MPLA Resilient Links Virtual LANs VLANs Packet Filters eee gt i gt BRIDGE WIDE PARAMETERS This chapter provides guidelines and other key information about how use the Administration Consol
351. ified IP address Destination IP For flow classifiers Up to 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 address only destination IP factory address default wildcard match Destination IP For flow classifiers Up to four portions 0 0 0 0 address mask only destination IP 255 255 255 255 factory address mask or default how many portions wildcard of the address you match want to match Start andend For flow classifiers a 0O 65535 start 0 and of TCP or UDP only start and end 65535 source port ofthe TCPor UDP 2049 65535 end factory range source port range See QoS Classifier Define defaults The start value Example Flow Classifier determines the end value Startandend For flow classifiers a 0 65535 start 0 and of TCP or UDP only start and end 65535 destination of the TCP or UDP 2049 65535 end factory port range destination port See QoS Classifier Define defaults range The start Example Flow Classifier value determines the end value Additional For flow classifiers a y yes no factory filter only additional no default address port source destination ae pattern and port information for this classifier Custom For nonflow a Ethertype protocol type classifiers with the a DSAP SSAP custom custom protocol nonflow type classifiers only w O O NOUA 10 qos classifier define 697 Prompt Description Possible Values Default Custom Hex values for a Ethertype hex value of 0x0 protocol nonflow cla
352. igurable parameter that sets the port mode on Ethernet ports that have port mode options If autonegotiation is enabled port mode values are ignored Number of bytes received by this port including framing characters Sum of all receive errors that are associated with this port summary report only Number of frames that were copied into receive buffers by this port Number of bytes that were transmitted by this port including framing characters Sum of all transmit errors that are associated with this port summary report only Number of frames that were transmitted by this port Number of frames that were lost because transmit queue was full management detail v 3500 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 management detail 153 Displays Ethernet detailed information about the out of band system management port Valid Minimum Abbreviation m det Important Considerations a The management summary and management detail displays contain the same fields as the Ethernet summary and Ethernet detail displays a Fields that do not apply to the management port contain n a in the management summary and management detail displays Fields in the Management Detail Display Field Description actualFlowControl actualPortMode alignmenteErrs autoNegMode autoNegState carrierSenseErr collisions excessCollision excessDeferrals fcsErrs Actual flow control setting for the port When autonegotiation is com
353. imum Abbreviation ip o po det Important Considerations a This display contains the summary information plus three additional fields interface metric and ASEType a Your system has one unified IP routing table Routing policies allow you to control the flow of information among the network the protocols and the routing tables on your system a There are two classes of routing policies a Import policies Control which OSPF non self originated external routes are stored in the routing table OSPF import policies control only what the local router uses They do not affect the propagation of non self originated external routes to other routers a Export policies Used on OSPF boundary routers to control which self originated external routing updates are placed in the link state database for propagation over the network In this way export policies govern what other routers learn with regard to the local boundary router s self originated information ma The system tracks policies that you define in both OSPF and Routing Information Protocol RIP so the indexes that are assigned to your policies may have gaps For example if you have OSPF policies 1 and 2 and RIP policies 3 through 6 the next policy is 7 Fields in the IP OSPF Policy Detail Display Field Description Action Action for the route accept or reject ASEType Type of external metric Type 1 or Type 2 specified in the AS external link advertisement
354. increases network availability using scalable Gigabit Ethernet connections among multiple campus switches For more information about MPLA and trunking see the CoreBuilder 9400 Implementation Guide Menu Structure The commands that you can use depend on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardware options that are configured for your system The following diagram shows the complete list of commands for all systems See the checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter for whether your system supports the command Top Level Menu bridge menu mpla menu system display summary module ipFragmentation detail management ipxSnapTranslation mode ethernet addressThreshold peerMacAddress fddi agingTime bridge _ _ __ spanningTree ip gvrpState ipx cos appletalk port qos multicast snmp packetFilter analyzer vlan log trunk script mpla logout link disconnect 322 CHAPTER 12 MULTIPOINT LINK AGGREGATION MPLA bridge mpla summary Describes the state of the multipoint aggregated link 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9000 b mp s vy 9400 i i Fields in the Bridge MPLA Summary Display 3900 Field Description 9300 Mode Whether MPLA is enabled on the switch Possible values are enabled and disabled The default is disabled Peer Switch Interface The state up or down of the out of band management State port on the other p
355. index number is available for future use Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Policy index Index number of the policy that w Valid policy you want to delete index number m all a fora list of selectable indexes ip ospf statistics v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip ospf statistics 603 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays general OSPF statistics Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o sta Fields in the IP OSPF Statistics Display Field Description extLsaChanges Number of external LSA changes that have been made to the database LSAsReceived Number of link state advertisements that have been received LSAsTransmitted Number of link state advertisements that have been transmitted memoryFailures Number of nonfatal memory allocation failures recvErrors Number of general receive errors routeUpdateErrors Number of nonfatal routing table update failures softRestarts Number of OSPF router soft restarts due to insufficient memory resources implies a fatal memory allocation failure To fix this problem use ip ospf partition modify to change the OSPF memory partition add memory or reconfigure the network topology to generate smaller OSPF databases SPFComputations Number of shortest path first computations that have been made 604 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH FIRST OSPF oe tte e P E d IPX This chapter provides guidelines and oth
356. ine see the Implementation Guide for your system Procedure To display summary information about Ethernet ports enter ethernet summary At the prompt for example 1 24 a11 2 select the ports whose information you want to display or to display a port summary specify Indicate a range of ports with a hyphen Separate nonconsecutive ports with a comma The system displays port information based on the ports that you specified ethernet detail v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 Displays detailed Ethernet port information including the information in the summary and additional Ethernet port statistics such as collision counters Valid Minimum Abbreviation ed Important Considerations Port numbering is consecutive regardless of module type if you are using a system that has modules Depending on the system numbering may or may not skip an empty slot and continue with the ports that are associated with the next occupied slot See the Implementation Guide for your system for specific information about port numbering Numbering includes unused ports Only one port number is assigned to a Gigabit Ethernet module in switches that use Gigabit Ethernet modules The system no longer assigns port number 1 to the out of band management port which does not receive a port number The rxFrames value that the Ethernet detail command reports for a bridge port may differ from the value that the bridge p
357. ing circumstances When an OSPF Hello packet is received and the packet length is too short When an OSPF Hello packet is received that has the same router ID as the router receiving the packet When an OSPF database descriptor packet is received and the packet length is too short When an OSPF link state request LSR packet is received and the packet length is too short When processing an LSR packet if the area is not configured on the interface When an OSPF link state update LSU packet is received and the packet length is too short When processing an LSU packet if there are more than 500 advertisements the packet is not processed When an OSPF link state acknowledgement LSAck packet is received and the packet length is too short When processing an LSAck packet if the area described by the packet is not known by the router receiving the packet When processing any OSPF packet if the packet length is less than the OSPF header length then it must have been truncated and the packet is dropped When an OSPF packet is received on an interface that is not running OSPF When an OSPF packet is received over a virtual link but the virtual link is down or not configured When an OSPF packet is received over a non virtual link from a source whose IP network does not match the IP network of the interface on which it was received When an OSPF packet is received on a Non Broadcast Multiple Access network from an un
358. ing protocol that is used for communications among various networking devices To gain access to the system using the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP or to manage the system using the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP you must set up an IP interface to manage your system either in band with your regular network traffic or out of band with a dedicated network a In Band Management Set up an IP routing interface and at least one virtual local area network VLAN See Chapter 14 for information about how to define a VLAN a Out of Band Management Assign an IP address and subnet mask for the out of band Ethernet port on your system through the management menu This chapter focuses on out of band management The out of band Ethernet port is the 10BASE T port on the system processor module It is not associated with a port number See Chapter 16 for background information about IP addresses and subnet masks This chapter provides guidelines and other key information about how to set up an out of band management interface for your system The CoreBuilder 9000 and SuperStack II Switch 3900 use in band management only For more information about management interfaces see the Implementation Guide for your system 150 CHAPTER 5 OuT OF BAND MANAGEMENT Menu Structure The commands that you can use depend on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardw
359. ion Possible Values Default Enable Connects your system tothe Disabled LDAP server Poll period 600 2000 LDAP server The IP address of the LDAP address server you have configured LDAP group Name of an LDAP entry on the Wildcard name LDAP server that indexes other entries containing QoS classifier and control information gos Idap disable 727 qos Idap disable Disables QoS parameter directory services which are located on the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP server Y 3500 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 q 1 disa Important Considerations 3900 P E 9300 a By default LDAP is disabled a If LDAP is disabled you do not receive automatic updates Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Disabled Removes the connection tothe Disabled LDAP server 728 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP qos rsvp summary v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays summary Resource Reservation Protocol RSVP information when RSVP is enabled Valid Minimum Abbreviation qars Fields in the QoS RSVP Summary Display Field Description Excess loss Whether excess packets are loss eligible eligible Excess service Service level for excess policed traffic best or low Per resv Largest reservation that RSVP attempts to install bandwidth Policing option When to drop excess packets Edge policing cau
360. ion floods the network with Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP echo packets and can cause network congestion Do not use the Burst option during periods of heavy network traffic Use this option only as a diagnostic tool in a network that has many routers to determine if one of the routers is not forwarding packets For example you can set a high count value 1000 packets and then observe the run lights on the units the run lights blink rapidly on routers that are forwarding packets successfully but remain unlit or blink slowly on routers that are not forwarding packets successfully To interrupt the command press Enter Options Possible Prompt Description Values Default Host name or Host name or IP address of the A valid host 0 0 0 0 IP address destination that you want to ping name or IP address Number of Number of ICMP echo request 1 9999 3 ICMP Request packets that are sent to ping a host packets packets If the destination host does not respond after it is pinged by the number of packets that you specify the system displays a Host is Unreachable or Host is not Responding message 180 CHAPTER 5 OuT OF BAND MANAGEMENT Possible Prompt Description Values Default Packet size Number of bytes in each ICMP echo 28 4096 64 request packet The packet size bytes includes both the IP and the ICMP headers Burst Transmit When enabled sends out the a disabled disabled Ping mode ICMP echo request packets a
361. iority a 0 255 1 a If 0 router will not be the default router a If 1 255 the highest priority becomes the designated router 550 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf interface arealD VY 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Associates an interface with an OSPF area Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipoia Important Considerations Set the area ID to the same value for all routers on the network segment because they are in the same area a 0 0 0 0 indicates the OSPF backbone area Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interface Index number of one or more w One or more all factory interfaces that you want to valid IP interface default or associate with the area index numbers current value C all a fora list of selectable indexes Area ID ID of area in the form n n n n Valid area ID 0 0 0 0 factory where 0 lt n lt 255 with default or which you want to associate current value the specified interfaces ip ospf interface cost 551 ip ospf interface cost For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Assigns a cost to an OSPF interface Z 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 peie 3900 Important Consideration 9300 a The interface cost reflects the line speed of the port Although the system calculates a default cost value based on the module media type you can use this c
362. iption Possible Values Default Area Index number of the area that m Valid area index you want to modify number a fora list of selectable indexes Area ID In the form n n n n where Up to 0 lt n lt 255 functions as 255 255 255 255 an area identification number to the OSPF autonomous system Stub area Whether this area is a stub area my yes n factory default or n no a no current value 534 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf areas For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only removeArea Removes an existing OSPF area vV 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation A 9000 ip o a removea 9400 Options 3900 9300 Prompt Description Possible Values Default Area Index number of the area that w Valid area index First available you want to remove number index number a all a fora list of selectable indexes ip ospf areas addRange 535 ip ospf areas For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only addRange Adds a range to an existing OSPF area vV 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9000 eae 9400 Options 3900 9300 Prompt Description Possible Values Default Area Index number of the area to a Valid area index which you want to add the number range a fora list of selectable indexes IP address IP address of the range that Up to you want to add to the area 255 255 255 255 Subnet Subnet mask of the range that Variable based on Variable based
363. irst rate limit should be expressed percentage of port bandwidth or KBytes sec KBytes sec is the default If the control has multiple per port rate limits you can change one rate limit without affecting the others d If you specified KBytes sec for the first or only rate limit enter the value for the rate limit in KBytes sec 0 through 65434 If you specified percentage for the rate limit specify the percentage in the range of from 0 through 100 percent e Enter the burst size in KBytes in the range of from 16 through 8192 The default value depends on your specified rate limit 722 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP f Specify the bridge ports for which you want to enable the new rate limit for example 1 13 or a11 If you modify the rate limit and apply it to only one or a subset of the bridge ports you are prompted to specify whether you want to modify or define another rate limit for another set of bridge ports If you specify yes you are prompted to enter another rate limit and burst size This sequence of prompting continues until you specify n meaning that you do not want to modify or define another rate limit for another set of ports The rate limit applies only to those ports that you explicitly specified any ports that you did not specify are not associated with your rate limit 7 Select an IEEE 802 1p tag value in the range of from 0 through 7 or the value none to apply to forwarded frames
364. is ambiguous Reenter the option from the point at which it became incorrect or expand a truncated command until it becomes unambiguous When a new menu appears the selection prompt with its choices in parentheses changes to reflect your progression through the menus Example If you enter bridge at the top level menu and then agingTime at the module prompt the prompt changes to reflect the current level Select a menu option bridge agingTime Entering a Command String After you become familiar with the menu structure you can enter a string of menu options or commands to move immediately to a task Example The command string for setting the path cost for a port on a module looks like this Select a menu option bridge port stpCost Entering Values Entering Values 41 Entering Abbreviated Commands You can abbreviate command strings by typing only as much of the command as is necessary to make it unique Select a menu option b po stpe When you correctly enter either a full or an abbreviated command string you move to the last menu level or option that is specified in the string Information that is relevant to that option appears as a menu a prompt or a display If you enter a command string incorrectly the Administration Console displays a message indicating that your entry was not valid or was ambiguous Reenter the command from the point at which it became incorrect or expand a truncated command until it becom
365. isplay 116 system sntp modify 118 system sntp polllnterval 121 system sntp remove 119 system sntp state 120 system sntp timezone 104 106 121 system sntp tolerance 122 system up time 69 T T_Opr 232 tagging VLAN defining 345 352 displaying 341 modifying 355 360 specifying 347 352 tags priority for controls 712 for excess packets 736 for nonflow classifiers 697 703 705 TCMP Trunk Control Message Protocol displaying state 301 304 305 328 329 technical support 3Com Knowledgebase Web Services 767 3Com URL 767 bulletin board service 768 fax service 769 network suppliers 769 product repair 771 telnet rebooting the system 123 terminal port port speed 93 96 terminal speed 93 terminalSpeed command system serialPort 93 96 terminate a Telnet session 126 TFP Trivial File Transfer Protocol 87 time displaying module 137 time in service 69 tolerance threshold 122 total reservable bandwidth 725 728 traceRoute port number 182 480 source address 182 using 478 traceroute IP multicast 528 transmit statistics QOS 741 trap reporting adding 195 flushing addresses 197 modifying 195 TReq 232 triggered updates RIP 631 SAP 639 trunk groups supported 314 trunking and VLANs 346 definition 299 overview 299 trunks defining 310 315 definition 299 detail information 305 329 maximum ports 316 names 316 removing 318 resources 318 sample definition 311 summary information 304 328 trusted IP clients 77 to 8
366. it Priority of the virtual router Represented by a value from 0 through 255 Used in Master router election Value of 255 indicates that the router owns the IP addresses that are associated with the virtual router 0 indicates that the current Master has stopped participating in VRRP IP address which VRRP advertisements use as the source of the IP packet Total number of VRRP advertisements with a priority of 0 that this virtual router has received The priority of zero 0 indicates that the current Master has stopped participating in VRRP Used to trigger Backup routers to quickly transition to Master without having to wait for the current Master to time out 490 CHAPTER 17 VIRTUAL ROUTER REDUNDANCY VRRP Field Description priorityZeroTx State Type versionErrors VLAN Index VRID Total number of VRRP advertisements with a priority of O that this virtual router has sent The priority of zero 0 indicates that this virtual router was acting as Master but stopped participating in VRRP Used to trigger backup routers to quickly transition to Master without having to wait for the current Master to time out Current state of the VRRP router One of the following a Master In this state the router is the active forwarding router for all IP addresses that are associated with the virtual router Backup In this state the router monitors the availability of the Master router If the Master router
367. ities for the virtual router should the primary router fail a When you define a Backup virtual router you cannot use the VRID of a primary router that is defined on the system You cannot define a Primary and Backup VRRP router for the same virtual router on the same routing device Address Mode m In auto learn mode systems learn the IP addresses to associate with the specified VRID m IN IP address mode the system prompts you to select the interface index from a list a After a reboot the address learning process restarts for each virtual router in auto learn address mode a When you define a Primary virtual router selecting auto learn as the address mode automatically adds all IP addresses that are associated with the selected VLAN to the primary virtual router 496 CHAPTER 17 VIRTUAL ROUTER REDUNDANCY VRRP Advertisement Intervals When you define a Primary router on a VLAN that contains a single interface the single interface is automatically chosen as the primary address when you select LP address as the Address mode When you define a Backup virtual router selecting autto learn as the address mode configures the Backup router to learn the IP addresses that are associated with the virtual router by means of VRRP advertisements from the Primary router The Primary router must be up for backup routers to auto learn the addresses that are associated with the specified VRID When you define Backup virtual routers th
368. itted Number of LSA request packets that were transmitted Number of link state update packets that were transmitted 548 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf interface For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only mode Enables or disables OSPF on specified IP interfaces vV 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation V 9000 ners 9400 Options 3900 9300 Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interface Index number of one or more w One or more all factory IP interfaces on which you valid IP interface default or want to enable or disable OSPF index numbers current value C all a fora list of selectable indexes OSPF mode Whether to disable or enable disabled disabled OSPF on the specified IP enabled factory interface z default or current value ip ospf interface priority 549 ip ospf interface For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only priority Assigns interface priority to the OSPF router v 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation V 9000 eae 9400 Important Consideration 3900 a The interface priority of an OSPF router determines its status as a 9300 designated router Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interface Index number of one or more w One or more all factory IP interfaces to which you want valid IP interface default or to assign a priority index numbers current value m all a fora list of selectable indexes Priority Interface pr
369. known neighbor When an OSPF packet is received whose version is not OSPF version 2 Number of Hello packets that were received Number of LSA acknowledgments that were received Number of LSA request packets that were received ip ospf interface statistics 547 Field Description receiveLSU Number of link state update packets that were received transmitDD Number of database description packets that were transmitted transmitError transmitHello transmitLsAck transmitLSR transmitLSU Interpretation A non zero value is OK Database description packets are sent when forming adjacencies with valid neighbors A large number in a network whose configuration has not changed could indicate that adjacencies are being torn down and re established This statistic is incremented under the following circumstances When an OSPF database descriptor packet is transmitted Number of general transmit errors Interpretation A non zero value indicates that an OSPF packet could not be sent either out a particular interface or to a particular destination This could prevent OSPF from running properly within the autonomous system and lead to routing problems This statistic is incremented under the following circumstances When an OSPF Hello LSU or LSAck is being sent as a multicast packet on a non broadcast multiple access network Number of Hello packets that were transmitted Number of LSA acknowledgments that were transm
370. kplane 9000 Configurable parameter that sets the flow control option when autonegotiation is disabled When autonegotiation is enabled flow control values are ignored Port mode on Ethernet ports that have port mode options when autonegotiation is disabled When autonegotiation is enabled port mode values are ignored Configurable parameter that is used to enable and disable this port The default is enabled Number of frames received by this port that were shorter than 64 bytes Number of broadcasts received by this port CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET PORTS Field Description rxByteRate Average number of bytes received per second by this port during the most recent sampling period rxBytes Number of bytes received by this port including framing characters rxDiscards Number of received frames that were discarded because there 3500 and 9000 Layer 3 rxFrameRate rxFrames rxinternalErrs rxMcastsOnly 3900 9000 Layer 2 9300 and 9400 rxMulticasts rxPeakByteRate rxPeakFrameRate rxUnicasts singleCollision 3500 3900 and 9000 slot port 9000 txBroadcasts 3900 9000 Layer 2 9300 and 9400 txByteRate txBytes txDiscards was no higher layer to receive them or because the port was disabled Average number of frames that were received per second by this port during the most recent sampling period Sampling periods are 1 second long and not configurable Number of frames tha
371. ks and you then try to remove the Gigabit Ethernet trunk you will exceed the trunk resource limit The Gigabit Ethernet ports use two trunk resources The system reports that it is unable to remove the trunk because the trunk resource limit would be exceeded a Removing a trunk requires a module reboot For CoreBuilder 9000 modules rebooting a module returns you to the EME prompt which requires you to reconnect to the module Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Trunk index Index number of the trunk that One or more you want to remove valid trunk index number m all a fora list of selectable trunk indexes bridge trunk remove 319 Bridge Trunk Remove Example 9000 Select menu option bridge trunk remove CB9000 slot10 1 12 E FEN TX L3 bridge trunk remove Select trunk index s 1 2 all 2 The configuration of the ports will be modified The module must be rebooted to complete trunk configuration This may take a few minutes Are you sure you want to reboot the system n y y y 320 CHAPTER 11 TRUNKS 12 oe tte E E d gt MULTIPOINT LINK AGGREGATION MPLA MultiPoint Link Aggregation MPLA increases the capacity and availability of campus LAN cores without using complex meshed router networks Functioning at Layer 2 MPLA provides both dual homed link resiliency and automatic load sharing over point to multipoint backbone connections MPLA
372. l router identifier 1 255 1 Identifies the virtual router that you want to define on the LAN Virtual Explicitly turns on or turns off m enabled disabled router mode a configured virtual router aw alesbied IP VRRP Mode Example Select menu option ip vrrp mode Enter VLAN interface index 2 3 all all Enter virtual router ID 1 2 all all Vrid 1 Enter virtual router mod enabled disabled disabled enabled Vrid 2 Enter virtual router mod enabled disabled disabled enabled 500 CHAPTER 17 VIRTUAL ROUTER REDUNDANCY VRRP ip vrrp neighbor v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays a list of neighboring virtual routers Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip vn Important Considerations a Any locally defined virtual router is not displayed a Ifthe Address and MasterRouterAddr fields contain the same IP address the listed virtual router is in the Master state Fields in the IP VRRP Neighbor Display Field Description VLAN Index Index number of the VLAN on which the virtual router is defined VRID Virtual Router ID Number that identifies the virtual router on the LAN Address IP address of the neighbor virtual router which may be a Master or Backup router MasterRouterAddr IP address of the Master virtual router Interval Time in seconds between virtual router advertisements Priority Priority among the backup routers to beco
373. la logout link disconnect bridge packetFilter list v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Lists the currently defined packet filters Valid Minimum Abbreviation b pa li Bridge Packet Filter List Example 3500 Select menu option bridge packetFilter list Packet Filter 1 rejdiffportgrp Port 11 txA rxA In the example the system has one packet filter with a filter id of 1 anda defined name of rejdiffportgrp This filter is loaded onto port 11 The filter is assigned to both the transmit all txa path and the receive all rxa path 372 CHAPTER 15 PACKET FILTERS bridge packetFilter v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 display For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays the contents of the specified packet filter Valid Minimum Abbreviation b pa di Important Considerations a Possible values for filters n depend on the number of created or loaded filters on the system a The packet filter id and name are displayed followed by a list of the packet filter instructions Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Select filter Identifier id number of the a 1 n Current filter id filter that you want to display for a list of all filters Sample Bridge Packet Filter Display 3500 Select menu option bridge packetFilter display Select filter 1 1 Packet Filter 1 rejdiffpor
374. lder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Defines an AppleTalk interface Valid Minimum Abbreviation ap i def Important Considerations An AppleTalk interface defines the relationship between a virtual LAN VLAN and an AppleTalk network a Every AppleTalk interface has one VLAN associated with it a For routing purposes you define a range of network numbers that are assigned to the AppleTalk interface Example 20301 20310 You can configure the interface to be a seed or nonseed interface Seed interface Initializes seeds the network with your configuration information This information includes the network range and zone name list Nonseed interface Listens for a seed router and then takes the zone and network range information from the first seed interface that it detects After a nonseed interface obtains this information it can participate in AppleTalk routing Before you define the AppleTalk interface you must define a VLAN and select AppleTalk as a protocol that the VLAN supports Clients that have not been configured to use a particular zone use the default zone name You can enter up to 16 zone names per interface Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Seed Whether an interface is a no y factory Interface configured as an AppleTalk yes default or seed y or non seed interface yy current value n Start of Start of the network range that 1 6
375. le You are not prompted to confirm the deletion Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Destination IP IP address associated A valid IP address address with the route that you want to delete Subnet mask Subnet mask for the A valid subnet mask Based on specified IP address specified IP address 164 CHAPTER 5 OuT OF BAND MANAGEMENT management ip route v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 flush Deletes all learned routes from the routing table Valid Minimum Abbreviation m ip ro fl Important Considerations a The system deletes all learned routes from the routing table immediately You are not prompted to confirm the deletion a Flushing the routing table causes Routing Information Protocol RIP to regenerate the routing table The system repopulates the routing table a few seconds after you flush it management ip route v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 default management ip route default 165 Adds a default route to the routing table immediately Valid Minimum Abbreviation m ip ro de Important Considerations a f you define a default route the system uses it to forward packets that do not match any other routing table entry The system can learn a route using the Routing Information Protocol RIP or you can statically configure a default route a f the routing table does not contain a default route the system cannot forward a packet that does not match any other routing table
376. le indexes Fields in the IP OSPF Interface Statistics Display Field Description adjacencyDown Number of times that OSPF adjacencies have gone down adjacencyUp Number of times that OSPF adjacencies have been formed authError Number of packets discarded due to OSPF authentication errors Interpretation a A non zero value is bad and means that packets from some OSPF routers are being discarded due to authentication errors This statistic is incremented under the following circumstances a f the OSPF packet authentication type is something other than simple password i e cryptographic authentication is not supported in the current implementation a f the OSPF packet contains a password but the interface does not have a password configured a f the OSPF packet has a simple password that does not match the password defined for the OSPF interface computeDR Number of times that the designated router has been computed IsaXsumError Number of LSA checksum errors that were detected mismatchArealD Number of interface area ID mismatches that were detected mismatchAreaType Number of interface area type mismatches that were detected Field ip ospf interface statistics 545 Description mismatchDead mismatchHello mismatchMask packetXsumError receiveDD receivedUnknown Number of router dead interval mismatches that were detected Interpretation a A non zero value is bad and means that some OSPF routers on
377. learn default advertise and enabled Mode for RIP 2 If you disable RIP 2 the output lists the state as of f Other modes are learn default advertise and enabled Whether Route Aggregation mode is enabled or disabled v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 ip rip mode For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only On a per interface basis sets one of four RIP Version 1 RIP 1 modes on the system For all platforms except the CoreBuilder 9000 also allows you to set RIP Version 2 RIP 2 modes Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip rim Important Considerations a Platforms except the CoreBuilder 9000 support RIP Version 1 as well as RIP Version 2 For each interface you select a RIP Version 1 mode and a RIP Version 2 mode The default RIP Version 1 mode for all platforms is learn The default RIP Version 2 mode is learn a The four available RIP modes are as follows a Disabled The interface ignores all incoming RIP packets and does not generate any RIP packets of its own a Learn The interface processes all incoming RIP packets but it does not transmit RIP updates This is the default RIP mode Advertise 3500 and 9000 only The interface broadcasts RIP updates but it does not process incoming RIP packets a Enabled 3500 and 9000 only The interface broadcasts RIP updates and processes incoming RIP packets Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default
378. ledgments that have been received Number of LSA request packets that have been received 580 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH FIRST OSPF Field Description receiveLSU transmitDD transmitError transmitHello transmitLsAck transmitLSR transmitLSU Number of link state update packets that have been received Number of database description packets that were transmitted Interpretation a A non zero value is OK Database description packets are sent when forming adjacencies with valid neighbors A large number in a network whose configuration has not changed could indicate that adjacencies are being torn down and re established This statistic is incremented under the following circumstances a When an OSPF database descriptor packet is transmitted Number of general transmit errors Interpretation a A non zero value indicates that an OSPF packet could not be sent either out a particular interface or to a particular destination This could prevent OSPF from running properly within the autonomous system and lead to routing problems This statistic is incremented under the following circumstances a When an OSPF Hello LSU or LSAck is being sent as a multicast packet on a non broadcast multiple access network Number of Hello packets that have been transmitted Number of LSA acknowledgments that have been transmitted Number of LSA request packets that have been transmitted Number of link state update packets that
379. les Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP router discovery which enables hosts that are attached to multicast or broadcast networks to discover the IP addresses of their neighboring routers and determine which router to use for a default gateway Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip i icmpro Important Considerations ICMP router discovery can be set on a per interface basis When you enable the state for an interface the system prompts you for a preference See RFC 1256 By default this preference level is o Use the preference to control the use of certain routers as the default router The host uses the router with the highest preference level An appropriately configured end station can locate one or more routers on the LAN to which it is attached The end station then automatically installs a default route to each of the routers that are running Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP router discovery You do not need to manually configure a default route ICMP redirect messages subsequently channel the IP traffic to the correct router You can configure only certain end stations to work with the ICMP router discovery protocol See the documentation for your workstation to determine whether you can configure it to work with this protocol You can configure and display three timers for ICMP router discovery on the CoreBuilder 3500 a Maximum advertisement interval The maximum time interval between advertisements a Minimum
380. logout disconnect bridge menu trunk menu automap menu display gt autoMap summary ipFragmentation summary enable ipxSnapTranslation detail disable addressThreshold define test agingTime modify spanning Tree remove gvrpState cos port multicast packetFilter vian gt trunk mpla link bridge trunk autoMap summary 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 bridge trunk autoMap summary 301 Displays a list of slot numbers that have been selected to support automatic backplane trunking Valid Minimum Abbreviation bta Important Considerations a Automatic backplane trunking is supported only through the switch fabric modules and managed interface modules a The Gigabit Ethernet GEN Switch Fabric Module Model Number 3CB9FG24T has 24 non blocking Gigabit Ethernet ports that connect to the chassis backplane to provide high speed low latency connectivity between CoreBuilder 9000 interface modules a The GEN Switch Fabric Module supports port trunking for 12 groups with up to six ports in a group Fields in the Bridge Trunk autoMap Summary Display Field Description Slot number Port numbers selected to be in the trunk AutoMap status Whether the autoMap on the slot is enabled or disabled 302 CHAPTER 11 TRUNKS bridge trunk autoMap enable disable 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Dynamic backplane trunking provides automatic backplane trunking on the switch fabric modules and managed interfac
381. lot2 1 12 E FEN TX L3 bridge vlan modify Select VLAN interface index 1 5 5 ter VID 2 4094 5 5 Select bridge ports 1 13 all 1 5 13 1 5 13 ter protocol suite P IPX Apple XNS DECnet SNA Vines X25 NetBEUI unspecified IPX II IPX 802 2 IPX 802 3 IPX 802 3 IPX 802 3 CG Dd CG Dd H Enter protocol suite q to quit IP IPX Apple XNS DECnet SNA Vines X25 NetBEUI IPX II IPX 802 2 q O dify per port tagging n y yl y ter port 1 tag type none 802 10 none none 802 10 none none 802 10 none none pa none ra ter port 2 tag type none ter port 3 tag type none 802 10 none none ter port 4 tag type 5 ter port 5 tag type none 802 1Q0 none 802 19 ter port 13 tag type none 802 10 802 10 802 1Q ter VLAN Name IPX IPX1 5 w E a wee Bridge VLAN Modify Example 3500 This example shows the steps to modify the member ports and per port tagging for an IP VLAN Select menu option bridge vlan modify Select VLAN interface index 1 2 2 Enter VID 2 4094 2 2 Select bridge ports 1 4 6 9 13 all1l 3 6 9 9 11 Enter protocol suite IP IPX Apple XNS DECnet SNA Vines X25 NetBEUI unspecified IPX II IPX 802 2 IPX 802 3 IPX 802 2 SNAP IP IP Enter protocol suite q to quit IPX Apple XNS DECnet SNA Vines X25 NetBEUL IPX II IPX 802 2 I
382. low classifiers If you specified a subset of available ports whether you want to define another rate limit for other ports Whether one way filtering is used so that drop packets establish a TCP connection Whether you want to set starting and ending times for a control a Any subset of selectable ports all a fora list of selectable ports a 0 7 none a fora list of selectable values a y yes m n no specified rate limit Selectable ports none factory default gos control define 713 Prompt Description Possible Values Default Input time type Type of time control that you m specific specific want to establish a daily See Table 7 for a complete listing of input time type options a everydayofthe week a dayoftheweek a weekdays a weekends a everyweekdays a everyweekends Classifiers to Classifiers for this control to Selectable be controlled affect See qos control classifiers that is summary for a list of defined those not already classifiers that are associated associated with a with controls control 714 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP Table 7 lists the options for the input time types The key to the prompts are a mm dd month day a hh mm hour minute Table 7 Input Time Type Options Input Time Type Options Specific default Daily gt Day of the week gt Every day of the week i gt
383. lues Default Destination IP IP address of the A valid IP address address route that you want to delete Subnet mask Subnet mask for the A valid subnet mask Based on specified IP address specified IP address 424 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP ip route flush For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Deletes all learned routes from the routing table v 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation vV 9400 ip route fl Y 3900 Important Considerations v 9300 a The system flushes all learned routes from the routing table immediately You are not prompted to confirm the deletion a Flushing the routing table does not cause the Routing Information Protocol RIP to update the routing table You must change the metric to update the routing table ip route default v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Adds a default route to the routing table immediately Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip route de Important Considerations If you define a default route the system uses it to forward packets that do not match any other routing table entry The system can learn a route through the routing protocol or you can statically configure a default route The system can learn a default route If the routing table does not contain a default route the system cannot forward a packet that does not match any other routing table entry When the s
384. m Abbreviation sy se b Important Considerations a The default setting for the serial port is 9600 You can change the setting to match the port speed on your terminal or modem The default setting for the serial port is 9600 You can change the setting to match the port speed on your terminal or modem a When you change the baud rate to something other than 9600 the new setting becomes the new default even after you use the system nvData reset option a You must adjust the baud rate setting of your terminal or terminal emulator s terminal interface processor tip to match your system serial port s speed before you can reestablish communication using the terminal port a You can use this command through the terminal serial port or through a Telnet session However if you change the terminal speed while you are in a Telnet session you must reboot the system for the change to take effect Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default New value Baud rate for the serial port m 19200 9600 connection 9600 a 4800 a 2400 a 1200 Confirmation Confirmation of baud rate m y yes change aio Procedure Local Connection 1 To set the baud rate for the serial port from the top level of the Administration Console enter system serialPort baudRate system serialPort baudRate 97 2 Enter the baud setting for the serial port The system supports the following baud rates m 19200 a 9600 a 4800 a 2400 a 1200 T
385. m Any of the S for which you want to set the available ports port label on the installed FDDI modules m all Label Name of the FDDI port used for identification fddi port path a fddi port path Sets the one or more FDDI ports to be either part of the primary path or isolated from the ring v 3500 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 fd po p Options 3900 p 9300 Prompt Description Possible Values Default Ports One or more FDDI station ports m Any of the for which you want to set the available ports path on the installed FDDI modules m all Path Sets the type of path used by isol pri the port apri a isol isolates the port from the ring a pri sets the port to be part of the primary ring 246 CHAPTER 8 FIBER DISTRIBUTED DATA INTERFACE FDDI fddi stationMode v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 display Generates a display of FDDI stationMode information The display shows the station mode DAS Dual Attachment Station or SAS Single Attachment Station for each FDDI port Valid Minimum Abbreviation fd stationM d Important Consideration a Before the new stationMode takes effect you must reboot your system Fields in the FDDI Station Mode Display Field Description Ports Ports numbers that are assigned to the FDDI module The FDDI port numbers change depending on the configuration of your system stationMode Current FDDI stationMode DAS or SAS that is assigned to a spec
386. m displays a message that the transfer is complete and displays the file name and the name of the host on which it stored the file FTP Procedure 3500 Only Create an empty file with open write permissions on the host to store the system display images From the top level of the Administration Console enter system snapshot save Enter the IP address of the host on which you want to save the display images Enter the full pathname of the file that you designated 5 Enter your username and password While the system sends the files to the host it displays the name of each display image that it transfers When the transmission is complete the system displays a message that the transfer is complete and displays the file name and the name of the host on which it stored the file system softwareUpdate 89 system Loads a new revision of system software softwareUpdate Valid Minimum Abbreviation Y 3500 sy so 9000 Y 9400 Important Considerations a The CoreBuilder 3500 uses the Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP or Y 3900 File Transfer Protocol FTP to transfer the files to the host depending 9300 on the setting for the system fileTransfer option The SuperStack II Switch 3900 Switch 9300 and the CoreBuilder 9400 use TFP to transfer files a Before you attempt to install the system software make sure that you have extended memory installed on your system a You can load the system software into flash memory while th
387. mary with the selectable bridge ports a f tagging is enabled for a port the software uses the VID as the 802 1Q tag 356 CHAPTER 14 VIRTUAL LANs VLANs a If you modify the tagging for a port shared by another VLAN and tagging is the only distinguishing characteristic between the VLANs verify that the new tag type does not conflict with the port s tag type in another VLAN A shared port can use a tag type of none for only one of its VLANs for all other VLANs to which it belongs the shared port must use IEEE 802 1Q tagging Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN System assigned index number m SelectableVLAN 1 if you have interface that identifies a VLAN index only the default index VLAN m all a fora list of selectable indexes VID Unique user defined integer 2 4094 Current VID for VLANs used by global management ther than operations the default Bridge ports Index numbers of the bridge a One or more Current ports in ports that belong to the VLAN index numbers the VLAN To add trunked ports specify of the ports that the anchor port of the trunk are available to You cannot add a port owned be assigned to by a router port IP interface the VLAN m all a fora list of selectable ports Prompt Description Possible Values Default Protocol One or more protocol suites m P Current suite that you want to specify for the protocol type IPX VLAN for VLANs a Apple for other than Apple
388. me AppleBcast Select cast type unicast multicast broadcast all broadcast Select protocols TCP IP IP IPX Appletalk any custom Appletalk Select IEEE 802 1p tag s 0 7 all all qos classifier modify v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Modifies a previously defined classifier Valid Minimum Abbreviation q cl m Important Consideration a f the classifier that you want to modify is associated with a control you must remove the control before you can modify the classifier See qos classifier remove later in this chapter for more information Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Classifier Number of the flow or m Flow classifiers number nonflow classifier that 1 399 except 20 you want to modify and 23 which are Existing classifiers are predefined flow shown in braces classifiers a Nonflow classifiers 400 498 except 401 407 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 401 407 are predefined nonflow classifiers with applied controls a fora list of selectable values Classifier name Name of the classifier a Unique name with up Current that you want to modify to 32 characters Use name around any string with embedded spaces Use to enter an empty string a fora list of selection criteria Cast type Cast type for the flow or m Flow classifiers Cur
389. me the Master virtual router Auth Authentication type whether a password is needed to access the virtual router Config Whether the virtual router has been locally configured ip vrrp statistics 501 ip vrrp statistics For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays general VRRP statistics for the virtual router y 3500 vZ 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 ipvst 3900 Fields in the IP VRRP Statistics Display 9300 Field Description ckSumErrors Total number of VRRP advertisements with an invalid VRRP checksum value that this virtual router has received versionErrors Total number of VRRP advertisements with an unknown or unsupported version number that this virtual router has received vriderrors Total number of VRRP advertisements with an invalid VRID number that this virtual router has received 502 CHAPTER 17 VIRTUAL ROUTER REDUNDANCY VRRP oot ts IP MULTICAST This chapter provides guidelines and other key information about how to configure and manage IP multicast routing commands from the Administration Console of the CoreBuilder 3500 and CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 switching modules For the CoreBuilder 9000 platform the commands in this chapter apply to Layer 3 switching modules only For more information about IP multicast technology concepts and implementation procedures see the Implementation Guide for your system For IGMP commands in Layer 2 switchi
390. menu appears COMMAND SUMMARY oo eee e e ecco Table 6 gives an overview of all the commands in this book Table 6 Command Summary 3500 9000 9000 9400 3900 9300 Layer Layer Commands 2 3 PART II System Level Functions Chapter 3 System Environment system display S S S system fileTransfer system console webHelpConfig system console webAccess system console consoleAccess system console ctlKeys system console password system console screenHeight system console security display system console security define system console security remove system console security access system console security message system console timeout timeOut system console timeout interval Be NOS ON SSO NS OS NS RON SS Se Ss NNN SS RNR SS Seo SS NNR NOON SOROS SOS SNe SSN Oe NON SONS ON 44 CHAPTER 2 COMMAND SUMMARY Table 6 Command Summary continued 3500 9000 9000 9400 3900 9300 Layer Layer Commands 2 3 system snapshot summary system snapshot detail system snapshot save system softwareUpdate system baseline display system baseline set Se NTR NSS SONS OS OSS Se SON NN OSS system baseline requestedState system serialPort terminalSpeed RoW SN SN So Re SSS system serialPort modemSpeed system serialPort baudRate system serialPort serialPortMode system serialPort configModem system serialPort enableModem system name system time dateTime system time
391. metric changed on a route entry 652 CHAPTER 20 IPX ipx statistics sap VY 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays IPX SAP Service Advertising Protocol statistics Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx st sa Important Considerations a The first line in the output the status line indicates whether IPX forwarding is enabled RIP is active SAP is active RIP Triggered updates are enabled SAP Triggered updates are enabled Secondary route server option is enabled Fields in the IPX SAP Statistics Display Field Description SAP Dropped Number of IPX SAP packets that have been dropped SAP Entries Number of servers in the server table Servers Aged Number of times the system marked a server entry unreachable because it did not receive an update for that entry during the timeout period SAP GNS Requests Number of IPX SAP Get Nearest Service Requests that have been processed SAP GNS Responses Number of IPX SAP Get Nearest Service Responses that have been received SAP Received Number of IPX SAP packets that have been received SAP Requests Number of IPX SAP Requests that have been processed SAP Responses Number of IPX SAP Responses that have been processed SAP Transmitted Number of IPX SAP packets that have been transmitted Metric Changed Number of times the metric changed on a server entry v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ipx sta
392. metric that is Type 1 1 used in the AS external Type 2 advertisement ASE defined as yp a Type 1 External metric is directly comparable without translation to the link state metric a Type 2 External metric is larger than any link state path Administrative Metric value for this policy 1 16 1 weight Higher values have higher priority OSPF Import Policy Conditions Route address mask Action Description Specified accept Add specified non self originated external route route mask with or without metric adjustments to the routing table all 0 0 0 0 accept Add all non self originated external routes with or without metric adjustments to the routing table Specified reject Do not add specified non self originated external route mask route to the routing table all reject Do not add any external routes to the routing table reject all non self originated external routes CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH FIRST OSPF OSPF Export Policy Conditions Source Protocol Router Route Action Description RIP or static Specified Specified accept Advertise in external LSAs router or all route mask specified RIP static route from routers specified router with or without metric adjustments RIP or static Specified all 0 0 0 0 accept Advertise in external LSAs all router or all RIP static routes from routers specified router with or without metric adjustments
393. mode Number of frames received by this port that are not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the FCS check Autonegotiation mode configured for port Possible values are enable Or disable Current negotiation state Possible values are disabled configuring completed and failed Number of frames that were discarded because the carrier sense condition was lost while transmitting a frame from this port Number of frames that have been dropped because they experienced 15 consecutive collisions when sent from this port This value is incremented by 1 each time that a frame experiences 15 consecutive collisions Number of frames that were not transmitted on this port because the maximum allowed deferral time was exceeded Number of frames received by this port that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the frame check sequence FCS test Number of frames received by this port that were shorter than 64 bytes and had CRC or alignment errors Number of frames received by this port that were longer than 1518 bytes and had CRC or alignment errors Number of times that a collision was detected on this port later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a frame Number of frames received by this port that are longer than 1518 bytes or shorter than 64 bytes Field Description linkStatus Boolean value that indicates the current state of the physical ink for this port either enabled o
394. mote addresses the system automatically assigns the value 1 as both the tunnel metric and the tunnel TTL threshold as shown in the IP multicast DVMRP tunnel summary display You can change these values through menu options IP multicast interfaces and tunnels have similar characteristics such as TTL threshold and metric The characteristics of a tunnel do not have to match the characteristics of the interface on which it is configured You can define multiple tunnel end points on the same local routing interface in your system but these tunnels must lead to different remote routing interfaces 512 CHAPTER 18 IP MULTICAST Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default interface Remote address Index number of the interface on which you want to create a DVMRP tunnel end point IP address of the remote multicast tunnel end point Use standard dotted decimal notation a A valid IP interface index number a fora list of selectable indexes A valid IP interfaceona different system and subnetwork ip multicast dvmrp tunnels remove v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip multicast dvmrp tunnels remove 513 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Deletes a DVMRP tunnel end point from the system Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipmdt r Important Considerations To remove a tunnel specify its tunnel index number This number is different from the routing inte
395. mum Minimum interval between 3 600 seconds 450 advertisement advertisements interval Advertisement Length of time that 600 9000 seconds 1800 holdtime advertisements are held valid Select menu option IP Interface ICMP Router Discovery Example 3500 ip interface icmprouterdiscovery Select IP interfaces Int Int Int Int Int Larra 1 1 rface 1 Enter router discovery state disabled enabled disabled enabled rface 1 Enter router discovery preferenc 0 rface 1 Enter maximum advertisement interval 4 1800 600 rface 1 Enter minimum advertisement interval 3 600 450 rface 1 Enter advertisement holdtime 600 9000 1800 418 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP ip interface statistics For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays IP interface statistics on a per interface basis v 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 ip i st 3900 Important Consideration 9300 a The system prompts you for an interface index number even if you have only one interface defined Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Interface index Index number of the m One or more interface whose configured interface statistics you want to indexes display a all a fora list of selectable interface indexes Fields in the IP Interface Statistics Display Field Description inAddrErrors inCsumErrors inDelivers
396. must unassign the filter from the assigned ports a Possible values for filters n depend on the number of created or loaded filters on the system a To find the id of the filter list the filters using the bridge packetFilter list command Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Select filter Identifier id number of the a 1 n Current filter filter that you want to delete number for a list of all identifiers Delete Whether you want to delete a no y packet the selected packet filter Ges filter Yves Bridge Packet Filter Delete Examples 3500 Select menu option bridge packetFilter delete Select filter 1 1 1 Delete packet filter n y y Yy Packet filter 1 has been deleted If the filter is assigned it cannot be deleted The system responds as follows to the delete command Select menu option bridge packetFilter delete Select filter 1 1 1 The selected filter is assigned This problem prevents the deletion of this filter bridge packetFilter v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 edit bridge packetFilter edit 377 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Modifies an existing packet filter using the built in editor Valid Minimum Abbreviation b pa e Important Considerations The built in editor is a simple one line at a time editor that supports a short list of EMACS style editing commands The system displays the editor comm
397. n Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o pad Important Consideration a See ip ospf partition modify later in this chapter for information on how OSPF memory allocation works and how to modify it Fields in the IP OSPF Partition Display Field Description Current partition maximum size Configured partition maximum size Allocated partition size OSPF is using the system partition OSPF memory partition upper limit as implemented at the last system reboot Last value that you entered which will become the current partition maximum size after the next system reboot 0 means that OSPF has been set to use the system memory partition at the next reboot 1 means that OSPF has been set to use the default memory allocation scheme deriving its partition size from the maximum size of the IP routing table at the next reboot a Any other value that does not equal the current partition maximum size means that OSPF has been manually set to use a specific maximum partition size at the next reboot Module s current working memory OSPF dynamically allocates memory in 100 000 byte chunks up to the current partition maximum size The administrator used the ip ospf partition modify command to set a partition value of 0 The OSPF protocol is using the system memory partition instead of its own partition and there is no specified OSPF memory limit 570 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf pa
398. n Values Default Host name or Host name or IP address of the a Avalid 0 0 0 0 IP address destination that you want to ping host name a P address Maximum ttl Maximum number of hops that 1 255 30 the system can use in outgoing hops probe packets Destination Destination or base UDP port 30000 33434 port number that the system uses in 65535 probe packets Set the destination UDP port number to be very high to ensure that an application at the destination is not using that port probeCount Maximum number of probes that 1 10 3 the system sends at each TTL level Wait Wait interval in seconds that 1 10 3 determines the maximum amount seconds of time that the system waits for a response to a probe packetSize Number of bytes that the system 28 4096 28 sends in each UDP probe packet bytes management ip advancedTraceRoute 185 Possible Prompt Description Values Default sourceAddress Source address other than the a no y one from which the probe my yes packets originate This option is available if you have more than one IP interface defined on the system Interface index Index number of the ICMP source A selectable O the router IP address that you want to use interface picks the The system lists defined interfaces best and their indexes interface Numeric mode Whether the system shows hop disabled default addresses numerically or a enabled symbolically Management IP Advanced Trace Route Exampl
399. n the local interface that connects to the peer router ip multicast dvmrp interface mode v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip multicast dvmrp interface mode 507 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Enables or disables the Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DVMRP per routing interface This protocol facilitates router to router communication for building source rooted spanning trees that deliver IP multicast traffic to IP multicast group members Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipmd im Important Considerations When DVMRP is enabled on an interface the interface is configured with the default value of 1 for the metric which you can modify at any time See ip multicast dvmrp interface metric later in this chapter If DVMRP is enabled on any interface IGMP snooping should also be enabled in the system See ip multicast igmp snooping later in this chapter If DVMRP is disabled the interface cannot participate in building spanning trees for IP multicast However as long as IGMP snooping is enabled the interface forwards appropriate IP multicast traffic to downstream group members If IGMP snooping is disabled then the interface only forwards IP multicast traffic with addresses in the reserved range Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interface Index number of the interface m A valid IP for which you want to enable interface index or disable DVMRP
400. name server IP address Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipdr Important Consideration a When you enter the command the system displays the list of name server addresses and the index number that is associated with each Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Index Index number of the m A selectable server index number for a list of selectable server indexes name server IP address that you want to remove ip dns nslookup For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Maps an IP address to a host name or a host name to an IP address on a y 3500 name server y 9000 9400 Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip dn V 3900 Y 9300 Important Considerations a Specify a host name or IP address at the prompt a Enter a string of up to 255 characters a Use single quotation marks around any string with embedded spaces Use double quotation marks to enter an empty string Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP address or IP address or host a Ahostnameofupto host name name that you want 255 characters to map a A valid IP address 442 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP ip udpHelper display v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays the BOOTP bootstrap protocol hop count and the threshold configuration Also lists the ports with their IP forwarding addresses that are defined in your s
401. nd prompts you for verification before performing the restoration see step 4 a f there is not an exact match between system IDs module types and module revisions the system displays a warning message and prompts you as follows WARNING mismatch between saved system IDs 27DA00 and current system 28E100 Do you want to disregard this and continue the restore n y yl If you want to continue the restoration enter y yes If you do not want to continue enter n no At the next prompt to have the system NV data restored as requested enter y yes To terminate the restoration enter n no For example Restoring nonvolatile data may leave the system in an inconsistent state and therefore a reboot is necessary after each restore Do you wish to continue y n y a f you enter y the system displays the following messages Restoring nonvolatile data done Nonvolatile data successfully restored The system automatically reboots itself after it restores the NV data a f you enter n the restoration ends and the previous menu appears 112 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system nvData v 3500 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 examine Displays the header information of the NV data file Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy nve Important Considerations a Some TFP implementations allow you to specify only the file name and the system uses the default TFTP directory a If a session is succe
402. nd 0800 55 3072 Israel 1800 9453794 U K 0800 966197 Italy 1678 79489 Latin America Argentina AT amp T 800 666 5065 Mexico 01 800 CARE 01 800 2273 Brazil 0800 13 3266 Peru AT amp T 800 666 5065 Chile 1230 020 0645 Puerto Rico 800 666 5065 Colombia 98012 2127 Venezuela AT amp T 800 666 5065 North America 1 800 NET 3Com 1 800 638 3266 Enterprise Customers 1 800 876 3266 Returning Products for Repair Before you send a product directly to 3Com for repair you must first obtain an authorization number Products sent to 3Com without authorization numbers will be returned to the sender unopened at the sender s expense To obtain an authorization number call or fax Country Telephone Number Fax Number Asia Pacific Rim Europe South Africa and Middle East Latin America 65 543 6500 31 30 6029900 65 543 6348 31 30 6029999 1 408 326 2927 1 408 326 3355 From the following countries you may call the toll free numbers select option 2 and then option 2 Austria Belgium Denmark Finland France Germany Hungary Ireland Israel Italy Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal South Africa Spain Sweden Switzerland U K U S A and Canada 0800 297468 0800 71429 800 17309 0800 113153 0800 917959 0800 1821502 00800 12813 1800553117 1800 9453794 1678 79489 0800 0227788 800 11376 00800 3111206 0800 831416 0800 995014 900 983125 020 795482 0800 55 3072 0800 966197
403. nd specify the appropriate set of ports You can apply aggregate rate limits only to flow classifiers For the receivePort Of aggregate limit type enter the service level for conforming packets as high best Or low For the none rate limit type enter the service level for conforming packets as high best low Or drop The default is best best effort If you use drop the system drops all traffic on all ports for the classifier that is associated with the control Ping packets are ICMP not UDP TCR so they are not dropped Specify whether the conforming packets are loss eligible yes or no The default is no If you have selected receivePort or aggregate for the rate limit type you are prompted for the following information a Enter the service level for excess packets high best low Or drop The default is best b Specify whether excess packets are loss eligible yes or no The default is yes c Specify how the rate limit is expressed percentage of port bandwidth or KBytes sec KBytes sec Is the default 716 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP If you specified KBytes sec for the rate limit enter the value for the rate limit in KBytes sec 0 through 65434 If you specify that you want a percentage for the rate limit specify the percentage in the range of from 0 through 100 percent These numbers are rounded to the nearest 16 KBytes sec A value of 0 makes all packets excess packets Enter the b
404. nds that the packet takes to reach the network segment There are 18 21 ticks ina second ipx route secondary v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Displays any secondary routes that are available Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx ro se Important Considerations m To see entries for any secondary routes you must a Establish alternate paths to the same IPX network a Enable the IPX secondary route server option See ipx secondary at the end of this chapter a A secondary route entry can replace a primary route entry when the primary route is removed from the routing table for any reason for example if the route reaches its age limit a Fora CoreBuilder 3500 system the route table display shows the range for the routing table primary entries in the format n m where nis the current number of entries and m is the maximum number of primary entries Fields in the IPX Secondary Route Display Field Description Address Unique 4 byte network address of a segment in the system s routing table Age Number of seconds that have elapsed since the last time the router sent a packet Hops Number of hops or the number of routers that must be crossed to reach the network segment Interface System assigned number for the interface Node 6 byte MAC address of the router that can forward packets to the segment A node address of all zeroes 00 00 00 00 00 00 means that the route is connected directly to the router Tick
405. nds for all systems See the checklist at the beginning of each command description in each chapter for whether your system supports the command The following example shows the CoreBuilder 9000 top level menu when a Layer 2 switching module is installed Menu options module Administer module level functions ethernet Administer Ethernet ports bridge Administer bridging VLANs snmp Administer SNMP disconnect Disconnect and return to the Management Console Type for help Select a menu option gt These examples show the CoreBuilder 9000 menu options for a Layer 2 switching interface module Menus on other platforms may differ See the Command Quick Reference for the list of commands on your system 40 CHAPTER 1 ADMINISTRATION OVERVIEW Selecting Menu Options gt To select a menu option at the prompt enter the menu option or enough of the name to uniquely identify it within the particular menu Example to access the module menu from the top level of the Administration Console on a module in the CoreBuilder 9000 enter Select a menu option module Menu options are not case sensitive When you enter a menu option or command correctly either you move to the next menu in the hierarchy or the Administration Console displays information a prompt or a screen display for the option that you entered If you enter the menu option incorrectly a message indicates that your entry is not valid or
406. ne 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 2 switching modules only Defines one or more links on the system When you define a link you specify ports and characteristics for the link Valid Minimum Abbreviation b 1 def Important Considerations Connect the network cable to the resilient link ports after you reboot the system failure to do so may create a bridge loop in your network In general create resilient links before you define your virtual LANs VLANs If you plan to create resilient links for part of a VLAN create the resilient links before you create the VLAN When you create a resilient link that includes ports that are part of a VLAN those ports are removed from the VLAN You must modify the VLAN and add the new bridge port to the appropriate VLAN This situation does not apply to the default VLAN all ports are part of the default VLAN If you have already defined other resilient links or trunks on your system you cannot select ports that are part of an existing resilient link pair or a trunk You must reboot the system at the end of the link definition process You can define multiple links in one define operation The resilient link port pair uses a single MAC address for frames sourced by this pair The resilient link name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters bridge link define 331 Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Resilient link N
407. nfig that do not require hardware sampling If you replace the module that the monitored port resides on with a module of a different media type the roving analysis port RAP configuration for the monitored port is reset 762 CHAPTER 24 ROVING ANALYSIS Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Bridge port Target analyzer port address Number of the bridge port to be monitored n varies by platform MAC address of the port to which the analyzer is attached m 1 n a fora list of available bridge ports A valid MAC address of an analyzer port Analyzer Start Example 9000 1000BASE SX module CB9000 slot 3 1 Select bridge port 9 GEN SX L2 1 8 10 12 Enter the target analyzer port address analyzer start 1 00 20 9c 0d el 2a v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 analyzer stop analyzer stop 763 Stops port monitoring activity on the selected bridge port Valid Minimum Abbreviation an sto Important Consideration m Port data is no longer copied and forwarded to the selected analyzer port from the port that you specify See analyzer start earlier in this chapter for details Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Bridge port Number of the bridge port that m 1 n is being monitored A Sora lscot n varies by platform available bridge ports Analyzer Stop Example 3500 Select menu option analyzer
408. nfiguration satisfies the requirements of automatic backplane trunking If the switch fabric module and interface module satisfy requirements then no reset is required If not then the switch fabric module determines if the interface module must reconfigure to support backplane configuration requirements If the switch fabric module or interface module must reconfigure then a message is sent to the user that a reset is required Fabric reset required for trunk configuration to be effective for the module in slot x If autoMap is disabled the switch fabric module verifies that the interface module s backplane configuration is compatible to the switch fabric s configuration If the interface module is compatible to the switch fabric module s backplane configuration then no reset is required If not then the switch fabric module determines if the interface module can support the defined switch fabric module s backplane configuration If the interface module can then a message is sent to the interface module with the desired backplane port configuration Otherwise the switch fabric module will modify its configuration and a message is sent to the user that a reset is required Fabric reset required for trunk configuration to be effective for the module in slot x 304 CHAPTER 11 TRUNKS bridge trunk Displays summary information about configured trunks on your system summary In a summary report the system displays the trunk name
409. nflict with the port s tag type in another VLAN A shared port can use a tag type of none for only one of its VLANs for all other VLANs to which it belongs the shared port must use IEEE 802 1Q tagging Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN System assigned index number that SelectableVLAN 1 if you interface identifies a VLAN index have only index the default a all VLAN a fora list of selectable indexes Prompt Description Possible Values Default VID Unique user defined integer used 2 4094 Current for VLANs by management operations VID other than the default Bridge ports Index numbers of the bridge ports One or more Current that belong to the VLAN To add index numbers ports in trunked ports specify the anchor of the portsthat VLAN port of the trunk are available to be assigned to the VLAN m all a fora list of selectable ports Per port Whether you want to configure ay yes y tagging 802 1Q VLAN tagging You are n no prompted to answer for each port that you selected Tag type Either no tagging or IEEE 802 1Q a none Current tagging the VID tag type 1021 for each port VLAN name Unique user defined name that Up to 32 ASCII Current identifies members of the VLAN If characters or name for VLANs other than YOu use spaces put quotation spaces the default marks around the VLAN name Procedure Enter the VLAN interface index For a VLAN other than the de
410. ng Ethernet 221 222 numbering Ethernet 204 207 PACE Access Ethernet 217 PACE Interactive Access Ethernet 218 receive ports for controls 712 716 speed Ethernet 212 213 speed setting 95 state Ethernet 220 Statistics Ethernet 204 208 tagging 349 predefined QoS classifiers 691 priority tags excess packets 736 nonflow classifiers 697 703 705 QoS controls 712 780 IN DEX prioritzation 267 probe RMON 755 procedures defining controls 715 defining flow classifiers 697 defining nonflow classifiers 700 defining RSVP 731 defining VLANs Layer 2 devices 354 defining VLANs Layer 3 devices 349 modifyi modifyi ng VLANs Layer 2 devices 361 ng VLANs Layer 3 devices 358 protocol types for QoS classifiers 695 718 modify modify ng for VLANs 355 ng QoS classifier 704 selecting for VLANs 345 347 352 prune messages IP multi cast 519 quiet advancedPing option 475 Q QoS Quality of Service bandwidth display modifyi QoS Quali ng 733 ng 734 y of Service classifiers defining 694 displayi displayi examp ng detail information 692 ng summary information 691 e of defining 699 examp e of modifying 705 guidelines for using 689 modify removing 706 QoS Quali applyin defining 710 displayi displayi examp examp modify ing 701 ty of Service controls g to classifiers 713 ng detail information 708 ng summary information 707 e
411. ng a module returns you to the EME prompt which requires you to reconnect to the module a The following considerations apply to the trunk clustering function MultiPoint Link Aggregation MPLA in the CoreBuilder 9400 system a When you configure a new switch define multipoint aggregated links and reboot the system before you define other trunks and VLANs on the switch a Ona reboot existing trunks and VLANs are deleted and the default VLAN is restored Trunked ports that were part of a VLAN before reboot are moved to the default VLAN You must then redefine trunks or VLANs that you want to continue to use See Chapter 11 Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Mac type Media type for the trunk Depends on your if you configuration have more than one at FDDI a Fast_Ethernet a Gigabit_Ethernet a 10 100BASE TX a 100BASE FX a 1000BASE SX a fora list of selectable media types bridge trunk define 309 Prompt Description Possible Values Default Ports Total number of the bridge 9000 ports that you want to be part of the trunk a Layer 2 modules support up to 4 trunk groups with up to 6 ports per trunk a Layer 3 modules support up to 3 trunk groups with up to 6 ports per trunk The 6 port SAS 3 port DAS FDDI Layer 3 supports 3 trunk groups In SAS mode the trunks can contain up to 6 ports In DAS mode the trunks can contain up to 3 ports a The FGA24 switch fabric m
412. ng diagram shows the complete list of commands for all systems See the checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter for whether your system supports the command Top Level menu system module management ethernet fddi bridge ip D ipx appletalk qos snmp analyzer log script logout disconnect ipx menu b interface lb route lb server forwarding brip sap output delay b statistics oddLengthPadding NetBIOS secondary interface menu display define modify remove SAPadvertising RIPadvertising route menu display secondary static remove flush display static remove flush secondary rip menu mode triggered b policy sap menu mode triggered policy summary rip sap forwarding interface server menu _Statistics menu _ policy menu summary define modify remove policy menu summary detail define modify remove ipx interface display v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays information about the IPX parameters and IPX interfaces that are configured on the system Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx i di Important Considerations a The first line in the output the status line indicates whether a IPX forwarding is enabled a RIP is active a SAP is active a RIP Triggered updates are enabled a SAP Trigger
413. ng systems CoreBuilder 9400 CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 2 switching modules SuperStack II Switch 3900 and SuperStack Il Switch 9300 see Chapter 9 504 CHAPTER 18 IP MULTICAST Menu Structure The commands that you can use depend on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardware options that are configured on your system The following diagram shows the complete list of commands for all systems See the checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter for whether your system supports the command Top Level Menu ip menu multicast menu dvmrp menu system interface dvmrp interface module route igmp tunnels management arp cache routeDisplay ethernet multicast traceRoute cacheDisplay fddi dns default bridge vrrp dip udpHelper gmp menu ipx routing interface appletalk ospf snooping qos rip querying snmp ping analyzer advancedPing log traceRoute script advancedTraceRoute logout statistics disconnect interface menu summary detail mode metric _tunnels menu summary define remove address threshold metric interface menu summary detail TIL ip multicast dvmrp interface summary v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip multicast dvmrp interface summary 505 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays summary information about IP interfaces that may or may not be
414. ng tables on your system There are two classes of routing policies a Import policies Control which OSPF non self originated external routes are stored in the routing table OSPF import policies control only what the local router uses They do not affect the propagation of non self originated external routes to other routers a Export policies Used on OSPF boundary routers to control which self originated external routing updates are placed in the link state database for propagation over the network In this way export policies govern what other routers learn with regard to the local boundary router s self originated information You can set up an IP RIP or OSPF import or export policy to accept or advertise the default route as long as the default route exists in the routing table When you define a policy you are always prompted for the route subnet mask after the route address even though you specify the wildcard route address of 0 0 0 0 Specify a route subnet mask as follows a f you want the wildcard subnet mask for all routes use the default subnet mask 0 0 0 0 a If you want the default route not all routes use 255 255 255 255 For more information about IP routing policies see the Implementation Guide for your system 594 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Policy type Type of policy import import m export Origin For export policies
415. nk state metric a Type 2 External metric is larger than any link state path Administrative Metric value for this policy 1 16 Current weight Higher values have higher value priority OSPF Import Policy Conditions Route address mask Action Description Specified accept Add specified non self originated external route route mask with or without metric adjustments to the routing table All 0 0 0 0 accept Add all non self originated external routes with or without metric adjustments to the routing table Specified reject Do not add specified non self originated external route mask route to the routing table All reject Do not add any external routes to the routing table reject all non self originated external routes OSPF Export Policy Conditions Source Protocol Router Route Action Description RIP or static Specified Specified accept Advertise in external LSAs router or all route mask specified RIP static route from routers specified router with or without metric adjustments RIP or static Specified all 0 0 0 0 accept Advertise in external LSAs all router or all RIP static routes from routers specified router with or without metric adjustments RIP or static Specified Specified reject Do not advertise in external router or all route mask LSAs RIP static routes from routers specified router s RIP or static Specified all 0 0 0 0
416. nnected directly to the router Interface Index number of the IP a One or more All Index interface associated with this interface policy numbers a All a to view a list of selectable interfaces Policy action Whether this router accepts or m Accept Accept rejects a service that matches Rei a Reject the policy Weight Metric value of this policy This 1 16 1 parameter specifies the order of precedence for policies that match the same service A higher value takes precedence over a lower value 644 CHAPTER 20 IPX IPX SAP Policy Define Example Select menu option ipx rip policy define Enter policy type import export import Enter service origin static sap all all sap Enter the service type 0x1 0xlffff all all 0x0004 Enter the server nam all Enter the IPX address 0x0 Oxfffffffel all fall Enter the node address all Select interface index 2 all all Enter the policy action accept reject accept accept Enter the administrative weight 1 16 1 2 ipx sap policy modify v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Modify a SAP Service Advertising Protocol policy Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx sa pm Important Considerations a Every router maintains a table of current configured services in a service table a The SAP running on the router receives and advertises services from the
417. ns a When the bridge link linkState option is enabled the resilient link transmits or receives frames a When the bridge link linkState option is disabled the resilient link no longer transmits or receives frames Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Resilient link Index number of the resilient m Depends on index link that you want to modify configured links a fora list of selectable link indexes a A valid link number a all linkState Whether you want the resilient m enable value link for the selected link index disable to transmit and receive frames bridge link activePort 333 bridge link activePort For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 2 switching modules only Sets either the main port or the standby port as the active port The active 3500 port carries the network traffic Y 9000 Y Y 9400 Valid Minimum Abbreviation bla y 3900 Y 9300 Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Resilient link Index number of the link a Depends on index whose active port you want to configured links Set a fora list of selectable link indexes a A valid link number 7 all Active port Port that you want to carry main state network traffic a standby 334 CHAPTER 13 RESILIENT LINKS bridge link modify 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 2 switching modules only Modifies the link name as well as the main port and standby port of a
418. nslation The default setting is disabled To configure this option see bridge ipxSnapTranslation later in this chapter Not available at this release 254 CHAPTER 9 BRIDGE WIDE PARAMETERS Field Description maxAge mode peakAddrCount priority rootCost rootPort stpGroupAddress stpState timeSinceLastTopology Change topologyChangeCount topologyChangeFlag Time period in seconds that the bridge uses to discard stored configuration messages The value is determined by the root bridge Compare with the bridgeMaxAge field Reflects that the bridge operates as a transparent bridge Reflects the highest number of addresses that have been counted since the last address table flush For the current size of the address table see the addressCount field Configurable STP priority value for the bridge The default value is Ox8000 Ox signifies that 8000 is a hexadecimal number The acceptable range is 0x0 Oxffff 0 ffff To configure a value see bridge spanningTree stpPriority later in this chapter The bridge priority is included in the bridge identifier and is considered the most significant portion because it influences root bridge selection A lower priority increases the odds that the bridge will become the root bridge Value that reflects the total cost of the best path lowest value from the bridge root port to the root bridge The value sums individual port path costs To con
419. nt 0 65535 0 Enter ASE type typel type2 typel 2 Enter administrative weight 1 16 1 3 Example of Export Policy for a Directly Connected Interface Select menu option ip ospf policy define Enter policy type import export import export Enter origin protocols dir sta rip all dir sta rip dir Select IP interfaces 1l all 1 Enter policy action accept reject accept accept Enter metric adjustment 0 65535 0 3 Enter ASE type typel type2 typel 2 Enter administrative weight 1 16 1 4 598 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf policy modify v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Modifies an existing OSPF routing policy Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o pom Important Considerations The system assigns an index number to each policy and takes into account all route policies Routing Information Protocol RIP and OSPF that are set on the system There are certain conditions associated with import and export policies See the Implementation Guide for your system for more information Your system has one unified IP routing table Routing policies allow you to control the flow of information among the network the protocols and the routing tables on your system There are two classes of routing policies a Import policies Control which OSPF non self originated external routes are stored in the routing table OSPF import policies con
420. nt port on the switch you are presently configuring a The input format for this MAC address is 00 00 00 00 00 00 E E d i gt RESILIENT LINKS Resilient links protect your network against the failure of an individual link or device by providing a secondary backup link that is inactive until it is needed This chapter provides guidelines and other key information about how to configure resilient links in your system For more information about resilient links see the Implementation Guide for your system Menu Structure The commands that you can use depend on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardware options that are configured for your system The following diagram shows the complete list of commands for all systems See the checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter for whether your system supports the command Top Level Menu bridge menu link menu system display summary module ipFragmentation detail management ipxSnapTranslation define ethernet addressThreshold linkState fddi agingTime activePort bridge spanning Tree modify ip gvrpState remove ipx cos appletalk port qos multicast snmp packetFilter analyzer vlan log trunk script mpla logout b link disconnect 328 CHAPTER 13 RESILIENT LINKS bridge link summary For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 2 switching modules only Displays summary inf
421. nt to change or to display a port summary specify 2 After you have selected the ports the system prompts you to enter the port mode for the ports that you selected ethernet flowControl v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 Controls whether a Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet port can respond to or generate flow control packets Valid Minimum Abbreviation ef Important Considerations a Flow control allows a port to a Decrease the frequency with which it sends packets to a receiving device if packets are being sent too rapidly a Send flow control packets to a sending device to request that the device slow its speed of transmission to the port a The system does not count flow control packets in either receive or transmit statistics Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Port Ports for which you want to set a A single port selection flow control characteristics A range of ports a all a to display a port summary Flow control Flow control characteristics for m on off setting each of the ports that you off selected a rxOn a txOn 216 CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET PORTS Flow Control Settings Setting Description Available on Port Type on off rxOn txOn Port recognizes flow control packets and responds by pausing transmission The port can generate flow control packets as necessary to slow incoming traffic Port ignores flow control packets and does not generate th
422. nt to set the interface index oddLengthPadding state a fora list of selectable indexes IPX odd length State for odd length padding for m disabled disabled padding state the specified interface enabled 658 CHAPTER 20 IPX v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 ipx NetBIOS Determines whether the system handles IPX Type 20 packet forwarding on a per interface basis Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx n Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Interface index index number of the interface for m One or more 1 if only 1 which you want to set the selectable IPX NetBIOS forwarding state interface indexes a all a fora list of selectable indexes IPX NetBIOS State for NetBIOS forwarding for m disabled enabled forwarding the specified interface enabled factory state J default or current value IPX NetBIOS Example 3500 Select menu option ipx netBIOS Select interface index es 1 6 all 1 Interface 1 Enter state for NetBIOS packets disabled enabled enabled disabled v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 ipx secondary Determines whether the system enables secondary routes and servers Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx sec Important Considerations a This option allows the system to learn about secondary routes and secondary servers a With this option a secondary route server entry can replace a primary route server entry when the primary route server is removed from the rou
423. nterface modules using the EME Management Console Web Management The Web Management suite of applications are an embedded part of the CoreBuilder 9000 system software image They include the WebConsole and DeviceView applications Additional installable applications include online Help After you have set up your IP address for your system you can access the Web Management applications directly from your Web browser by entering its IP address See the Web Management User Guide for the CoreBuilder 9000 Enterprise Switch for additional information about Web Management You manage the EME from a command line interface using EME management commands You manage the switch fabric modules or interface modules through the Administration Console using module management commands or through the Web Management interface The CoreBuilder 9000 system uses separate channels for network traffic and management traffic The private management LAN MLAN handles management traffic Management traffic travels to and from the EME which acts as the single point of contact for all management traffic in the chassis Switch fabric module backplane channels handle network traffic Each interface module has one or two backplane ports that connect to the switch fabric module backplane which allows network traffic to pass through the CoreBuilder 9000 system Figure 1 illustrates the MLAN channel and the switch fabric module backplane channels in the CoreBuilde
424. ntry index same number as the IP interface index Password Password that is associated with the OSPF interface Pri OSPF router priority for the interface Rxmit Intvl LSA retransmit interval in seconds Xmit Cost Interface transmit cost Xmit Delay Interface transmit delay in seconds 542 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf interface VY 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 detail For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays summary and detailed information for the system s OSPF interface configuration Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o i det Important Consideration a The display also indicates whether IP routing and Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP router discovery are enabled and gives the OSPF router ID Fields in the IP OSPF Interface Detail Display Field Description ArealD OSPF area to which the interface belongs BDR P interface of the backup designated router BDR Dead Intvl Time interval in seconds before OSPF declares that a neighbor is dead DR P interface of the designated router DR Hello Intvl OSPF Hello packet transmit interval in seconds for the interface Indx ndex number that corresponds to the IP interface for which OSPF information is displayed IP address P address of the OSPF interface Notes When RouterID appears the interface address is being used as the OSPF router ID Password Password that is associated with the OSPF interface Pri O
425. nued 3500 9000 9000 9400 3900 9300 Layer Layer Commands 2 3 ipx forwarding i ipx rip mode ipx rip triggered ipx rip policy summary ipx rip policy define ipx rip policy modify ipx rip policy remove ipx sap mode ipx sap triggered ipx sap policy summary ipx sap policy detail ipx sap policy define ipx sap policy modify ipx sap policy remove ipx output delay ipx statistics summary ipx statistics rip ipx statistics sap ipx statistics forwarding ipx statistics interface ipx oddLengthPadding ipx NetBIOS VA NANA SS ON N NRN NN SN OR NON NNN Se Be SS VNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNN NN NNN NN ipx secondary Table 6 Command Summary continued 3500 9000 9000 9400 3900 9300 Layer Layer Commands 2 3 Ch 21 AppleTalk appletalk interface summary appletalk interface detail appletalk interface define appletalk interface modify appletalk interface remove appletalk interface statistics appletalk route display appletalk route flush appletalk aarp display appletalk aarp remove appletalk aarp flush appletalk zone display network appletalk zone display zone appletalk forwarding appletalk checksum appletalk sourceSocket appletalk ping appletalk statistics ddp appletalk statistics rtmp appletalk statistics zip Sar Se TR RSN ig OR SG SR Sg Sy SS SN OSS SI SSS REN SSRN SR ASN appletalk statistics nbp 62 CHAPTER 2 COMMAND SUMMARY Table 6 Command Summary continued 3500
426. o forwarded frames You can define up to 16 nonflow classifiers All 16 nonflow classifiers are in use by default The default classifier number is 499 You cannot remove or modify this default classifier However you can remove any of the predefined classifiers for example if you need another nonflow classifier See qos classifier remove later in this chapter for more information When you define a filter address and port pattern for a flow classifier select a source and destination start and end port ranges that are as small as possible for example a single port If the classifier applies to a wide range of Transmission Control Protocol TCP or User Datagram Protocol UDP ports you increase the amount of classified traffic on the system and consume valuable QoS resources A classifier can have only one control applied to it If you select custom when you define a nonflow classifier you are prompted to select the protocol by Ethertype or DSAP SSAP After you select a protocol you are prompted to provide the hexidecimal ranges Depending on the number of VLANs defined you can define a maximum of 3 custom protocols that can have controls applied to them This limitation does not apply to non controlled custom protocols gos classifier define 695 Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Classifier Number of the flow m Flow classifiers 1 399 number or nonflow classifier except 20 and 23 which in th
427. ocol Actual interface address Route was statically configured Route has timed out and is no longer valid 162 CHAPTER 5 OuT OF BAND MANAGEMENT management ip route v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 static Defines a static route Valid Minimum Abbreviation mip ros Important Considerations Before you can define static routes you must define at least one IP interface See ip interface define 3500 9000 Layer 3 in Chapter 16 for more information You can define up to 128 static routes Static routes remain in the table until you remove them or the corresponding interface Static routes take precedence over dynamically learned routes to the same destination Static routes are not included in periodic Routing Information Protocol RIP updates sent by the system Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Destination IP IP address of the A valid IP address address destination network subnet or host for this route Subnet mask Subnet mask for the A valid subnet mask Based on specified IP address specified IP address Gateway IP IP address of the A valid router address address gateway used by this route management ip route v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 remove management ip route remove 163 Deletes an existing route Valid Minimum Abbreviation m ip ror Important Consideration a When you enter the command the system deletes the route immediately from the routing tab
428. odule devices management services ethernet fddi bridge ip ipx appletalk qos snmp analyzer blog script logout disconnect v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 log display log display 749 Displays the current log settings Valid Minimum Abbreviation log di Important Consideration a The CoreBuilder 3500 by default enables logging to the serial port session and disables logging to any Telnet or modem session However you can toggle the current logging state on the CoreBuilder 3500 from serial port to Telnet or modem by entering Ctrl L Fields in the Log Display Field Description consoleOut Logging message Administration Console output device You can enable or disable the Console to display event log messages for each severity level Whether logging to this console session is enabled or disabled Supported Event Log Services AppleTalk IPX System Severity Levels Config Error Info Warning Appletalk log service Enabled or disabled for each severity level IPX log service Enabled or disabled for each severity level System log service Enabled or disabled for each severity level Configuration changes Application specific error Default enabled Severity level of changes in the state of the system that are not caused by events at any other severity level Nonfatal problem Default enabled 750 CHAPTER 23 EVENT LOG log devices Configures seve
429. odule supports up to 4 trunk groups with up to 6 ports per trunk and the FGA24T and GAQ switch fabric modules support up to 12 trunk groups with up to 6 ports per trunk The GAY cannot support 12 trunk groups because there are not enough ports on this module 3500 Supports up to 4 trunk groups with up to 8 ports per trunk 3900 Supports up to 4 trunk groups with up to 6 ports per trunk 9300 and 9400 a Supports up to 12 trunk groups with up to 6 ports per trunk m all a for a list of selectable ports 310 CHAPTER 11 TRUNKS Prompt Description Possible Values Default Mode Operating mode for the a 100half 100full for Fast trunk Ethernet a 10half 10full 100half 100full for platforms that support 10 Mbps Ethernet Flow Flow control setting m on off control Ethernet only off m rxOn Gigabit Ethernet a txOn Gigabit Ethernet Trunk Name of the trunk a Maximum 32 alphanumeric name characters Use quotation marks around any string with a fora list of selectable embedded spaces names TCMP Trunk Control Message a enabled enabled Protocol TCMP Performs disabled the following functions a Detects and corrects trunks that violate trunk configuration rules a Ensures orderly activation and deactivation of trunk ports Procedure You can define all trunks in one bridge trunk define operation and then reboot At the end of each trunk definition the s
430. oes down or the primary entry reaches its age limit a Fora CoreBuilder 3500 system the route table display shows the range for the routing table primary entries in the format n m where nis the current number of entries and m is the maximum number of primary entries Fields in the IPX Secondary Server Display Field Description Age Number of seconds that have elapsed since the last time a server in the table sent a packet Hops Number of networks that must be crossed to reach the server The maximum number is 15 Interface Index number of the interface Name Name for the secondary server Network 4 byte IPX network address of the server Node 6 byte MAC address of the server that forwards packets to the segment Socket 2 byte socket address of the server that receives service requests Type Type of service that the server provides The IPX protocol defines various types of services One type is 0x4 which is for a file server For more information on IPX type values consult your Novell documentation ipx forwarding 629 ipx forwarding For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Controls whether the system forwards or discards IPX packets v 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 ipx f 3900 Important Considerations 9300 m When you enable IPX forwarding the system acts as a normal IPX router forwarding IPX packets from one network to another when required a When you disable IPX forwa
431. of packets that the system sent and received any loss of packets and the average time that it took a packet to travel to and from the host When disabled the system displays more detailed status information about each ICMP echo request packet Number of seconds that the system waits before it sends out successive ICMP echo request packets Set this option to a high value if network traffic is heavy and you choose not to add to the network traffic with pings in fast succession Whether to force the source address of the ICMP packets to be something other than the IP address of the interface from which the packet originated You can use this option if you have more than one IP interface defined Index number of the ICMP source IP address that you want to use The system lists currently defined interfaces and their indexes 28 4096 bytes 64 a disabled enabled disabled a disabled a enabled disabled 1 20seconds 1 no y m y yes A selectable O the interface index router picks the best interface IP Advanced Ping Example Select menu option ip advancedPing Configure ICMP sourceAddress n y yl Index Interface address 0 Best interfac default 1 158 101 117 151 2 158 101 10 1 Select interface index 0 2 0 1 Press Enter key to interrupt PING 158 64 bytes 64 bytes 64 bytes 158 3 packets transmitted 101 112 56 from 158
432. of ICMP address mask reply packets that were sent outAddrMasks Number of ICMP address mask request packets that were sent outDestUnreach Number of ICMP destination unreachable packets that were sent outEchoReps Number of ICMP echo reply packets that were sent outEchos Number of ICMP echo request packets that were sent outErrors Number of ICMP packets that were sent that were dropped due to system resource errors outMsgs Number of ICMP packets that were sent outParmProbs Number of ICMP parameter problem packets that were sent outRedirects Number of ICMP redirect packets that were sent outSrcQuenchs outTimeExcds outTimeStampReps outTimeStamps Number o Number o Number o Number of ICMP source quench packets that were sent ICMP time exceeded packets that were sent ICMP time stamp reply packets that were sent ICMP time stamp request packets that were sent oe tte E E d gt gt VIRTUAL ROUTER REDUNDANCY VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP provides fault tolerant routing on a LAN by eliminating the single point of failure that exists when hosts are configured with a static default gateway This chapter provides guidelines and other key information about configuring VRRP on your system For more information about VRRP see the Implementation Guide for your system For the CoreBuilder 9000 platform the commands in this chapter apply to Layer 3 switching modules only Menu Str
433. of bytes that this MAC transmitted per second during the most recent sampling period Number of bytes that this MAC transmitted Number of frames discarded because LLC service was not enabled or the FDDI ring was not operational Average number of frames that this MAC transmitted per second during the most recent sampling period Number of frames that this MAC transmitted This number does not include MAC frames Number of frames discarded because of an internal hardware error during transmission Number of multicast frames queued for transmission by a higher level protocol or application including frames not transmitted successfully Peak value of fddiMACByteTransmitRate for this MAC since the station was last initialized Peak value of fddiMACFrameTransmitRate for this MAC since the station was last initialized Number of frames discarded because the transmit queue was full Number of unicast frames queued for transmission by a higher level protocol or application including frames not transmitted successfully MAC address of this MAC s upstream neighbor Whether the address upstream of this address is duplicated on the ring fddimac Determines when the system generates a MAC condition report because frameErrorThreshold too many frame errors have occurred Y 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation v 9000 fd mf 9400 Important Considerations 3900 a A frame error occurs when a frame becomes corrupted 9300 a A high frame error rate
434. of defining 717 e of modifying 722 ing 718 721 removing 724 service specify QoS Quali levels 711 ng rate limits 710 712 715 ty of Service excess packet tagging disabling 737 display ng 735 enabling 736 QoS Quali interva receive transm ty of Service statistics 738 739 it 741 R rate limits QoS control 710 712 715 modifying one or more 718 using with trunks 716 reboots trunks and 307 receive ports rate limit 712 specifying for trunks 716 receive statistics QoS 739 receivePort rate limit 710 712 715 relay threshold BOOTP 446 remote access 73 removing IP interfaces 612 613 649 links 336 QoS classifiers 706 QoS controls 724 trunks 318 VLANs 363 reserved packets 733 734 returning products for repair 771 RIP Routing Information Protocol display 173 management statistics 176 mode example 175 modes 173 174 RIP mode IP interface information 451 IPX setting 630 Statistics 651 triggered updates 631 RIP policy define IPX 633 modify 635 summary IPX 632 637 RIP 2 password 459 rlogin and rebooting the system 123 router ID OSPF 567 routes adding default 165 AppleTalk 672 673 defining static IP 422 deleting default 166 finding in table 167 flushing from the routing table 164 IPX displaying in routing table 615 flushing all learned 621 removing 620 SAPadvertising 613 types of 421 routing policies OSPF 590 to 602 roving analysis and Spanning Tree 758 RSVP Res
435. of the host on which Any valid IP address Previous IP address you want to store the data file address used NV control Full path of the file where you file want to store the NV data File label Meaningful description of the 32 character text optional file string Procedure 1 To save NV data from the top level of the Administration Console enter system nvData save The system prompts you for information about saving the data To accept the value in brackets press Return Any entry for IP address filename and user name becomes the new default 2 Enter the IP address of the TFTP or FIP server 3 If you are using TFP and your implementation requires a full path enter the full pathname of the control file Some implementations allow you to specify only the file name and the server uses the default TFTP directory The system prompt says NV Control file so enter the name of the control file without the NVD extension 4 Optionally enter a label for the file Example Host IP Address 158 101 100 1 158 101 112 34 V Control file full pathname nvdata Enter an optional file label Labdata Success Failure system nvData save 109 If the information is incorrect or if a connection cannot be made with the specified host the system displays a message similar to this one Login incorrect Error Transfer Timed Out Error I O error while writing nonvolatile data If a session is successfully opened a system
436. ommand to manually change the cost to a different value Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interface Index number of one or more One or more all factory interfaces to which you want valid IP interface default or to assign a cost index numbers current value a all a fora list of selectable indexes Cost Cost that you want to assign to 1 65535 Cost of slowest the specified interface Higher port usually 1 values are slower ports 552 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf interface VY 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 delay For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Sets the OSPF interface transmit delay Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o i del Important Considerations a The system adds the value of the transmit delay to all link state advertisements LSAs that it sends out to the network Set the transmit delay according to the link speed use a longer transmit delay time for slower link speeds a The transmit delay must be consistent throughout the autonomous system Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interface Index number of one or more w One or more all factory interfaces for which you want valid IP interface default or to set the transmit delay index numbers current value L all a fora list of selectable indexes Transmit Delay in seconds that you 1 65535 seconds 1 factory delay want to assign to the spe
437. on Origin IP address of the subnetwork that contains an IP multicast source followed by a forward slash and subnetwork mask Gateway IP address of the routing interface that lies upstream of the local system on the path back towards an IP multicast source If the source subnetwork is connected directly to your system this field contains a dash Metric Number of hops from your system back to the origin subnetwork This value is not the DVMRP interface or tunnel metric which are shown under Met ric in other displays Occasionally instead of a numeric value you may see NR meaning network unreachable Your system may have trouble computing the hop count because of factors such as an upstream router being temporarily congested This condition is usually resolved in a short period of time Tmr Amount of time in seconds since each entry was last reset Parent The interface that connects to the upstream router Gateway Because DVMRP forms a loopless spanning tree to reach all hosts for a given IP multicast group your system always chooses a single parent interface Either an I or a T precedes the index number An I indicates that the index is an interface index number A T indicates that the index is a tunnel index number Children Interfaces that communicate with downstream routers or local subnetworks The system forwards incoming IP multicast traffic through these interfaces Either an I ora T precedes each index num
438. on 9400 ip oa di 3900 Fields in the IP OSPF Areas Display 9300 T_T__a_aa aaaaaaaaasasasasasasasasasasasasasasasasasasasassssss I Field Description Advertise Whether the network range is advertised y or not n ArealD Area identifier Indx Entry index number for the area IP Address Network portion of IP address range Mask IP address range subnet mask Stub Whether the area is a stub area y or not n 532 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip ospf areas defineArea For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Defines an OSPF area Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o a de Important Considerations a The backbone area 0 0 0 0 is configured by default a The area ID must be unique for the autonomous system a On the CoreBuilder 3500 you can define a maximum of eight areas Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Area ID In the form n n n n where Up to 0 lt n lt 255 functions as 255 255 255 255 an area identification number to the OSPF autonomous system Stub area Whether this area is a stub area m y yes n factory default or an no current value ip ospf areas modifyArea 533 ip ospf areas For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only modifyArea Modifies an existing OSPF area V 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation A 9000 ip o a modifya 9400 Options 3900 9300 Prompt Descr
439. on Console with Administer access each menu contains all of the options for the system Here is an example of a system menu for users with Administer access on the CoreBuilder 3500 Select menu option system Menu options CoreBuilder 2B4200 display Display the system configuration console Administer console level functions fileTransfer Set the file transfer protocol snapshot Display all configuration and status information softwareUpdate Load a new revision of system software baseline Administer a statistics baseline serialPort Administer the terminal and modem serial ports name Set the system nam time Set the date and time nvData Save restore or reset nonvolatile data clearDiagBlock Clear the diagnostic block diagErrLog Display Diagnose Error Log sntp Administer the Simple Network Time Protocol reboot Reboot the system Type q to return to the previous menu or for help Select menu option system 38 CHAPTER 1 ADMINISTRATION OVERVIEW Write Access Example When you enter the Administration Console with write access the system menu contains a subset of the complete menu focusing on the network as shown in this example on the CoreBuilder 3500 Select menu option system Menu options display console fileTransfer snapshot baseline serialPort name diagErrLog sntp CoreBuilder 2B4 200 Display the system configuration
440. onReverse ip rip routeAggregationMode SON NO SON OTUS NORN NSA SN MW NNA N NNR Se Se A SASASSNSNSNSNSNSNSSNSNSNSSNSNSNSNSNSNSNSNSNSNSSSNS Table 6 Command Summary continued 3500 9000 9000 9400 3900 9300 Layer Layer Commands 2 3 ip rip password J ip rip addAdvertisement ip rip removeAdvertisement ip rip policy summary ip rip policy detail ip rip policy define ip rip policy modify ip rip policy remove ip rip statistics ip ping ip advancedPing ip traceRoute ip advancedTraceRoute SoS Bs SON ON ON Se NN SSS SS SON ONO SYS RON IN SS So SONS SR SNe N ON SSS QNNNNN AN ip statistics Ch 17 VRRP ip vrrp summary ip vrrp detail ip vrrp define ip vrrp modify ip vrrp remove ip vrro mode ip vrrp neighbor SS She ON Be PG Se ae Sy R NIR SSASSN ip vrrp statistics 56 CHAPTER 2 COMMAND SUMMARY Table 6 Command Summary continued 3500 9000 9000 9400 3900 9300 Layer Layer Commands 2 3 Ch 18 IP Multicast ip multicast igmp interface summary ip multicast igmp interface detail ip multicast igmp interface TTL ip multicast igmp snooping ip multicast igmp querying icast cache O 3 Cc n ip multicast dvmrp interface summary f S ip multicast dvmrp interface detail S S ip multicast dvmrp interface mode S S ip multicast dvmrp interface metric ff S ip multicast dvmrp tunnels summary S S ip multicast dvmrp tunnels define S S ip multicast d
441. onding switch fabric module port must also be tagged in the VLAN definition on the switch fabric module You connect to the switch fabric module and define the VLAN to include the appropriate tagged switch fabric module port based on the slot that contains the switching module CB90D00 slot 10 1 En Select bridge por Configure per por En En Bridge VLAN Define Example 3900 ter VID ter por ter por ter por ter por ter por t ct ct ct ct ct ter por ter VLA 2 4094 3 t 2 3 4 5 21 tag type tag tag tag tag tag 20 E FEN TX L2 3 ts 1 22 all 1 5 21 t tagging n y yl y type none 802 10 802 10 type none 802 10 802 10 type none 802 10 802 10 type none 802 10 802 10 type none 802 10 802 190 none 802 10 802 19 vlantag3 Name bridge vlan define This example shows a port based VLAN that includes tagged ports Select menu option 2 4094 2 1 39 all En En En En En ter VID ter port ter port ter port ter VLAN Select bridge ports Configure per port tagging none 802 10 3 tag type 4 tag type 5 tag type name 2 none 802 10 none 802 10 Sales n y 3 5 Ly bridge vlan define y none none none 802 10 802 10 802 10 bridge vlan modify 3500 9000 Layer 3 v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 i gt For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer
442. ons using the network select a port range that is as small as possible for example a single port Enter the start of the TCP or UDP destination port range in the range of from 0 through 65535 The default is 0 Enter the end of the TCP or UDP destination port range using a value of up to 65535 The end value must be greater than or equal to the start value At the prompt specify whether you want any other filters address and port patterns with this classifier yes or no The default is no If you specify yes the system prompts you for additional information beginning with the source IP address Flow classifiers classify traffic only at the network layer and therefore affect only traffic that is being routed from one subnetwork to another qos classifier define 699 QoS Classifier Define Example Flow Classifier Select menu option qos classifier define Enter classifier number 1 498 26 Enter classifier name IPFilterl Select cast type unicast multicast all all Select IP protocol type TCP UDP all all Enter source IP address 0 0 0 0 168 20 30 0 Enter source IP address mask 255 255 0 0 255 255 255 0 Enter destination IP address 0 0 0 0 192 1 0 0 Enter IP address mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 0 0 Enter start of UDP source port range 0 65535 0 0 Enter end of UDP source port range 0 65535 65535 65535 Enter start of UDP destination port range 0 65535 0 0 Enter end of UDP destination port
443. or Information Frames NIF Valid Minimum Abbreviation fd station t Important Considerations a f you set the T notify value low your network reacts quickly to station changes but uses more bandwidth a If you set the T notify value high less bandwidth is used but your network does not react to station changes as quickly Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Ports One or more FDDI station ports m Any of the for which you want to set the available ports neighbor notification timer on the installed FDDI modules m all tnotify Timer in seconds used in the 2 30 seconds 30 Neighbor Notification protocol to indicate the interval of time between generation of Neighbor Information Frames NIF 228 CHAPTER 8 FIBER DISTRIBUTED DATA INTERFACE FDDI fddi station statusReporting v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Controls whether a station generates Status Report Frames SRFs to report events and conditions to network management stations Valid Minimum Abbreviation fd station s Important Consideration a f you do not have an SMT management station listening to these event reports or if you use SNMP to monitor FDDI events on all FDDI end stations set this attribute to disabled so that the station does not generate SRFs Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Ports One or more FDDI station ports m Any of the for which you want to set available ports statusReportin
444. or a modem connection Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy se s Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Serial port Type of serial port console console configuration that you want modem Procedures To change the serial port configuration from console tO modem perform the following steps Change the serial port configuration from console tO modem Disconnect the console cable Connect the modem cable The system is ready for you to establish a modem connection See system serialPort configModem next for details To change the serial port configuration from modem to console perform the following steps Change the serial port configuration from modem to console 2 Disconnect the modem cable Connect the console cable The system is ready for you to establish a console connection See system serialPort baudRate earlier in this chapter system serialPort v 3500 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 configModem system serialPort configModem 99 Configures the external modem from the Administration Console Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy sec Important Considerations a The system transmits characters that you have entered as output on the modem port The system echoes characters that it receives as input on the modem port to the current Console session Thus the Console appears to be directly connected to the external modem a You may need to change the baud of the modem to match that of
445. oreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays summary information about QoS controls Valid Minimum Abbreviation q co s Fields in the QoS Control Summary Display T Field Description 802 1p Tag For controls for nonflow classifiers the IEEE 802 1p tag value 0 7 Classifiers Classifiers that this control affects controlled Control Number of the control number Control name Excess loss eligible Excess service Loss eligible Service Name of the control For receivePort or aggregate rate limit types whether excess packets are loss eligible For receivePort or aggregate rate limit types the service level for excess packets Whether conforming packets are loss eligible If a packet is loss eligible it can be dropped if the transmit queue for which it is destined exceeds its threshold Service level for the conforming packets 708 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP qos control detail v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays detailed information about the QoS controls that you specify Valid Minimum Abbreviation q co det Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Control Number of the control for a Oneor more number which you want detail configured information controls 7 all a fora list of selectable controls Fields in the QoS Control Detail Display F
446. ork node Example 20301 7 Index Index number of the AppleTalk interface Network range Range of numbers that are assigned to the interface Example 20301 20310 State Status of the AppleTalk interface which indicates whether the interface is available enabled or unavailable down VLAN index Index number of the virtual LAN VLAN that is associated with the AppleTalk interface 664 CHAPTER 21 APPLETALK appletalk interface For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only detail Displays detailed information for all AppleTalk interfaces V 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation A 9000 ap i det 9400 Fields in the AppleTalk Interface Detail Display 3900 9300 Field Description Address AppleTalk interface address which is based on the network range and the network node Example 20301 7 Index Index number of the AppleTalk interface Network Range Range of numbers that are assigned to the interface Example 20301 20310 Seed Whether the interface is configured as a seed y or non seed n interface State Status of the AppleTalk interface that is whether the interface is available enabled or unavailable down VLAN index Index number of the virtual LAN VLAN that is associated with the AppleTalk interface Zone List All zone names that are associated with the AppleTalk interface appletalk interface v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 define appletalk interface define 665 For CoreBui
447. ork port Unlike for any other network port the system automatically distributes traffic across the ports that are associated with a trunk If any of the trunk s ports go down or up the system automatically redistributes traffic across the new arrangement of operational ports For more trunking information see the Implementation Guide for your system Trunks can work with MultiPoint Link Aggregation MPLA MPLA is a feature for the CoreBuilder 9400 that increases the capacity and availability of campus LAN cores without using complex meshed router networks Functioning at Layer 2 MPLA provides both dual homed link resiliency and automatic load sharing over point to multipoint backbone connections MPLA increases network availability using scalable Gigabit Ethernet connections among multiple campus switches For more information about MPLA and trunking see the CoreBuilder 9400 Implementation Guide 300 CHAPTER 11 TRUNKS Menu Structure The commands that you can use depend on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardware options that are configured for your system The following diagram shows the complete list of commands for all systems See the checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter for whether your system supports the command Top Level Menu system management ethernet fddi gt bridge ip ipx appletalk qos snmp analyzer log script
448. ormation about configured resilient links on your 3500 system In a summary report the system displays the index number link v 9000 name and whether the link is up or down V 9400 Valid Minimum Abbreviation J 3900 b 1s v 9300 f i f Fields in the Bridge Link Summary Display Field Description Index Number that the system assigned to the resilient link pair You can select all resilient link pairs or one resilient link pair Name Name of the defined resilient link pair State Whether the resilient link pair is up or down bridge link detail For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 2 switching modules only Displays detailed link information in addition to the summary 3500 information v 9000 v 9400 Valid Minimum Abbreviation b 1 det v 3900 Y 9300 Fields in the Bridge Link Detail Display Field Description Active Port Port that carries network traffic Enable State Whether the resilient pair is enabled or disabled Index Number that the system assigned to the resilient link pair You can select all resilient link pairs or one resilient link pair Main Link Link state up or down of the main link Main Port Main resilient link port Name Name of the defined link Standby Link Link state up or down of the standby link Standby Port Standby resilient link port to which traffic shifts if the main resilient link port fails State Whether the resilient link pair is up or down 330 CHAPTER 13 RESILIENT LINKS bridge link defi
449. ors MasterlpAdd Ports Preempt Pri PrimarylpAddr priorityZeroRx Whether the VRRP router uses simple password authentication If password authentication is configured the VRRP router discards any VRRP packet that does not have a matching authentication string Total number of VRRP advertisements that this virtual router has received that did not have the correct simple text authentication password Total number of times that this virtual router has changed to the Master state Last type of invalid advertisement received or none Time in seconds between virtual router advertisements The Master router advertises all IP addresses that are associated with the virtual router Backup routers on the VLAN consider the Master down if two advertisement intervals pass with no advertisement from the Master Total number of VRRP advertisements that the virtual router has received with the Authentication Type not equal to the locally configured authentication method Number of VRRP advertisements with an invalid value in the Type field that this virtual router has received Total number of VRRP advertisements with IP TTL Time to Live not equal to 255 that this virtual router has received IP address of the Master for this virtual router Ports that are defined on the virtual LAN VLAN and that are associated with the virtual router Whether the router preempts a Master with a lower priority yes allows preemption no prohibits
450. ort group en toadda a for a list of group ge P groups Select Number of the bridge port that m 1 n bridge port you want to add to the a all selected port group a fora list of groups Bridge Packet Filter Port Group Add Port Examples Select menu option bridge packetFilter portGroup add Select port group 1 2 2 2 Select bridge port s 1 6 all 2 When you display port group 2 the display shows that port 2 is added Select menu option bridge packetFilter portGroup display Select port group 1 2 all 2 Port Group 2 Sales Port 2 Port 5 Port 6 392 CHAPTER 15 PACKET FILTERS bridge packetFilter v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 portGroup removePort For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Removes ports from a port group Valid Minimum Abbreviation bpapr Important Considerations a At least one group must exist before you can remove a port from a port group a Possible values for port groups m depend on the number of user defined port groups on the system a Possible values for bridge ports n depend on the number of existing bridge ports on the system Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Select port Number of the port group a 1 m Current port group from which you want to group remove a bridge port for a list of groups Select Number of the bridge port that 1 n E bridge port you want to remove from the selected por
451. ort detail command reports The Ethernet detail command counts all frames that are delivered to the port while the bridge port detail command reports only valid frames that are passed to the port Therefore the Ethernet detail value should exceed the bridge port detail value by the number of receive errors rxErrs At some prompts you can specify the option to list Ethernet ports and port numbers The option displays Selection Port and Port Label columns The Selection column and Port column contain the same port numbers because they represent your physical ports 208 CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET PORTS Fields in the Ethernet Detail Display Field Description actualFlowControl actualPortMode alignmenteErrs 3500 3900 and 9000 autoNegMode autoNegState carrierSenseErr 3500 3900 and 9000 excessCollision 3500 3900 and 9000 excessDeferrals 3500 and 9000 Layer 3 fcsErrs fragments 3900 9000 Layer 2 9300 and 9400 jabbers 3900 9000 Layer 2 9300 and 9400 ateCollisions 3500 3900 and 9000 engthErrs 3500 and 9000 Layer 3 Actual flow control setting When autonegotiation is completed the value is the autonegotiated setting When autonegotiation is disabled the value is the user selected flow control value Actual operating port mode When autonegotiation is completed the value shown is the autonegotiated setting When autonegotiation is disabled the value is the port
452. ose the default setting to ensure unique router IDs a The resulting prompt depends on the router ID type that you choose 568 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH FIRST OSPF Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Router ID Type of router identifier m default default factory type that you want to define default or current interface value a address IP interface For interface router ID a Valid IP interface First available type only Index number for a list of factory default or of IP interface to use as i current value selectable indexes router ID Router ID For address router ID User defined router Unique router ID type only Identifier that ID generated by the is assigned to router in system factory the form of an IP address default or current 0 0 0 0 and vag 255 255 255 255 are invalid and will be rejected IP OSPF Router ID Example Interface Type Current OSPF router id 0 43 66 0 default Enter router ID type default interface address default interface Select IP interface 1 3 1 IP OSPF Router ID Example Address Type Current OSPF router id 24 23 11 23 address Enter router ID type default interface address address address Enter router ID 24 23 11 23 101 89 2 4 ip ospf partition v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 display ip ospf partition display 569 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays OSPF memory allocatio
453. ot 10 subslot 1 enter connect 10 1 D gt All modules use subslot 1 The system displays a prompt similar to the following CB9000 slot10 1 20 E FEN TX L2 When you have connected to a module you manage the module from the Administration Console with the same level of access that you have on the EME For example if you have logged in to the EME with administer privileges you also have administer privileges for the module to which you are connected For additional information about the EME see the CoreBuilder 9000 Enterprise Switch Getting Started Guide and the CoreBuilder 9000 Enterprise Management Engine User Guide Access Examples 37 Access Examples The examples in this section show how the top level menu structure of the Administration Console changes The menus that you see in the Administration Console vary depending on a Which 3Com system you are viewing as described in Accessing Your System earlier in this chapter Your level of access a The optional interface modules switch fabric modules and other hardware options that you configure into your system For example you see the fddi menu only if you have installed the FDDI module on your CoreBuilder 3500 system These examples show the CoreBuilder 3500 menus Menus for other platforms may differ See the Command Quick Reference for your system for the list of commands on your system Administer Access Example When you enter the Administrati
454. otocol Valid Minimum Abbreviation ap c Important Considerations a The AppleTalk protocol uses checksums to detect errors in data transmissions A checksum totals all data bytes and adds the sum to the checksum field of the data packet The receiving station computes a verification checksum from the incoming data and compares the new checksum with the value that is sent with the data If the values do not match the transmission contains an error m Disabled is the preferred setting Enabling the checksum generation or verification significantly impacts the router s performance Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Checksum Whether to enable or disable m enabled disabled generation generation of checksums for disabled factory state AppleTalk packets default or current value Checksum Whether to enable or disable enabled disabled verification verification of checksums for factory a disabled state AppleTalk packets default or current value v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 appletalk sourceSocket For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Enables and disables AppleTalk Data Delivery Protocol DDP source socket verification Valid Minimum Abbreviation ap so Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default source Whether to enable or disable enabled disabled Socket source socket verification factory a disabled default or current value 682 C
455. ou are not prompted to confirm the deletion ip route findRoute For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Searches for a route in the routing table v 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 ip route fi 3900 Important Considerations 9300 a This command enables you to find a route using an IP address or a host name as long as the Domain Name System DNS is configured a When you enter this command with a valid IP address or host name the system displays the routing table entry Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP address or IP address of the a A valid IP address 0 0 0 0 or host name route that you want A valid hostiam current to find or a host g value name if DNS is configured 428 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 ip arp display For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays the contents of the Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache for each interface on the system Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip ard Important Considerations a The system uses the ARP cache to find the MAC addresses that correspond to the IP addresses of hosts and other routers on the same subnetworks Each device that participates in routing maintains an ARP cache which is a table of known IP addresses and their corresponding MAC addresses a The first line in the output the status line indicates whether IP routing i
456. ound the clock access to technical information on most 3Com products 768 3Com FIP Site gt 3Com Bulletin Board Service APPENDIX A TECHNICAL SUPPORT Download drivers patches software and MIBs across the Internet from the 3Com public FTP site This service is available 24 hours a day 7 days a week To connect to the 3Com FIP site enter the following information into your FTP client Hostname ftp 3com com a Username anonymous a Password lt your Internet e mail address gt You do not need a user name and password with Web browser software such as Netscape Navigator and Internet Explorer The 3Com BBS contains patches software and drivers for 3Com products This service is available through analog modem or digital modem ISDN 24 hours a day 7 days a week Access by Analog Modem To reach the service by modem set your modem to 8 data bits no parity and 1 stop bit Call the telephone number nearest you Country Data Rate Telephone Number Australia Up to 14 400 bps 61 2 9955 2073 Brazil Up to 28 800 bps 55115181 9666 France Up to 14 400 bps 33 1 6986 6954 Germany Up to 28 800 bps 4989 62732 188 Hong Kong Up to 14 400 bps 852 2537 5601 Italy Upto 14 400 bps 39 2 27300680 Japan Up to 14 400 bps 81 3 5977 7977 Mexico Up to 28 800 bps 52 5 520 7835 P R of China Up to 14 400 bps 86 10 684 92351 Taiwan R O C Up to 14 400 bps 886 2 377 5840 U K Up to 28 800 bps 44 1442 438278 U S A Up to 53 333 bps
457. ource Reservation Protocol definition of 689 disabling 732 displaying detail information 729 displaying summary information 728 729 enabling 730 policing options 725 728 procedure for defining 731 session information 729 treatment of excess packets 728 730 RTMP Routing Table Maintenance Protocol 684 S SAP Service Advertisement Protocol mode statistics 652 triggered updates 639 SAP mode IPX 638 SAP policy define PX 642 detail PX 641 modify PX 645 remove PX 648 summary PX 640 script 124 scripts for the Administration Console examples 125 script command 124 serial number 69 129 serial port modem setting baud rate 95 server information 116 servers defining static IPX 624 displaying static IPX 622 table for 622 service levels conforming packets 711 default 715 RSVP 728 730 services for event logging 752 Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP 116 to 122 size burst 712 SMT Station Management lerAlarm value 242 lerCutoff value 243 snapshot feature 86 sniffer 755 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol agent 189 community strings 192 display 189 displaying configurations 191 trap reporting flushing addresses 197 SNMP trap addressThresholdEvent 257 soft restarts 570 software backup NV data 107 build date and time 69 129 version 69 source address 480 advancedPing option 476 advancedTraceRoute option 480 traceRoute option 182 source IP address for QoS classifiers 695 702 710 718 sour
458. out this guide to sdtechpubs_comments ne 3com com Include the following information when commenting a Document title a Document part number found on the front or back page of each document a Page number if appropriate Example Command Reference Guide Part Number 10013505 Page 347 Year 2000 Compliance For information on Year 2000 compliance and 3Com products visit the 3Com Year 2000 Web page http www 3com com products yr2000 html 26 ABOUT THIS GUIDE GETTING STARTED Chapter 1 Administration Overview Chapter 2 Command Summary oe tte ts ADMINISTRATION OVERVIEW This chapter introduces the Administration Console software that is supplied with your system the types of commands that you use to perform network tasks the valid syntax for command abbreviations and some shortcuts to help you navigate through the menus It also provides an overview of the management software that is specific to the CoreBuilder 9000 Enterprise Switch It introduces the EME Enterprise Management Engine Management Console for the CoreBuilder 9000 and describes its relationship to the Administration Console software The following topics are covered in this chapter a Administration Console Overview a CoreBuilder 9000 System Management Overview a CoreBuilder 9000 Management Features a Configuration Tasks a Accessing the Administration Console a Using Menus to Perform Tasks Admini
459. oute functions 478 UDP Helper 442 447 IP multicast cache 518 DVMRP metric 507 510 hop count 517 IGMP 524 525 prune messages 518 519 routing table 517 TTL threshold 510 tunnels 511 513 517 519 527 IP multicast filtering IGMP snooping 524 525 IP multicast routing DVMRP 507 IGMP 525 routeDisplay 517 P protocol types modifying 704 P routes flushing 424 interface status 421 P routing enabling or disabling 450 PX forwarding enabling or disabling 629 statistics 653 interfaces Statistics 655 RIP mode setting 630 statistics 651 triggered updates 631 RIP policy define 633 summary 632 637 routes defining static 618 flushing learned routes 621 removing 620 SAP Service Advertisement Protocol mode statistics 652 triggered updates 639 SAP mode 638 SAP policy define 642 detail 641 modify 645 remove 648 summary 640 static servers 622 624 K KBytes sec rate limit 712 L labels Ethernet ports 219 LANs virtual 337 Layer 2 devices defining VLANs 352 modifying VLANs 360 Layer 3 addresses for VLANs 347 modifying 355 Layer 3 devices defining VLANs 346 modifying VLANs 355 earn RIP mode 451 453 earned routes IP 424 earning state 264 LER Link Error Rate alarm value 242 erCutoff and lerAlarm value 243 evels service 711 imits for QoS classifiers 694 QoS rate 710 712 715 ink aggregation 299 ink state database OSPF 557 to 563 inks removing 336 resources 336 istening state 264 LLC
460. outes 424 SNMP trap addresses 197 forwarding AppleTalk 679 IPX 629 H hardware revision numbers 69 high service level 711 hop count 442 G gateway IP address 421 Gigabit Ethernet trunks 318 guidelines for using QoS 689 GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol displaying status 338 using 345 352 l ICMP statistics 187 483 ID VLAN 341 IEEE 802 1p priority tagging for excess packets 735 736 for nonflow classifiers 697 703 705 for QoS controls 712 EEE 802 1Q tagging 349 GMP Internet Group Management Protocol query mode 524 525 snooping mode 524 525 GMP snooping Layer 2 devices 270 GMP snooping Layer 3 devices 524 gnore STP mode selecting 365 ignoring blocking for VLANs 365 in band management 149 index 356 VLAN interface 360 395 interface module backplane ports 31 interfaces IP 449 OSPF 541 to 556 interfaces AppleTalk define 665 detail display 664 modify 667 interval QoS statistics 738 IP Internet Protocol address masks for QoS classifiers 695 addresses 395 421 loading software 89 QoS classifiers 702 addresses and restoring NV data 110 advancedPing 475 advancedTraceRoute 480 ARP cache 428 to 433 defining routes 422 DNS 436 enabling or disabling routing 450 interfaces displaying 608 610 removing 613 649 statistics 418 summary information 398 overlapped interfaces 447 to 449 overview 149 ping functions 473 478 RIP mode 451 routes 450 Statistics 482 ICMP 483 UDP 483 traceR
461. p statistics 176 management ip ping 177 management ip advancedPing 179 management ip traceRoute 182 management ip advancedTraceRoute 184 management ip statistics 186 6 SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL SNMP Menu Structure 190 snmp display 191 snmp community 192 snmp trap display 193 snmp trap addModify 194 snmp trap remove 196 snmp trap flush 197 snmp trap smtProxyTraps 198 snmp rmonConfiguration 199 snmp writeDisable 200 PART IV PHYSICAL PORT PARAMETERS 7 ETHERNET PORTS Menu Structure 203 ethernet summary 204 ethernet detail 207 ethernet autoNegotiation 212 ethernet portMode 213 ethernet flowControl 215 ethernet paceAccess 217 ethernet pacelnteractiveAccess 218 ethernet label 219 ethernet portState 220 ethernet monitoring summary 221 ethernet monitoring mode 222 8 FIBER DISTRIBUTED DATA INTERFACE FDDI Menu Structure 223 fddi station display 224 fddi station connectPolicy 225 fddi station tNotify 227 fddi station statusReporting 228 fddi path display 229 fddi path tvxLowerBound 230 fddi path tmaxLowerBound 231 fddi path maxTreq 232 fddi mac summary 233 fddi mac detail 234 fddi mac frameErrorThreshold 237 fddi mac notCopiedThreshold 238 fddi mac llcService 239 fddi mac path 240 fddi port display 241 fddi port lerAlarm 242 fddi port lerCutoff 243 fddi port label 244 fddi port path 245 fddi stationMode display 246 fddi stationMode modify 247 PART V BRIDGING PARAMETERS 9 BRIDGE WIDE PA
462. packets to the network A node address of all zeroes 00 00 00 00 00 00 means that the route is connected directly to the router Action Whether this router accepts or rejects a route that matches the policy ipx sap policy detail v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Display information about IPX SAP Service Advertising Protocol policies Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx sap p det Fields in an IPX SAP Policy Detail Display Field Description Idx Index number of the IPX SAP policy Interface Index number of the IP interface associated with this policy Weight Metric value of this policy This parameter specifies the order of precedence for policies that match the same service A higher value takes precedence over a lower value 642 CHAPTER 20 IPX ipx sap policy define v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Define a SAP Service Advertising Protocol policy Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx sa p def Important Considerations a Every router maintains a table of current configured services in a service table ma The SAP running on the router receives and advertises services from the network m Service policies control the services in the service table and those that the router advertises a Novell defines several different service types using specific numbers for the server adve
463. play ip ospf neighbors add ip ospf neighbors remove ip ospf router ID ip ospf partition display ip ospf partition modify ip ospf stubDefaultMetric display ip ospf stubDefaultMetric define ip ospf stubDefaultMetric remove ip ospf virtualLinks summary ip ospf virtualLinks detail ip ospf virtualLinks statistics ip ospf virtualLinks define ip ospf virtualLinks remove ip ospf virtualLinks arealD ip ospf virtualLinks router ip ospf virtualLinks delay ip ospf virtualLinks hello ip ospf virtualLinks retransmit ip ospf virtualLinks dead SON NNN SSN NNR NN SG NNR NN SSN So Se SS Se RONEN NN NN So TROY SR NOR NOR INN SQN Table 6 Command Summary continued 3500 9000 9000 9400 3900 9300 Layer Layer Commands 2 3 ip ospf virtualLinks password JY ip ospf policy summary ip ospf policy detail ip ospf policy define ip ospf policy modify ip ospf policy remove Sy Se ie Re SS SSN ONIN UN SS ip ospf statistics Ch 20 IPX ipx interface display ipx interface define ipx interface modify ipx interface remove ipx interface SAPadvertising ipx interface RIPadvertising ipx route display ipx route secondary ipx route static ipx route remove ipx route flush ipx server display ipx server static ipx server remove ipx server flush VUN RG Se Sg OS OSG OR SS SSN ON NIR NN SONS ON Se SR SS ipx server secondary 60 CHAPTER 2 COMMAND SUMMARY Table 6 Command Summary conti
464. ple 20301 20310 a You can configure the interface to be a seed or nonseed interface Seed interface Initializes seeds the network with your configuration information This information includes the network range and zone name list Nonseed interface Listens for a seed router and then takes the zone and network range information from the first seed interface that it detects After a nonseed interface obtains this information it can participate in AppleTalk routing a Before you define the AppleTalk interface you must define a VLAN and select AppleTalk as a protocol that the VLAN supports a Clients that have not been configured to use a particular zone use the default zone name a You can enter up to 16 zone names per interface Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Interface Index number of the AppleTalk m AppleTalk interface that you want to interface index modify number a fora list of selectable indexes Seed Whether you want to a no Current value Interface configure the interface as an ay yes AppleTalk seed y or nonseed interface n 668 CHAPTER 21 APPLETALK Prompt Description Possible Values Default Start of network range End of network range Default zone name Zone name VLAN interface index Interface down time Start of the network range that is associated with the seed interface Seed interfaces only End of the network
465. ple Network Time Protocol SNTP information Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy snt di Important Considerations a SNTP handles the synchronization of system clocks in the network to the national time standards via distributed time servers a Your system provides the SNTP client a The display has two types of information Configuration information User configurable parameters appear a Servers information Information returned by the server appears if you have defined SNTP servers Otherwise the no Servers are defined message appears Fields in the System SNTP Display Field Description Configuration Information State Pollinterval Tolerance Servers Information Server Mode Version Stratum Poll Delay LastPktRcv SNTP state It is either enabled or disabled Interval for the client to send requests to a specific server Threshold for updating the local system time Server IP address Client s SNTP operating mode This field always displays Unicast Version number of the responding server for example 4 represents version 4 which is suitable for IPv4 IPv6 and OSI The client version number is 3 8 bit integer that indicates the stratum level of the local clock for example a stratum value of 3 indicates a secondary reference via SNTP Maximum interval between successive messages Roundtrip propagation delay from the server s reply Date and time stamp of the last packet
466. pletalk statistics ddp 683 appletalk statistics rtmp 684 appletalk statistics zip 685 appletalk statistics nop 686 PART VII TRAFFIC POLICY 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP Menu Structure 690 qos classifier summary 691 qos classifier detail 692 qos classifier define 694 qos classifier modify 701 qos classifier remove 706 qos control summary 707 qos control detail 708 qos control define 710 qos control modify 718 qos control remove 724 qos Idap display 725 qos ldap enable 726 qos ldap disable 727 qos rsvp summary 728 qos rsvp detail 729 qos rsvp enable 730 qos rsvp disable 732 qos bandwidth display 733 qos bandwidth modify 734 qos excessTagging display 735 qos excessTagging enable 736 qos excessTagging disable 737 qos statistics interval 738 qos statistics receive 739 qos Statistics transmit 741 PART VIII MONITORING 23 EveNT LOG Menu Structure 748 log display 749 log devices 750 log services 752 24 PART IX A ROVING ANALYSIS Menu Structure 756 analyzer display 757 analyzer add 758 analyzer remove 760 analyzer start 761 analyzer stop 763 REFERENCE TECHNICAL SUPPORT Online Technical Services 767 World Wide Web Site 767 3Com Knowledgebase Web Services 767 3Com FIP Site 768 3Com Bulletin Board Service 768 3Com Facts Automated Fax Service 769 Support from Your Network Supplier 769 Support from 3Com 769 Returning Products for Repair 771 INDEX ABOUT THIS GUIDE This Command Re
467. pleted the value is the autonegotiated setting When autonegotiation is disabled the value is the user selected flow control value Actual operating port mode When autonegotiation is completed the value shown is the autonegotiated setting When autonegotiation is disabled the value is the user selected port mode Number of frames received by this port that are not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the FCS check Autonegotiation mode configured for port Possible values are enabled or disabled Current negotiation state Possible values are disabled configuring completed and failed Number of frames discarded because the carrier sense condition was lost while attempting to transmit a frame from this port Number of collisions detected on this port Number of frames that could not be transmitted on this port because the maximum allowed number of collisions was exceeded Number of frames that could not be transmitted on this port because the maximum allowed deferral time was exceeded Number of frames received by this port that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check CHAPTER 5 OuT OF BAND MANAGEMENT Field Description lateCollisions Number of times that a collision was detected on this port ater than 512 bit times into the transmission of a frame lengthErrs Number of frames received by this port that are longer than 1518 bytes or shorter than 64 bytes
468. plies it to all of the ports a The following table explains the forwarding behavior of a port based on its bridge and port STP states Port Participates Port Forwards Bridge STP State Port STP State in STP Frames Disabled Disabled No Yes if link state is up Enabled No Yes if link state is up Removed No Yes if link state is up Enabled Disabled No No Enabled Yes Determined by STP provided that the port link state is up Removed No Yes if link state is up Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Ports Ports for which you want m One or more to control the STP setting valid port numbers a to display a port summary STP state Spanning Tree Protocol a enabled enabled factory state that you assign to Missbied default or current specified ports value removed 290 CHAPTER 10 BRIDGE PORT PARAMETERS bridge port stpCost v 3500 vy 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 Sets the path cost that the Spanning Tree Protocol STP adds to the root cost field in a configuration message that the port receives The system uses this value to determine the path cost to the root through the port The current value is shown in the pathCost field of the bridge port detail display Valid Minimum Abbreviation b po stpc Important Considerations You can use this command to configure the same setting on multiple ports simultaneously When you specify multiple port numbers the system prompt
469. port numbers m all a to display a port summary Port state Value shown in the summary enabled enabled and detail displays reports on line for all enabled ports disabled displayed and off line for all disabled ports displayed Procedure To enable or disable an Ethernet port from the top level of the Administration Console enter ethernet portState At the prompt for example 1 24 a11 2 enter the ports whose port state values you want to set or to display a port summary specify Enter enabled Or disabled for each Ethernet port The port State value shown in the summary and detail displays reports on line for all enabled ports that are displayed and of 1ine for all disabled ports The Port Status LED for each disabled port on the module indicates the disabled status ethernet monitoring 3500 v 9000 9400 v 3900 9300 summary Displays the status of 10 100 Mbps Ethernet ports that are being monitored The display shows the status of port statistics that are being monitored including error count excessive collisions multiple collisions late collisions runts fcsErrs Valid Minimum Abbreviation ems Important Consideration The Ethernet monitoring feature in enabled by default and performs these functions 1 Monitors 10 100Mbps Ethernet ports for excessive collisions multiple collisions late collisions runts and FCS errors Compares these error counters against user defined thresholds Di
470. port summary PACE Whether the PACE feature is m enable disable setting on or off for each of the ports that you selected disable 218 CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET PORTS ethernet pacelnteractiveAccess v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Configures the Ethernet ports on your system to support the PACE Interactive Access feature which ensures reliable timing by preventing excessive Ethernet network jitter the variation in the timing of packet delivery that can cause garbled sound jerky images and delays Valid Minimum Abbreviation e pa Important Considerations a PACE technology is 3Com s method to provide reliable timing optimal LAN bandwidth utilization and data prioritization for time sensitive multimedia and real time applications and data only applications a PACE Interactive Access employs a back off algorithm that enables your system to control traffic flow on a point to point link with an end station When the network experiences congestion the switch holds packets PACE Interactive Access prevents an end station from monopolizing the link Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Port Ports for which you want to set m A range of port the PACE feature numbers m all a to display a port summary PACE Whether the PACE feature is w enable disable setting on or off for each of the ports that you selected disable e
471. port was disabled Sum of all transmit errors that are associated with this port summary report only Average number of frames transmitted per second by this port during the most recent sampling period Sampling periods are 1 second long not configurable Number of frames that were transmitted by this port Number of frames that were discarded because of an internal error during transmission Number of multicast frames that are queued for transmission by a higher level protocol or application including those not transmitted successfully Peak value of ethernetPortByteTransmitRate for this port since the station was last initialized Peak value of ethernetPortFrameTransmitRate for this port since the station was last initialized Number of frames that were lost because transmit queue was full Number of unicast nonmulticast frames that are queued for transmission by a higher level protocol or application including frames not transmitted successfully 156 CHAPTER 5 OuT OF BAND MANAGEMENT management ip interface summary v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 Displays a summary table about the out of band system IP management interface configuration including parameter settings Valid Minimum Abbreviation m ip i sum Fields in the Management IP Interface Summary Display Field Description Index IP address IP routing status RIP status State Subnet mask Type Unique number that identifies the out of b
472. r 9000 16 slot chassis 32 CHAPTER 1 ADMINISTRATION OVERVIEW Figure 1 System Data Channels in the16 slot Chassis 123 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 1213 14 15 16 5 traces each verified to 1 25GHz 5 redundant traces Primary and redundant switch fabric modules Primary interconnect Backup interconnect Management LAN MLAN EME Overview 33 CoreBuilder 9000 Management Features EME Overview You can manage the CoreBuilder 9000 system through a terminal interface through the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP and through the 3Com Transcend Network Control Services The EME is the primary communication mechanism into the chassis and modules You manage other intelligent modules within the chassis through the EME The EME is an SNMP based network management module that manages and controls the 3Com CoreBuilder 9000 chassis and its modules The EME has the following features a Chassis Management Architecture Provides a cost efficient management architecture that a Provides a central point of contact for chassis management a Provides all controller functions as well as EME functions a Intelligent Power Management Manages power use in the chassis by a Preventing newly installed modules from receiving power when there is not enough power available a Allowing you to prioritize t
473. r CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays network link state advertisements LSAs in the link state database Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipo ln Important Consideration a To view link state database information OSPF must be active enabled Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Area ID Area ID in the form Valid area ID 0 0 0 0 factory n n n n where 0 lt n lt 255 default or that corresponds to the OSPF current value area for which you want to view network LSA information Area Mask Subnet mask of OSPF area for Valid area mask 0 0 0 0 factory which you want to view default or network LSA information current value LSID Link State ID interface address Valid IP address 0 0 0 0 factory of the designated router default or current value LSID mask Link State ID bit mask Link State ID bit 0 0 0 0 factory Example 255 0 0 0 mask default or current value Fields in the IP OSPF Link State Data Network Display Field Description Attached routers List of routers that are fully adjacent to the designated router DR also the DR LS Age Time in seconds since the LSA was originated LS Seq Sequence number of the LSA used to detect older duplicate LSAs LSID Interface address in the form of an IP address of the designated router Network mask IP address mask for the network Router ID Originating router ID ip ospf linkStateData v 3500
474. r User Datagram Protocol UDP port range Beginning and end of the TCP or UDP destination port range Beginning and end of the TCP or UDP source port range Actual flows seen on the system with the following data Port a Source IP address source port a Destination IP address destination port a Protocol type a Number of flow cache misses Control number that you assign to the control Name that you assign to the classifier Protocol type if applicable that is associated with the classifier and control 694 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP qos classifier define v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Defines a flow or nonflow classifier Valid Minimum Abbreviation q cl def Important Considerations Classifiers define how the system groups packets so that it can schedule them with the appropriate service level QoS supports flow and nonflow classifiers a Flow classifiers apply to routed IP multicast and IP unicast packets You can define up to 100 flow classifiers Each filter address and port pattern in a flow classifier counts toward the limit a Nonflow classifiers apply to bridged or routed traffic that is associated with a specific protocol IP TCP IP IPX and AppleTalk or to a custom protocol Ethertype or Destination Service Access Point Source Service Access Point DSAP SSAP You can also use them to apply IEEE 802 1p tag values t
475. r disabled macAddress MAC address of this port multiCollisions 3500 3900 and 9000 Layer 3 noRxBuffers oversized 3900 9000 Layer 2 9300 and 9400 paceAccess 3900 and 9000 Layer 2 portLabel portState portType reqFlowControl reqPortMode requestedState runts 3900 9000 Layer 2 9300 and 9400 rxBroadcast 3900 9000 Layer 2 9300 and 9400 Number of frames that have experienced from 2 to 15 consecutive collisions before successful transmission from this port If a frame also experiences a collision on the 15th attempt it is dropped and the excessCollision count is increased by 1 Number of frames that were discarded because no buffer space was available Number of frames received by this port that were longer than 1518 bytes Whether PACE Interactive Access is enabled or disabled for this port User defined label name The maximum length of the string is 32 characters including the null terminator Current software operational state of this port Possible values are on line off line partitioned tx fault and config error The value on line appears when the port is both enabled and connected to a cable The value partitioned appears when the port has been disabled by the ethernet port monitoring feature Specific description of this port s type Values for each port type 10 100BASE T RJ45 10O0BASE FX SC 1000BASE SX SC 1000BASE LX GBIC 1000BASE SX GBIC Bac
476. rations m When the system accepts the new IP address it displays a message like the following Server s IP address xxxxx is added to the DNS database a The system assigns an index number to the new IP address Use this index number to modify or remove this IP address Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Name server IP IP address of the A valid IP address address name server that you want to define v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 ip dns modify For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Modifies a currently defined name server IP address Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip dm Important Considerations a When you enter the command the system displays the list of name server addresses and the index number that is associated with each m The system assigns an index number to the new IP address Use this index number to modify this IP address Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Index Index number of the m A selectable server Name server IP address name server IP address that you want to modify New IP address of the name server that you want to use index number a fora list of selectable server indexes A valid IP address 440 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP ip dns remove v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Deletes a previously defined
477. rding the system discards all IPX packets Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IPX forwarding Whether the system forwards or m disabled disabled state discards IPX packets factory a enabled default or current value 630 CHAPTER 20 IPX v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ipx rip mode For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Selects the Routing Information Protocol RIP mode that is appropriate for your network Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx rim Important Considerations a RIP allows the exchange of routing information on a NetWare network IPX routers use RIP to create and maintain their dynamic routing tables a The system has three RIP modes a Off The system processes no incoming RIP packets and generates no RIP packets of its own a Passive The system processes all incoming RIP packets and responds to RIP requests but it does not broadcast periodic or triggered RIP updates a Active The system processes all incoming RIP packets responds to explicit requests for routing information and broadcasts periodic and triggered RIP updates Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default RIP mode Whether the system a off disabled processes RIP packets wis factory amip default or a active current value ipx rip triggered v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ipx rip triggered 631 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching mod
478. rds packets that are received on the port and does not transmit packets that are forwarded to the port a Learning Similar to listening but the bridge receives packets on the port to learn the location of some of the stations that are located on the port a Forwarding The bridge receives packets on the port and forwards or does not forward them depending on address comparisons with the bridge s source address list Provided that the link state is up this state field indicates forwarding even if STP is disabled for the bridge a Disabled Management has disabled the port or the link state is down Configurable status of STP on a port Provided that bride wide STP is enabled the port STP configuration states function as follows a enabled STP sets the operating state of the port blocking listening etc according to network topology characteristics This is the default configuration for all ports a disabled STP is disabled and the port is disabled The port does not participate in STP decisions frame reception or frame transmission a removed STP is disabled on the port but the port can still receive or transmit frames if its link state is up If bridge wide STP is disabled this port STP setting is meaningless as long as its link state is up the port forwards all frames To configure STP on a port see bridge port stpState in this chapter Number of frames that the bridge port discarde
479. re delivered to the IPX host s RIP and SAP applications Host Dropped Number of IPX packets to or from the IPX hosts s RIP and SAP applications that were dropped Host Tx Number of IPX packets from the IPX host s RIP and SAP applications that were successfully transmitted ipx statistics rip 651 ipx statistics rip For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays IPX RIP Routing Information Protocol statistics v 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 ipx st r 3900 Important Considerations 9300 a The first line in the output the status line indicates whether a IPX forwarding is enabled a RIP is active a SAP is active a RIP Triggered updates are enabled a SAP Triggered updates are enabled a Secondary route server option is enabled Fields in the IPX RIP Statistics Display Field Description RIP Dropped Number of IPX RIP packets that have been dropped RIP Entries Number of routes in the routing table including local routes Routes Aged Number of times the system marked a route entry unreachable because it did not receive an update for that entry during the timeout period RIP Received Number of IPX RIP packets that have been received RIP Requests Number of IPX RIP requests that have been processed RIP Responses Number of IPX RIP responses that have been processed RIP Transmitted Number of IPX RIP packets that have been transmitted Metric Changed Number of times the
480. re is no route to that host a To interrupt the command press Enter Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Host name or Host name or IP address of the A valid hostname 0 0 0 0 IP address destination that you want to or IP address ping 178 CHAPTER 5 OuT OF BAND MANAGEMENT Management IP Ping Example Select menu option ip ping Press Enter key to interrupt PING 158 101 111 50 64 byte packets 64 bytes from 158 101 111 50 icmp_seq 0 64 bytes from 158 101 111 50 icmp_seq 1 64 bytes from 158 101 111 50 icmp_seq 2 158 101 111 50 PING Statistics 3 packets transmitted 3 packets received round trip ms min avg max 16 20 24 Enter host name IP address 0 0 0 0 158 101 111 50 0 packet loss management ip v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 advancedPing management ip advancedPing 179 Tries to reach or ping a host with one or more of the advanced ping options Valid Minimum Abbreviation m ip advancedP Important Considerations a When you specify a host name the host name and its associated IP address must be configured on a network name server Also you must add the IP address on the name server to the list of name server addresses that are associated with the network domain name See the ip dns commands in Chapter 16 for more information The Burst option when enabled overrides the value that is set in the Quiet or Wait option The Burst opt
481. re received for the IPX ions that were dropped were delivered to the IPX ions Number of IPX packets that were transmitted from the PX host s RIP and SAP app ications 654 CHAPTER 20 IPX Field Description Host Tx Discards Number of IPX packets from the IPX host s RIP and SAP applications that were dropped on transmission Host Tx Request Number of IPX packets from the IPX host s RIP and SAP applications to be transmitted NetBIOS Max Hops Number of IPX NetBIOS packets that exceeded the transport control maximum NetBIOS Rx Number of IPX NetBIOS packets that were received NetBIOS Tx Number of IPX NetBIOS packets that were transmitted No Routes Number of IPX packets that were dropped because the PX route is unknown Total Received Number of IPX packets that were received Tx Discards Number of IPX packets that were forwarded but not successfully transmitted Tx MTU Exceeded Number of IPX packets that were forwarded but dropped b ecause the MTU was exceeded ipx statistics interface v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 655 ipx statistics interface For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays IPX interface statistics Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx st i Fields in the IPX Interface Statistics Display Field Description Addr Errors Forwarded Fwd Discards Fwd Received Fwd Transmitted Hdr Errors Hop Count Errors Host In Discards Host Rx Host
482. reBuilder 9000 the commands in this chapter apply only to Layer 3 switching modules 662 CHAPTER 21 APPLETALK Menu Structure The commands that you can use depend on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardware options that are configured for your system The following diagram shows the complete list of commands for all systems See the checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter for whether your system supports the command Top Level Menu system module management ethernet appletalk menu interface menu fddi bridge ip ipx appletalk qos snmp analyzer log script logout disconnect b interface route aarp b zone forwarding checksum SourceSocket ping b statistics summary detail define modify remove statistics route menu display flush aarp menu display remove flush zone menu network zone statistics menu ddp rtmp zip nbp appletalk interface summary v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays summary information for all AppleTalk interfaces Valid Minimum Abbreviation ap i su Fields in the AppleTalk Interface Summary Display Field Description Address AppleTalk interface address which is based on the network range and the netw
483. received that are excess nonFlowExcessPeak Highest number of nonflow excess bytes that have been received up to this point 740 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP Field Description nonFlowReserved nonFlowResvPeak port Number of conforming non flow classifier bytes that have been received Peak count The highest number of conforming nonflow classifier bytes that have been received up to this point If you display statistics for multiple ports the port number that is associated with the statistics qos statistics transmit v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays QoS transmit statistics Valid Minimum Abbreviation qst Important Considerations a The transmit statistics help you track bandwidth utilization and packet loss by physical port and queue reserved high best and low a The RSVP and network control packets go out on the reserved queue a When you mark any packet conforming or excess aS loss eligible the packet is dropped if the transmit queue for which it is destined is over its threshold A packet that is marked loss eligible falls into one of the two highLoss Statistic categories a If the transmit queue is not over its threshold the packet is sent and counted as a highLossSent packet a f the transmit queue is over its threshold it is dropped and counted as a highLossDropped packet a f you do not mark
484. rent nonflow classifier unicast multicast or cast type all a Nonflow classifiers unicast multicast broadcast or all 702 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP Prompt Description Possible Values Default Protocol type IP or other protocol a Flow classifiers IP Current type if applicable that protocol type with protocol is associated with the TCP UDP or all type flow or nonflow Sid oo dastier a Nonflow classifiers TCP IP IPX AppleTalk any or custom a fora list of selectable values Source IP For flow classifiers only Up to 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 address IP address of the source factory default wildcard match or current value Source IP For flow classifiers only Up to four portions 0 0 0 0 address mask source IP address mask 255 255 255 255 factory or how many portions of default the IP address you want wildcard to match Example match or 255 255 255 0 matches current the first three portions value of the specified IP address Destination IP For flow classifiers only Up to 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 address destination IP address factory default or current value Destination IP For flow classifiers only Up to four portions 0 0 0 0 address mask destination IP address 255 255 255 255 factory mask or how many default or portions of the IP current address you want to value match Start andend For flow classifiers only 0 65535 0 and of TCP or UDP start and end of the TC
485. rently the dead interval defined virtual link 7 all a fora list of selectable indexes Dead Maximum duration in 1 65535 seconds 40 factory interval seconds that neighbor routers default or wait for a Hello packet before current value they determine that the transmitting router is inactive ip ospf virtualLinks v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 password ip ospf virtualLinks password 589 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Sets password security for a virtual link Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipovp Important Considerations a Set the virtual link password to none to remove a previously assigned password a The password must be consistent throughout the autonomous system Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Virtual link Index number of the virtual link m Valid IP for which you want to specify a interface index password number a all a fora list of selectable indexes Virtual link Password for the specified Up to eight ASCII none factory password virtual link characters default or current value 590 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf policy Displays summary information about OSPF routing policies summary Valid Minimum Abbreviation J 3500 ip o po s v 9000 9400 Important Considerations a Your system has one unified IP routing table Routing policies allow 3900 you to control the flow of information among the network the 93
486. rface multiple AppleTalk interfaces or all 9300 AppleTalk interfaces a If only one AppleTalk interface exists on the system the interface is immediately removed after you enter this command a The system prompts you to select an interface number only if more than one AppleTalk interface exists on the system Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Interface Index number of one or more m One or more interfaces that you want to valid AppleTalk remove interface index numbers a fora list of selectable indexes a all 670 CHAPTER 21 APPLETALK appletalk interface v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Statistics For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays statistics for each AppleTalk interface You can specify a single AppleTalk interface multiple interfaces or all interfaces If you have multiple interfaces and you do not specify one of them the system prompts you to specify the appropriate interface index number Valid Minimum Abbreviation ap i st Important Consideration a The display includes statistics for the AppleTalk Address Resolution Protocol AARP Datagram Delivery Protocol DDP Routing Table Maintenance Protocol RTMP Zone Information Protocol ZIP Name Binding Protocol NBP and AppleTalk Echo Protocol AEP Fields in the AppleTalk Interface Statistics Display Field Description aarpInProbes aarplnReqs aarplnResp aarpOutProbes aa
487. rface index number Reference the DVMRP tunnel summary display prior to deleting a tunnel If you try to remove an IP interface in your system and you have a DVMRP tunnel defined on that interface the system warns you with an error message Before you can remove the IP interface you must remove the DVMRP tunnel When you remove a tunnel the system does not dynamically re order remaining tunnels in the DVMRP tunnel summary display For example if you had three tunnels with tunnel index numbers 1 2 and 3 and you then removed tunnel 2 the display lists the remaining tunnels with their original tunnel index numbers 1 and 3 in this example The system assigns tunnel index 2 to the next new tunnel that you define After 2 is used the system can assign tunnel index 4 for the next new tunnel and so on Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Multicast Index number of the a Avalid DVMRP tunnel tunnel index multicast tunnel that you index number want to remove from the system a fora list of selectable tunnel index numbers 514 CHAPTER 18 IP MULTICAST ip multicast dvmrp tunnels address v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Modifies the remote IP address that is defined in an existing DVMRP tunnel Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipmdta Important Consideration a The remote address that you specify must represent a routing interface on a
488. rface numbers RIP policy Sourcenode 6 byte MAC address of the a Anodeaddressin All address router that can forward the format packets to the network A XX XX XX XX XX XX node address of all zeroes All 00 00 00 00 00 00 means that the route is connected directly to the router Policy action Whether this router accepts or m Accept Accept rejects a route that matches Rei a Reject the policy 634 CHAPTER 20 IPX Prompt Description Possible Values Default Metric Increase or decrease a route a 0 16 0 does not adjustment metric by a value that you change the f add specify Specify an integer and metric an operand to a Subtract adjust the metric value This multiply parameter is valid only if the ply Policy Action is set to Accept divide a modulo remainder of integer division Weight Metric value of this policy This 1 16 1 parameter specifies the order of precedence for policies that match the same route A higher value takes precedence over a lower value IPX RIP Policy Define Example Select menu option ipx rip policy define Enter policy type import export import export Enter route origin dir static rip all all rip Enter route address 0x1 Oxlfffffffelall all all Select IP interfaces 2 all all Enter the source node address all Enter the policy action accept reject accept accept Enter the metric adjustment 0 16 0 Enter t
489. rfaces Index number of the interfaces m One or more Previous for which you want to set the RIP selectable entry if cost interface applicable indexes 7 all a fora list of selectable interface indexes RIP cost Selected RIP cost for the interface 1 15 1 factory default or current value ip rip poisonReverse v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Enables or disables RIP Poison Reverse mode on the system Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip ri poi Important Considerations a Your system always implements Split Horizon a scheme that aims to avoid the problems that are associated with reverse route updates that is the updates that are sent to a neighboring router that include the routes that are learned from that router The scheme omits the routes that are learned from one neighbor in the updates that are sent to that neighbor the reverse routes Poison reverse works with Split Horizon as follows a When you enable Poison Reverse for use with the Split Horizon scheme the default the system advertises reverse routes in updates but sets the metrics to 16 infinity Setting the metric to infinity breaks the loop immediately when two routers have routes that point to each other a When you disable Poison Reverse for the Split Horizon scheme reverse routes are simply not advertised Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interfaces In
490. ric adjustment 0 16 0 Enter administrative weight 1 16 1 ip rip policy modify v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Modifies an existing route policy for RIP Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip ri pol m Important Considerations a Route policies are classified as follows mport policies import routing information from what RIP learns from a router neighbor to the unified routing table You can also import routing information from Open Shortest Path First OSPF E amp xport policies send information from the routing table to RIP and RIP routers which controls what is going out on the wire to the RIP domain You can also export from the routing table to OSPF a The system assigns an index number to each policy that you define This index takes into account all route policies set on the system RIP and OSPF so the assigned index can be higher than you may expect Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Policy type Type of policy import import m export Origin Whether or not the route is a a RIP protocols static route for export policies OSPF export only m all Source address IP address of the source router a A valid IP 0 0 0 0 address a 0 0 0 0 L all Route address Route that is associated with the m A valid IP 0 0 0 0 source network address a 0 0 0 0 L all Route subnet Subnet mask that is associated
491. ric is not defined the router does not advertise a default route into the attached stub area a By default the stub default metric is not defined Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Stub default Stub default metric value to 1 65535 Current stub metric define for the area border default metric router Higher numbers are slower ip ospf stubDefaultMetric remove 573 ip ospf For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only stubDefaultMetric Disables the stub default metric on an OSPF area border router remove Valid Minimum Abbreviation v 3500 ip o stu r Y 9000 9400 Important Considerations m The system removes the current stub default metric value immediately 3900 after you enter the command 9300 a The stub default metric value determines if the router generates the default route into the stub areas of the network This value applies to area border routers ABRs that have attached stub areas If a stub default metric is not defined the router does not advertise a default route into the attached stub area a By default the stub default metric is not defined 574 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf virtualLinks v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 summary For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays summary information about a virtual link Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o v su Options Prompt Description Possible Values
492. ric remove 540 ip ospf interface summary 541 ip ospf interface detail 542 ip ospf interface statistics 544 ip ospf interface mode 548 ip ospf interface priority 549 ip ospf interface arealD 550 ip ospf interface cost 551 ip ospf interface delay 552 ip ospf interface hello 553 ip ospf interface retransmit 554 ip ospf interface dead 555 ip ospf interface password 556 ip ospf linkStateData databaseSummary 557 ip ospf linkStateData router 558 ip ospf linkStateData network 560 ip ospf linkStateData summary 561 ip ospf linkStateData external 563 ip ospf neighbors display 564 ip ospf neighbors add 565 ip ospf neighbors remove 566 ip ospf routerID 567 ip ospf partition display 569 ip ospf partition modify 570 ip ospf stubDefaultMetric display 571 ip ospf stubDefaultMetric define 572 ip ospf stubDefaultMetric remove 573 ip ospf virtualLinks summary 574 ip ospf virtualLinks detail 575 ip ospf virtualLinks statistics 577 ip ospf virtualLinks define 581 ip ospf virtualLinks remove 582 ip ospf virtualLinks arealD 583 ip ospf virtualLinks router 584 ip ospf virtualLinks delay 585 ip ospf virtualLinks hello 586 ip ospf virtualLinks retransmit 587 ip ospf virtualLinks dead 588 ip ospf virtualLinks password 589 ip ospf policy summary 590 ip ospf policy detail 591 ip ospf policy define 593 ip ospf policy modify 598 ip ospf policy remove 602 ip ospf statistics 603 20 IPX Menu Structure 606 ipx interface display 607 ipx interface
493. ring connection management emCount Number of link errors that this port detected emRejectCount Number of times that the link error monitor rejected the link erAlarm Link error rate estimate at which a link connection generates an alarm erCondition Whether the lerEstimate is less than or equal to lerAlarm erCutoff Link error rate estimate at which a link connection is broken erEstimate Average link error rate It ranges from 10 4 to 10 15 and is reported as the absolute value of the exponent of the link error estimate ineState Line state of this port myType Type of port connector on the port A B S M neighborType Type of port connector at the other end of the physical connection A B S M pcmState Current Physical Connection Management PCM state defined in SMT pcWithhold Reason for withholding the connection pmdcClass Type of PMD entity that is associated with this port port Ports numbers that are assigned to the FDDI module The portLabel FDDI port numbers change depending on the configuration of your system 32 character string of a user defined name for the port 242 CHAPTER 8 FIBER DISTRIBUTED DATA INTERFACE FDDI fddi portlerAlarm Sets the link error rate LER value at which a link connection generates an alarm V 3500 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 fd po lerA 3900 Important Considerations 9300 a The lerAlarm value is expressed as the absolute value of the exponent such as 1 x 10 19 A health
494. riority queue Rate limit Percentage of traffic allowed on the high priority queue See the Implementation Guide for your system for more information about the rate limit option Traffic classes Priority values assigned to each queue The IEEE 802 1p standard specifies eight possible values 0 7 each of which is intended to signify a certain kind of traffic bridge cos modify 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 2 switching modules only Changes how the eight priority values 0 7 are assigned to each of the two hardware queues and changes the optional rate limit on queue 1 the high priority queue Valid Minimum Abbreviation bem Important Considerations m Because you cannot configure a rate limit for queue 2 the Administration Console prompts you to enter a rate limit only if you select queue 1 a When you assign priority values to a given queue the system automatically assigns the remaining priority values to the other queue a f CoS is disabled you can still modify the queue settings however they do not affect traffic until CoS is enabled Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Queue Number of the device a 1 index queue whose settings you 2 want to modify a fora list of selectable indexes Rate limit Throughput limit that Whole numbers 100 factory default applies only to queue 1 from 1 100 or current value and is expressed a
495. rity levels for event logging on the Administration Console VZ 3500 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 log de 3900 Important Considerations 9300 a You can set the console to log events for one or more of the four severity levels a To specify multiple severity levels separate the levels with a comma for example warning config Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Levels for Event logging severity level for error console console output warning config info all for a list of valid severity levels Selected Whether selected event y yes y levels logging for console output is n no enabled or disabled Log Devices Examples 3500 Select menu option log devices Select levels for console error warning config info all Selectable values error warning config info Select levels for console error warning config info all all Enable th selected levels n y yl y log devices 751 To disable the config and info severity levels Select menu option log devices Select levels for console error warning config info all config info Enable the selected levels n y y n The display now indicates that the error and warning severity levels remain enabled and the config and info levels are disabled 752 CHAPTER 23 EVENT LOG v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 log services Enables the logging of messages that pertain to the following services a System level
496. rk numbers v 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation Y 9000 ee 9400 Important Considerations 3900 a AppleTalk routers use the Zone Information Protocol ZIP to map 9300 network numbers to Zones a Each AppleTalk router maintains a Zone Information Table ZIT which lists the zone to network mapping information 678 CHAPTER 21 APPLETALK appletalk zone For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only display zone Displays the AppleTalk Zone table indexed by zones v 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation v 9000 ap zdz 9400 Important Considerations 3900 a AppleTalk routers use the Zone Information Protocol ZIP to map 9300 network numbers to Zones a Each AppleTalk router maintains a Zone Information Table ZIT which lists the zone to network mapping information appletalk forwarding 679 appletalk forwarding For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Enables and disables AppleTalk Data Delivery Protocol DDP forwarding V 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 ae 3900 Options 9300 Prompt Description Possible Values Default Forwarding Whether to enable or disable enabled disabled state AppleTalk forwarding aiesbled Sa efault or current value 680 CHAPTER 21 APPLETALK appletalk checksum v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Enables Data Delivery Protocol DDP checksum error detection for the AppleTalk pr
497. rp statistics For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays detailed information about the specified interfaces or all v 3500 interfaces v 9000 9400 Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip ar status 3900 9300 Important Considerations Your system tracks the number of times that a particular Address Resolution Protocol ARP event occurs a Ifa port that has multiple IP interfaces associated with it receives an ARP frame that is discarded because of an address mismatch the inReceives and inDiscards statistics are incremented for the first interface of all the interfaces that are associated with the port ma The system supports baselining for ARP statistics Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interface Index number of the m One or more 1 IP interface from selectable interface which to select ARP indexes statistics all a a fora list of selectable interface indexes Fields in the IP ARP Statistics Display Field Description inDiscards Received ARP frames that have been discarded due to one of the following reasons a Frame had a source address that did not match any directly connected IP interface that was associated with the port on which it was received a Frame contained an invalid header a Frame was not an ARP request or an ARP reply inReceived ARP frames requests replies and discards that were received on an IP interface Field Description inReplies
498. rpOutReqs aarpOutResp ddpForwRequests ddpInChecksumErrors ddpInLocals ddplnReceives ddpInTooLongs ddpInTooShorts ddpNoProtoHandlers echolnReplies Number of AARP probes that have been received Number of AARP requests that have been received Number of AARP responses that have been received Number of AARP probes that have been sent Number of AARP requests that have been sent Number of AARP responses that have been sent Total number of packets for which an attempt was made to forward them to their final destination Number of DDP datagrams that were dropped because of a checksum error Number of DDP datagrams for which this entity was the final DDP destination Total number of packets that have been received including those with errors Number of input DDP datagrams that have been dropped because they exceeded the maximum DDP datagram size Number of input DDP datagrams that have been dropped because the received data length was less than the data ength that was specified in the DDP header or the received data length was less than the length of the expected DDP header Number of DDP datagrams without protocol handlers Number of echo replies that have been received appletalk interface statistics 671 Field Description echolnRequests Number of echo requests that have been received echoOutReplies Number of echo replies that have been sent echoOutRequests Number of echo requests that have been s
499. rred to as baud rate in the following messages After you select the new terminal speed rate the system displays the following message The baud rate will not change until the system is rebooted To have your change take effect without rebooting perform this command via the serial port Are you sure you want to change the baud rate y n a f you respond y yes the rate is not changed until you reboot a f you respond n no the rate does not change and the display returns to the previous menu system serialPort v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 modemSpeed system serialPort modemSpeed 95 Sets the port speed for the modem port to match your external modem baud setting Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy sem Important Considerations a After you use this command you must establish a connection between your current Console session and the modem port before you dial in See system serialPort configModem later in this chapter for details a Be sure that the baud setting of the modem port matches that of your external modem a The system immediately changes the modem port baud setting Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Modem Signal speed for the m 19200 9600 speed connection a 9600 a 4800 a 2400 m 1200 96 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system serialPort 3500 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 baudRate Sets the baud rate of your system serial port Valid Minimu
500. rrent route was learned Not address value applicable to the following a Import policies a Export polices that define direct as the Origin Protocol Route address Route IP address Not applicable Any valid IP Current to export policies that define address value direct as the Origin Protocol Route subnet Subnet mask for the route for Any valid mask Current mask example 255 255 0 0 Not value applicable to export policies that define direct as the Origin Protocol IP interfaces Index number of the interface for m Valid IP Current which you want to define a interface index value routing policy Only applicable all when you specify direct asthe origin protocol when defining an m fora list of export policy selectable indexes Policy action Accept or reject the route accept Current value reject 600 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH FIRST OSPF Prompt Description Possible Values Default Metric For accept conditions only 0 16 with or Current adjustment increases or decreases the without options value converted route metric by the specified value Options add subtract multiply metric by value divide metric by value modulo remainder of division operation as integer ASE type Type of external metric used in Type 1 Current the AS external advertisement Type 2 value ASE defined as m Lyp a Type 1 External metric is directly comparable without translation to the li
501. rt based VLAN PX II PX 802 2 PX 802 3 PX 802 2 SNAP Prompt Description Possible Values Default Layer 3 Whether you want to define w y yes y address Layer 3 information for the IP configuration VLAN n no Mi Since this is the last release to support Layer 3 address information in IP VLANs avoid this mechanism and instead define multiple IP interfaces for the VLAN with ip interface define commanas Layer 3 Fields IP network address and Any valid IP address and subnet mask you can use to network address mask set up flood domains for and subnet mask IP VLAN overlapping IP VLAN only subnetworks This is the last release to support Layer 3 address information in IP VLANs Per port Whether you want to ay yes y tagging configure IEEE 802 1Q VLAN n no tagging You are prompted to answer for each port that you selected Tag type Whether you want to none none configure no tagging or IEEE 802 10 802 1Q tagging the VID for each port VLAN name Unique user defined name Up to 32 ASCII that identifies members of the characters or for VEAN VLAN If you use spaces put other than LY Peco py apace the default Procedure quotation marks around the VLAN name Enter the VLAN identification VID number in the range 2 4094 Select the bridge ports Select one or more protocol suites If you select an IP protocol suite proceed with step 4 If you did not choose an IP protocol suite for this in
502. rt discarded because of an unknown VLAN ID or because the port was in a non forwarding Spanning Tree state Number of frames that this port discarded due to insufficient resource availability buffer space Number of frames that this port discarded because they contained either invalid group source addresses or source addresses that belong to this bridge indicates network loops Number of frames that this port discarded because they contained either invalid MAC source addresses or source addresses that belong to this bridge Number of frames that this port discarded because the destination address is known on the same network segment as the source address and thus the frame does not need to be bridged Number of frames that this port discarded because they contained source addresses that were statically configured on another bridge port Not available at this release 286 CHAPTER 10 BRIDGE PORT PARAMETERS Field Description SRHopLimit 3500 and 9000 L3 state stp txAllFilters 3500 and 9000 L3 txBlockedDiscs 3500 and 9000 L3 Not available at this release Current operating state of the port a Blocking The bridge continues to run STP on the port but the bridge does not receive packets from the port learn locations of station addresses from it or forward packets onto it a Listening The bridge continues to run STP and to transmit configuration messages on the port but it disca
503. rt of the command string or you can supply the information at the prompt a When you specify a host name the host name and its associated IP address must be configured on a network name server Also you must add the IP address on the name server to the list of name server addresses that are associated with the network domain name See ip dns domainName earlier in this chapter for more information a To track the route of an IP packet traceRoute launches User Datagram Protocol UDP probe packets with a small TTL value and then listens for an ICMP Time Exceeded reply from a gateway Probes start with a small TTL of 1 and increase the value by 1 until one of the following events occurs a The system receives a Port Unreachable message which indicates that the packet reached the host a The probe exceeds the maximum number of hops default 30 a At each TTL setting the system launches three UDP probe packets and the traceRoute display shows a line with the TTL value the address of the gateway and the round trip time of each probe If a probe answers from different gateways the traceRoute feature prints the address of each responding system If no response occurs in the 3 second timeout interval traceRoute displays an asterisk for that probe Other characters that can be displayed include the following a n Network is unreachable a 8 Host is unreachable a P Protocol is unreachable a F Fragmentation
504. rtising the service You enter a Novell service type when you define a SAP policy Some of the most common service types are 0x0004 0x0005 0x0007 0x0009 Ox000A 0x0047 0x0098 File Server Job Server Print Server Archive Server Job Queue Advertising Print Server NetWare Access Server For a complete list of Novell service types consult your Novell documentation Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Policy Type Type of the policy Import a Import Import apply the policy to received services or Export apply the a Export policy to advertised services Service Origin of the service to which w Static All Origin this policy applies This ma SAP parameter is valid only if the policy Type is set to Export a All ipx sap policy define 643 Prompt Description Possible Values Default Service Type Number for the type of service m 0x1 Oxfffff All that the server performs a All Enter up to 6 hex characters For example 0x4 file server For more details consult your Novell documentation Server Name of the server providing m Server name All Name the services a All IPX Address IPX network address of the a 0x0 Oxfffffffe All network where the server a All resides Node 6 byte MAC address of the a Anode addressin All Address router that can forward the format packets to the network A XX XX XX XX XX XX node address of all zeroes All 00 00 00 00 00 00 z means that the route is co
505. rtition v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 modify For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Modifies the maximum memory that OSPF can allocate Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o pam Important Considerations m There are three choices for memory allocation a Have the system intelligently determine the maximum OSPF memory partition size partition size 1 This is the default a Have OSPF be part of system memory growing as needed and without limit partition size 0 a Configure the maximum OSPF memory partition size manually partition size 4096 lt maximum available memory gt a You typically do not have to modify the OSPF memory allocation However if the softRestarts statistic shown by the ip ospf statistics option begins to climb it means that OSPF is thrashing for memory and you must increase the maximum memory For a complete description of OSPF memory allocation see the OSPF Memory Partition section in the OSPF chapter of the Implementation Guide a The partition size option that you enter takes effect after a system reboot Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default New Maximum memory size in m 4096 to 1 factory partition bytes to allocate to OSPF lt maximum default or maximum system operations available size gt current OSPF size partition size a O to specify system memory partition a 1 to specify a size based on amount of memory and the
506. rtual router on the same routing device a In auto learn mode systems learn the IP addresses to associate with the specified VRID a IN IP address mode the system prompts you to select the interface index from a list a After a reboot the address learning process restarts for each virtual router in auto learn address mode a When you define a Primary virtual router selecting auto learn as the address mode automatically adds all IP addresses that are associated with the selected VLAN to the primary virtual router Advertisement Intervals When you define a Primary router on a VLAN that contains a single interface the single interface is automatically chosen as the primary address when you select 1P address as the Address mode When you define a Backup virtual router selecting autto learn as the address mode configures the Backup router to learn the IP addresses that are associated with the virtual router by means of VRRP advertisements from the Primary router The Primary router must be up for backup routers to auto learn the addresses that are associated with the specified VRID When you define Backup virtual routers the auto learn address mode option enables auto address learning for the specified VRID If a new interface is added to the VLAN on a primary virtual router the new IP address is sent out in VRRP advertisements so that the Backup routers in auto learn mode can learn the new address without having to manually add t
507. rules for tagged frames a The CoreBuilder 3500 tagged frame ingress rules vary for 1 2 0 2 0 0 and 3 0 0 For more information see the CoreBuilder 3500 Implementation Guide a The CoreBuilder 9000 tagged frame ingress rules vary for 2 0 0 to 3 0 0 For more information see the CoreBuilder 9000 Implementation Guide Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN aware Whether all ports are tagging a allPorts allPorts mode aware or only tagged ports are taggedVlanPorts tagging aware Reboot Since changing the mode a no y yes system requires you to reboot whether y yes you want to reboot the system or cancel the request Bridge VLAN Aware Mode Example 3500 Select menu option bridge vlan vlanAwareMode VLAN aware mode taggedVlanPorts allPorts allPorts taggedVLANPorts Changing the VLAN aware mode will reboot the system continue n y yl y 368 CHAPTER 14 VIRTUAL LANs VLANs oe ecee gt gt PACKET FILTERS This chapter provides guidelines and other key information about how to administer bridge packet filters in your system including the following tasks a Listing and displaying packet filters a Creating deleting editing and loading packet filters a Assigning and unassigning packet filters a Managing port groups Independently configurable packet filtering is provided for the packet processing paths on each bridge port of the system After you create a p
508. runk remove 318 12 MULTIPOINT LINK AGGREGATION MPLA Menu Structure 321 bridge mpla summary 322 bridge mpla detail 323 bridge mpla mode 324 bridge mpla peerMacAddress 326 13 RESILIENT LINKS Menu Structure 327 bridge link summary 328 bridge link detail 329 bridge link define 330 bridge link linkState 332 bridge link activePort 333 bridge link modify 334 bridge link remove 336 14 ViRTUAL LANs VLANS Menu Structure 337 bridge vlan summary 338 bridge vlan detail 341 bridge vlan define 3500 9000 Layer 3 345 bridge vlan define 3900 9300 9400 9000 Layer 2 352 bridge vlan modify 3500 9000 Layer 3 355 bridge vlan modify 3900 9300 9400 9000 Layer 2 360 bridge vlan remove 363 bridge vlan mode 364 bridge vlan stpMode 365 bridge vlan vianAwareMode 366 15 PACKET FILTERS Menu Structure 370 bridge packetFilter list 371 bridge packetFilter display 372 bridge packetFilter create portGroup 373 bridge packetFilter create custom 374 bridge packetFilter delete 376 bridge packetFilter edit 377 bridge packetFilter load 379 bridge packetFilter assign 382 bridge packetFilter unassign 384 bridge packetFilter portGroup list 386 bridge packetFilter portGroup display 387 bridge packetFilter portGroup create 388 bridge packetFilter portGroup delete 390 bridge packetFilter portGroup addPort 391 bridge packetFilter portGroup removePort 392 PART VI ROUTING PROTOCOLS 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP Menu Structure 39
509. rxErrs Actual flow control setting When autonegotiation is completed the value is the autonegotiated setting When autonegotiation is disabled the value is the user selected flow control value Actual operating port mode When autonegotiation is completed the values shown are the autonegotiated settings When autonegotiation is disabled the value is the user selected port mode Autonegotiation mode configured for port Possible values are enable or disable Current negotiation state Possible values are disabled configuring completed and failed Boolean value that indicates the current state of the physical link for this port either enabled or disabled MAC address of this port Number of frames that were discarded because no buffer space was available User defined label name The maximum length of the string is 32 characters including the null terminator Current software operational state of this port Possible values are on line off line partitioned tx fault and config error The value on line appears when the port is both enabled and connected to a cable The value partitioned appears when the port has been disabled by the ethernet port monitoring feature Specific description of this port s type Values for each port type 10 100BASE T RJ45 100BASE FX SC LOOOBASE SX SC LOOOBASE LX GBIC 1000BASE SX GBIC Backplane 9000 Configurable parameter that sets the flow control option
510. ry 3 anagement ip interface define 3 anagement ip interface modify management ip interface remove 3 anagement ip route display 3 anagement ip route static 3 anagement ip route remove management ip route flush management ip route default 3 anagement ip route noDefault 3 anagement ip route findRoute 3 anagement ip arp display management ip arp static 3 anagement ip arp remove 3 anagement ip arp flushAll LA SS SN IN Se NS SS SS Table 6 Command Summary continued 3500 9000 9000 9400 3900 9300 Layer Layer Commands 2 3 management ip arp flushDynamic management ip rip display management ip rip mode management ip rip statistics management ip ping management ip advancedPing management ip traceRoute management ip advancedTraceRoute SN Se SNe SS SS management ip statistics Ch 6 SNMP snmp display S S snmp community snmp trap display snmp trap addModify snmp trap remove NOS eS Krk NN Se SN SON NOR OSS SN SSN NSS NS snmp trap flush snmp trap smtProxyTraps snmp rmonConfiguration AS Ny Sr ON SOR OOS SSN NONE NSS snmp writeDisable Part IV Physical Port Parameters Ch 7 Ethernet Ports ethernet summary S S S S S S ethernet detail ethernet autoNegotiation S i JY J J J S S S S S S 48 CHAPTER 2 COMMAND SUMMARY Table 6 Command Summary continued 3500 9000 9000 9400 3900 9300 Layer Lay
511. ry 339 GVRP is based on IEEE 802 1Q and allows for dynamic configuration of port based VLANs GVRP can help you simplify the management of VLAN configurations in larger networks Use the command bridge port gvrpState to explicitly enable GVRP on the participating bridge ports and use the command bridge gvrpState to enable the bridge GVRP state for the entire system The bridge GVRP state enables you to control GVRP on the system without losing the per port GVRP state By default the GVRP state for the entire system iS disabled and the GVRP state for each bridge port is disabled The system prompts you for a VLAN interface index number before it displays the summary information Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN interface Index numbers One or more selectable VLAN 1 if you index of the VLAN interface index numbers have only interfaces for one VLAN A m all which you want summary a for a list of selectable information indexes Fields in the Bridge VLAN Summary Display Field Description Index System assigned index number that identifies a VLAN of the identified origin Statistics appear in the display for the VLAN that you specify Name Character string of from o through 32 bytes that identifies the VLAN The default VLAN always uses the name Default 340 CHAPTER 14 VIRTUAL LANs VLANs Field Description Origin Ports Type VLAN mode VID VLAN Aware Mode 3500 and 9000 La
512. s and command strings 40 entering abbreviated command strings 41 entering values 41 navigating 42 selecting options 40 MIBs 768 MLAN channel 31 mode operating defining for Ethernet trunk 310 315 displaying for trunks 305 329 modem external configuring 99 100 modes VLAN definition 340 343 displaying 338 selecting allOpen or allClosed 364 selecting Ignore STP 365 modifying QoS bandwidth 734 QoS classifiers 701 QoS controls 718 VLANs Layer 2 devices 360 VLANs Layer 3 devices 355 358 module diagnostic messages 129 displaying date 137 module status information 69 monitoring ports Ethernet 221 222 MultiPoint Link Aggregation MPLA 321 mode 324 Peer Switch Interface State 322 N name server DNS 436 to 440 names for QoS classifiers 695 718 for QoS controls 710 trunk 316 VLAN 349 navigating menus 42 NBP Name Binding Protocol 686 neighbor notification and LLC Service 239 neighbors OSPF 564 to 566 network supplier support 769 network troubleshooting 755 none for rate limit 710 712 715 nonflow classifiers cast types 695 701 702 defining 694 predefined 691 protocol types 695 701 702 removing 706 specifying IEEE 802 1p tags 697 703 705 numbering ports Ethernet 204 207 numbers for QoS classifiers 695 718 for QoS controls 710 NV data restoring 110 O online technical services 767 origin VLAN 340 343 OSPF Open Shortest Path First areas 531 to 537 default route metric
513. s Number of ticks which is an estimate of time in seconds that the packet takes to reach the network segment There are 18 21 ticks ina second 618 CHAPTER 20 IPX ipx route static v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Defines a static route Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx ro st Important Considerations a Before you define static routes on the system define at least one IPX interface See ipx interface define earlier in this chapter for more details a Static routes remain in the routing table until you remove them or until you remove the corresponding interface a If an interface goes down routes are temporarily removed from the routing table until the interface comes back up a Static routes take precedence over dynamically learned routes to the same destination You can have a maximum of 32 static routes Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IPX network 4 byte IPX address of the 0x1 Oxfffffffe address interface The address must be unique within the network Hops Number of hops or number of 1 15 1 routers that must be crossed to reach the network segment Interface nterface number to associate a Aselectable number with the route Depends on IPX interface Node address number of configured IPX interfaces 6 byte MAC address of the router that can forward packets to the segment A node address of all z
514. s a percentage Class of IEEE 802 1p priority values 0 7 For queue 1 values service tags that you want to assign to all 4 5 6 7 factory the selected queue Use default or current commas to separate a fora list of values multiple values possible values For queue 2 values 0 1 2 3 factory default or current values 270 CHAPTER 9 BRIDGE WIDE PARAMETERS bridge multicast igmp For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 2 switching modules only summary Displays a summary of parameters related to the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP which conserves network bandwidth by 3500 directing IP multicast application traffic only to the ports that require it v 9000 vV 9400 Valid Minimum Abbreviation b mu i su V 3900 Y Y 9300 Important Consideration a For the CoreBuilder 3500 system and CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 modules IGMP commands exist under the ip multicast igmp menu Fields in the Bridge Multicast IGMP Summary Display Field Description igmp snooping Whether the IGMP snooping function is enabled or disabled for the entire system igmp querying Whether the system is enabled to operate as an IGMP querier IGMP snooping must be enabled for the querying function to operate igmp query source IP Source IP address used by the system or module in query address messages if it is elected as the IGMP querier bridge multicast igmp 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 snoopMode For CoreBuilder 9000 Appl
515. s enabled a For the CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 module it also indicates whether Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP router discovery is enabled on the system a For the CoreBuilder 3500 IP interface options such as ICMP router discovery appear under ip interface detail earlier in this chapter and are set on a per interface basis The second status line indicates the number of entries in the ARP cache Fields in the IP ARP Display Field Description Circuit Circuit identifier Hardware address MAC address that is mapped to the IP address I F Index number of the associated interface IP address IP address of the interface Type Type of entry static or dynamic v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 ip arp static For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Defines a static Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache entry on the system Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip ars Important Considerations a For the CoreBuilder 3500 you can define up to 128 static ARP entries a For the other platforms you can define up to 64 entries Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Index number of the interface for which you want to define a static ARP entry Interface index IP address to use in the entry IP address Hardware address to use in the entry MAC address IP ARP Static Example Select interfac Enter IP address Enter MAC address a A s
516. s rapidly a enabled as possible The system displays a period upon receiving an ICMP echo replay packet Use this display to determine how many packets are being dropped during the burst This is unique to the Burst option Quiet mode How much packet information the disabled disabled system displays after a ping When Z ae system aisolays enabled information about the number of packets that the system sent and received any loss of packets and the average time that it took a packet to travel to and from the host When disabled the system displays more detailed status information about each ICMP echo request packet Time between Number of seconds that the system 1 20 1 sending each waits before it sends out successive seconds packet wait ICMP echo request packets Set this option to a high value if network traffic is heavy and you do not want to add to the network traffic with pings in fast succession ICMP Forces the source address of the a no y sourceAddress ICMP packets to be something other than the IP address of the interface Y yes from which the packet originated You can use this option if you have more than one IP interface defined Interface index Index number of the ICMP source IP Currently O the address that you want to use defined router interfaces picks the and their best indexes interface management ip advancedPing 181 Management IP Advanced Ping Example Select menu option ip advancedPing En
517. s that were statically configured through the Administration Console or through the Web management software Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default GVRP state Whether the system uses GYRP enable disabled for the entire bridge disable bridge cos enable 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 2 switching modules only Enables or disables IEEE 802 1p Class of Service CoS on the bridge Use this feature to help prioritize business critical or time sensitive traffic in your network Valid Minimum Abbreviation bce Important Considerations a The opportunity to be processed in the high priority queue exists only for IEEE 802 1Q tagged packets provided that CoS is enabled with priority values that match the high priority queue configuration Non tagged packets are always processed in the low priority queue along with tagged packets with priority values that match the low priority queue configuration a COS is enabled by default and initial queue assignments conform with IEEE 802 1p recommendations that is priorities O 3 are assigned to the low priority queue and priorities 4 7 are assigned to the high priority queue To modify queue assignments see bridge cos modify later in this chapter a If you disable CoS all tagged and non tagged traffic is processed through the low priority queue and its buffers The high priority queue and buffers are shut off
518. s the Spanning Tree Protocol STP on your system Valid Minimum Abbreviation b sp stps Important Considerations The state of STP is configured in two places the entire bridge this command and individual bridge ports see Chapter 10 The combination of the states determines the forwarding behavior of each port as shown in the following table Port Participates Port Forwards Bridge STP State Port STP State in STP Frames Disabled Disabled No Yes if link state is up Enabled No Yes if link state is up Removed No Yes if link state is up Enabled Disabled No No Enabled Yes Determined by STP provided that the link state Is up Removed No Yes if link state is up After you enable STP the system takes several seconds to process the command before the Administration Console menu reappears Although bridge wide STP is initially disabled default values exist for the following STP bridge parameters priority max age hello time forward delay and group address These values do not function until STP is enabled CoreBuilder 3500 and CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 modules include an ignore STP mode option See Chapter 14 in this guide or see your system mplementation Guide for more information Bridge wide STP must be disabled on a CoreBuilder 9400 switch if you configure it as a MultiPoint Link Aggregation MPLA core switch For more information about MPLA see the CoreBuilder 9400 Implementation Guide
519. s whose protocol is unknown Fields in the UDP Statistics Display Field Description inDatagrams Number of UDP packets that were received and addressed to the router or broadcast address inErrors Number of received UDP packets that contain header errors noPorts Number of UDP packets that were received but addressed to an unsupported UDP port outDatagrams Number of UDP packets that the router sent Fields in the ICMP Statistics Display Field Description inAddrMaskReps Number of ICMP address mask reply frames that were received inAddrMasks Number of ICMP address mask request packets that were received inDestUnreach Number of ICMP destination unreachable packets that were received inErrors Number of received ICMP packets that contain header errors inEchoReps Number of ICMP echo reply packets that were received inEchos Number of ICMP echo request packets that were received inParmProbs Number of ICMP parameter problem frames that were received inRedirects Number of ICMP redirect packets that were received inSrcQuenchs Number of ICMP source quench packets that were received 484 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP Field Description inTimeExcds Number of ICMP time exceeded packets that were received inTimeStamps Number of ICMP time stamp request packets that were received inTimeStampsReps Number of ICMP time stamp reply packets messages Number of ICMP packets that were received outAddrMaskReps Number
520. s you to choose the setting and then applies it to all of the ports A larger path cost value makes the LAN that is reached through the port more likely to be low in the Spanning Tree topology The lower the LAN is in the topology the less through traffic it carries For this reason you may want to assign a large path cost to a LAN that has a lower bandwidth or to one on which you want to minimize traffic If your configuration is successful the previous menu appears If the configuration is not successful the system notifies you that your changes failed and you can try to reenter your changes See the EEE 802 1D MAC Bridges standard for recommended path cost settings Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Bridge ports Bridge ports for which you One or more valid want to set the path cost bridge port numbers STP cost Configurable bridge port STP 1 65535 m 100 parameter that specifies the Ethernet cost to add to the total path 10 Fast cost when this port is the root z Ethernet port a 1 Gigabit Ethernet v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 bridge port stpPriority Sets the Spanning Tree Protocol STP bridge port priority This value influences the choice of port when the bridge has two or more ports that have the same path cost and that are connected to the same LAN which creates a loop STP selects the bridge port with the lowest priority and places the remaining ports in the blocking
521. sables a port that reaches an error threshold Reports the reason that a port is disabled to the Administration Console MIB databases and SNMP traps Reenables the port after an initial backoff time interval Continues monitoring 222 CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET PORTS ethernet monitoring Enables or disables port monitoring on 10 100 Mbps Ethernet ports on mode the switch 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation Y 9000 emm 9400 f Important Considerations Y 3900 m You can use this command to configure the same setting on multiple 9300 ports simultaneously When you specify multiple port numbers the system prompts you to choose the setting and then applies it to all of the ports m You can determine when a monitored port is in error and has been disabled by these port statistics a The status value shown in the ethernet monitoring summary display reports partitioned a The portstate value shown in the ethernet summary and ethernet detail displays reports partitioned a The linkStatus value shown in the ethernet summary and ethernet detail displays reports disabled When the monitoring feature reenables the port port statistics resume normal values m The Ethernet monitoring feature in enabled by default and performs these functions 1 Monitors 10 100Mbps Ethernet ports for excessive collisions multiple collisions late collisions runts and FCS errors Compares these error counters against user defined thresholds Disables a port tha
522. ses excess packets to be dropped only at the edge that is when the traffic has not yet passed through any network device that has already performed policing for that flow Options are edge always Or never Total resv Admission control policy RSVP begins to refuse reservations bandwidth when the requested bandwidth on an output link exceeds the total reservable bandwidth qos rsvp detail v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays detailed RSVP information when RSVP is enabled Valid Minimum Abbreviation q r de Important Consideration a If no flows are installed on the system or on a Layer 3 module the command displays only the summary information Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Level of RSVP If RSVP flows are available to report all information the amount of RSVP information eG when flows you want are installed a P Fields in the QoS RSVP Detail Display Field Description Excess loss eligible Whether excess packets are loss eligible Excess service Service level for excess policed traffic best or low Per resv bandwidth Largest reservation that RSVP attempts to install Policing option When to drop excess packets Edge policing causes excess packets to be dropped only at the edge that is when the traffic has not yet passed through any network device that has already performed policing for that flow
523. sible Values Default Host IP IP address of the host on which Any valid IP address Previous IP address the NV data file resides address that was used NV control Location of the NV data file a filename Previous nv file control file that a full path was used Do you wish Confirmation of the operation m n no y to You may not want to reboot m y yes continue because resetting nonvolatile data may leave the system in an inconsistent state so the system reboots after each reset Procedure To restore the NV data from the top level of the Administration Console enter system nvData restore The system prompts you to enter information for restoring the NV data that was saved to a file system nvData restore 111 Press Return at any prompt to accept the current or default value in brackets 2 Enter the IP address of the host on which the NV data file resides 3 If you are using TFP and your implementation requires a full path name enter the full NV data file path and filename Some implementations allow you to specify only the file name the system uses the default TFTP directory When you restore system NV data the software compares the system IDs module types and module revisions if applicable between the saved configuration and the system on which you are restoring the image m f the system finds an exact match between system IDs module types and module revisions the system displays a reminder message a
524. sing the per port GVRP state By default the GVRP state for the entire system is disabled and the GVRP state for each bridge port is disabled The system prompts you for a VLAN interface index number before it displays the detail information Either you can use network based IP VLANs by supplying Layer 3 address information when you configure a VLAN for IP or you create the IP VLAN and then define multiple IP interfaces per VLAN See Chapter 16 Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN interface Index numbers of a One or more 1 if you index the VLAN interfaces selectable VLAN have only for which you want interface index one VLAN detailed information numbers E all a fora list of selectable indexes Fields in the Bridge VLAN Detail Display Field Description gnore STP mode Whether a VLAN can ignore STP blocked ports and let 3500 and 9000 Layer 3 routing traffic pass through Possible values enabled and disabled ndex System assigned index number that identifies a VLAN Statistics appear for the VLAN that you specify Layer 3 addresses Information that is used to set up flood domains for 3500 and 9000 Layer 3 overlapping IP VLAN subnetworks network based VLANs Name Character string 0 through 32 bytes that identifies the VLAN The default VLAN always uses the name Default Field 343 bridge vlan detail Description Origin Ports Port Protocol 3500 and 9000 Layer 3
525. ssfully opened the system displays the header information that corresponds to the file name that you entered Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Host IP IP address of the host on which Any valid IP address Previous IP address the NV data file resides address used NV control Location of the NV data file a filename System NV data file file a full path system nvData reset v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 system nvData reset 113 Resets the system values to the factory defaults You can then reconfigure the system from its original settings Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy nv rese Important Considerations a You are not permitted to perform an NV data reset from a Telnet session An NV data Reset over Telnet clears all of your configurable information including the IP interface of the box and prevents you from managing the system without a direct console connection a f you enter n no when you are prompted to confirm the reset the system displays the previous menu CAUTION As a precaution consider saving the existing NV data to a file before you reset all values to the factory defaults Resetting NV data means that NV memory is set back to the factory defaults except for the serial port baud rate modem baud rate and system boot parameters Before you proceed be sure that you want to reset your NV data Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Do you wish Confirmation o
526. ssifiers 0x0 Oxfffe a a yP 0x0 Oxff nonflow f pe Note You cannot enter classifiers only 0 xaa Oxaa 0x0 a SSAP hex value of 0x0 Oxff Note You cannot enter Oxaa Oxaa 802 1p tag For nonflow a Any combination of classifiers only IEEE priority tag values in the 802 1p tag values range of 0 7 m all a fora list of possible values Flow Classifier Procedure To accept the default or current values that appear in brackets press Enter Enter a classifier number in the range of from 1 through 399 Flow classifiers 20 and 23 are predefined for FTP and Telnet Enter the classifier name a unique name of up to 32 characters Enter a cast type For a flow classifier the options are unicast multicast and all Enter the IP protocol type of TCP UDP or all Enter the source IP address The default value is 0 0 0 0 Enter the source IP address mask The default value is 0 0 0 0 Enter the destination IP address Enter the destination IP address mask Enter the start of the TCP or UDP source port range in the range of from 0 through 65535 The default is 0 Enter the end of the TCP or UDP source port range using a value of up to 65535 698 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP 12 13 The value that you enter for the start of the range determines the default for the end of the range The end value must be greater than or equal to the start value To avoid severely affecting applicati
527. ssociated index is available for future use Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Policy index Index number that is associated One or more aa with the policy that you want to selectable delete policy indexes a all a fora list of selectable policy indexes 472 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP ip rip statistics v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays general RIP statistics Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip rip s Fields in the IP RIP Statistics Display Field Description queries Number of queries routeChanges Number of route changes v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 ip ping ip ping 473 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Tries to reach or ping a specified destination using the default ping options Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip p Important Considerations This tool is useful for network testing performance measurement and management It uses the ICMP echo facility to send Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP echo request packets to the IP destination that you specify If you need to change the default ping options use the ip advancedPing option The command description for ip advancedPing lists the default ping options You can either supply the host name or IP address as part of the command string or you can supply the information at the prompt
528. st group address of packets coming from the subnetwork listed to its left Index number of the interface that receives incoming IP multicast group traffic Either an I or a T precedes the index number An I indicates a regular IP multicast interface A T indicates that the interface also operates as a DVMRP tunnel Index numbers of the interfaces to which traffic from the inVif is being forwarded Physical port that corresponds to the interface that is listed in the inVits field Physical ports that correspond to the interfaces that are listed in the outVifs field 528 v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip multicast traceRoute CHAPTER 18 IP MULTICAST For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Provides a method for tracing the path that an IP multicast packet takes from a source to a particular receiver Unlike unicast IP traceroute multicast traceroute works in the reverse and requires a special packet type and implementation in routing devices Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipmt Important Considerations a This command traces the path backwards from a specific receiving device to a specific source device When you use this command the receiver is assumed to be the system to which you are connected a This command produces a display that shows IP addresses of the interfaces that soan from your system back to the source that you specify The display also shows the number of hops back to those int
529. st of valid paths Bridge Packet Filter Assign Examples 3500 Select menu option bridge packetFilter assign Select filter 1 1 Select bridge port s 1 12 all 4 6 all Select path s txA txM rxA rxM rxI all txA To specify multiple ports use the hyphen to indicate ranges and commas to indicate individual non contiguous ports To specify multiple paths separate the paths with commas Select menu option bridge packetFilter assign Select filter 1 1 Select bridge port s 1 6 all 1 3 6 Select path s txA txM rxA rxM rxI all txA rxA rxI 384 bridge packetFilter v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 unassign CHAPTER 15 PACKET FILTERS For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Unassigns selected packet filter from one or more ports Valid Minimum Abbreviation b pau Important Considerations a The packet filter that you want to unassign must have been assigned to at least one port a Possible values for filters n depend on the number of created or loaded filters on the system a Possible values for bridge ports n depend on the number of existing bridge ports on the system a After you unassign the filter ports and paths are added to the list of possible values which are listed in the Options table Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Select filter Identifier id a 1 n Current valid Select bridge ports Sele
530. stop Select bridge port 3 4 3 764 CHAPTER 24 ROVING ANALYSIS REFERENCE Appendix A Technical Support eete Aa e e Pec TECHNICAL SUPPORT 3Com provides easy access to technical support information through a variety of services This appendix describes these services Information contained in this appendix is correct at time of publication For the most recent information 3Com recommends that you access the 3Com Corporation World Wide Web site Online Technical Services World Wide Web Site 3Com Knowledgebase Web Services 3Com offers worldwide product support 24 hours a day 7 days a week through the following online systems a World Wide Web site a 3Com Knowledgebase Web Services a 3Com FIP site a 3Com Bulletin Board Service 3Com BBS a 3Com Facts Automated Fax Service To access the latest networking information on the 3Com Corporation World Wide Web site enter this URL into your Internet browser http www 3com com This service provides access to online support information such as technical documentation and software as well as support options that range from technical education to maintenance and professional services This interactive tool contains technical product information compiled by 3Com expert technical engineers around the globe Located on the World Wide Web at http knowledgebase 3com com this service gives all 3Com customers and partners complementary r
531. stration Console Overview The Administration Console software is installed at the factory in flash memory on the system processor Because this software boots automatically from flash memory when you power on your system the system is immediately ready for use in your network However you may need to a Configure certain parameters before the system can operate effectively in your networking environment a Connect to the Administration Console if you have a CoreBuilder 9000 a View important MAC port bridge virtual LAN VLAN and IP Statistics while you manage your system 30 CHAPTER 1 ADMINISTRATION OVERVIEW gt gt You use the Administration Console software to configure your system parameters or on the CoreBuilder 9000 to configure your module parameters and display statistics and counters For more complete network management you can use an external application such as 3Com s Transcend Network Control Services tool suite On the CoreBuilder 3500 CoreBuilder 9000 and CoreBuilder 9400 and on the SuperStack Il Switch 3900 and Switch 9300 you can also configure parameters and view statistics using the Web Management suite of HTML based applications See the Web Management User Guide for your system for additional information CoreBuilder 9000 System Management Overview The CoreBuilder 9000 comes in a 7 slot 8 slot or 16 slot chassis in which you install switch fabric modules and interface mod
532. successful packet reassemblies rtDiscards Number of packets that were discarded due to system resource errors unkProtos Number of packets whose protocol is unknown Fields in the Management UDP Statistics Display Field Description inDatagrams Number of UDP packets that were received and addressed to the router or broadcast address inErrors Number of received UDP or ICMP packets that contain header errors noPorts Number of UDP packets that were received but addressed to an unsupported UDP port outDatagrams Number of UDP packets that were sent by the router Fields in the Management ICMP Statistics Display Field Description inAddrMaskReps Number of ICMP address mask reply frames that were received inAddrMasks Number of ICMP address mask request packets that were received inDestUnreach Number of ICMP destination unreachable packets that were received inEchoReps Number of ICMP echo reply packets that were received inEchos Number of ICMP echo request packets that were received inParmProbs Number of ICMP parameter problem frames that were received inRedirects Number of ICMP redirect packets that were received inSrcQuenchs Number of ICMP source quench packets that were received inTimeExcds Number of ICMP time exceeded packets that were received 188 CHAPTER 5 OuT OF BAND MANAGEMENT Field Description inTimeStamps Number of ICMP time stamp request packets that were received inTimeStampsReps Num
533. system displays statistical summaries or other information that results from your use of the menus not the way that the system displays the menus themselves a Each time that the screen output reaches the designated screen height the system prompts you to press a key to display more information Set the screen height to infinite 0 if you do not want the system to display this prompt At o however the screen output can scroll beyond the screen depending on your screen size a Most terminal screens are 24 lines high Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default New screen New screen height in lines a 20 200 24 height a O to receive no prompts Default Default screen height for ay yes y value future Administration Console a iNo sessions system console security display 77 system console Displays a summary of trusted IP client information security display Valid Minimum Abbreviation J 3500 sy co se di 9000 TEN 9400 Important Consideration a f you do not have any trusted IP clients configured this command Y 3900 displays only the first two fields v 9300 Bax ee Fields in the System Console Security Display Field Description Trusted client access Whether the trusted IP client feature is enabled or only disabled Deny message Text of the current message that is sent to a user who is not a trusted client Index Index number that is associated with the trusted IP client Trusted IP address IP address of the
534. t txinternalErrs txMcastsOnly 3900 9000 Layer 2 9300 and 9400 txMulticasts txPeakByteRate txPeakFrameRate txQOverflows txUnicasts vendorName 3500 Number of frames that were discarded because of an internal error during transmission Number of multicast frames transmitted by this port Number of multicast frames that were queued for transmission from this port by a higher level protocol or application including frames not transmitted successfully Peak value of ethernetPortByteTransmitRate for this port since the station was last initialized Peak value of ethernetPortFrameTransmitRate for this port since the station was last initialized Number of frames lost because transmit queue was full Number of unicast nonmulticast frames that are queued for transmission by a higher level protocol or application including frames not transmitted successfully Vendor name for a GBIC module Other modules display n a 212 CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET PORTS ethernet Enables or disables autonegotiation of port attributes such as duplex autoNegotiation mode and port speed on ports that support autonegotiation J 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation Y 9000 ea vV 9400 f Important Considerations Y 3900 m You can use this command to configure the same setting on multiple 9300 ports simultaneously When you specify multiple port numbers the system prompts you to choose the setting and then applies it to all of the ports a
535. t 13 which is the module s backplane port Protocol suites for the VLAN VLANs that are associated with router port IP interfaces always have IP as the protocol type The default VLAN always uses the protocol type unspecified Number of received broadcast bytes Number of received broadcast frames Number of received multicast bytes Number of received multicast frames Number of received unicast bytes Number of received unicast frames 344 CHAPTER 14 VIRTUAL LANs VLANs Field Description Tag type Whether tagging is set to none or 802 10 IEEE 3500 and 9000 Layer 3 802 1Q tagging txBcastBytes Number of transmitted broadcast bytes 3500 and 9000 Layer 3 txBcastFrames Number of transmitted broadcast frames 3500 and 9000 Layer 3 txMcastBytes Number of transmitted multicast bytes 3500 and 9000 Layer 3 txMcastFrames Number of transmitted multicast frames 3500 and 9000 Layer 3 Type VLAN Mode VID VLAN Aware Mode Layer 3 only Either allOpen or allClosed VLANs in allOpen mode share a single address table for all configured VLANs In allClosed mode each VLAN has its own unique address table Standard bridging rules apply based on the table addresses that are assigned to the specific VLAN Router port IP interfaces require allClosed mode Unique user defined integer VLAN ID that identifies this VLAN It is used by management operations You can assign or modify a VID that is associated with a
536. t group all a for a list of ports Bridge Packet Filter Port Group Remove Port Examples Select menu option bridge packetFilter portGroup remove Select port group 1 2 2 2 Select bridge port s 1 6 all 6 Displaying port group 2 shows that port 6 is removed Select menu option bridge packetFilter portGroup display Select port group 1 2 all 2 Port Group 2 Sales Port 2 Port 5 Chapter 16 Chapter 17 Chapter 18 Chapter 19 Chapter 20 Chapter 21 ROUTING PROTOCOLS Internet Protocol IP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP IP Multicast Open Shortest Path First OSPF IPX AppleTalk oft ts i gt INTERNET PROTOCOL IP To route packets using the Internet Protocol IP you a Establish an IP routing interface a Decide which IP options and routing protocols you want to use a Enable IP routing An IP routing interface defines the relationship between an IP virtual LAN VLAN and the subnetworks in the IP network Each routing IP VLAN interface is associated with one VLAN that supports IP The system has one interface defined for each subnet that is directly connected to it You can also choose between two different routing models when you establish an IP routing interface a VLAN based routing Because bridging is faster in normal circumstances the system first tries to determine if it can bridge the frame before routing it a Router port based ro
537. t ports Part IV Physical Port Displaying statistics for and labelling Ethernet ports Fafameters Administering Fiber Distributed Data Interface FDDI ports Finding Specific Information in This Guide 21 If you are looking for information about Turn to Configuring bridge parameters such as bridge display Part V Bridging agingTime stpState and Class of Service Parameters Managing trunks Configuring bridge port parameters such as listing addresses setting the port priority and controlling the Spanning Tree Protocol STP on a bridge Displaying MultiPoint Link Aggregation MPLA parameters Configuring resilient links Configuring virtual LANs VLANs Configuring packet filters Configuring IP interfaces and IP protocol parameters Part VI Routing Protocols Configuring Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP parameters Configuring IP multicast routing and filtering Configuring Open Shortest Path First OSPF routing Configuring IPX routing Co iguring AppleTalk routing Configuring Quality of Service QoS classifiers controls Part VII Traffic Policy Resource Reservation Protocol RSVP bandwidth and excess tagging Viewing statistics Administering the event log Part VIII Monitoring Administering roving analysis Technical support Part IX Reference Quickly locating information on tasks and topics Index 22 ABOUT THIS GUIDE Command Information Sample platform list
538. t reaches an error threshold Reports the reason that a port is disabled to the Administration Console MIB databases and SNMP traps Reenables the port after an initial backoff time interval Continues monitoring oe tte PE E d gt FIBER DISTRIBUTED DATA INTERFACE FDDI Fiber Distributed Data Interface FDDI is a standards based solution that provides fast and reliable data transfer on a local area network This chapter provides guidelines and other key information about how to configure FDDI parameters in your system For more information about implementing FDDI in your network see the Implementation Guide for your system Menu Structure The commands that you can use depend on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardware options that are configured for your system The following diagram shows the complete list of commands for all systems See the checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter for whether your system supports the command Top Level Menu fddi menu station menu system station display module path connectPolicy management gt mac tNotify ethernet port statusReporting fddi stationMode bridge _path menu ip display ipx tvxLowerBound appletalk tmaxLowerBound qos maxTreq snmp analyzer mac Monu log summary script detail logout rameErrorThreshold disconnect notCopie
539. t tunnels between the same two end points interfaces 510 CHAPTER 18 IP MULTICAST Fields in the IP Multicast DVMRP Tunnels Summary Display Field Description Index Local address Remote address Metric TTL State Tunnel index number which is different from the routing interface index number that is shown under Index in other displays IP address of the local interface that serves as one of two multicast tunnel end points IP address of the remote interface a different system a different subnetwork that serves as the other multicast tunnel end point DVMRP cost of the tunnel The system assigns a value of 1 when you define the tunnel but you can modify that value at any time see ip multicast dvmrp tunnels metric This value can be different from the metric that you assigned to the interface itself see ip multicast dvmrp interface metric Time to live TTL threshold of the tunnel The system assigns a value of 1 when you define the tunnel but you can modify that value at any time see ip multicast dvmrp tunnels threshold This value can be different from the TTL threshold that you assigned to the interface itself see ip multicast igmp interface TTL Role that the interface in the multicast delivery tree For possible entries and definitions see ip multicast dvmrp interface summary earlier in this chapter ip multicast dvmrp tunnels define v 3500 v 9000 94
540. t were copied into receive buffers by this port Number of frames that were discarded because of an internal error during reception Number of multicast frames received by this port Number of multicast frames that were delivered to a higher level protocol or application by this port Peak value of ethernetPortByteReceiveRate for this port since the station was last initialized Peak value of ethernetPortFrameReceiveRate for this port since the station was last initialized Number of unicast nonmulticast frames that were delivered by this port to a higher level protocol or application Number of frames that have experienced only one collision before successful transmission from this port on the second attempt Module slot and port number Number of frames that were queued for transmission from this port by a higher level protocol or application including frames not transmitted successfully Average number of bytes that were transmitted per second by this port during the most recent sampling period Number of bytes that were transmitted by this port including framing characters Number of transmitted frames that were discarded because the port was disabled Field Description txFrameRate Average number of frames that were transmitted per second by this port during the most recent sampling period Sampling periods are 1 second long and not configurable txFrames Number of frames that were transmitted by this por
541. t which port is the anchor port You must use the anchor port number to display a port summary for a trunk Fields in the Bridge Port Summary Display Field Description fwdTransitions Number of times that the port has entered the forwarding state since you enabled STP or rebooted the system This value is useful for determining the relative stability of the topology gvrpState Whether GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GARP is 3500 9000 L3 enabled or disabled on the port For GVRP to function on the port you must enable it on the port as well as the entire bridge To configure GVRP on a port see bridge port gvrpState later in this chapter To configure GVRP on the bridge see bridge gvrpState in Chapter 9 linkState State of the link up or down that is whether it is available for communication portld Port identification which includes the port priority value first 2 digits after Ox and the logical port number last 2 digits Both are shown as hexidecimal values Field Description portNumber Logical index number that the system assigns to the bridge port which may not correspond with the physical port number depending on your system configuration For example when you define a trunk only the anchor port receives a portNumber As you add and remove logical ports portNumbers are reassigned so that they remain consecutive rxDiscards Total number of frames received on the bridge port t
542. tail save baseline menu display set requestedState serialPort menu terminalSpeed modemSpeed baudRate serialPortMode configModem enableModem time menu dateTime timezone dst nvData menu save restore examine sntp menu display define modify remove state polllnterval tolerance timeOut interval In addition this chapter describes the script and logout options from the top level menu system display v 3500 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 system display 69 Generates a system configuration display that includes software and hardware revision numbers module status information and warning messages for certain system conditions Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy d Important Consideration a A message appears in the display if any module fails a diagnostic test at start up Fields in the System Display Field Description Diagnostics Whether a module has passed or failed diagnostics Memory size AP FP Memory capacities of the system processors Flash and Buffer POV Power on verification SysBoot Boot software revision ExtDiags Extended diagnostics version number Part number Each module s 3Com part identification number Product number Each module s 3Com 3C product identification number Rev Unique number assigned to the hardware build by 3Com Serial number Each module s unique serial number Slot number Slot position of each hardware module System ID Uniqu
543. ter ID Originating router ID RouteTag Not used by OSPF these 32 bits may be used to communicate other information between boundary routers Tag contents are defined by applications Type a Type 1 normal link state metric a Type 2 metric is larger than any local link state path 564 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf neighbors v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 display For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays information about currently defined neighbors in an OSPF area Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipond Fields in the IP OSPF Neighbors Display Field Description Flags Neighbor identification flags a D Dynamic neighbor a S Static neighbor BDR Backup designated router a DR Designated router Example S BDR D DR isa static neighboring backup designated router and a dynamic neighboring designated router Indx nterface index that corresponds to the interface to which a neighbor belongs Neighbor Addr nterface address of neighbor Pri Neighbor s OSPF router priority ReqQ Number of LSAs being requested from neighbor Router ID Neighbor s OSPF router ID RxQ Number of LSAs in local retransmit queue to the neighbor State Neighbor s adjacency Down No recent data received from neighbor connection is down a Attempt Only used on nonbroadcast networks No recent data received from neighbor will attempt to contact a Init H
544. ter host IP address 0 0 0 0 158 101 112 56 Enter number of ICMP request packets 1 9999 3 Enter packet size bytes 28 4096 64 Enter Burst Transmit Ping mode disabled enabled disabled Enter Quiet mode disabled enabled disabled Enter time sec waits between sending each packet 1 20 1 2 Configure ICMP sourceAddress n y yl Index Interface address 0 Best interfac default 1 158101 117 251 2 158 101 10 1 Select interface index 0 2 0 1 Press Enter key to interrupt PING 158 101 112 56 from 158 101 117 151 64 byte packets 64 bytes from 158 101 112 56 icmp_seq 0 time 26 ms 64 bytes from 158 101 112 56 icmp_seq l time 18 ms 64 bytes from 158 101 112 56 icmp_seq 2 time 18 ms 158 101 112 56 PING Statistics 3 packets transmitted 3 packets received 0 packet loss round trip ms min avg max 18 21 26 182 CHAPTER 5 OuT OF BAND MANAGEMENT management ip v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 traceRoute Traces a route to a destination using the default traceRoute options Valid Minimum Abbreviation m ip t Important Considerations TraceRoute information includes all of the nodes in the network through which a packet passes to get from its origin to its destination It uses the IP time to live TTL field in User Datagram Protocol UDP probe packets to elicit an Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP Time Exceeded message from each gateway to a
545. terface proceed to step 5 350 CHAPTER 14 VIRTUAL LANs VLANs 4 Specify whether you want to specify Layer 3 address information n or y The default is y Specify n if possible and instead define multiple IP interfaces for this VLAN using ip interface define commands See Chapter 16 If you still want to specify Layer 3 address information for an IP VLAN a Enter y for Layer 3 addressing b Enter the Layer 3 network address c Enter the Layer 3 subnet mask To accept the default or current value in brackets press Return or Enter 5 Specify whether you want per port tagging n or y The default is y 6 If you specified per port tagging enter the tag type for the indicated port none Or 802 10 If you have defined more than one port you are prompted again for a tag type for each port Enter the VLAN name Bridge VLAN Define Example 9000 Layer 3 This example shows the steps necessary to define a protocol based VLAN for IPX 802 3 on a Layer 3 switching module In this example only the backplane port port 13 of the module has IEEE 802 1Q tagging the front panel ports in this VLAN are not tagged Because you have tagged the module s backplane port you must also tag the corresponding switch fabric module port of the switch fabric module for that VLAN Use the EME to connect to the switch fabric module and configure the VLAN CB9000 slot2 1 12 E FEN TX L3 bridge vlan define Enter VID 2 4094 5 5
546. terval defined virtual link 7 all a fora list of selectable indexes Hello packet Interval in seconds at which 1 65535 seconds 10 factory interval the area border router default or transmits Hello packets current value ip ospf virtualLinks retransmit 587 ip ospf virtualLinks For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only retransmit Sets the virtual link retransmit interval in seconds V 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation v 9000 ip o v ret 9400 Options 3900 9300 Prompt Description Possible Values Default Virtual link Index number of the virtual link m Index number for which you want to specify of a currently the retransmit interval defined virtual link rT all a fora list of selectable indexes LSA Interval in seconds at which 1 65535 seconds 50 factory retransmit the area border router default or time retransmits LSAs over the current value virtual link 588 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf virtualLinks v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 dead For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Sets the virtual link dead interval in seconds Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o v dea Important Consideration Set the dead interval to the same value for all routers on the network Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Virtual link Index number of the virtual link m Index number for which you want to specify of a cur
547. tgrp name rejdiffportgrp pushDPGM pushSPGM and pushLiteral 1 0x00000000 ne bridge packetFilter create portGroup v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 bridge packetFilter create portGroup 373 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Creates the portGroup rejdiffportgroup standard hardware filter Valid Minimum Abbreviation b pa c p Important Considerations a The portGroup rejdiffportgroup packet filter rejects a frame if the destination and source ports are not in the same group a Creating a hardware filter means that the code for the filter is copied from firmware into non volatile memory a To verify that the filter has been created use the bridge packetFilter list command To see the contents of the portGroup filter use the bridge PacketFilter display command a The system only creates the packet filter definition You must still assign ports and masks to port groups as described for bridge packetFilter portGroup create later in this chapter and assign the standard filter to ports and filtering paths as described for bridge packetFilter assign later in this chapter a At present portGroup is the only filter supported in hardware Bridge Packet Filter Create Port Group Example This example shows the user creating the portGroup filter Select menu option bridge packetFilter create portgroup Packet filter 1 stored 374 CHAPTER 15 PACKET FILTERS bri
548. that you want to assign 1 32 A group mask to the port group a fora list of masks Select port Name of the port group that Up to 32 group name you want to create alphanumeric characters Use quotation marks around any string with embedded a for name criteria spaces Use to enter an empty string Select Number of the bridge port that 1 n bridge port you want to add to the new all group a fora list of valid ports bridge packetFilter portGroup create 389 Bridge Packet Filter Port Group Create Example 3500 Select menu option bridge packetFilter portGroup create Select port group mask 1 32 15 Select port group name Marketing Port Group 1 Marketing has been created Select bridge port s 1 6 all 1 3 4 Select menu option bridge packetFilter portGroup create Select port group mask 1 14 16 32 32 Select port group name Sales Port Group 2 Sales has been created 390 CHAPTER 15 PACKET FILTERS bridge packetFilter portGroup delete v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Deletes a selected port group Valid Minimum Abbreviation b pa p de Important Considerations a When you delete port groups from the system those groups are no longer available for use in packet filters a When you delete a port group the remaining port group IDs are automatically renumbered to maintain consecu
549. that you want to set m p primary E a ADAS port has primary and w s secondary secondary paths m all a A SAS port has only a primary path tvxLowerBound Minimum time value of 0 4294967295 2500 fddiMAC tvxValue that any microseconds MAC that is configured onto this path uses fddi path tmaxLowerBound v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Specifies the minimum time value in microseconds of fddiMAC T Max that any MAC that is configured in this path uses This value specifies the boundary for how high T Req the requested token rotation time can be set Valid Minimum Abbreviation fd pa tm Important Consideration a You can use this command to configure the same setting on multiple ports simultaneously When you specify multiple port numbers the system prompts you to choose the setting and then applies it to all of the ports Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Ports One or more FDDI station a Any of the ports for which you want to available set the tmaxLowerBound ports on the installed FDDI modules m all Path Path that you want to set m p primary a A DAS port has primary s secondary and secondary paths all a A SAS port has only a primary path tmaxLowerBound Minimum time value of 0 4294967295 16500 fddiMAC T Max that any microseconds MAC that is configured onto this path uses 232 CHAPTER 8 FIBER DISTRIBUTED DATA INTERFACE FDDI fddi path maxTreq v 3500 vy 9000 9400
550. the output link a value of from o through 100 with 50 as the default Enter the policing option edge always Or never with edge as the default Enter the service level for excess policed traffic best or low with low as the default Specify whether excess packets are loss eligible yes or no with no as the default 732 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP qos rsvp disable For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Disables RSVP on the system v 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 qx di 3900 Important Considerations 9300 a By default RSVP is disabled a This command does not verify that RSVP has been disabled qos bandwidth v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 display For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays the link bandwidth as the ratio of bandwidth that is allocated to high priority traffic versus best effort traffic Link bandwidth is the total link bandwidth less the bandwidth that RSVP and network control traffic use Valid Minimum Abbreviation qbd Important Consideration a By default 75 percent of bandwidth is allocated to high priority traffic 734 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP qos bandwidth v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 modify For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Sets how to weigh the high priority and best effort transmit queues and sets RSVP bandwidth for th
551. the VLAN Considerations for information all about the list of ports a fora list of selectable ports Per port Whether you want to configure y yes y tagging 802 1Q VLAN tagging You are a no prompted to answer for each port that you selected Tag type Whether you want no tagging or m none none IEEE 802 1Q tagging the VID For a port shared by another 80210 VLAN verify that the specified tag type is not in conflict with the port s tag type in another VLAN VLAN name Unique user defined name that Up to 32 ASCII identifies members of the VLAN characters or for VLANs if ether than you use spaces put quotation spaces the default Procedure marks around the VLAN name Press Return or Enter to accept the default or existing values that appear in brackets Enter the VLAN identification VID number Enter one or more port numbers To assign all ports to the VLAN enter all 3 Configure the per port tagging 354 CHAPTER 14 VIRTUAL LANS VLANs 4 Enter the tag type for each port in the VLAN 5 Enter the VLAN name Bridge VLAN Define Example 9000 Layer 2 This example shows a port based VLAN that includes tagged front panel ports and a tagged backplane port port 21 These ports are tagged because they overlap with ports that belong to other VLANs Because the front panel ports are tagged any attached devices must be IEEE 802 1Q enabled Because the backplane port is tagged the corresp
552. the bits set in the subnet mask for the specified IP address management ip route display 161 Fields in the Management IP Route Display Field Description Destination Gateway Metric Status Subnet mask IP address of the destination network subnetwork or host This field can also identify a default route which the system uses to forward packets that do not match any other routing table entry You may want to use the default route in place of routes to numerous destinations that all have the same gateway IP address Address that directs the router how to forward packets whose destination addresses match the route s IP address and subnet mask The system forwards such packets to the indicated gateway Number of networks through which a packet must pass to reach a given destination The system includes the metric in its RIP updates to allow other routers to compare routing information that is received from different sources Status of the route See the following route status table Subnet mask that is associated with the IP address of the destination network subnet or host Status for Routes Value Description Direct Route is for a directly connected network Learned Route was learned using indicated protocol Learned RIP Route was learned using RIP 1 protocol Learned Route was learned but is partially timed out RIP Zombie Learned RIP2 Local Static Timed out Route was learned using RIP 2 prot
553. the bridge uses to discard the stored configuration message when it is operating as the root bridge If the bridge is not the root bridge it uses the value shown in the maxAge field instead which is assigned to it by the root bridge The default value is 20 seconds The acceptable range is 6 40 seconds To configure the bridge maximum age see bridge spanningTree stpMaxAge later in this chapter Identity of the root bridge It includes the root bridge s priority value and the MAC address of port 1 on that bridge Time period in seconds that the bridge spends in each of two states listening and learning as assigned by the root bridge Compare with the bridgeFwdDelay field Status of GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP for the entire bridge You configure GVRP as a bridge state as well as individual port states To configure GVRP for the bridge see bridge gvrpState later in this chapter To configure GVRP on ports see bridge port gvrpState in Chapter 10 Time period in seconds that elapses between the configuration messages that the bridge receives from the root bridge Compare with the bridgeHelloTime field Minimum delay time the bridge uses between topology change BPDUs that it sends Shows configuration state of the IP fragmentation option The default setting is enabled To configure this option see bridge ipFragmentation later in this chapter Shows configuration state of IPX SNAP tra
554. the request matches the agent s read write community a SNMP get and get next requests are valid if the community string in the request matches the agent s read only community string or read write community string a You can specify any string value up to 48 characters long Do not use embedded spaces or the symbol a f you do not want to change the value of a community string press Return or Enter at either prompt Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Read only Octet string included in each public public SNMP message that provides m A string up to read only access to system 48 characters information long Read write Octet string included in each private private SNMP message that controls a A string up to read write access to system l 48 characters information long SNMP Community Example 3500 Select menu option snmp community Enter new read only community public our_app Enter new read write community private my_mail snmp trap display 193 snmp trap display Displays the SNMP traps and their currently configured destinations Y 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation J 9000 sntd v 9400 Fields in the SNMP Trap Display y 3900 Field Description 9300 Trap description Description of the system event that triggers the trap Trap destinations IP address of the system that is to receive event configured notification Trap number Identifying number of the trap that is
555. the selectable entry if route aggregation mode interface indexes applicable m all a fora list of selectable interface indexes Route Whether you want to a disabled Current aggregation implement route aggregation value mode on the selected interface enabled ip rip password v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Sets the IP RIP 2 password so that you can choose the IP interfaces that can put RIP 2 updates into their routing tables Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip ri pa Important Considerations a f the sending interface has an IP RIP 2 password the receiving interface must have the same IP RIP 2 password If the receiving interface has a different password or a null password its routing table is not updated a If you are using RIP 1 do not use the password option a You cannot use the ASCII string none as the password This string is reserved to indicate the default password which is a null value Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interfaces Index number of the IP interfaces m One or more that you want to allow to receive selectable route updates interface indexes m all a fora list of selectable interface indexes Password Combination of characters that upto 16 null you set as the RIP 2 password alphanumeric password characters a null password IP RIP Password Example Select menu option ip rip password S
556. thernet label v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 Labels the Ethernet ports to help identify the kind of device that is attached to each port for example LAN workstation or server Valid Minimum Abbreviation el Important Considerations a Label Ethernet ports so that you can easily identify the devices that are attached to them such as LANs workstations or servers For example ngineeringserver a Anew port label appears in system displays the next time that you display information for that port Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Port Ports for which you want to a Arangeofport selection define a port label numbers m all a to display a port summary Port label Labels that appear the next String of up to 32 time that you display information for the ports that you selected ASCII characters including the null terminator 220 CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET PORTS ethernet portState v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 Enables or disables Ethernet ports controlling whether the ports send or receive frames Valid Minimum Abbreviation e ports Important Consideration a When an Ethernet port is enabled frames are transmitted normally over that port When an Ethernet port is disabled the port neither sends nor receives frames Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Port Ports that you want to enable m Individual ports or disable a A range of
557. timezone system time dst system nvData save system nvData restore system nvData examine system clearDiagBlock A SS SS SS NS SNS OAN NSO SS Se NN SY ARN NS SO NS SS system diagErrLog system sntp display S S system sntp define YRRUN RENSON RNN SASN Table 6 Command Summary continued 3500 9000 9000 9400 3900 9300 Layer Layer Commands 2 3 system sntp modify system sntp remove system sntp state system sntp polllnterval system sntp tolerance system reboot script logout Aw NY Ss Ne eS SS SN NNO SS SN ON NNN SS Se SS SNE SS Ch 4 Module Environment module display module snapshot summary module snapshot detail module baseline display module baseline set module baseline requestedState ANON NN Se SLS module redundancy display module redundancy reset NonRedundant module name module time module screenHeight module nvData reset module nvData emergencyDownload module nvData displayDownload SN SON Ne ROS NONN RON SNON SS SINR NYSE SS module nvData staging 46 CHAPTER 2 COMMAND SUMMARY Table 6 Command Summary continued 3500 9000 9000 9400 3900 9300 Layer Layer Commands 2 3 module clearDiagBlock S S module diagErrLog module reboot NNN disconnect PART Ill Establishing Management Access Ch 5 Out of Band Management management summary 3 anagement detail management ip 3 anagement ip interface summa
558. ting server table for any reason for example if the associated interface goes down or if the primary entry reaches its age limit a For this option to have any effect you must establish alternate paths to the same IPX network or server a After you enable the IPX secondary route server option you can display entries for any secondary routes or servers See ipx route secondary and ipx server secondary earlier in this chapter Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IPX secondary How to handle secondary routes m disabled enabled route server and servers factory a enabled state default or current value IPX Secondary Example Select menu option ipx secondary Enter secondary route server state disabled enabled disabled enabled 660 CHAPTER 20 IPX oo fey e P E d TT APPLE TALK This chapter provides guidelines and other key information about commands that you can use to configure AppleTalk routing on your system Configuring and managing AppleTalk routing involves these tasks Administering AppleTalk interfaces Administering routes Administering the AARP cache Displaying the Zone Table Configuring forwarding Configuring checksum Enabling DDP Source Socket Verification Pinging an AppleTalk node Viewing AppleTalk statistics For more information about administering AppleTalk routing on your network see the Implementation Guide for your system For the Co
559. tion IP address 192 1 1 0 Enter destination IP address mask 255 255 255 0 Enter start of TCP source port range 0 65535 0 Enter end of TCP source port range 0 65535 65535 Enter start of TCP destination port range 0 65535 0 Enter end of TCP destination port range 0 65535 65535 Enter another filter yes no no n 706 CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP qos classifier remove VY 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Removes a previously defined classifier Valid Minimum Abbreviation q cl r Important Considerations a f the classifier that you want to remove is associated with a control you must remove the control before you can remove the classifier See qos control remove later in this chapter for more information a When you enter the command specify the number that represents the classifier that you want to remove or specify to view the selectable classifiers Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Classifier Number for the classifier that Any number you want to remove selectable classifier number a fora list of selectable classifiers QoS Classifier Remove Example 3500 Select menu option qos classifier remove Enter classifier number 20 23 26 401 407 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 26 qos control summary v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For C
560. tion and selectable values Index number 28 prompts for an offset from the GMT in the following time format hh mm System Time Timezone Example 3500 Select menu option Index OMDANI DO BPWNHRF DMO DAA PWN FP 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Time Zone GMT 0 00 GMT 1 00 GMT 2 00 GMT 3 00 GMT 4 00 GMT 5 00 GMT 6 00 GMT 7 00 GMT 8 00 GMT 9 00 GMT 10 00 GMT 11 00 GMT 12 00 GMT 1 00 GMT 2 00 GMT 3 00 GMT 4 00 GMT 5 00 GMT 5 30 GMT 6 00 GMT 7 00 GMT 8 00 GMT 9 00 GMT 9 30 GMT 10 00 GMT 11 00 GMT 12 00 Select timezon GMT WET UT WAT AT system time timezone system sntp timez 105 Brasilia Buenos Ar GeorgeTown AST ES CST ST PST YST AHST CAT HST CET FWT ME T M EWT SWT BT ZP4 ZP5 Bombay Calcutta Madras New Deh1li Colombo ZP6 WAST CCT JST Darwin Adelaide EAST GST IDLE NZST NZT Input an offset from GMT index 1 28 1 agadan Solomon Is N Caledonia 106 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT system time dst v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 Sets daylight savings time Valid Minimum Abbreviation sy t ds Important Consideration a Displays the daylight savings time periods for various parts of the world Procedure To set daylight savings time enter ds The system displays the following prompt Do you want to set the Daylight Saving Time
561. tions Valid Minimum Abbreviation b po g Important Considerations You can use this command to configure the same setting on multiple ports simultaneously When you specify multiple port numbers the system prompts you to choose the setting and then applies it to all of the ports To activate GVRP in your system you must enable it for the entire bridge see bridge gvrpState in Chapter 9 as well as on individual bridge ports this commana If you enable GVRP on a port but you have not enabled it for the bridge GVRP does not function To maximize the effectiveness of GVRP it should be enabled in as many end stations and network devices as possible GVRP updates are not sent to any blocked Spanning Tree Protocol STP ports GVRP operates only on ports that are in the forwarding State If GVRP is enabled on the bridge and on a given port which changes to the STP forwarding state the port automatically begins to participate in GVRP VLANs that are created dynamically with GVRP exist only as long as a GVRP enabled device is sending updates if the devices no longer send updates GVRP is disabled or the system is rebooted all dynamic VLANs are removed but the system leaves unchanged all VLANs that were statically configured through a management interface Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Bridge ports Bridge ports for which you a enable disable wish to enable or disable the GVRP state disable
562. tistics forwarding ipx statistics forwarding 653 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays IPX forwarding statistics Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx st f Important Considerations a The first line in the output the status line indicates whether a IPX forwarding is enabled a RIP is active a SAP is active a RIP Triggered updates are enabled SAP Triggered Updates are enabled a Secondary route server option is enabled Fields in the IPX Forwarding Statistics Display Field Description Addr Errors Forwarded Fwd Discards Fwd Received Fwd Transmitted Hdr Errors Hop Count Errors Host Delivers Host In Discards Host Rx Host Tx PX address errors in netwo Number of IPX packets to b be forwarded forwarded successfully transmitted Network layer header error Number of IPX packets tha host s RIP and SAP applicat Number of IPX packets tha host s RIP and SAP applicat Number of IPX packets tha host s RIP and SAP applicat Number of IPX packets that were dropped that due to rk layer header Number of IPX packets that were forwarded e forwarded that could not Number of IPX packets that were received to be Number of IPX forwarded packets that were Number of IPX packets that were dropped due to IPX S Number of IPX packets that were dropped due to exceeded maximum transport control were delivered to the IPX ions we
563. tive numbering a Possible values for port groups n depend on the number of user defined port groups on the system Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Select port Number ofthe port group to w 1 n Current port group delete a fora list of group groups Delete port Whether to delete the selected m n no y group port group Ges Bridge Packet Filter Port Group Delete Example Select menu option bridge packetFilter portGroup delete Select port group 1 2 2 1 Delete port group n y yl y Port Group 1 Marketing has been deleted bridge packetFilter portGroup addPort v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 bridge packetFilter portGroup addPort 391 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Adds ports to an existing port group Valid Minimum Abbreviation bpapa Important Considerations m You add ports to an existing group by entering port identifiers at the prompts At least one port group must exist before you can add ports a The maximum number of ports that a port group can contain is 32 which is the maximum number of ports on a switching system a Possible values for port groups m depend on the number of user defined port groups on the system a Possible values for bridge ports n depend on the number of existing bridge ports on the system Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Select port Number ofthe port group to 1 m Current p
564. to m 1 n which you want to attach the a ah oe ain ot analyzer available bridge n varies by platform Only valid ports port number choices are displayed Analyzer Add Example 9000 1000BASE SX module CB9000 slot 3 1 9 GEN SX L2 analyzer add Select bridge port 1 9 9 Warning Port being removed from Vlan Default Analyzer port address is 00 20 9c 0Od el 2a 760 CHAPTER 24 ROVING ANALYSIS analyzer remove v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 Restores the port to be a regular bridge port Restores the Spanning Tree state to its state before the port was configured as an analyzer port Valid Minimum Abbreviation an r Important Considerations a Use this command when you no longer need the bridge port for the analyzer a The analyzer port can not be removed if it still has monitor ports ma The port becomes a member of the default virtual LAN VLAN when it is restored when you remove it as an analyzer port a The port will not be automatically restored to any VLAN it might have been a member of before it was configured as an analyzer port you must do this yourself Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Bridge port Number of the bridge portto m 1 n A which the analyzer is attached for a list of n varies by platform Only available bridge active analyzer port numbers ports are displayed Analyzer Remove Example 3500 Select menu option analyzer remove
565. tocol suites If you have selected the IP protocol suite proceed with step 5 If you did not define an IP protocol suite for this VLAN proceed to step 7 5 Specify whether you want to modify Layer 3 address information n or y Since this is the last release to support Layer 3 address information specify n if possible and instead define multiple IP interfaces for this VLAN using ip interface define commands See Chapter 16 If you still want to modify Layer 3 address information for an IP VLAN a Enter y for Layer 3 addressing b Enter the Layer 3 network address c Enter the Layer 3 subnet mask To accept the default or current value in brackets press Return or Enter 6 Specify whether you want to modify per port tagging 7 If you want to modify per port tagging enter the new tag type for the port none Or 802 19 8 If you have specified that you want to modify more than one port enter a tag type for each port 9 For a VLAN other than the default VLAN enter a new VLAN name or keep the current name The VLAN name can include up to 32 ASCII characters including spaces If you include spaces put quotation marks around the VLAN name Bridge VLAN Modify Example 9000 Layer 3 This example shows the steps to modify the per port tagging for a protocol based VLAN on a Layer 3 module In this example front panel port 5 is changed to have IEEE 802 1Q tagging and its associated device is IEEE 802 1Q enabled CB9000 s
566. tries immediately from the cache You are not prompted to confirm the deletions 172 CHAPTER 5 OuT OF BAND MANAGEMENT management ip arp v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 flushDynamic Deletes all dynamic automatically learned entries from the ARP cache Valid Minimum Abbreviation m ip ar flushD Important Considerations a This command applies to the CoreBuilder 3500 only other platforms USe ip arp flush To flush all entries static and dynamic see the previous management ip arp flushAll command a When you enter the command the system deletes all dynamic entries immediately from the cache You are not prompted to confirm the deletions management ip rip v 3500 9000 9400 3900 9300 display management ip rip display 173 Displays information about the Routing Information Protocol RIP interfaces on the system RIP is one of the IP Interior Gateway Protocols IGPs When enabled RIP allows the system to dynamically configure its routing tables Valid Minimum Abbreviation mip rid Important Considerations a The first line in the output the status line indicates whether IP routing is enabled in band only a P interface options such as ICMP router discovery appear under ip interface detail and are set on a per interface basis The rest of the output contains more RIP interface information a The two available RIP modes are as follows a Disabled The system ignores all incoming RIP pack
567. trol only what the local router uses They do not affect the propagation of non self originated external routes to other routers a Export policies Used on OSPF boundary routers to control which self originated external routing updates are placed in the link state database for propagation over the network In this way export policies govern what other routers learn with regard to the local boundary router s self originated information You can set up an IP RIP or OSPF import or export policy to accept or advertise the default route as long as the default route exists in the routing table When you define a policy you are always prompted for the route subnet mask after the route address even though you specify the wildcard route address of 0 0 0 0 Specify a route subnet mask as follows a If you want the wildcard subnet mask for all routes use the default subnet mask 0 0 0 0 a If you want the default route not all routes enter 255 255 255 255 For more information about IP routing policies see the Implementation Guide for your system Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Policy Index number of the policy that m Valid policy you want to modify index number a fora list of selectable indexes Origin For export policies only Defines m direct Current protocols from which protocol the route value A sta static originated rip Source address Source router from which the Any valid IP Cu
568. tualLinks For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only arealD Modifies the transit area that is associated with a virtual link vV 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9000 ee 9400 Options 3900 9300 Prompt Description Possible Values Default Virtual link Index number of the virtual link m Index number for which you want to specify a of a currently new area ID defined virtual link L all a fora list of selectable indexes Target area Area ID in the form ID of a currently Current value n n n n where 0 lt n lt 255 defined area of the transit area through which the virtual link must pass to reach the target router 584 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf virtualLinks For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only router Modifies the target router that is associated with a virtual link V 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation v 9000 ip o v ro 9400 Options 3900 9300 Prompt Description Possible Values Default Virtual link Index number of the virtual link m Index number for which you want to specify a of a currently new target router defined virtual link a all a fora list of selectable indexes Target IP address of the new Valid IP address of Current value router destination area border router an OSPF area where the virtual link border router terminates ip ospf virtualLinks delay v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ip ospf virtualLinks delay 585
569. ual router IP VRRP Define Example Select menu option ip vrrp define Enter virtual router s type Primary Backup Primary Enter VLAN interface index 2 5 2 Enter VRID 1 255 1 2 Enter address mod auto learn IP address auto learn Enter the advertise interval in sec 1 255 1 Enter virtual router preempt mode no yes yes Enter Authentication Type none pass pass pass Enter 8 characters password echoe ip vrrp modify For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Modifies an existing virtual router Y 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 ip v modi 3900 Important Considerations 9300 a Authentication passwords can be up to eight alphanumeric characters Primary Routers m You can define one Primary router per VLAN a Primary routers own the IP addresses that you associate with a virtual router a When you define a Primary virtual router the possible VLANs that you can select are the IP VLANs on the router that have no virtual routers configured a The virtual router ID VRID must be unique across all locally attached LAN segments and unique for the local router a When you define a Primary virtual router you cannot use the VRID of a virtual router that is already defined on the system or the VRID of a neighboring VRRP router Backup Routers m Backup routers back up the primary router of a specified virtual router and assume Master state responsibil
570. ucture The commands that you can use depend on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardware options that are configured for your system The following diagram shows the complete list of commands for all systems See the checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter for whether your system supports the command Top Level Menu ip menu vrrp menu system interface summary module route detail management arp define ethernet multicast modify fddi dns remove bridge vrrp mode dip udpHelper neighbor ipx routing statistics appletalk ospf qos rip snmp ping analyzer advancedPing log traceRoute script advancedTraceRoute logout statistics disconnect 486 CHAPTER 17 VIRTUAL ROUTER REDUNDANCY VRRP ip vrrp summary v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays summary information about configured virtual routers on your system Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip vs Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VLAN Index number of the virtual a One or more interface LAN VLAN for which you valid IP VLAN index want to display virtual router index numbers information L all a fora list of selectable indexes Virtual ID of the virtual router for a Valid virtual ID of virtual router ID which you want to display router ID router that is summary information 1 25
571. ues Default IP interface Index number of one or more w One or more all factory interfaces on which you want valid IP interface default or to set the LSA retransmit interval LSA Interval at which the specified retransmit interface retransmits LSAs time index numbers C all a fora list of selectable indexes 1 65535 seconds current value 5 factory default or current value ip ospf interface dead v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Specifies the dead interval for an interface Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip o i dea Important Consideration Set the dead interval to the same value for all routers on the network Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IP interface Index number of one or more One or more all factory interfaces on which you want valid IP interface default or to set the dead interval index numbers current value n all a fora list of selectable indexes Dead Maximum duration in 1 65535 seconds 40 factory interval seconds that neighbor routers default or wait for a Hello packet before current value they determine that the transmitting router is inactive 556 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH First OSPF ip ospf interface For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only password Sets password security for an OSPF interface v 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation fee
572. uilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Deletes a server from the IPX server table Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx ser r Important Consideration a The server is immediately deleted You are not prompted to confirm the deletion Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Service name Service name of the server a A selectable service name a fora list of selectable names Service type Number for the type of service that the server performs 0x1 Oxffff ipx server flush 627 ipx server flush For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Deletes all dynamically learned servers from the server table Y 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 ipx ser f 3900 Important Consideration 9300 a All learned servers are immediately deleted You are not prompted to confirm the deletion 628 CHAPTER 20 IPX ipx server secondary v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Displays any secondary servers that are available Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx ser se Important Considerations m To see entries for any secondary server you must a Establish alternate paths to the same IPX server a Enable the IPX secondary route server option See ipx secondary at the end of the chapter a A secondary server entry can replace a primary server entry when the primary server is removed from the server table for any reason for example if the associated interface g
573. ules Before you begin to manage your CoreBuilder 9000 system review the management related information in this section The CoreBuilder 9000 system supports the following management interfaces a EME Management Console Use the EME Management Console to manage EME and Enterprise Management Controller EMC functions such as login table management IP connectivity event and trap logs and software downloads to all modules The EME Management Console also manages chassis functions such as system inventory and power management features a Administration Console Use the Administration Console to manage the CoreBuilder 9000 switch fabric modules and intelligent interface modules These modules contain an on board network management agent that allows this direct management a ATM Local Management Application LMA Use the ATM LMA to manage the ATM Enterprise Switch ATM Switch Fabric Module and ATM interface modules These modules contain an on board network management agent to allow this direct management Management and Data Channels Management and Data Channels 34 ATM LMA management of ATM switch fabric modules and ATM interface modules is outside of the scope of this guide To learn about managing the ATM Enterprise Switch and ATM modules using the ATM LMA see the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Management Guide You cannot manage the EME using the ATM LMA and you cannot manage ATM Switch Fabric Modules or ATM i
574. ules only Sets the RIP Triggered update mode which dictates when the IPX protocol broadcasts newly learned routes Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx ri t Important Considerations a The system has two RIP triggered modes a Disabled Broadcasts IPX routes 3 seconds after learning them a Enabled Broadcasts IPX routes immediately after learning them Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Triggered Mode that determines when IPX m disabled enabled update mode broadcasts newly learned routes enabled 632 CHAPTER 20 IPX v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 ipx rip policy summary For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Display a list of IPX RIP Routing Information Protocol policies Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx rips Fields in an IPX RIP Policy Summary Display Field Description Idx Index number of the IPX RIP policy Origin Source of the route to which this policy applies If the policy type is set to Export the possible values of this parameter are RIP or Static This parameter is not applicable if the policy type is set to Import Type Import apply the policy to received routes or Export apply the policy to advertised routes Route One or more IPX network addresses where this policy applies Interface One or more IP interfaces on this router associated with the RIP policy Source 6 byte MAC address of the router that can forward packets to the network A
575. ummary detail define modify remove arpProxy broadcastAddress directedBroadcast icmpRedirect icmpRouterDiscovery statistics route menu display static remove flush default noDefault findRoute arp menu display static remove flushAll flushDynamic age statistics dns menu display domainName define modify remove nslookup udpHelper menu display define remove hopCountLimit threshold I interface rip menu display mode compatibilityMode cost poisonReverse routeAggregationMode password addAdvertisement removeAdvertisement gt policy statistics 397 interface menu first even sequential policy menu summary detail define modify remove 398 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP ip interface summary v 3500 vy 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays summary information about the IP interfaces that are configured on the system Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip i su Important Considerations When you enter the command you are prompted for an interface index number even if you have only one interface defined The first line in the output the status line indicates whether IP routing is enabled For CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 modules it also indicates whether ICMP router discovery is enabled on the system For the CoreBuilder 3500
576. urately define your virtual LANs VLANs as described in the Implementation Guide for your system This chapter provides guidelines and other key information about how to configure Ethernet ports in your system For more information about port numbering and how to configure Ethernet ports see the Implementation Guide for your system Menu Structure The commands that you can use depend on your system your level of access and the modules and other hardware options that are configured for your system The following diagram shows the list of commands for all systems The checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter shows whether your system supports the command Top Level Menu ethernet menu monitoring menu system summary summary module detail mode management autoNegotiation ethernet portMode fddi flowControl bridge paceAccess ip pacelnteractiveAccess ipx label appletalk portState qos monitoring snmp analyzer log script logout disconnect 204 CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET PORTS ethernet summary v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 3900 v 9300 Displays a summary of Ethernet port information The summary shows the port s label and status as well as the most pertinent statistics about general port activity and port errors Valid Minimum Abbreviation e s Important Considerations Port numbering is consecutive regardless of module type if you are using a system that has modules
577. ures in MPLA edge switches but not in MPLA core switches a Spanning Tree a IGMP snooping a Resilient links a Roving analysis port When you configure a new MPLA core switch define MPLA configurations and reboot the switch before you define other trunks and VLANs on the switch bridge mpla mode 325 Procedure To enable MultiPoint Link Aggregation on the switch use the bridge mpla mode enable command To disable MultiPoint Link Aggregation on the switch use the bridge mpla mode disable command Select the ports that you want to be part of the multipoint aggregated link using the bridge trunk define command as described in Chapter 11 Reboot the switch to implement the multipoint aggregated link selection On reboot existing trunks and VLANs are deleted and the default VLAN is restored 326 CHAPTER 12 MULTIPOINT LINK AGGREGATION MPLA bridge mpla Specifies the MAC address of the out of band management port of the peerMacAddress attached CoreBuilder 9400 switch in the MPLA core the peer core switch 3500 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 b mp p 3900 Important Considerations 9300 You execute this command on each of the two CoreBuilder 9400 switches in the MPLA core a In each core switch you use this command to specify the MAC address for the out of band management port of the attached peer switch You must use this management port to connect a crossover Ethernet cable to the out of band manageme
578. urrently detail information defined virtual link E all a fora list of selectable indexes Fields in the IP OSPF Virtual Links Detail Display Field Description Dead Intvl Number of seconds before the area border router s neighbors declare it down when they stop hearing the router s Hellos Hello Intv Length of time in seconds between Hello packets Indx Index number of the virtual link Password Password for the virtual link Rxmit Intvl Length of time in seconds between link state advertisement Target Router Transit Area Xmit Delay retransmissions End point area border router where the virtual link terminates Common area that the virtual link uses to reach the target router Estimated number of seconds that it takes to transmit a link state update packet over the virtual link 576 CHAPTER 19 OPEN SHORTEST PATH FIRST OSPF Fields in the IP OSPF Virtual Links Detail Display Field Description Cost Indx Local Address Remote Address State Cost of sending a packet over the virtual link expressed in the link state metric Index number of the virtual link Address of the local router Address of the remote router State of the virtual link Fields in the IP OSPF Virtual Links Neighbor Display Field Description Indx ReqQ RxQ State SumQ Index number for the interface to which a neighbor belongs Number of LSAs that are being requested from the neighbor Number of LSAs that are
579. urst size in KBytes 16 through 8192 with the default value depending on your specified rate limit The burst size is the maximum amount of data that you can transmit at the line rate before the transmission is policed Specify the receive ports for which you want to enable the rate limit specific bridge ports or all bridge ports If you apply the rate to only one or a subset of the bridge ports you are prompted to specify whether you want to define another rate limit for another set of bridge ports If you specify yes you are prompted to enter another rate limit and burst size for another set of ports This sequence of prompting continues until you specify n meaning that you do not want to define another rate limit for another set of ports If the receive port is the anchor port for a trunk the rate limit applies to D gt each port that is associated with the trunk For example a rate limit of 1000 KBytes on a three port trunk means that each port in the trunk has the 1000 KByte limit 7 Enter an IEEE 802 1p tag value in the range of from 0 through 7 or none the default to apply to forwarded frames 8 Specify whether drop packets used to establish a TCP connection yes no The default is no 9 Set the start and end time for the control yes no The default is no a If you specified a start and end time enter the time type Time type selections are variations on days of the week and weekends or it can be specific day
580. ute that matches Rei a Reject the policy 636 CHAPTER 20 IPX Prompt Description Possible Values Default Metric Increase or decrease a route a 0 16 O does not adjustment metric by a value that you change the add specify Specify an integer and metric an operand to a Subtract adjust the metric value This multiply parameter is valid only if the ply Policy Action is set to Accept divide a modulo remainder of integer division Weight Metric value of this policy This 1 16 1 parameter specifies the order of precedence for policies that match the same route A higher value takes precedence over a lower value IPX RIP Policy Modify Example Select menu option ipx rip po Select policy 1 1 En En En En En Cer Pout e origin static rip all FFE ter rout Select IP ter th address 0x1 0x1ff interfaces 2 all source node address ter the ter the En ter the policy action accep metric adjustment administrative weigh all akiri reject 0 16 1 licy modify all rip ilies Le tL ffel all all accept O ipx rip policy remove 637 ipx rip policy remove For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Remove an existing RIP Routing Information Protocol policy V 3500 Vv 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 ipx ripr 3900 Options
581. uting The system first tries to route packets that belong to recognized protocols and then bridges all other packets If the network or a portion of the network is devoted to routing IP frames this model makes network traffic more efficient This chapter provides guidelines and other key information about how to configure IP in your system This chapter addresses the commands in the ip menu except for multicast and ospf which other chapters in this Command Reference Guide explain For information about IP multicast see Chapter 18 For information about Open Shortest Path First OSPF routing using IP see Chapter 19 For more information about IP routing see the Implementation Guide for your system 396 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP Menu Structure The commands that you can use depend on the system that you have your level of access and the types of modules and other hardware options that are configured for your system The following diagram shows the complete list of commands for all systems See the checklist at the beginning of each command description in this chapter for whether your system supports the command Top Level Menu ip menu system interface module route management barp ethernet multicast fddi dns bridge vrrp dip udpHelper ipx routing appletalk ospf qos rip snmp ping analyzer advancedPing log traceRoute script advancedTraceRoute logout statistics disconnect interface menu s
582. ve Ctrl w Exit Esc Edit buffer has been saved name rejdiffportgrp Replace existing filter n y yl y Packet filter 1 has been replaced Store as New Filter Example 3500 Select menu option bridge packetFilter edit Select filter 1 2 1 1 Editing packet filter 1 Editor Commands Buffer list Ctrl l Ctrl d D Line next Ctrl n previous Ctrl p Cursor start Ctrl a end Ctrl e left Ctrl b Insert line Enter Delete previous Ctrl h BSP current ode insert overstrike toggle Ctrl o Save Ctrl w Exit Esc Edit buffer has been saved name BlockGeoB Replace existing filter n y y n Store as new filter n y y Y Packet filter 3 stored right EL line right EL line Ctr1l f Ctrl k Ctri Ctrl k bridge packetFilter v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 load bridge packetFilter load 379 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Transfers a packet filter file from another host machine to the switch to which you are currently connected Valid Minimum Abbreviation b pa lo Important Considerations a On the CoreBuilder 3500 before you use the packetFilter load command select the required file transfer protocol TFTP or FIP using the syst m fileTransfer command a On the CoreBuilder 3500 this single command transfers a file from another host and loads
583. vePort aggregate For rate limit receivePort or aggregate high best best effort or low For a rate limit of none high best low or drop y yes n no high best low drop y yes n no Effort none factory default best factory default no factory default best factory default yes factory default CHAPTER 22 QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND RSVP Prompt Description Possible Values Default How rate limit For receivePort or aggregate a KBytes sec KBytes sec is expressed rate limit types in KBytes sec factory percentage or percentage default Rate limit value For receivePort or aggregate a 0 65434 rate limit types in KBytes sec KBytes sec or percentage a 0 100 O makes all packets excess percent packets Burst size For receivePort or aggregate 16 8192 KBytes Determined rate limit types the maximum by your Bridge ports 802 1p tag Apply another rate limit TCP drop control enabled flow classifiers only Start and end times amount of data in Kbytes that you can transmit at the line rate before the transmission is policed Receive ports for which you want to enable the rate limit If you specify a subset of ports you can specify multiple rate imit values On the CoreBuilder 9000 the ist of ports includes the front panel ports and any enabled backplane ports EEE 802 1p priority tag value to apply to forwarded frames for both flow and nonf
584. ved inQueries Number of ZIP queries that have been received inReplies Number of ZIP replies that have been received inZoneCons Number of times that a conflict has been detected between this system s zone information and another entity s zone information inZonelnvs Number of times that this system has received a ZIP GetNetInfo reply with the zone invalid bit set because the corresponding GetNetInfo request had an invalid zone name inZoneLists Number of ZIP GetZoneLists requests packets that have been received outAddrinvs Number of times that this system had to broadcast a ZIP GetNetInfo reply because the GetNetInfo request had an invalid address outExReplies Number of ZIP extended replies that have been sent outGniReplies Number of ZIP GetNetInfo reply packets that have been sent out of this port outGniRequests Number of ZIP GetNetInfo packets that have been sent outLocalZones Number of transmitted ZIP GetLocalZones reply packets outQueries Number of ZIP queries that have been sent outReplies Number of ZIP replies that have been sent outZonelnvs Number of times that this system has sent a ZIP GetNetInfo reply outZoneLists Number o with the zone invalid bit set in response to a GetNetInfo request with an invalid zone name transmitted ZIP GetZoneList reply packets 686 CHAPTER 21 APPLETALK appletalk statistics For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only nbp Displays AppleTalk Name Binding Proto
585. vmrp tunnels remove S S ip multicast dvmrp tunnels address S S ip multicast dvmrp tunnels threshold JS S ip multicast dvmrp tunnels metric S S ip multicast dvmrp routeDisplay S S p multicast dvmrp cacheDisplay s S p multicast dvmrp default v S A A A A A A A A A v A A A A icast traceRoute ne 3 Cc Table 6 Command Summary continued Commands 3500 9000 9000 9400 3900 9300 Layer Layer 2 3 Ch 19 OSPF ip ospf areas display ip ospf areas defineArea ip ospf areas modifyArea ip ospf areas removeArea ip ospf areas addRange ip ospf areas modifyRange ip ospf areas removeRange ip ospf defaultRouteMetric display ip ospf defaultRouteMetric define ip ospf defaultRouteMetric remove ip ospf interface summary ip ospf interface detail ip ospf interface statistics ip ospf interface mode ip ospf interface priority ip ospf interface arealD ip ospf interface cost ip ospf interface delay ip ospf interface hello ip ospf interface retransmit ip ospf interface dead ip ospf interface password ip ospf linkStateData databaseSummary Mir NRN BT Pg Se gS Tg SG SE SR By SS Syn NO SRO NS SS SN ER SSRN RS SS 58 CHAPTER 2 COMMAND SUMMARY Table 6 Command Summary continued 3500 9000 9000 9400 3900 9300 Layer Layer Commands 2 3 ip ospf linkStateData router i ip ospf linkStateData network ip ospf linkStateData summary ip ospf linkStateData external ip ospf neighbors dis
586. want to set m p primary a A DAS port has primary and s secondary secondary paths a A SAS port has only a primary path 230 CHAPTER 8 FIBER DISTRIBUTED DATA INTERFACE FDDI fddi path tvxLowerBound v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Specifies the minimum time value in microseconds of fddiMAC tvxValue that any MAC that is configured in this path uses Valid Minimum Abbreviation fd pa tv Important Considerations A MAC uses its valid transmission timer TVX to detect and recover from certain ring errors If a valid frame has not passed through a MAC during the time indicated by fddiMACTvxValue the MAC reinitializes the ring By adjusting the tvxLowerBound value you specify how quickly the ring recovers from an error The lower you set this value the faster the network reacts to problems but the ring might be reinitialized when there is no problem The higher you set this value the less chance of frequent reinitializations but the network takes longer to recover from errors You can use this command to configure the same setting on multiple ports simultaneously When you specify multiple port numbers the system prompts you to choose the setting and then applies it to all of the ports Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Ports One or more FDDI station ports m Any of the for which you want to set the available tvxLowerBound ports on the installed FDDI modules m all Path Path
587. were transmitted on each port The network type that you assigned to the ports in the trunk for example FDDI Fast_Ethernet or Gigabit_Ethernet bridge trunk define v 3500 v 9000 v 9400 v 3900 v 9300 bridge trunk define 307 Defines one or more trunks on the system When you define a trunk you specify ports and characteristics for the trunk Valid Minimum Abbreviation b t def Important Considerations If you have more than one media type on your system for example Fiber Distributed Data Interface FDDI Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet you are prompted for a media type before you are prompted for the trunk information All links to be trunked must be homogeneous For example you cannot mix Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet links in a trunk If you have already defined other trunks on your system you cannot select ports that are part of an existing trunk In general create trunks before you define your virtual LANs VLANs If you create a trunk whose ports are part of existing VLANs the VLAN bridge port configuration changes For example if you have the default VLAN as well as IP VLANs and you then define a trunk with ports in one of the IP VLANs the system removes those ports from that VLAN and places them in the default VLAN You must modify the VLAN and add the new bridge ports to the appropriate VLAN This situation does not apply if you have only the default VLAN all ports are part of the d
588. which you are currently connected To display configuration information for another module disconnect from the current module through the Enterprise Management Engine EME and then connect to the module that you want to display a After you have logged in to the EME you can access the module that you want to manage a Diagnostic messages appear in the display only if a module fails any of the tests at start up Fields in the Module Display Field Description 24 port Gigabit Switching Fabric 3C number Built Diagnostics Memory size AP FP Flash Buffer Module ID Rev Serial Slot System name System up time Time in service Version 32 character alphanumeric name that uniquely identifies this module Each module s 3Com 3C product identification number Date and time when this software version was built Whether a module has passed or failed diagnostics Additional diagnostic messages describe a failure Memory capacities of the processors ID number that the system assigns to that module Unique number assigned to the hardware build by 3Com Each module s unique serial number Location of the module in the chassis slot subslot Name of the system Time that this module has been up and running Total operational time since the module was manufactured Software release number 130 CHAPTER 4 MODULE ENVIRONMENT module snapshot Captures an image of all the module s display screens The values in
589. xes ipx interface SAPadvertising 613 ipx interface For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only SAPadvertising Controls whether the system advertises IPX services v 3500 Valid Minimum Abbreviation V 9000 DA 9400 Options 3900 A __IE______ss_seEeE Prompt Description Possible Values Default 9300 IPX SAP Whether the system advertises enable disable ee IPX services advertising a disable state 614 CHAPTER 20 IPX ipx interface RiPadvertising v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Controls whether the system advertises IPX routes Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx i r Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default IPX RIP Whether the system advertises enable disable advertising IPX services State a disable ipx route display v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Displays the routing tables for the system The routing tables include all configured routes Valid Minimum Abbreviation ipx rod Important Considerations a Your system maintains a table of routes to other IPX networks You can a Use the Routing Information Protocol RIP to exchange routing information automatically a Make static entries in this table using the Administration Console a The first line in the output the status line indicates whether a IPX forwarding is enabled
590. y RSVP 0O 200 percent 50 factory reservable begins to refuse reservations default bandwidth when the requested bandwidth on an output link exceeds the total reservable bandwidth Maximum per Largest reservation that RSVP 0 100 percent 50 factory reservation attempts to install default bandwidth Policing option When to drop excess packets m edge edge factory Edge policing drops excess default packets only at the edge that is when traffic has not yet never passed through any network device that has already performed policing for that flow a always a With edge the system polices the flow when RSVP requests it a With always the system polices the flow regardless of whether RSVP requests it a With never the system never polices the flow even if RSVP requests it gos rsvp enable 731 Prompt Description Possible Values Default Service level Service level for excess policed m best low factory for excess traffic Low is recommended default policed traffic F f l OW This setting applies to the excess traffic with the reserved bandwidth that is which queue it should be placed in Excess Loss Whether excess packets are m yes no factory Eligible loss eligible ae default Procedure Enter the maximum total reservable bandwidth using a percentage of the output link a value of from 0 through 200 with 50 as the default Enter the maximum per reservation bandwidth using a percentage of
591. y network has an LER exponent between 1 x 10 10 and 1 x 10 15 a f the LER value is greater than the alarm setting then SMT sends a Status Report Frame SRF to the network manager software indicating a problem with a port a Set the lerAlarm value below these values so that you receive alarms only if your network is in poor health The SMT Standard recommended value is 8 a You can use this command to configure the same setting on multiple ports simultaneously When you specify multiple port numbers the system prompts you to choose the setting and then applies it to all of the ports Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Ports One or more FDDI station ports m Any of the for which you want to set the available ports port lerAlarm on the installed FDDI modules m all lerAlarm value Link error rate LER value at 4 15 7 which a link connection generates an alarm fddi port lerCutoff v 3500 v 9000 9400 3900 9300 Sets the link error rate estimate at which a link connection is disabled When the lerCutoff value is reached the PHY that detected a problem is disabled Valid Minimum Abbreviation fd po lerc Important Considerations a The lerCutoff value must be lower than the lerAlarm value so that the network management software is alerted to a problem before the PHY port is actually removed from the network a Set the lerCutoff below these values so that a port is removed only as a last
592. y the lower numbered backplane port is enabled by default On the SuperStack II Switch 3900 the list of ports includes the 24 or 36 10 100 ports and any Gigabit Ethernet ports in use For the CoreBuilder 9000 keep the following considerations in mind a When you define a VLAN on a switching module and other switching modules in the system also define this VLAN you must define the VLAN on both the switching module and on the switch fabric module a When you define the VLAN on the Layer 2 switching module you must specify any front panel ports in the VLAN as well as the module s lower numbered backplane port The specified backplane port must also be tagged if you have more than one VLAN a When you define the VLAN on the switch fabric module you must specify the switch fabric module backplane port that is connected to the switching module s backplane port The switch fabric module port must also be tagged if you have more than one VLAN Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default VID Unique user defined integer a f the default Next available used by global management VLAN exists VID operations 2 4094 a f the default VLAN does not exist 1 to redefine the default VLAN or 2 4094 for other VLANs Bridge ports Index numbers of the bridge a Oneormoreof ports that belong to the VLAN If the ports that you include trunked ports are available to specify the anchor port of the be assigned to trunk See Important
593. yer 3 For all Layer 2 systems or switching modules the VLAN origin is always static which indicates that the user created the VLAN For the CoreBuilder 3500 or CoreBuilder 9000 the origin indicates one of the following a static The VLAN was created statically user configured by using the bridge vlan define command a router The VLAN was created automatically by a outer port IP interface of router origin You create a router port IP interface using the ip interface define command with the interface type port You cannot modify or remove a router port VLAN a GVRP The VLAN was created dynamically from a GVRP update GVRP You must enable the GVRP state for the entire system as a bridge wide parameter and for the participating bridge ports as a bridge port parameter Index numbers of the bridge ports that belong to the VLAN or the bridge port that belongs to the router port IP interface On the CoreBuilder 9000 the list of ports includes the front panel ports and the appropriate backplane ports Example On a 12 port Layer 3 module the list of ports includes ports 1 12 and port 13 which is the module s backplane port Either allOpen or allClosed VLANs in allOpen mode share a single address table for all configured VLANs in allClosed mode each VLAN has its own unique address table Standard bridging rules apply based on the table addresses that are assigned to the specific VLAN A router port IP interfac
594. ystem Valid Minimum Abbreviation ip u di Important Considerations a With UDP Helper you can send User Datagram Protocol UDP packets between routed networks UDP Helper provides support for UDP services such as BOOTP and DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol which rely on the BOOTP relay agent a When you configure the logical BOOTP port you can boot hosts through the router UDP Helper also provides a relay agent for DHCP broadcasts UDP packets that rely on the BOOTP relay agent are modified and then forwarded through the router a BOOTP including DHCP uses UDP port 67 a With UDP Helper you can configure the amount of time that a UDP packet is forwarded between subnetworks The system discards UDP packets based on the hop count and the seconds value only for BOOTP and DHCP Fields in the IP udpHelper Display Field Description UDP port UDP port number usually the value 67 Forwarding address Forwarding address that is used for UDP packets ip udpHelper define For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Defines port numbers or IP forwarding addresses for the UDP Helper v 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation 9400 ap seas 3900 Important Considerations 9300 m You can have up to 63 combinations of port numbers and IP forwarding addresses per router a You can have multiple IP address entries for the same ports Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default UDP port
595. ystem drops the packet it sends an Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP destination unreachable message to the host that sent the packet On the CoreBuilder 3500 or the CoreBuilder 9000 Layer 3 module you establish a static sink default route so that the system can advertise itself as a default router The static sink default route is not used in any of the system s forwarding decisions because it does not have a valid next hop gateway but it can be advertised to all of the system s neighbors unless you establish IP policies to prevent the advertisement Defining a static sink default route causes the route to be advertised through any IP protocols that you have configured on the system for example Open Shortest Path First OSPF and RIP For more information about static sink default routes see the mplementation Guide for the CoreBuilder 3500 or for the CoreBuilder 9000 Options Prompt Description Possible Values Default Gateway IP IP address of the a A valid IP address address route that you want a 0 0 0 0 static sink to add as the default default route 426 CHAPTER 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL IP ip route noDefault For CoreBuilder 9000 Applies to Layer 3 switching modules only Deletes the default route v 3500 v 9000 Valid Minimum Abbreviation J 9400 ip route n Y 3900 Important Consideration v 9300 m The system deletes the default route from the routing table immediately after you enter the command Y
596. ystem prompts you to define another trunk If you have more than one media type on your system enter the media type for example rast_Ethernet Of Gigabit_Ethernet Enter the ports that you want to be part of the trunk To get information about the selectable ports enter Enter the correct operating mode for 10 100 Ethernet ports If you are configuring a Fast Ethernet trunk select the Fast Ethernet port mode 100half 100fu11 For an Ethernet trunk enter the flow control setting on off rxOn or txOn 311 bridge trunk define 5 Enter the trunk name or to get information about specifying the trunk name enter 6 Specify whether TCMP is enabled or disabled The system indicates that the trunk definition is complete and allows you to define additional trunks until you reach the system trunk limit 7 At the system prompt to define another trunk enter y yes or to end the trunk sequence enter n no You must then reboot to enable the trunks to take effect Bridge Trunk Define Example 9000 The example shows a define operation that creates two trunks Select menu option bridge trunk define Select mac type Fast_Ethernet Gigabit_Ethernet Select ports 14 19 all 14 18 Trunk definition complete This may take a few minutes Are you sure you want to reboot the system Enter mode 100half 100ful1 100full Enter trunk name Trunk_1 Enter TCMP stat

3Com 3500 Switch User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents